What are the key considerations in the design of prestressed concrete structures in terms of internal and external loading factors?

The key considerations in the design of prestressed concrete structures include understanding the actions from prestressing, the properties of the tendon group, and the geometry of the prestressing system as outlined in Source 1. It is important to account for creep and shrinkage, including the relaxation of prestressing steel . Additionally, designers must ensure the structure satisfies the ultimate limit states checks, considering factors such as bending with and without longitudinal forces, lateral force, torsion and combined loads, and fatigue . The serviceability limit states, such as stress determination and limiting stresses in both concrete and steel, must also be evaluated .

How does the material behavior under linear elastic assumptions differ from nonlinear system analysis in stress computations?

Under linear elastic assumptions, stress computations are based on a direct proportionality between stress and strain, meaning that deformations will be reversible and the material will return to its original state upon load removal . Conversely, nonlinear system analysis considers the material's response beyond the proportional limit, accounting for permanent deformations, stress redistributions, and potential yielding . Nonlinear analysis is necessary for materials and conditions where large deformations occur, such as in plastic states, requiring a more complex analysis to accurately predict behavior under such stresses .

Why is the understanding of creep and shrinkage crucial in designing prestressed concrete structures?

Understanding creep and shrinkage is crucial in prestressed concrete design because these phenomena affect the long-term stability and durability of the structure. Creep causes gradual deformation over time under sustained load, which can alter stress distributions and lead to unintended structural deformations . Shrinkage, the reduction in volume as concrete cures, can contribute to cracking if not properly managed . These factors are critical to accurately predicting long-term deflections and maintaining the prestressed state, ensuring the intended structural performance and safety over the lifespan of the structure .

Evaluate the necessity of defining node displacements in modeling support conditions.

Defining node displacements is essential in accurately modeling support conditions because these displacements can directly affect the load distribution, potential failure points, and the overall stability of a structural system . Node displacements allow engineers to simulate real-world constraints like fixed, hinged, or roller supports, each presenting different restrictions on movement and rotational freedoms . Accurate definition and application of node displacements are critical for evaluating loading scenarios across different support arrangements, securing the structure's ability to carry expected loads without compromising safety .

How does the superposition of load cases enhance the analysis of structural elements?

The superposition of load cases enables the aggregation of existing results from different load scenarios to understand the combined effects on structural elements . This process can incorporate various loads like dead load, live load, and environmental effects, offering a comprehensive view of the cumulative loads acting on the structure . By superposing load cases in a weighted manner, engineers can simulate realistic scenarios to ensure that the structural system can withstand operational conditions without failure .

How does the calculation of crack width in reinforced concrete impact structural design?

The calculation of crack width in reinforced concrete is a vital aspect of structural design as it influences durability, aesthetics, and serviceability of the structure . Cracks can allow moisture and harmful substances to penetrate, leading to deterioration and reduced structural integrity over time . By calculating and limiting crack widths through proper reinforcement distribution and concrete mix design, engineers can ensure that the structure remains watertight and resistant to environmental conditions. The results influence decisions on minimum reinforcement requirements and construction practices, supporting long-term serviceability and structural health .

Discuss the role of influence lines in determining internal forces of beams.

Influence lines play a crucial role in structural engineering by graphically representing how loads affect internal forces such as axial force, shear forces, and bending moments in beams. They allow engineers to determine the response of a beam to varying positions and magnitudes of moving loads . Influence lines can help identify critical design points along the beam, facilitating optimized distribution and sizing of reinforcement . By analyzing influence lines, engineers can predict how a beam will perform under actual operational conditions, thereby ensuring safety and efficiency .

Explain the concept and application of link elements in finite element analysis.

Link elements in finite element analysis create kinematic dependencies between the degrees of freedom of nodes within the structure . Such elements are crucial for simulating connections that have shared or dependent degrees of motion, mimicking real-world mechanical joints like hinges or sliders . They influence the stiffness matrix of the finite element model, thereby affecting its dynamic and static response characteristics. Applications include modeling mechanisms and structural components that require specific movement restrictions or coupling effects due to these connections .

What are the implications of performing stress analysis using both local and global orientations for load applications?

Performing stress analysis using both local and global orientations for load applications allows for the consideration of loads in terms of the structure's intrinsic characteristics (local) and the overall structural behavior (global). Local orientations are crucial when dealing with non-uniform or complex loading conditions that directly relate to member-specific axes, ensuring more accurate loading scenarios for each element . Meanwhile, global orientation ensures that the interaction between elements and overall stability under external influences like wind or seismic loads is considered . This dual approach can improve precision in identifying stress concentrations and distribution under realistic operational conditions, benefiting the structural integrity and safety .

How does condensation of the element mesh around a specified point affect finite element analysis?

Condensing the element mesh around a specified point in finite element analysis focuses computational resources on critical regions, enhancing accuracy where needed the most . This process involves inserting additional nodes, which can improve the local resolution of the mesh and hence the fidelity of the analysis at that location . By addressing local detailing in areas of high stress concentration or geometrical complexity, the finite element model can provide more precise stress and deformation results, which are essential for design validation and optimization .

Open navigation menu

Upload

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

501 views864 pages

Manual

Infocad

Uploaded by

Marian Dragos

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

501 views864 pages

Manual

Infocad

Uploaded by

Marian Dragos

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

InfoCAD 14.

4
User Manual

Finite Elements
Prestressing
Dynamics
Frameworks
CAD

InfoCAD 14.4

User Manual

The description of program functions within this documentation should not be considered a warranty of product features.
All warranty and liability claims arising from the use of this documentation are excluded.
InfoGraph is a registered trademark of InfoGraph GmbH, Aachen, Germany. The manufacturer and product names
mentioned below are trademarks of their respective owners.
This documentation is copyright protected. Reproduction, duplication, translation or electronic storage of this document or
parts thereof is subject to the written permission of InfoGraph GmbH.
2015 InfoGraph GmbH, Aachen, Germany. All rights reserved.
Title image: Kaisersteg, Berlin.
Courtesy of Krone Hamann Reinke Ingenieurbro GmbH, Berlin.

Contents

Copy 36
Insert 36
Delete 36

Introduction 13

Select 36
Select Group 37

Installation and Configuration 14

Select All 37
Deselect All 37

Single User License 14

Move 37
Copy Directly 38

Installation 14
Program Start 14

Generate 38
Color 39

User Configuration 15
Language Selection 15

Layer 39
Line Type 40

Design Codes 15
Page Frames 15

Modify 40
Modify Length 40

Updates 15
Uninstallation 16

Modify Endpoint 40
Intersect 41

Network License 16

Wall Aperture 41
Divide 41

Licensing 14

Network Configuration 16
Tasks on the Licensed Computer 16
Virtual Machines using VMware 17
Tasks on the Workstation 17

Join 41
Convert 42

Program Start 18

Redraw 43

User Interface 19

Zoom 43
3D Representation 43

Controls 19
Standard Bar 19
Draw Bar, Snap Bar, View Bar 19
Structure Bar, Analysis Bar, Result Bar 19
Status Bar 20
Data Base Pane 20
Print List Pane 20
Layer Pane 20
Partial View Pane 20

3D-View 43
Rotate 43
Projection 44
Hidden 44
Section Representation 44
Viewport 44
Layout 45
Partial View 45

Draw 46

Representation Area 20
Graphical View 20

Line 46
Text 46

Table View 21
Output Pane 21

Circle 47
Arc 47

Dialog Bar 22
Coordinate Input 22

2D Solid 47
NURBS 48

Arithmetic 22

File 23
Construction Stage 23
Print, Page Setup 27
Print List 28
Import and Export 29
Data Exchange between Project Files 29
Data Exchange with InfoGraph Interface Files 29
Data Exchange via DXF Format 30
IFC Data Transfer 31
File Service 35

Edit 35
Undo / Redo 36
Cut 36

Model 53
Edge 53
Hole 53
Property dialog for Edge and Hole objects 54
Wall 54
Column 55
Face 55
Cone 57
Solid 58
Dimension 59

Snap 60
Relative Coordinates 60
Basepoint 60
Snap Settings 61
1

Contents

Format 61
Options 62
List 62
Distance 62
Area 62
Angle 62
Variable 62
Page frame 63
Archive 64
Auto Save 64

Finite Elements 65
Basics 65
Analysis Method 65
Element Library 66
Coordinate Systems 67
Foundation Models 69
Second-Order Theory 70
Buckling Eigenmodes 72
Contact 73
Equation Solver 76
Parallel Sparse Solver 76
Iterative Equation Solver 76
Substructure Technique 77
Singular System of Equations 78
Capacity Limit under Windows 79
Program Capacities 80
Analysis Results 80

Structure Description 85
Mesh Generation 86
Form-Sensitive or Grid-Shaped from Model 87
Polygonal Area 87
Circular or Conic Shape 88
Parabolic Bordered Square 88
Triangular Area 88
Square - Grid on Four Edges 89
Square - Variable Grid on Two Edges 89
Square or Cuboid 89
Tetrahedron from Solid 89
Beam Series 90
Element Input 90
Element Properties 91
General 91
Equivalent Beam Length 91
Section 92
Area Section 94
Polygon Section 94
Rectangle Section 97
Beam Section 97
Tension Member 97
Composit Section 97
Shear Stresses 98
Material 98
Creep Coefficients 99
2

Bedding 100
Reinforcing Steel of an Area Section 101
Element Info 102
View 102
Mesh Check 103
Element System 104
Number Sort 105
Supports 105
Predeformation 106
Moving Nodes 107
Finding Nodes or Elements 107
Condense 108
Link Elements 109
Spring Elements 111
Line Hinges 112
Moduli of Compressibility 113
Arranging Elements 113
Models for the Downstand Beam 114

Load 115
Input 116
General 116
Dead Load 116
Dead Load of an Element Selection 116
Influence Surface 116
Influence Line 117
Inserting of Load Case Data 117
Buckling Eigenvalues 117
Creep and Shrinkage 118
Support Displacement 118
Superposition of Load Cases 118
Theory 118
Temperature on Area and Solid Elements 119
Temperature on Beams and Cable Elements 119
Free Temperature on Solid Elements 119
Initial Strain 120
Prestressing 121
Dynamic Train Load 121
Dynamic Element Collapse 121
Predeformation 121
Fire Scenario 122
Thermal Action 122
Load Group 122
Point Loads 124
Free Point Load 124
Nodal Load 124
Point Load on Beams 124
Point Moment on Beams 124
Fixed-end Reactions of Beams 125
Line Loads 125
Free Line Load - global 125
Free Line Load - local 125
Local Line Load on Area and Solid Elements in the
Element Direction 126
Line Load on Beams and Cable Elements 126
Trapezoidal Loads on Beams 126

Contents
Free Line Moments on Beams and Area Elements 127
Line Torsional Moment on Beams 127
Area Loads 127

Element Properties 165

General 165
Equivalent Beam Length 165

Area Element Load 127

Uniform Region Load on Area Elements 128

Section 165
Polygon Section 167

Free Area Load - Rectangle 128

Free Area Load - Polygon 129

Rectangle Section 170

Beam Section 170

Liquid Pressure on Area Elements 129

Area Load onto Beams 130

Tension Member 170

Shear Stresses 170

Database 130

Design objects 131

Material 171
Bedding 172

Purpose 131
Definition 131

Element Info 172

Example 131
Input 132

Mesh Check 174

Element System 174

Editing 133
Integration 133

Number Sort 174

Supports 175

Analysis 134

Predeformation 175
Moving Nodes 176

Settings Statics 135

Batch 136

Results 137
Result Bar 137
Result Categories 138
Deformation Figure 138
Colored, Isosurfaces 139
Isolines 140
Numeric 141
Section View 142
Vectors 143
Solid Section 143
Support Lines 144
Result Graphs 145
Result Diagram 146
Section Stresses 146
Result List 148
Combination Information 148
Reinforcement Export 149
Punching Shear Check 149

Examples 150
Slab with Mindlin-Reissner Elements 150
Buckling Eigenmodes of a Column 151
Lateral Torsional Buckling of a Shell Structure 153
Silo Foundation Based on the Modulus of Compressibility
Method 155

Finding Nodes or Beams 176

Condense 177
Arranging Beams 177
Link Elements 177

Load 179
Input 179
Dead Load 180
Influence Line 180
Inserting of Load Case Data 180
Support Displacement 180
Superposition of Load Cases 181
Temperature 181
Temperature, Initial Strain 181
Theory 181
Predeformation 182
Fire Scenario 182
Load Group 182
Point Load 183
Point Moment 183
Nodal Load 184
Line Load 184
Line Torsional Moment 184
Trapezoidal Load 185
Fixed-end Reactions 185

Analysis 186

Construction Stages, Creep Redistribution 157

Cable Mesh 159

Settings Statics 186

Batch 187

High-Rise Based on the Substructure Technique 160

Results 188

References 161

Result Bar 188

3D Frame 163

Result Categories 189

Deformation Figure 189

Basics 163
Structure Description 164
Element Input 164

Numeric 190
Result Graphs 190
Section Stresses 191
Result List 193
3

Contents
Combination Information 193

Result Bar 222

Example - Steel Hall According to the

Second-Order Theory 194

Result Categories 222

Deformation Figure 223

2D Frame 198

Numeric 223
Result Graphs 223

Basics 198
Coordinate Systems 198

Structure Description 199

Section Stresses 224

Result List 226
Combination Information 226

Element Input 199

Examples 227

Element Properties 200

General 200

Reinforced Concrete Frame 227

Influence Lines 229

Equivalent Beam Length 200

Section 200

Axisymmetric Shell 231

Polygon Section 202

Rectangle Section 204

Basics 231

Beam Section 205

Tension Member 205

Coordinate Systems 232

Element Bedding 233

Shear Stresses 205

Material 205

Singular System of Equations 233

Analysis Results 233

Analysis Method 231

Bedding 207
Element Info 207

Program Capacities 235

View 207
Mesh Check 208

Element Input 235

Element System 209

Number Sort 209
Supports 209
Predeformation 210
Moving Nodes 210
Finding Nodes or Beams 211
Condense 211
Link Elements 211
Arranging Beams 212

Load 213
Input 213
Dead Load 214
Influence Line 214
Inserting of Load Case Data 214
Support Displacement 214
Superposition of Load Cases 215
Temperature 215
Temperature, Initial Strain 215
Theory 215
Predeformation 216
Fire Scenario 216
Load Group 216
Point Load 217
Nodal Load 217
Line Load 218
Trapezoidal Load 218
Fixed-end Reactions 219

Structure Description 235

Element Properties 236
General 236
Section 236
Material 238
Bedding 239
Reinforcing Steel 239
Element Info 239
View 240
Mesh Check 241
Element System 241
Number Sort 241
Supports 241
Moving Nodes 242
Finding Nodes or Elements 242
Condense 242
Link Elements 243

Load 244
Input 244
Dead Load 244
Inserting of Load Case Data 244
Point Load 245
Liquid Pressure 245
Nodal Load 245
Support Displacement 246
Superposition of Load Cases 246
Temperature 246
Temperature, Initial Strain 246
Theory 247

Settings Statics 220

Trapezoidal Load 247

Load Group 248

Batch 221

Fixed-end Reactions 248

Results 221

Analysis 249

Analysis 219

Contents
Settings Statics 249

Punching Shear Check 287

Batch 250

Prestressed Structures 289

Results 250

Internal Prestressing 289

Result Bar 251

Result Categories 251

External Prestressing, Mixed Construction 289

Scattering of Prestressing 289

Deformation Figure 252

Numeric 252

Creep and Shrinkage 290

Relaxation of Prestressing Steel 291

Result Graphs 253

Result List 254

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States 292

Combination Information 254

Examples 255
Water Tank 255
Septic Tank 256

Load Case Combination 258

Basics 258
Input 258
Analysis Settings 259
Results 259
Example 260
Load Case Combination on a Multi-Span Girder 260
Load Case Combination for a Floor Slab 261

Prestressed Concrete 262

Basics 262

Design Combinations 292

Stress-Strain-Curves 293
Design Internal Forces 293
Design for Bending with and without Longitudinal Force or
Longitudinal Force only 295
Minimum Reinforcement for Ensuring Ductile Component
Behavior 296
Minimum Surface Reinforcement for Prestressed Members
296
Design for Lateral Force 297
Design for Torsion and Combined Loads 299
Punching Shear 300
Check against Fatigue 303
Fatigue of longitudinal reinforcement, shear
reinforcement and prestressing steel 303
Fatigue of concrete under compressive stress 304
Special characteristic of shell structures 305

Checks in the Serviceability Limit States 306

Composite Section 262

Design Combinations 306

Stress Determination 306

Creep and Shrinkage 263

Actions from Prestressing 263

Limiting the Concrete Compressive Stresses 307

Limiting the Reinforcing and Prestressing Steel Stresses 307

Tendon Group Geometry 265

Input 265

Check of Decompression 307

Minimum Reinforcement for Crack Width Limitation 308

Prestressing 265
Tendon Group Properties 266

Calculation of the Crack Width 309

Determining the Effective Area Ac,eff 311

Prestressing System 267

Prestressing Procedure 268

Crack Width Check by Limitation of the Bar Distances 312

Limiting Deformations 312

Examples for Prestressing Procedures 269

Tendon Group View 272

Results 313

DIN 1045-1 Design 274

Slab with Downstand Beam 315

Basics 274
Input 275
Actions and Design Situations 275

Examples 315
Prestressed Roof Construction 321
Torsional Beam 331
Single Design Reinforced Concrete 332
Single Design Prestressed Concrete 333

Definition of an Action 276

Partial Safety Factors 277

References 333

Section Input 278

Checks 278

EN 1992-1-1 Design 335

Base Values 279

Shear Section 280
Concrete Stress 281
Crack Width 282
Fatigue 283
Scattering Coefficients 284
Analysis Settings 285
Single Design 286

Basics 335
Input 336
Actions and Design Situations 336
Definition of an Action 337
Partial Safety Factors 338
Section Inputs 339
Checks 339
Base Values 340
5

Contents
Shear Section 342

Partial Safety Factors 405

Stresses 343
Crack Width 344

Section Input 406

Checks 406

Fatigue 346
Scattering Coefficients 347
Analysis Settings 348
Single Design 349
Punching Shear Check 350

Base Values 407

Shear Section 408
Stresses 409
Crack Width 410

Prestressed Structures 352

Fatigue 411
Analysis Settings 412

Internal Prestressing 352

External Prestressing, Mixed Construction 352

Single Design 413

Punching Shear Check 414

Scattering of Prestressing 352

Creep and Shrinkage 353

Prestressed Structures 416

Relaxation of Prestressing Steel 354

External Prestressing, Mixed Construction 416

Scattering of Prestressing 416

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States 354

Design Combinations 354
Stress-Strain Curves 355
Design for Bending With or Without Normal Force or
Normal Force Only 355
Minimum Reinforcement against Failure Without Warning
357
Surface Reinforcement 357

Internal Prestressing 416

Creep and Shrinkage 417

Relaxation of Prestressing Steel 417

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States 418

Design Combinations 418
Stress-Strain-Curves 418

Design for Lateral Force 358

Design for Torsion and Combined Stressing 361

Design for Normal Force, Bending Moment (N, M, N and M)

419
Minimum Reinforcement against Failure without Warning
420

Punching Shear 362

Check against Fatigue 366

Design for Lateral Force 420

Design for Torsion 422

Fatigue of longitudinal reinforcement, shear

reinforcement and prestressing steel 366
Fatigue of concrete under compressive stress 367
Special characteristic of shell structures 368

Checks in the Serviceability Limit States 369

Punching Shear 423

Check against Fatigue 424
Fatigue of longitudinal reinforcement, shear
reinforcement and prestressing steel 424
Fatigue of concrete under compressive stress 424
Special characteristic of shell structures 425

Design Combinations 369

Stress Analysis 369

Checks in the Serviceability Limit States 426

Limiting the Concrete Compressive Stresses 370

Limiting the Reinforcing and Prestressing Steel Stresses 370

Design Combinations 426

Stress Determination 426

Decompression Check 371

Minimum Reinforcement for Crack Width Limitation 371

Limiting the Concrete Compressive Stresses 427

Limiting the Reinforcing and Prestressing Steel Stresses 427

Crack Width Calculation 374

Determining the Effective Area Ac,eff 375

Check of Decompression 427

Crack Dispersing Minimum Reinforcement 428

Limiting Deformations 377

Results 378

Limiting the Crack Width 429

Limiting Deformations 430

Examples 380

Results 430

Slab with Downstand Beam 380

Prestressed Roof Construction 386

Example - Two-Span Girder with Cantilever 432

Torsional Beam 396

Single Design Reinforced Concrete 397
Single Design Prestressed Concrete 398

References 400

OENORM B 4700 Design 402

Basics 402
Input 403
Actions and Design Situations 403
Definition of an Action 404
6

References 436

SIA 262 Design 437

Basics 437
Input 437
Actions and Design Situations 437
Definition of an Action 439
Partial Safety Factors 440
Section Input 440
Checks 440
Base Values 441

Contents
Shear Section 442
Concrete Stress 443
Crack Control 444

Fatigue 492
Scattering Coefficients 493
Analysis Settings 494

Fatigue 445
Analysis Settings 446

Prestressed Structures 496

Single Design 447

Punching Shear Check 448

External Prestressing, Mixed Construction 496

Scattering of Prestressing 496

Prestressed Structures 451

Creep and Shrinkage 497

Relaxation of Prestressing Steel 498

Internal Prestressing 451

External Prestressing, Mixed Construction 451
Creep and Shrinkage 451
Relaxation of Prestressing Steel 452

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States 452

Stress-Strain-Curves 452
Design for Bending and Bending with Normal Force 453
Design for Lateral Force 453
Design for Torsion and Combined Loads 455
Punching Shear 455
Check against Fatigue 457
Fatigue of longitudinal reinforcement, shear
reinforcement and prestressing steel 457
Fatigue of concrete under compressive stress 458
Special characteristic of shell structures 458

Checks in the Serviceability Limit States 459

Limiting the Concrete Compressive Stresses 459
Minimum Reinforcement against Brittle Failure 459
Crack Reinforcement in Case of Restraint 460
Crack Width Limitation 461
Limiting Deformations 461

Results 462
Examples 463
Slab with Downstand Beam 463
Prestressed Roof Construction 468
Torsional Beam 475
Single Design 477

Internal Prestressing 496

Ultimate Limit State Design 498

Design Combinations 499
Partial Safety Factors for Construction Material 499
Stress-Strain-Curves 499
Design for Bending with or without Longitudinal Force and
Longitudinal Force only 500
Minimum Reinforcement against Failure without Warning
501
Minimum Surface Reinforcement for Prestressed
Components 501
Design for Lateral Force 502
Design for Torsion and Combined Loads 505
Punching Shear 506
Check against Fatigue 506
Fatigue of longitudinal reinforcement, shear
reinforcement and prestressing steel 506
Fatigue of concrete under compressive stress 507
Special characteristic of shell structures 508

Serviceability Limit State Design 509

Design Combinations 509
Stress Determination 509
Limiting the Concrete Compressive Stresses 510
Limiting the Reinforcing and Prestressing Steel Stresses 510
Check of Decompression 511
Concrete Tensile Stresses in Bridge Transverse Direction 511
Minimum Reinforcement for Crack Width Limitation 512
Calculation of the Crack Width 513

References 478

Determining the Effective Area Ac,eff 515

Crack Width Check by Limitation of the Bar Distances 516

DIN Technical Report Bridge

Checks 479

Limiting Diagonal Principal Tensile Stresses 516

Limiting Deformations 518

Basics 479
Input 480
Type of Structure 480
Load Model 1 for Road Bridges 480
Tandem System of Load Model 1 481
Actions and Action Combinations 482
Definition of an Action 483
Definition of an Action Combination 485
Section Input 486

Results 518
Examples 520
Road Bridge in Solid Construction 520
Railroad Overpass with Prestressed Concrete Superstructure
529
Bridge Abutment 539

References 548

EN 1992-2 Bridge Checks 550

Checks 486
Base Values 487

Basics 550

Shear Section 489

Concrete Stress 490

Type of Structure 550

Load Model 1 for Road Bridges 551

Crack Width 491

Input 550

Tandem System of Load Model 1 552

Contents
Actions and Action Combinations 553

References 622

Definition of an Action 554

Definition of an Action Combination 556

DIN 18800 Steel Checks 624

Partial Safety Factors 556

Section Inputs 557
Checks 557
Base Values 558
Shear Section 560
Stresses 561
Crack Width 562
Fatigue 564

Basics 624
Input for Checks on the Entire Structure 624
Actions and Design Situations 624
Definition of an Action 625
Partial Safety Factors 626
Analysis Settings 626

Input for Checks on the Equivalent Beam 627

Scattering Coefficients 566

Analysis Settings 567

Settings 627
Section & Material 628

Single Design 568

Load & System 629

Lateral torsional buckling parameters 630

Prestressed Structures 569

Internal Prestressing 569
External Prestressing, Mixed Construction 569
Scattering of Prestressing 569
Creep and Shrinkage 570
Relaxation of Prestressing Steel 571

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States 572

Design Combinations 572
Stress-Strain Curves 572
Design for Bending With or Without Normal Force or
Normal Force Only 573
Minimum Reinforcement against Failure Without Warning
574
Surface Reinforcement 574

Torsion spring 631

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States 632

Design Combinations according to DIN 1055-100 632
Design Combinations according to DIN 18800-1 632
Design Values according to the Second-Order Theory 633
Characteristic Values 633
Stress Determination 633
Coordinate Systems 633
Longitudinal Stresses 634
Shear Stresses 634
Check 'Elastic-Elastic' 635
Check 'Elastic-Plastic' 636
Check against Lateral Torsional Buckling 638

Design for Lateral Force 575

Design for Torsion and Combined Stressing 578

Results 639

Punching Shear 579

Check against Fatigue 579

Steel checks on the Entire System 640

Fatigue of longitudinal reinforcement, shear

reinforcement and prestressing steel 579
Fatigue of concrete under compressive stress 580
Special characteristic of shell structures 581

Examples 640
Lateral Torsional Buckling Check of a Two-Hinged Frame
645
Lareral Torsional Buckling Check of a Frame Column with
Two-Axis Bending and Normal Force 648

References 654

Checks in the Serviceability Limit States 582

Design Combinations 582
Stress Analysis 582
Limiting the Concrete Compressive Stresses 583
Limiting the Reinforcing and Prestressing Steel Stresses 584
Decompression Check 584
Concrete Tensile Stresses in Bridge Transverse Direction 585
Minimum Reinforcement for Crack Width Limitation 585
Crack Width Calculation 587
Determining the Effective Area Ac,eff 588
Limiting Diagonal Principal Tensile Stresses 589
Limiting Deformations 591

Results 592
Examples 594
Road Bridge in Solid Construction 594
Railroad Overpass with Prestressed Concrete Superstructure
603
Bridge Abutment 613

EN 1993-1-1 Steel Checks 655

Basics 655
Input for Checks on the Entire Structure 655
Actions and Design Situations 655
Definition of an Action 657
Analysis Settings 658

Input for Checks on the Equivalent Beam 659

Settings 659
Section & Material 660
Load & System 661
Lateral torsional buckling parameters 662
Torsion spring 663

Ultimate Limit States 664

Design Combinations 664
Design Values according to the Second-Order Theory 664
Characteristic Values 665
Stress Determination 665

Contents
Coordinate Systems 665
Longitudinal Stresses 665
Shear Stresses 666
Classification of Cross-Sections 667
Elastic Cross-Section Resistance 667
Plastic Cross-Section Resistance 668
Check against Buckling and Lateral Torsional Buckling 669

Serviceability Limit States 670

Design Combinations 670
Limiting Deformations 670

Results 671
Examples 672
Checks on the Entire System 672
Lateral Torsional Buckling Check of a Two-Hinged Frame
678
Lareral Torsional Buckling Check of a Frame Column with
Two-Axis Bending and Normal Force 681

References 686

DIN 1052 Timber Checks 688

Basics 688
Input 688
Actions and Design Situations 688
Definition of an Action 689
Partial Safety Factors 690
Equivalent Beam Length 690
Analysis Settings 691

Example Timber Checks on a Purlin with Joints

701
References 704

EN 1995-1-1 Timber Checks 705

Basics 705
Input 705
Actions and Design Situations 705
Definition of an Action 707
Fire Exposures 708
Partial Safety Factors 709
Equivalent Beam Length 709
Analysis Settings 710

Ultimate Limit States 711

Design Combinations 711
Design Values according to the Second-Order Theory 712
Stress Determination 712
Coordinate Systems 712
Longitudinal Stresses 712
Shear Stresses 713
Construction Material Properties 713
Characteristic Values 713
Moisture Content and Load-duration 713
Effect of Member Size 715
Design Method for Fire Conditions 715
Cross-Section Checks 716

Ultimate Limit States 692

Design Values of Strengths 716

Tension parallel to the grain 717

Design Combinations according to DIN 1055-100 692

Design Combinations according to DIN 1052 692

Compression parallel to the grain 717

Bending 717

Design Values according to the Second-Order Theory 693

Stress Determination 693

Combined bending and axial tension 717

Combined bending and axial compression 717

Coordinate Systems 693

Longitudinal Stresses 693
Shear Stresses 694
Construction Material Properties 695
Characteristic Values 695
Moisture Content and Load-duration 695
Effect of Member Size 696
Cross-Section Checks 697
Tension parallel to the grain 697
Compression parallel to the grain 697

Shear 718
Torsion 718
Combined shear and torsion 719
Buckling Check with Equivalent Beam Method 719

Serviceability Limit States 720

Design Combinations 720
Limiting Deformations 720

Results 720
Examples 721

Bending 697
Combined bending and axial tension 697

Timber Checks on a Purlin with Joints 721

Three-hinged Frame at normal Temperature and under Fire
Conditions 724

Combined bending and axial compression 698

Shear from lateral force 698

References 730

Torsion 698
Combined shear and torsion 698

Dynamics 733

Buckling Check with Equivalent Beam Method 699

Serviceability Limit States 699

Design Combinations 699
Limiting Deformations 700

Results 700

Basics 733
Equations of Motion 733
Integration of the Equations of Motion 734
Undamped Natural Frequency Problem 734
Modal analysis 735
Direct Integration of the Equations of Motion 736
9

Contents
Stationary Response 736

References 782

System Excitation Caused by Soil Acceleration 737

Response Spectrum Method 737

Nonlinear Structural Analysis 783

Response Spectrum DIN 4149:2005 739

Response Spectrum DIN 4149:1981 740
Response Spectrum EN 1998-1 741
Response Spectrum OENORM B 4015 742
Response Spectrum SIA 261 743
Alternative Response Spectrum 744
Statistical Combination Methods 744
Earthquake action 745
Dynamic Train Crossing 746

Input 747
Analysis Settings 747
Eigenvalues 748
Effect of the masses 748
Soil acceleration 748
Coefficients as per DIN 4149:2005 748
Coefficients as per DIN 4149:1981 749
Coefficients as per EN 1998-1 749
Coefficients as per OENORM B 4015 749
Coefficients as per SIA 261 750
Alternative response spectrum 750
Store static pseudo loads 750
Time step integration 751
Consider the following load cases 751
Consider defined node accelerations 751
Point Masses 751
Generate Masses from Loads 752
Node Accelerations 752
Modal Damping 753
Lehr's Damping Measure 753
Node-Related Load-Time Functions 754
Instationary Load-Time Function 754
Rayleigh's Damping 755
Viscous Damper 755
Excitation Frequency Range Response 756
Excitation Spectrum 756
Alternative Response Spectrum 756

Basics 783
Area of Application 783
Analysis Method 783
Finite Beam Elements 784
Section Analysis 785
Reinforced Concrete Beams 785
Stress-strain-curves for the ultimate limit state check 786
Stress-strain-curves for the serviceability check 788
Torsional stiffness 790
Check of the limit strains (ultimat limit state check) 790
Automatic reinforcement increase (ultimate limit state
check) 791
Concrete creep 791
Steel Beams 791
Beams of Free Material 792
Area Elements 793
Reinforced Concrete Area Elements 793
Area Elements of Steel and Free Material 796
Solid Elements 797
Notes on Convergence Behavior 798

Analysis Settings 798

Examples 799
Crosscheck of Two Short-Term Tests 799
Reinforced concrete slab 799
Reinforced concrete frame 800
Calculation of the Deformation of a Ceiling Slab 802

References 805

Structural Analysis for Fire

Scenarios 806
Area of Application 806
Calculation of Section Temperatures 807
Basics 807
Thermal Section 809

Examples 757

Addition of Section Parts 810

Edit Section Parts 814

Linked Two-Mass Oscillator 757

Eigenvalues and eigenmodes 757

Edit Section Boundaries 814

Generate FE Mesh 815

Stationary response 758

Periodic Load-Time Function (Modal Analysis) 759

Settings for Thermal Analysis 816

Calculation of the Temperature Profile 816

Periodic Load-Time Function (Direct Analysis) 761

Constant Load-Time Function 762

Display Results 816

Instationary Load-Time Function 764

Response spectrum DIN 4149:2005 765
Response spectrum EN 1998-1 766
Natural Ventilation Cooling Tower with Eigenmode 767
Earthquake Check according to DIN 4149:2005 768
Maschine Foundation with Multiple Exciters 775
Braced Mast 777
DynamicTrain Crossing 779
10

Nonlinear System Analysis for Fire Scenarios 817

Basics 817
Load Case Definition 820
Analysis Settings 820
Results 821

Examples 822
Gable Column 822
Steel Frame 823
Composite Girder 824

Contents
Tunnel Structure 825
Ceiling Slab under Fire Exposure 827

References 829

Thermal Analysis of Solid

Structures 831
Area of Application 831
Basics 832
Input Data 834
Thermal Material Properties 834
Solid Surface 837
Thermal Actions 838
Thermal Analysis 839

Examples 840
Instationary Temperature Progression in an Angular
Retaining Wall 840
Comparative Calculation with and without Radiation 843
Stationary Temperature Destribution 844

References 845

Index 847

Introduction
The InfoCAD program system is a civil engineering software package for analyzing 2D and 3D structures. The system
includes the following analysis methods:

Computation of 2D and 3D beam and shell structures, cable structures and solid models.

Geometrically and physically nonlinear analysis.

Spring elements with nonlinear characteristic.

Analysis of contact problems.

Determination of buckling eigenmodes.

Element support according to method of bedding or modulus of compressibility with layered subsoil; optional exclusion
of tensile bedding.

Bending design according to DIN 1045-1, OENORM B 4700, SIA 262, EN 1992-1-1.

Shear and torsion design, punching shear and crack check according to DIN 1045-1, OENORM B 4700, SIA 262 and
EN 1992-1-1.

Steel structure checks according to DIN 18800 and EN 1993-1-1 (elastic-elastic, elastic-plastic and plastic-plastic).

Lateral torsional buckling check according to DIN 18800 and EN 1993-1-1.

Timber checks according to DIN 1052 and EN 1995-1-1.

Section analysis for polygonal beam sections; profile database.

Eigenvalue determination, time-step integration, dynamic train crossing, nonlinear cable dynamics.

Response spectrum method for earthquake check according to DIN 4149, EN 1998-1, OENORM B 4015 and SIA 261.

Thermal analysis of steel, timber, reinforced concrete and composite sections. Stability check under fire conditions
according to EN 1992-1-2, EN 1993-1-2 and EN 1995-1-2.

Prestressing of beam and shell structures as well as solid modells.

Prestressed concrete checks according to DIN 1045-1, OENORM B 4750, SIA 262 and EN 1992-1-1.

Bridge checks according to DIN Technical Report 102 and EN 1992-2.

Computation of construction stages.

Data exchange via DXF, IFC, steel construction and reinforcement interfaces.

Model editing, analysis control and results output for all structure types are performed in a standard 3D CAD user interface
that includes functions familiar from Windows.
InfoCAD manages structures in project files. The information contained in a project file is organized in data sets which you
can access from the graphical view, the table view or the File Service command in the File menu. The structure type is
defined for the project file and labeled by a file extension (FEM, etc.) in the Structure menu. One static system of the
following structure types can be stored in each project file:

Finite Element System (FEM)

3D Frame (RSW)

2D Frame (ESW)

Axisymmetric Shell (ROS)

The static system includes the specified structure data such as beams, area elements, tendon groups or section values along
with their associated loads. The computation modules identify deformations, internal forces as well as support and soil
reactions and store that data together with the check logs in the project file. This means all the results for output and
additional processing are available in one central location.
The program also allows you to create and save help diagrams and explanatory notes in the project file.

Installation and Configuration

Licensing
The program system can be used with a single user license or a network license. Each license is protected by a software
hardlock.
Single User License
With single user licenses a software hardlock is required at each workstation. Hardlock usage via remote connections is not
supported. If several workstations are set up with different licensing configurations, then each configuration will require its
own hardlock. You can check the current licensing configuration at the workstation in the licensing information provided in
the Help menu. Functions that are not licensed are disabled in the interface.
Network License
Network licenses do not require a software hardlock at the workstations. The licenses are managed by the InfoGraph
License Manager, which is installed on a central licensed computer together with a special network hardlock. The program
users can access the software from any workstation in the network.

Single User License

Installation
InfoCAD can be installed on 32/64-bit computers with Windows XP/Vista/7/8/8.1. All installations require administrator
privileges. Windows will automatically run the installation program when you insert the CD. Alternatively, you can run
Setup.exe directly from the CD. The customer license number indicated on the back of the CD box is required for each
installation.
Click the following options from the Installation menu:

Install hardlock driver.

This device driver is needed for the software hardlock to work.

Install InfoCAD.
'C:\Program Files\InfoGraph' is suggested as the target folder for local installation. The application, help and example
files will be stored in the target folder.

Program Start
The software hardlock must be connected to a free port before you can start the program for the first time. Afterwards you
can open the applications via shortcuts in the Windows Start menu. The applications include:

InfoCAD
The program system for editing structures.

System Viewer
Stand-alone program for realistic system display and results animation.

InfoGraph Crack Width Limitation

Stand-alone program for checking compliance with DIN 1045-1, OENORM B 4700, SIA 262 and EN 1992-1-1.

InfoGraph Lateral Torsional Buckling Check

Stand-alone program for checking compliance with DIN 18800, Part 2 and EN 1993-1-1.

Single User License

User Configuration
The user settings are managed in the following files:
IGRAPH.DAT
The basic settings of the computer programs, user-defined page formats and other printing settings are stored in this
system file. The file is automatically created in the 'C:\My Documents\name\Application Data\InfoGraph' (Windows XP) resp.
'C:\Users\name\AppData\Roaming\InfoGraph' (Windows Vista/7/8/8.1) folder when InfoCAD is opened for the first time,
where "name" represents the login name of the user. These folders carry the 'hidden' attribute and are displayed
depending on the folder options setting.
ANWEND.PRO
The user database lets you store user-defined beam sections. It is created in the 'My Documents\InfoGraph' subfolder of the
user.
If all users are to work with the same settings, the administrator must manually copy this file to the program directory. As a
result, users will no longer be able to change the settings.

Language Selection
During installation you will be prompted to select the language of the user interface. You can change the language at any
time in the Options menu. The analysis logs and results will now be displayed in the language you have selected.

Design Codes

The design codes shown in the user interface are preset according to the country setting of the operating system. You can
change the selection at any time in the Options menu.

Page Frames
The page frames used for printing can be selected in the Print dialog. Except for the standard page frame, you can design or
adjust any of the frames that are available for selection using the Page Frame option in the Options menu.

Updates
The program system is updated in the same way it was initially installed. Updates will not affect the users configuration files
and settings.

Installation and Configuration

Uninstallation
To erase the program system from the hard drive, use the option Software from the Windows control panel to start the
automatic uninstall program for InfoCAD. Uninstallation will not affect any files created by the user.

Network License
The network administrator should carry out the installation and configuration of network licenses.

Network Configuration

The licensed computer can either be a server running Windows 2003/2008/2012 or a workstation with Windows XP/
Vista/7/8/8.1.

On workstations the system limits the number of users to 10.

The licensed computer must have the 'Client for Microsoft Networks' and 'Files and Printer Sharing for Microsoft
Networks' network services installed. The firewall should grant access to the file system in order to allow for
communication via so called Named Pipes.

The program user must have the necessary user privileges on the licensed computer. Alternatively the guest account
must be activated (see Windows Function Control Panel/Administrative Tools/Computer Management/Local Users and
Groups/Users/Guest ) and the 'Password Protected Sharing' must be switched off (Windows Vista/7/8/8.1).

The workstation must have the 'Client for Microsoft Networks' network service installed.

Tasks on the Licensed Computer

Connect the network hardlock to the USB interface.

Install the hardlock driver. This requires administrator privileges. The installation is performed either from the
Installation menu or by running the \admin\HASPUserSetup.exe file on the CD.

Install the License Manager. This requires administrator privileges. The installation is performed either from the
Installation menu or by running the \admin\setup.exe file on the CD.

Choose whether you want the License Manager to start as an application or as a service. The autostart program group
is used to start the License Manager as an application after user login.

Perform the required settings in the License Manager.

If the License Manager runs as a service, settings should be performed with the help of the program InfoMonitor.exe,
16

Network License
which is included in the Licence Manager installation.

In the License Information dialog you can check the range of functions.

Virtual Machines using VMware

If the license manager is installed on a virtual machine, the USB hardlock must be logically disconnected from the host
system and exclusively connected to the virtual machine. On system boot the hardlock should be re-connected
automatically.

VMware settings dialog

Tasks on the Workstation

For central installation of InfoCAD on a file server:

- No further installation is necessary on the workstation.
- Create shortcuts to the Infocadw.exe, Infocadw64.exe, Infocadgl.exe or Infocadgl64.exe, Bdkn.exe and Risse.exe files
and, if necessary, manually register the InfoCAD file types.
- In order to display the miniature views within the Windows explorer, you have to copy the appropriate DLL file
(infoshex.dll or infoshex64.dll) from the Admin folder of the CD to the workstation. This DLL must be registered
using the console command regsvr32 "drive:\path\name.dll" which has to be executed as Administrator.

For local installation:

- Install InfoCAD on the workstation. This requires administrator privileges.
- Make sure that all workstations are using the same program version that matches the License Manager.

Installation and Configuration

Program Start
When you run InfoCAD for this first time, please enter the name or IP address of the computer running the License
Manager. Alternatively, you can identify the relevant computer in the network environment.

The remaining configuration is performed in the same way as for a single-user license.

Controls

User Interface
Controls
The image below shows how the interface appears after opening a project file.

Standard Bar
The standard bar contains key functions from the File and Edit menus. It also allows you to control the layer function, the
partial view function, the color selection and the transfer of the current screen view to the print list.

Draw Bar, Snap Bar, View Bar

These toolbars contain functions for creating drawings, snap functions for selecting object points and other functions for
defining the display window.

Structure Bar, Analysis Bar, Result Bar

The structure bar contains the functions of the Structure menu. The functions of the Analysis menu are also available in the
analysis bar. The results bar offers special functions for showing results.

User Interface

Status Bar
Information on the currently selected function is shown in the left part of the status bar. The x, y and z coordinates [m] of
the crosshair center or of the last entered point are displayed in the right part of the status bar. Click the status bar to
switch to continuous coordinate view.

Data Base Pane

The database represents all the input data and analysis results of the project in a single tree and allows you to display
selected data in the representation area either as a graphic or a table. In addition, you can print out selected sections using
the context menu and transfer them to the print list.

Print List Pane

Graphical and table representations are saved to the print list. These representations can later be accessed using their
original settings and then printed individually or in batches. The results contained therein will be automatically updated.

Layer Pane
In this pane the layer function is displayed and controlled. The layer feature can be used to group graphical objects in a
logical manner, e.g., to allow for separate editing.

Partial View Pane

This pane displays the existing partial views with their state and appropriate controls. Partial views can alternatively be used
to group graphical objects in a logical manner.

Representation Area
The representation area shows either the graphic or table view of the active project.

Graphical View
The graphical view displays objects in a plan view, front view or 3D perspective. You can freely choose the image plane
(viewport) and the display window. The mouse cursor assumes different shapes during editing:
With the left mouse button you can select objects by clicking them or dragging a selection box over them. If the
window is dragged from left to right, only the objects within the window are selected. If the window is dragged
from right to left, all objects within the window plus any objects crossing the boundaries of the window are
selected. When combined with the SHIFT and CTRL keys, you can expand or reduce the selection. To open the
context menu, press the right mouse button. To open the Properties dialog, double-click an object.
Indicates a direct transfer operation when holding down the left mouse button.
Specify coordinates graphically with the crosshair by clicking the left mouse button.
The crosshair with snap window is used to select objects in active dialogs. In conjunction with object snap methods,
the basepoints of objects are used to enter coordinates.
With this cursor you can rotate the view in any direction in 3D mode.
This cursor is used to move the display window.
This icon appears if you are not able to execute a function in the representation area.
For the selected objects the color and layer are displayed in the standard bar.

Controls

Table View
The table view enables additional alphanumeric input and output and provides the following functions:

Input and modification of structural properties in tabular form,

Definition of analysis settings,

Display of analysis logs,

Tabular view of results.

The following special functions are available in the menus for the tables:
Find...

Search for the specified words.

Goto...

Go to the specified row (number).

Standard View

Select the preferred view. The reaction pair (e.g., Nx min, corresp. My, corresp. Mz, ...) of a result
location will be shown in a table row for combination results.

One Row per Result

Location

Select a view of combination results in which all the reactions of a result location will be shown
in a table row.

View Selection...

Open the dialog to filter the result representation.

Font ...

Select the font for the current selection.

Bullet Style

Insert a bullet point in the selected rows.

Word Wrap

Word wrap allows you to view the entire text on the screen but does not affect how the text will
be printed.

Paragraph...

Open the dialog for specifying the indentation and alignment of the selected paragraph.

Tabs...

Open the dialog for specifying the tab stop in a selected paragraph.

Small Font

Select a small font for the table printing.

Section Stress...

Open the dialog for viewing the section stress of the selected internal forces.

Table contents and analysis logs can be exported to other programs via the clipboard. The analysis logs are recreated after
each analysis and can be supplemented with text-based explanations.

View Selection
With this dialog the table view of results can be limited to specific objects.
Active objects of the graphic view
Only the table content of objects which are on the active layers or partial views is displayed. Selecting nodes leads to a more
limited table view.
Selected objects of the graphic view
Only the table content of selected objects is displayed. Selecting nodes additionally leads to a more limited table view.
Selection stored in the print list
The selection is taken from the print list and is independent from the current graphic view.

Output Pane
The analysis and checking programs display their progress in the output pane. The information in the output pane can be
selected and then copied or printed using the context menu. By double-clicking the warnings and error messages of the
analysis modules, the affected object (load case, load line, beam, element, node) is selected in the graphic or table view and
the image section is centered on the object.

User Interface

Dialog Bar
The functions in the menu extend the range of input options when using the dialog bar. They are as follows:
The provided buttons can be accessed with the left mouse button.
You may enter data into the input field using the keyboard. If the text cursor is not in the input field, simply click the
field to move it there. Conclude all data inputs by pressing the Enter button or key. Right-click to access a context
menu.
You can cancel dialogs by pressing the Esc button or key.

Coordinate Input
Object coordinates are saved in InfoCAD using three components. You can enter the coordinates using either the crosshair
or the keyboard.
Crosshair input is carried out in the representation area. In 2D view the third component is specified based on the constants
that have been defined for the viewport (e.g., the constant z value for the xy viewport). Object points near the crosshair are
snapped automatically. The effective snap radius can be defined via the Snap menu.
If you enter coordinates using the unit meter in the dialog bar with the keyboard, separate the individual components with
a space. The decimal separator must be entered in accordance with the regional settings of the operating system. You can
define a local reference system for coordinate input using the Snap menu functions.
The following input variants are available:
Cartesian coordinates
Assign the first two values to the axes of the viewport in 2D view (e.g., x and y). The constant specifically defined for that
viewport will be used as the third component. In 3D view, coordinates must be entered in the order x, y and z. The &
character can be used to define relative coordinates which refer to the previous point.
Example:

In the xy viewport, entering '& 1.55 3.05' will yield a point with Dx=1.55 and Dy=3.05 relative to the last
point.

Cylinder coordinates
Specify radius [m] and rotation angle [] against the horizontal axis in 2D view (polar coordinates). In 3D view, the radius,
the rotation angle against the x axis and the z component are required. The angles are defined in a positive, clockwise
direction.
Example: In 3D view, entering '1.4142 <45 1' will yield the Cartesian coordinate (1 1 1).
The x, y and z coordinates of the crosshair center or the last specified point are displayed in the right part of the status bar.
Click the status bar to switch to continuous coordinate view.

Arithmetic
Numerical entries in the dialog area can be specified as arithmetic expressions. The expressions can be composed of
constants and variables. They can be grouped by parentheses, but spaces are not permitted. The arguments of the functions
must be in parentheses.
Operators
+
Addition
Subtraction
*
Multiplication
/
Division
** Exponentiation

Example:

Functions
SIN
COS
TAN
ASIN
ACOS
ATAN

Sine of an angle
Cosine of an angle
Tangent of an angle
Arcsine
Arccosine
Arctangent

1.50*SIN(30) results in 0.75.

ABS
SQRT
EXP
LOG
LOG10

Absolute value
Square root
E-function
Natural logarithm
Base-10 logarithm

File

File
The File menu contains functions for project file management. In addition to the structure, the project file can contain any
number of drawings. These drawings are only composed of drawing objects and can be opened and saved using separate
functions. To edit drawings without the structure, you first need to open the project file with the Open Drawing function.
New

Start a new structure. The current project file will close.

Open...

Open an existing project file. The structure will be automatically loaded and displayed.

Save

Save the current project file.

Save As...
Save Copy As...

Save all the input data of the current project with a new name.
Save all the input data of the current project with a new name. The current project will
remain open.
Generate or select a construction stage.
New
Create a new drawing. The current drawing will be closed.
Open
Open an existing drawing.
Save
Save the current drawing.
Save As
Save the current drawing with a new name.
Picture creation
Generate a 2D drawing of the current screen view.

Construction Stage...
Drawing

Print...

Graphic printout of the current screen view.

Print Preview

Preview of the pages to be printed.

Page Setup...
Add to Printing List

Page layout for printing.

Import
Export
File Service
1-4
Send...

Import a project file or other data formats.

Export a project file to other data formats.
Display and edit the data sets of the project file.
Open one of the four most recently used project files.
Send the current project file via e-mail. This function is only available if a Windows e-mail
client such as MS Outlook is installed.
Button for sending project files via e-mail.

Only Input Data

Exit

Add the active document to the printing list.

Close the current project file and exit the program.

Construction Stage
The Construction Stage function supports the calculation of structures in which different construction phases are to be
analyzed. The function is based on the following principles:
1.

The calculation model of each construction stage is stored in a separate project file.

The names of associated project files are identical except for a consecutive number. The file name for the first
construction stage must contain the number (1) (e.g., 'System(1).fem'). This is required for the function to work.

The program assigns an attribute to the project files to ensure their coherency. Hence there is no need to bypass the
system to add or delete construction stages.

When creating a new construction stage, the program simply uses the current system without the load cases. The new
construction stage also includes the number of 'inherited' elements, nodes, supports and tendon groups as well as the
load cases of the previous system. In the case of 'inherited' tendon groups, the Ignore in prestress load button is
selected.

The structural components in the new construction stage can be added or removed in any manner you choose. Doing
so will have no effect on the object numbers included from the previous stages.

The section and material properties of transferred elements may be modified.

You can define any number of new load cases (recorded load case numbers are protected).

The settings regarding the number of result locations in the beams and the result locations in the area elements must
be the same in all construction stages.

User Interface
9.

Before each calculation (finite elements or framework calculation), the results from the load cases of the previous
system are applied to the current system. This process only takes into account the included objects (see 4.). More
specifically, this involves:

Node deformations (DEFORM.*)

Beam deformations (ELDEF.*)

Support reactions (AUFLR.*)

Deformations in the support system (AUFLDEF.*)

Internal forces of the beams (SREAK.* / LERG.*)

Internal forces of the areas and stresses of the solid elements (REAK.*)

Soil pressures (SIGB.*)

Resulting soil pressures (SIGRB.*)

Tendon group forces from creep and shrinkage (VSPZV.*)

10. The transferred results are available in the standard form for additional processing. This includes the superposition or
the combination with other load cases, for example.
The buttons of the Construction stage dialog have the following functions:
Close
Close the dialog.
New
Insert a new construction stage behind the open and selected construction stage.
Open
Open the selected construction stage.
Delete
Delete the selected construction stages that follow the currently open construction stage. These deletions are permanent.
You will be prompted to confirm the deletions.
Edit
Edit the selected construction stage.

The left dialog shows the load cases and structure objects whose results are taken over from the previous construction stage
for each calculation process. During the creation of a new construction stage, the marks for all load cases and structure
objects existing at this moment are set automatically. If in previous construction stages load cases are added subsequently, a
take over of the results to the current construction stage only occurs if the new load cases are marked here. Results of a
new structure object can only be transferred if it exists in the current construction stage with the same number and it is
marked for transfer.
The right dialog shows the identifiers connecting the current construction stage with the previous and subsequent one. The
identifier is automatically defined by InfoCAD for every project file and persists after renaming of the file. A construction
stage can be deleted or added to this chain by replacing the identifier of a previous or subsequent construction stage.
The usage of these functions is to be limited to exceptional cases. It can result in overlapping of load case,
element and node numbers and as a result, it can lead to an unwanted mixture of results. The user is
responsible to prevent this overlapping.

File
Example 1: Girder
In this example, two single-span beams are connected retroactively. A detailed explanation of this example can be found in
the section 'Finite elements / Examples / Construction stages, creep redistribution'.

Internal forces My in construction stage 1 as a result of dead load

Internal forces My in construction stage 2 as a result of additional load

Sum of internal forces My from construction stages 1 and 2 (Superposition load type)
Example 2: Bridge with auxiliary support
This example shows a bridge with an auxiliary support. For the purpose of simplification, only the following three
construction stages will be considered:
1.

Fixed cantilever shortly before reaching the auxiliary support

Internal forces My in construction stage 1 as a result of G1

Bridge shortly before reaching the end support

Internal forces My in construction stage 2 as a result of G2

Bridge after the auxiliary support is removed

Internal forces My in construction stage 3 as a result of removing the auxiliary support

Sum of internal forces My from construction stages 1, 2 and 3 (SUP load type)

For comparison purposes, the calculated internal forces My in the final state as a result of G

User Interface
Example 3: Incrementally launched bridge
In this example, a bridge is moved to the end support using a launching nose. Unlike example 2, the beam nodes are moved
in this case. The field lengths measure 20 m and the dead load of the bridge is 100 kN/m. The 10 m long launching nose
has a dead load of 20 kN/m. An auxiliary support is used temporarily in the first stage.

Internal forces My [kNm] in construction stage 1 with auxiliary support as a result of G

Internal forces My [kNm] in construction stage 2 as a result of G

Internal forces My [kNm] in construction stage 3 as a result of G

Internal forces My [kNm] in construction stage 4 as a result of G

Internal forces My [kNm] in construction stage 5 as a result of G

These internal forces correspond to the monolithic model.

Internal forces min, max My [kNm] from construction stage 1 through 5 as a result of G

File

Print, Page Setup

This function allows you to adjust the print settings.
Page frame
Selected page frame for printing. User-defined page frames can be modified in the Options menu.
Page no.
Page number used for the next page to be printed. This number is increased by one after each printed page. You can enter
'0' to suppress numbering.
Part numbers
The part number is the consecutive number of pages in a print job. If the part number deviates from the page number, you
can have it printed in parentheses in front of the page number.
Scale
If the auto button is selected, the representation area will be printed out in the largest size that fits within the printable
paper area (see the figure below). If not selected, the printout will correspond to the scale setting.
Verfasser:

InfoGraph GmbH, Aachen

Projekt Nr.

Programm:

Finite Elemente 6.50 (c) InfoGraph GmbH

Abb.Nr.

Bauwerk:

Datum:

Beispiel
Platte
Info

InfoGraph GmbH
Kackertstrae 10
D-52072 Aachen
Tel. (0241) 88 99 80
Fax (0241) 88 99 888
Bauteil:

Pos. Nr.

Block:

Seite 1

Vorgang:

M = 1: 208

InfoGraph
Software fr die Tragwerksplanung

Archiv Nr.

Mastab: 1: 100
Finite Elemente 6.50 (c) InfoGraph GmbH

Datum:

Blatt: 1
System.fem

B/W-Print
Print the lines in black. Colored areas will be converted to gray values. You can define the gray values for the graphical
representation of results on the Gray Values dialog page.
Axes
Print the axes together with a dimension line in the upper left corner of the drawing area.
Date, Time
This information appears automatically in the standard page frame. In the other page frames the information is positioned
based on the @Datum or @Zeit placeholders.
Project, building number, Title
This text appears automatically in the standard page frame. In other page frames the information is positioned based on the
@Projekt or @Titel placeholders.
Use print list text
Leaving the title field empty, this switch enables you to print out the label text of graphical views of the print list instead of
the title. Printing graphical views by using the context menu of the database leads to the same result.
Texta, b, c
Text that can be added to the page frame using the @Texta, @Textb and @Textc placeholders. The fields are released for
editing if the placeholders are used in the selected frame. Any text entered in these fields can be saved in the current project
file.
User name, structural engineer
The user indicated here will be used in the conjunction with the standard page frame.
Printer...
Open the Windows printer dialog. In this dialog you can select a different printer or adjust printer-specific settings.
Page...
Page orientation, paper size and margin settings.

User Interface
Line Widths
Assigns line widths to the line colors for printing. You can also view them on the screen using the page view. This setting
can be disabled using the line width indicated in the line type.
Gray Values
Coloring of result diagrams and slab reinforcement is carried out with the colors defined here. You can assign grayscale
values to the colors for black and white printing. When selecting the Windows background color, coloring of result
diagrams is suppressed.
Text Options
Text that can be added within the page frame using the @T1-@T6 placeholders.

Print List
Save graphical and tabular views to the print list. They can be accessed with their original settings and printed out
individually or in groups. Since the print list only contains references, the data printed out will always be current.
To add views to the print list, click the
entry:

Current drawing

Current load case

Analysis result with settings

Visibility of layers and partial views

Display window and its configuration

Scale if layout view is enabled

Table selections

Paper size and page orientation

button in the standard toolbar. The following information will be saved for each

Page frame

If you only want to see specific details rather than the entire graphical view, you can drag a selection box by holding down
the ALT key. The display window inside the selection box will then be added to the print list.
The content of the print list can be edited using the toolbar of the same name. The icons in the toolbar have the following
functions:
Open the dialog to select or define print lists.
Print all or selected content.
Show the page view for all or selected content.
Open the Page Setup dialog. If entries are selected, the icon will show the current page orientation and allows you to
modify the paper size, page orientation and page frame.
Generate a table of contents at the beginning of the print list or update the existing table of contents.
Switch to the previous folder.
Create a new folder.
Double-click any entry in the list to restore the view. The context menu contains additional functions:

Rename entries.

Refreshing the selected entries. With this command the current graphical view will be assumed.

Align display window next to the previous window.

Cut, copy and paste entries. Entries can also be moved using drag and drop.

Insert page break.

Copy image objects directly to the clipboard. This allows you to insert graphics, tables and similar items into other
Windows programs.

Generate a metafile in the WMF or EMF format for all or selected content.

Insert user-defined text.

Changes of the print list can be undone.

File

Import and Export

These functions can be used to exchange data in the following formats:

AutoCAD DXF format

Data exchange interface for steel construction of DSTV 4/2000 as of 10/2002, file extension *.stp

IFC (Industry Foundation Classes), file extension *.ifc

InfoGraph project files with extensions *.fem, *.rsw, *.esw, and *.ros.
InfoGraph interface files with extension *.icx

Data Exchange between Project Files

Element data and drawings are exchanged between project files.
Import
Drawing

Insert the selected drawing of another project file.

Element data

The elements of another project file can be inserted into the current file. The numbers of the inserted
nodes and elements may change in some cases.

Insertion point

Location where the zero point of the imported data is inserted.

Angle of rotation

Angle by which the imported data is rotated.

Scaling

Scaling factors in the x, y and z direction for the inserted objects.

Export
Select objects

Select the objects to be exported.

Drawing

The selected drawing objects can be exported with a new name. Element data is exported without
further user interaction.

Data Exchange with InfoGraph Interface Files

The interface bases on the STEP (STandard for the Exchange of Product model data) technology and uses the ASCII format
to exchange the following data:
Drawing objects, model objects

Beams, cables, area and solid elements

Design objects

Link elements

Spring elements, supports

Tendons

Section, material, joints

Loads

The EXPRESS file icx-01.exp installed in the program directory describes all objects supported by the interface with their
properties and data types.

User Interface

Data Exchange via DXF Format

The data exchange is based on AutoCAD Version 12. The following DXF objects are included in the import:
3DFACE

ARC

BLOCK

CIRCLE

DIMENSION

INSERT

LINE

LWPOLYLINE

MTEXT

POLYLINE

SOLID

TEXT

TRACE

The LWPOLYLINE and POLYLINE objects are converted into lines and the DIMENSION object is converted into lines and text.
During export the current drawing and element data is stored as 3DFACE, ARC, CIRCLE, LINE, POLYLINE and TEXT.
Layer and color information will be retained.
Input
Unit

Measurement units in the DXF file (mm, cm or m).

Ground plan

You can choose whether the model information is to be kept for automatic mesh generation (column,
hole, edge, wall).

With respect to exchanging model information, the following conventions apply:

Walls

On layer G$WAND as closed POLYLINE in two forms:

4 points

6 points

Edges

On layer G$RAND as LINE or ARC.

Holes

On layer G$LOCH as LINE or ARC.

Columns

On layer G$STUETZE as POLYLINE with 4 points (rectangular column),

CIRCLE with r > 0.001 (round column),
CIRCLE with r = 0.001 (point column)

Note
Area and solid elements are exported as 3DFACE objects, beam elements as LINE objects. The context menu allows to
convert imported 3DFACE objects into area elements and imported LINE objects into model edges or beam elements.

File

IFC Data Transfer

The data transfer is based on the IFC version IFC 2x3.
Coordinate System
In the IFC product model the z axis of the global coordinate system typically runs from below to above. This is counter to
the convention used in InfoCAD. To avoid all objects standing on their heads after an export or import, they are turned 180
around the global x axis.
Import
The data import consists of two functional areas:
Importing the Analysis models (frames or model objects)

Importing the Geometry of Building Elements

1. Importing Analysis models (frames or model objects)

The import is carried out for the static analysis models (IfcStructuralAnalysisModel) saved in the transfer file and selected by
the user. The following table displays the relevant objects.
IFC Object
IfcArbitraryClosedProfileDef
IfcArbitraryProfileDefWithVoids
IfcAsymmetricIShapeProfileDef
IfcBoundaryNodeCondition

Imports as
Polygon section

IfcCircleHollowProfileDef
IfcCircleProfileDef

Tube profile or polygon section

Polygon section
32 polygon points

IfcIShapeProfileDef

HEA, HEB, HEM or IPE profile or

polygon section

IfcLShapeProfileDef
IfcMaterial
IfcRectangleHollowProfileDef
IfcRectangleProfileDef
IfcRelAssociatesMaterial
IfcRelAssociatesProfileProperties
IfcRelConnectsStructuralMember

L profile or polygon section

Material
Hollow profile or polygon
section
Rectangle section
Beam material
Beam section
Beam node

IfcStructuralCurveMember

Beam or edge

IfcStructuralLinearAction
IfcStructuralLinearActionVarying
IfcStructuralLoadGroup
IfcStructuralLoadLinearForce
IfcStructuralLoadPlanarForce

Linear load
Trapezoidal load
Load case
Line load
Area load

IfcStructuralLoadSingleDisplacement
IfcStructuralLoadSingleForce
IfcStructuralLoadTemperature
IfcStructuralPlanarAction
IfcStructuralPointAction

Support displacement
Point load
Temperature load
Area load
Punctiform load

IfcStructuralPointConnection
IfcStructuralProfileProperties

Node
General beam section

IfcStructuralSurfaceMember
IfcTShapeProfileDef
IfcUShapeProfileDef

Model face
T profile or polygon section
U profile or polygon section

Polygon section
Support, beam joint

Remarks
The geometry must be described with
IfcPolyline
Beam joints must be defined in the
beam system

Straight (not curved), constant section,

no eccentricity of nodes

Will be ignored if a different section is

imported

To import analysis models, either the FEM or the RSW mode must be active.

User Interface
Example
The following illustrations display the import of a framework from file gtstrudl_physical.ifc. Source: http://cic.nist.gov/vrml/
cis2.html (NIST, National Institute of Standards and Technology)

Dialog for selecting the import data

Imported framework

The file contains a analysis model with the name Loads and Results Exported from GTSTRUDL and also building elements
of various types that have been deselected for import.
2. Importing the Geometry of the Building Elements
This functional area calls for construction model objects saved in the transfer file whose type is derived from
IfcBuildingElement. They include, for example, IfcBeam, IfcColumn, IfcSlab and IfcWall(StandardCase). Only objects with the
geometric display SweptSolid, Clipping, Brep, and MappedRepresentation are considered. In InfoCAD special drawing
objects are generated from these that make it possible to continue to use the geometry of the building elements. The snap
modes End, Middle, and Normal allow you to use, for instance, characteristic points for measurements or for the design of
model objects.
Example

Building elements from the gtstrudl_physical.ifc file. Source: http://cic.nist.gov/vrml/cis2.html

(NIST, National Institute of Standards and Technology)

File
The figure above shows several further characteristics that are imported in addition to the geometry of the building
elements. These include

GlobalId: identification of the building element

Name, Descrip.: description

Material: assossiated material description

LoadBe(aring): displays whether the element bears load (1) or not (0)
Transformation into Model Objects
Imported drawing objects whose geometric display is based on the extrusion of a base area (IfcExtrudedAreaSolid) and who
originate from

IfcBeam

IfcColumn

IfcMember

IfcSlab

IfcWall(StandardCase)
can be transformed, with the help of the program, into model objects (select Convert from the context menu, FEM mode).
As part of this process, linear elements are turned into edges with the meaning Free beam. The generated beam section
corresponds to the profile definition used for the base area. Objects originating from IfcSlab and IfcWall whose base area
consists of a traverse with exactly four points are converted into model surfaces.
The following illustration displays some of the building elements from the file AC-90Smiley-West-14-07-2005.ifc, as well as
the resulting model surfaces. Source http://www.iai.fzk.de/www-extern.

Geometry of the building elements

Model objects, not joined

Because the model objects are created based on the wall or slab axis surfaces, gaps usually exists
between neighboring objects (see detail).

A
As a remedy, all objects are joined with one another during the transformation and, if necessary,
marginally reduced or enlarged. If for walls standing on top of each other the wall axes do not match
up, for instance due to differing wall thickness, it might be necessary to add transition surfaces that
are not perpendicular. In addition, openings that are close to the edge are adjusted.
The described operations help to improve the continuity between the model objects. This can eliminate the need for manual
corrections in many cases. The following illustrations show the joined model objects and the element mesh that has been
created as a result.

User Interface

Model objects, joined

Generated element mesh

Export
The function applies to model objects and frameworks. The following data will be exported:
Model objects
Model edges with meaning 'free beam'

Model faces

Framework, if no model objects exist

Static analysis model without results

Construction model of the 3D framework with the objects IfcBeam, IfcColumn

Framework exported with InfoCAD displayed in IfcStoreyView

(Forschungszentrum Karlsruhe, Institut fr angewandte Informatik)

File

File Service
All input and results data are stored and managed in the project file as data sets. The file service represents the table of
contents of the data sets in the project file. You can also use it to delete, copy or rename data sets. These actions are
permanent and cannot be undone. Improper use may make the project file unusable.
The data sets can be sorted according to the terms in their headers. The menu includes the following functions:
File, Delete Results
Delete all analysis results.
File, Compress
During compression unused parts are removed from the file. This can reduce the amount of space the files use on the hard
drive.
Records, Copy, Delete, Rename
With these functions you can use the * wildcard to select groups of data sets (e.g. LOAD.*).
View, Selection
You can select the data sets based on their names and properties for display in the table of contents.

Edit
The Edit menu contains the following functions:
Undo

Cancel the previous action.

Redo

Restore the previously canceled action.

Cut

Transfer selected objects to the clipboard.

Copy

Copy selected objects to the clipboard.

Insert

Insert objects from the clipboard.

Delete

Delete selected objects.

Select

Select objects.

Select Group...

Select objects according to group classification.

Select All

Select all active objects.

Move

Move, mirror, rotate and scale objects.

Copy Directly

Copy objects without using the clipboard.

Generate

Duplicate objects.

Properties Copy

Assign the specified properties of a reference object to the selected objects.

Layer

Manage a layer or assign it to selected objects.

Color

Preset the drawing color or assign it to selected objects.

Line Type

Preset the line type or assign it to selected objects.

Modify

Modify the properties of selected objects (text, solid, circle, arc).

Modify Length

Modify the length of the selected object.

Modify Endpoint

Change an endpoint of the selected objects.

Intersect

Intersect a selected object with another one.

Wall Aperture

Insert a wall aperture into the selected wall.

User Interface

Undo / Redo
You have the option of canceling the previous changes you made to project data. Any action that is canceled in this manner
can also be restored.

Cut
The cut function allows you to transfer and save selected objects to the clipboard for insertion at a later time. This function
is disabled if non-transferable objects are selected.

Copy
There are two ways of using the copy function:
Copy selected objects
The selected objects are copied to the clipboard and stored for insertion at a later time. This function is disabled if nontransferable objects are selected.
Copy a rectangular image section
While holding down the ALT key, you can use the left mouse button to create a selection box in the drawing area. When
you use the copy function, the image section will be saved to the clipboard as a WMF file and can then be transferred to the
analysis logs. You can also use this method to export graphics to other programs that support the WMF format.

Insert
Objects saved in the clipboard are inserted with their 3D coordinates. This will replace any objects you have selected. You
can move the inserted objects to place them at any specific position you want.

Delete
All selected objects are deleted.

Select
This function is used to select objects. Selected objects are displayed with dotted lines.
Selection
Objects

Selection of individual objects using the mouse.

Number

Selection based on a number (beam, element, tendon group, load line).

Window

Selection based on a window. All objects that are completely within the window will be selected. If the
window is dragged from right to left, all objects within the window plus any objects crossing the
boundaries of the window are selected.

Search region with four points. All objects that are completely within the area will be selected.

last

Selects the object specified last.

Switches to deletion of selected objects.

Switches from deletion mode back to selection mode.

Special features for object selection

Areas and solid elements can also be identified inside an element.

Text must be identified within the area that is limited by the text.

The option 'Object selection with crossing window (from right to left)' in the snap settings can be deselected.

Edit

Select Group
With this function you can select the objects based on logical aspects. This also enables direct access to individual object
groups, even for complicated structure models. Using AND logic, all objects are selected that meet every specified condition.

Select All
Select all visible objects.

Deselect All
Deselect all visible objects. This command can be assigned to the edit men or to a shortcut key using the function
Customize of the view menu.

Move
You can move selected objects using the following methods.
Displacement vector
Movement through displacement. The displacement vector is defined by two points.

Rotate
Movement through rotation. A rotation point is defined in 2D mode while a rotation axis is defined in 3D mode.

Mirror
Movement through mirroring. A mirror axis is defined in 2D mode while a mirror plane is defined in 3D mode.

Scaling
Movement through scaling in the global or local reference system. You can align objects on an axis or plane by specifying a
scaling factor of zero.

User Interface

Copy Directly
Selected objects can be copied using the following methods.
Displacement vector
Copying through displacement. The displacement vector is defined by two points. The Multiple option allows you to make
multiple copies of the selected objects.

Rotate
Copying through rotation. A rotation point is defined in 2D mode while a rotation axis is defined in 3D mode.

Mirror
Copying through mirroring. A mirror axis is defined in 2D mode while a mirror plane is defined in 3D mode.

Parallel
Lines and model edges can be copied through parallel displacement.

Generate
Selected objects are generated through displacement, rotation or a mixture of both. The original objects are always included
in the number of objects to be generated.
Displacement vector
Generation through displacement. After you specify a displacement vector, the generation will take place in orthogonal
form through the incremental addition of the displacement vector components (see image to the left). The specified number
of copies will also be generated if the component equals zero in a direction. This may result in an overlapping of the copied
objects.
After you specify a second displacement vector (and a third one in 3D mode), an oblique generation will be carried out
through the incremental addition of each displacement vector (see image to the right).

Global generation

Oblique generation

Rotate
Generation through rotation. A rotation point is defined in 2D mode while a rotation axis is defined in 3D mode.

Edit

Polar
The generation is carried out by means of rotation around the specified rotation angle [] and subsequent translation with
the displacement vector. This allows you to create a helix, for example, in a 3D layout.
A stair step was initially specified as the prototype in the illustrated example. This step is incrementally rotated around the
P1-P2 rotation axis through polar generation and then moved to the level of the next step with the P1-P3 vector.

Color
The color can be predefined for objects to be created or modified for selected objects. The current color is shown in the
toolbar. If objects are selected, their color will be displayed.

Layer
All graphical objects have a layer property to put them into logical groups. A Layer is identified by its number (from 1 to
255). For a description label can optionally be specified. For the graphical representation specific layers can be switched
invisible, i.e. all objects with this property will be hidden. The layer property is also applicable for locking layers. Afterwards
the affected objects are still visible but cannot be modified.
New objects get a layer preset by the user when they are created. It can be changed anytime later.
There are different controls for the management of layer properties of objects:

Combination list box

in the standard bar

Dialog which is accessible using the layer button

Layer pane

in the standard bar or the edit menu

User Interface

Line Type
The line type can be preset for new objects or modified for selected objects.
Style
You can choose from the following line styles:
1

Solid

Short dashed

Long dashed

Dot dashed

5-15

Solid

Width
Specify the line width for the objects. Alternatively, you can use the line width that has been defined for the object color
(see Print).

Modify
This function can be used to modify the properties of selected objects (text, solid, circle, arc).
Text
Position

Define new text position.

Direction

Specify point in the direction of the text or align the text horizontally.

Height

Change the text height [m].

Font

Change the text font. You can use Standard, Standard mono, Text or Text mono vector fonts as well as
true type fonts. Vector fonts of type mono have a fixed character width.

Text

Change the content of the text.

2D solid
Change the corner point of a solid.
Circle, arc
Change the radius.
Solid
Simplify

Add surfaces of a solid together, if they are in the same plane and touch each other.

Remove ports

Remove holes from solids.

Divide

Solids are cut into pieces by a defined plane.

Add

Solids which touch or penetrate each other are added together to one solid.

Subtract

Subtract a solid from another solid.

Example of the subtraction of two solids.

Modify Length
You can use this function to modify the length [m] of a linear object that has been selected. The endpoint of the object that
is closest to the selection point will be changed.

Modify Endpoint
With this function you can change the endpoints of selected objects (lines, arcs, edges, holes, solid). The endpoint of the
object that is closest to the last selection point will be changed. The radius of arcs will remain unchanged.

Edit

Intersect
You can use this function to intersect selected objects (lines, arcs, edges, holes, walls).
The figures below provide four examples of how lines and arcs are intersected. Proceed in the following order:
Select the object to be modified at the end that you want to intersect (point 1).

Activate the function.

Select the limiting object (point 2).

The figures below show you the steps involved in intersecting walls.

Wall Aperture
This function allows you to insert an aperture in the selected wall. The resulting ends of the wall axes are connected by an
edge object. The length of both of the resulting walls must measure at least half of the wall width since short walls may
lead to very unfavorable or even improper aspect ratios of the elements during mesh generation.

Divide
You can use the context menu to divide selected lines, arcs, edges, holes and solids.

Join
With this function from the context menu selected lines, arcs, edges, holes or line supports can be joined to one object. The
properties of the first selected object remains.
Lines (also edges, holes)
The objects must be collinear. There can be gaps between them.
Arcs (also edges, holes)
The objects must be on a imaginary circle. There can be gaps between them. The new arc starts at the starting point of
the first selected arc.
Line supports
Line supports are treated like lines or arcs, but no gaps are allowed.

User Interface

Convert
Using the context menu you can convert the following selected objects:

line, circle and arc drawing objects into edge and hole model objects,

edge and hole model objects into the corresponding drawing objects,

line and 3D face drawing objects into structure elements (beams or area elements),

line, circle and arc objects into NURBS curves,

specific IFC building elements into model objects.

Conversion is useful if a drawing comes from a DXF import, for example. In general, only drawing objects are transferred.
After conversion into model objects is complete, you can use any of the automatic mesh generators to generate the FE
mesh.

View
The View menu contains the following functions:

Redraw

Redraw the representation area.

Zoom

Zoom in on an image section.

View...

Specify the view options for the structure.

Switch between 2D and 3D view.

Rotate

Rotate in the 3D perspective.

3D-View

Define any 3D view direction.

Projection

Define central or parallel perspective.

Hidden

Enable or disable hidden view.

Section Representation

Enable or disable section representation.

XY-Viewport

Switch to the XY viewport.

XZ-Viewport

Switch to the XZ viewport.

YZ-Viewport

Switch to the YZ viewport.

1 Viewport

Switch to 1-viewport display.

2 Viewports

Switch to 2-viewport display.

Viewport...

Specify the screen viewport.

Load...

Load view with viewport setting.

Save...

Save view with viewport setting.

Normal

Activate normal view.

Layout

Activate layout view.

Grid Points

Enable or disable the auxiliary grid.

Scroll Bars

Activate scrollbars to move the image section.

Toolbars

Show or hide the toolbars.

Status Bar

Show or hide the status bar.

Reset Window Layout

Restores the default toolbar and docking window layout.

Standard View

Show the results of load case combinations in the standard view. This view shows a reaction
pair (e.g., Nx min, corresp. My, corresp. Mz, ...) of a reference point in a table row.

One Row per Result

Location

Show the results of combinations in a row depending on the result location.

View

Redraw
This function is used to redraw the representation area.

Zoom
The Zoom function allows you to specify which portion of the image is to be displayed.
Input
1st point of zoom window
Define the image section by entering a rectangle.
All
The image detail will be displayed such that all objects are visible.
Pan
Move the image section by entering a vector.
+
Enlarge image.

<< >>
Sc.=1:100

Reduce image.
The previous or next zoom level is activated.
Adjust the scale of the image section.

If your mouse has a scroll wheel, you can also use it to zoom while holding down the CTRL key. In addition, the
and the middle mouse button allow you to move the image section by dragging the mouse.

icon

3D Representation
This function is used to switch between 2D and 3D view.

3D-View
With this function you can define a specific view direction.
Input
1st point of view plane
Describe the view plane with three points. The view direction is defined perpendicular to the plane.
Axis

View in the direction of a global axis.

Direction

Specify a point that defines the view direction to the centroid of the object.

Vector

Enter the components of the direction vector from the object's centroid to the new view location.

Standard

Return to the standard view.

Rotate
With this function you can change the view direction of the observer in 3D view. The rotation direction refers to the view
location, meaning the movement occurs around the stationary object. The specified angle of tilt [] is relative and refers to
the current direction. A rotation cannot exceed the zenith or nadir point.

Up: 15

Left: 15

Default setting

Right: 15

Down: 15

Alternatively, you can use this cursor to rotate the view in any direction in 3D mode.
If your mouse has a scroll wheel, you can use it to rotate around the vertical axis while holding down the Shift key or
around the horizontal axis while holding down the Shift and CTRL keys.

User Interface

Projection
This function allows you to choose the projection type for the 3D perspective.
Input
Central 0...9

Display in central perspective with no change to the angle of view. The setting '0' produces the effect of
viewing the object from a large distance using a long focal length (telephoto lens), while the setting '9'
produces the effect of viewing the object from up close using a short focal length (wide-angle lens).

Parallel
Display in parallel perspective (isometric) with no change to the angle of view.
The following images show both the central and parallel perspectives.

Parallel

Central 0

Central 9

Hidden
Use this function to prevent hidden objects parts from being drawn in 3D view.

Hidden: Off

Hidden: On

Section Representation
Click this function to display all elements and their section dimensions in 3D view.

Section Representation: Off

with beam section

Section Representation: On

Viewport
This function is used to adjust the viewport setting.
Input
Number of viewports

Select 1 or 2 viewports.

1st viewport

Specify the desired coordinate system for the left viewport.

2nd viewport

Specify the desired coordinate system for the right viewport.

Constant coordinate

If only one viewport is selected, the constant third coordinate will be added to the 2D
coordinates. This allows you to set the xy viewport to a specific z level, for example.

View Direction

Selection of the direction of view.

View

Layout
Use the Layout function to switch to the layout view. Along with the defined page formats, the system is displayed in the
same manner as it is printed. You can work in the layout view exactly as you would in the normal view.

Partial View
For a structured representation of larger constructions, it is possible to create partial views. Every object can be part of
multiple partial views. The assignment to a partial view does not change the object properties. Representations can be
realized, which can't be realized by exclusively using layers. If, for example, in a high-rise construction the layers have been
structured separately for each floor, it is impossible to display only the objects in one axis of the building. With the
corresponding partial view this can be accomplished without modifying the objects.
The user can create any number of partial views, which can be named freely. They can subsequently be renamed without
any problems, because the name is not used for identification. Groups of partial views can be combined in folders.
If one or more partial views are selected for representation, the so-called 'Partial view mode' is automatically activated. In
the combination list box of the standard bar the existing partial views are displayed. Even in this mode the layers of the
objects keep their relevance. In other words, objects in disabled layers remain invisible. Objects created in the partial view
mode are added to the active partial view.
Partial views can be created and modified using the partial view pane or the partial view button menu.

Partial view pane

Partial view button menu

The following functions are available in the partial view pane:

Create a new partial view including the selected objects.
Create a new folder below the current partial view.
Add the selected objects to the selected partial view.
Remove the selected objects from the active partial views.
Reverse the visibility of the objects.
Close the partial view mode and return to the view according to the layer feature.
Extras

Sort
Remove empty partial views
Show inactive objects
Divide model structure into planes
Divide model structure into storeys

User Interface

Draw
This menu contains all relevant functions for entering drawing objects.
Line
Text
Circle
Arc
2D Solid
Nurbs
Model
Edge
Wall
Hole
Column
Face
Cone
Solid
Dimension
Image Adds images of formats bmp, ico, jpg, png, gif, tif, emf, wmf in the drawing.
For more detailed information on how to use drawing objects, refer to the Introductory_Examples.pdf document which is
installed in the program directory.

Line
This function specifies a line.
Input
1st point

Specify the start of the line. Additional lines can be entered consecutively once the endpoint has been
specified.

Start

Specify a new start point.

Connect the last point with the first start point.

Text
This function is used to enter text.
Input
Text starting point
Specify the text starting point.
Left, Middle, Right
Select left-aligned, centered or right-aligned text input. The text direction and text height [m] must also
be specified.
Font

Preselect the text font for further text input. You can use Standard, Standard mono, Text or Text mono
vector fonts as well as true type fonts. Mono type vector fonts have a fixed character width.

Draw

Circle
Use this function to specify a circle.
Input
Center point

Input using center point, circle plane (only in 3D) and radius.

3Points

Input using 3 circle points.

Arc
This function is used for entering arcs.
Input
Center point

Specify an arc using the following determinants:

1. Center point,
2. Direction to beginning of arc,
3. Direction between arc beginning and end,
4. Direction to arc end,
5. Radius.

3Points

Input using 3 arc points.

Variants for specifying arcs.

2D Solid
A 2D solid is used to describe a square color surface. The following figure shows the order of data input.

It can be specified that 2D solids are always drawn behind other objects in the 2D view (selecting 'draw order' during the
input of the first point). In the standard case the objects are displayed in the order of their input.

User Interface

NURBS
Non-Uniform Rational B-Splines are mathematically defined curves, surfaces and solids that can be used to model any kind
of (free-form) shape. In principle you can use NURBS to render any shape that is technically constructible or that exists in
nature. Here they are used to generate an FE mesh.
NURBS can normally be edited interactively in an intuitive manner using control points. These points are either directly on
the NURBS or act as a rubber band that connects to a NURBS.
Definition of a NURBS Curve
A NURBS curve with a degree of p is defined by:
n

N i, p (u ) wi Pi
C (u ) =

i =0
n

Ri, p (u ) Pi ;

a u b

i =0

N i, p (u ) wi
i =0

with

u
n
p
Pi

Curve parameter.
Index of the control point at the curve end.
Polynomial degree of the curve.
Control points; these generate the control polygon.

Weights of the control points.

Ni,p(u)

B-spline base function of degree p.

Ri,p(u)

Rational base function of degree p.

The curve parameter u is defined on the node vector

U = {a, ..., a, up+1, ., um-p-1, b, , b}

This parameter has m+1 elements. The first and last nodes are repeated p+1 times. The elements of the node vector are
arranged in ascending, non-cyclic order, yet they can be unevenly distributed. Normally a=0 and b=1 are set. You can
generally choose any degree for the base functions. For construction and computer-related reasons, p should be between 1
and 5.
The following illustration shows a NURBS curve of degree 2 with the associated control polygon. The weighting of all
control points is w = 1.
P7
P2
P6
P3

P0
The base node vector is:

U = {0, 0, 0, 1/6, 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, 5/6, 1, 1, 1}

The following illustration shows the course of the associated B-spline base function.

Draw

Important properties of the rational base functions Ri,p

Ri,p(u) 0 for all u [a, b].

The sum of all base functions at each location u [a, b] is equal to 1.

Each base function has exactly one maximum in the interval u [a, b].

Ri,p(u) = 0 outside the interval [ui, ui+p+1].

For wi = const., Ri,p(u) = Ni,p(u) applies.

All derivatives of Ri,p(u) exist within a node span, at a node Ri,p(u) is always differentiable (p-k) times. k is the
multiplicity of the respective node.

Important properties of NURBS curves

The above properties of rational base functions result in the following properties of NURBS curves:

C(a) = P0 and C(b) = Pn for u [a, b].

An affine transformation of NURBS curves is performed by transforming the control points.

The curve C(u) lies within the convex shell of the control polygon.
P7
P2
P6
P3

A NURBS curve without inner nodes is a rational Bezier curve. Consequently, NURBS curves contain both nonrational bspline curves as well as nonrational Bezier curves.

Changing the coordinates or the weight of a control point Pi will only affect the part of the curve that is assigned to
the interval u [ui, ui+p+1].
P7
P2

P'
3

P4
P0
Moving the control point P3 to P3
P7
P2
P6
P3

w 1=10

w 1=2

w 1=0.5

w 1=1
w 1=0.1

P4
P0
Changing the course of the curve by varying the weight of the control point P1

User Interface

The smaller the degree of a NURBS curve, the smaller the deviation from the associated control polygon. The following
curves all have the same control polygon and the same node vector, but their polynomial degree p differs.
P7
P2
P6
P3

p=5

p=4
p=3

p=2
p=1

P0
The use of multiple control points results in buckling in the curve. This is directly due to the above condition of the
convex shell.

The next illustration shows the course after the control point P5 has been moved to P4. The NURBS curve is linear in the
vicinity of the buckling. A comparable effect can be achieved by using p-times nodes since this results in a discontinuity as
mentioned above.
P7
P2
P6
P3

P4 P5

NURBS surfaces and solids

The properties of NURBS curves can formally be transferred to surfaces and solids. All principles are still valid in this case.
The numeric processing, however, is significantly more complex due to the two- or three-dimensional parameter range. For
more information on the mathematical principles involved, refer to the relevant technical literature.
P23

P22
P02

P13

P21

P11

P03

P20

P12
P10
P00
P01
0
NURBS surface with associated control polygon

Draw

Input and Editing

A NURBS curve is entered using either its control points or the interpolation points on the NURBS curve. The following
context functions are available to edit NURBS:
Reverse curve direction

Move control point

Change control point weight

Connect curves

Invert surface directions u, v

Insert nodes

NURBS surfaces are created based on NURBS curves. The following context functions are available for this purpose:
Create surface from profile curves

Create surface from 4 edge curves

Create surface of revolution

NURBS solids are created based on NURBS surfaces. The following context functions are available for this purpose:
Create solid of revolution

Create solid from surfaces

Example of a surface created from profile curves

The function NURBS curve is used to draw three NURBS curves. It is
important that the curves are aligned uniformly.

Three NURBS curves

The three NURBS curves are selected in order (1/2/3). Once the NURBS
curves have been selected, the Create surface from profile curves context
function is chosen. The degree of the surface in the 2nd direction is 2 in
this example.

NURBS surface
The Generate FE mesh context function of the NURBS surface is used to
create an FE mesh.

NURBS surface with FE mesh

User Interface
Example of a surface created from four boundary curves
The NURBS curve function is used to draw four
different and connected NURBS curves.
Once the NURBS curves have been selected, the
Create surface from 4 boundary curves context
function is chosen.

Two NURBS curves

NURBS surface
The Generate FE mesh context function of the NURBS
surface is used to generate an FE mesh.

NURBS surface with FE mesh

Example of a rotational solid

The NURBS curve function is used to draw NURBS
curves of the first degree with two control points
each.
Once the NURBS curves have been selected, the
Create surface from profile curves context function is
chosen.
Two NURBS curves

NURBS surface
The Create solid of revolution context function of the
NURBS surface is used to generate a NURBS solid.
The Generate FE mesh context function of the NURBS
solid is used to generate solid elements (VQ83).

NURBS solids

FE solid model

Example of a solid created from surfaces

The NURBS curve function and the Create surface
from profile curves context function are used to
create two 3D NURBS surfaces. It is important that
the NURBS are aligned uniformly.

NURBS curves

NURBS surfaces
Once the NURBS surfaces have been selected, the
Create solid from surfaces context function is chosen.
Finally, the Generate FE mesh context function of the
NURBS solid is used to create solid elements (VQ83).

NURBS solids

FE solid model

Draw

Model
Model objects describe the geometry and the properties of single structural components. They provide the basis for the
program-controlled generation of the finite element mesh by a mesh generator.

Edge
Edges define the border and the axes of structural components. Depending on their properties, they can also define a line
support, a beam series or free beams (e.g. columns) (see Property dialog for Edge and Hole objects). Together with the
model object Wall, edges are used to limit a plane area for the mesh generation.
Input
Start of edge
End of edge
Start
Arc
Circle
Properties

Specify the start of the edge.

Specify the end of the edge.
Specify the start of a new edge.
Specify an arc-shaped edge section.
Specify a circular edge.
Preset the edge properties.

Variants for constructing edges

Input via arc points:
1 edge start point
2 edge endpoint
3 point on arc
4 arc endpoint
5 edge endpoint

Input via center point:

1 edge start point
2 edge endpoint
3 center point
4 direction between start and end
5 direction of arc endpoint
6 edge endpoint

Hole
Hole objects define openings for mesh generation. The hole objects have to be lines or arches and must form a closed
polygon. They are displayed short dashed (line style 2) and can define a line support and a beam series (see Property dialog
for Edge and Hole objects).
Input
Start of hole
End of hole
Close
Start
Arc
Circle

Specify the beginning of the hole object.

Specify the endpoint of the hole object.
Close the polygon.
Specify the beginning of a new hole object.
Specify an arc-shaped hole object.
Specify a circular hole.

With respect to mesh generation, note that holes along the walls should be extended to the wall axes since otherwise
elements between the hole and the wall axis will be generated.

bad

better

User Interface

Property dialog for Edge and Hole objects

Basically the meaning for the mesh generation is defined here.
The following options can be selected:
Standard

Boundaries or fixed lines for generating area elements.

Support

Line support in the area element mesh. The support properties are specified in the dialog fields under Support.
Beam series

Additional beam series in the area element mesh (e.g., for downstand beams). The section is selected using the Section
at the beginning or Section at the end dialog fields. In conjunction with the Polygon, Rectangle and Beam section
types, you can specify different start and end sections. The program will then interpolate a section for each beam
element. This enables the modeling of a haunch. The position of the polygon points are interpolated for polygon
sections. For this to work, the number and arrangement of the polygon points must match one another.
Support+Beam series

Line support and beam series in the area element mesh.

Free beam

Beam elements with the same length are created based on the specified division (for sections, see Beam series). The
coordinate system of the beams is rotated around the beam axis using the selected angle. Using this property at the
edge or inside area element meshes is not effective!
The layers and colors of the beams to be created are determined by the properties defined in the interface (Standard), the
properties of the edge (Convert) or through direct selection.

Wall
Walls define the edge of structural components for mesh generation and a line support as well. The geometry of a
component is determined by the wall axes. Walls are specifically suited for creating slab systems.
Input
Start of wall
End of wall

Specify the start point of the wall.

Specify the endpoint of the wall. The length of wall must measure at least half of the wall width since
short walls may lead to very unfavorable or even improper aspect ratios of the elements during mesh
generation.
Side on that the wall is
Input another point to specify on which side the wall is placed in relation to the defined start and end
points. The following figures show two methods for entering the third point and continuing wall input
with a fourth point.

Start
W=
Axis: On
Properties

Instead of specifying the wall side, you can also select the wall axis.
Specify the start of a new wall.
Specify the wall width.
Enable or disable the wall axes view.
Preset the wall properties. These properties are the support conditions and the wall name.

With respect to mesh generation, note the following:

Problem
Avoid wall protrusions. These will result in
unfavorable aspect ratios during mesh
generation and might yield unwanted
singularities in the results.
Buttressing walls should be avoided since the
supports created by mesh generation will
often result in unwanted restraints.

bad

better

Draw

Column
Columns define a point support and, optionally, a column head condensation in the element mesh.
Input
Column center

Specify a point column without measurements.

Circle

Specify a circular column based on the center point and diameter.

Rectangle

Specify a rectangle column based on the center point, the measurements in the x and y directions
and the angle of rotation.

Corners

Specify a rectangle column based on three corner points.

Properties

Preset the column properties. These properties include the support conditions, a name and the
column head condensation for which the following symbols are used:
Condensation enabled:
Condensation disabled:

The figure below shows the Circular column, Point column and Rectangle column with the corresponding FEM mesh after
automatic mesh generation (representation in shrink mode).

With respect to mesh generation, note the following:

Problem

bad

better

Columns should be placed centrally under the

downstand beams (edges) since otherwise there
would be no direct support for the downstand
beams.
Buttressing walls should be avoided since the wall
and column supports created by mesh generation
often result in unwanted restraints.
For column measurements >> 2/1 the column head
condensation should be disabled or a wall should
be drawn in the place of the column since
otherwise the aspect ratio of the elements will be
unfavorable.

Face
A model face describes a 2D area for later meshing using a mesh generator. Edges, walls and holes form the outer
boundary of the area and must therefore be specified before the model face. All model objects inside the face are included
in the mesh generation.
The sign of a selected model face:

2.
3.

1. Rotational direction of the local z-axis. The direction can be reversed using the context menu.
2. Local x-axis of the element system (red).
3. Local x-axis of the internal force system (green, if different from the element system).
4. Local y-axis of the reinforcement system (blue).

You can assign line hinges to a face using the context menu or additional properties for the FE mesh using a separate
dialog.
The intersection curves for the selected model faces and cones can be calculated using the context menu. The subareas
which result are made visible with indented contours (see example).

User Interface

Edges

Model faces

FE mesh

Input
Select border objects

Selection of edges, walls or hole objects that form the surrounding edge of the model face.
Depending on the selection, the program will search for other limiting objects until the face is
unambiguously described. It cannot be limited exclusively by hole objects. Click selected objects
again to deselect them.
Search for boundary
Search for limiting objects that describe the greatest possible model face.
Properties
Preset the properties.
If the limiting objects of a face are deleted or moved, the model face will be deleted.

Properties Dialog
The dialog contains the following properties:
Section of elements

Layer of elements

Color of elements

Partial View of elements

Name

Factor for mesh width

Consideration of subareas during mesh generation

Rotation of the element, internal force and reinforcement systems []

If Standard is selected, the property defined in the surface will apply; if Take over is selected, the property of the model face
will apply. The significance of subareas is illustrated in the example below.
Example: Connection of a cylinder to a model face
The example shows the significance of the active and inactive subareas of a cylinder and a model face.

Active subarea of
the model face
Inactive subarea of the
cylinder (dashed)

Inactive subarea of the

model face (dashed)

Active subarea of the cylinder

Intersection
curve

Model face and cylinder with intersection curve and subareas.

Draw

Generated element mesh

Cone
The Cone model object describes a truncated cone segment for later meshing. You can use the context menu to determine
the intersection with other selected cones or model faces. A cone can also be assigned various properties for the FE mesh.

A truncated cone is defined using the first and second center points, first and second radiuses and the sector. Alternatively it
is possible to select boundary objects (edges) to define the cone.
Example: Drain of a container
The example shows how a cone and cylinder are meshed while taking their intersection into account.

Proceed as follows:
1. Draw the cone and cylinder.
2. Select both objects and determine the intersection (context menu).
A indented continuous line is inserted to make the resulting subareas visible and selectable.
3. Select and deactivate the interior subareas of the cone and the cylinder (Model Face, Cone from the context menu).
Inactive subareas are shown with dashed lines.
4. Generate the element mesh with the form-sensitive mesh generator.

User Interface
Inactive subarea of the cone

Active
subarea

Intersection curve
Inactive subarea of the cylinder
Cone and cylinder with intersection curve and subareas.

Generated element mesh

Solid
The model object Solid describes a solid body for the subsequent mesh generation with tetrahedron elements VT10.
Properties for the FE mesh can be assigned to the solid. The solid can be created in the following ways:
Extrusion of a polygonal area

Extrusion of two different areas at the beginning and the end of the extrusion axis

Definition of a cuboid by 8 discrete points

Solid with extrusion axis

Section at the start and the end

Tetrahedron elements

Draw
A solid is defined by the following determinants:
Section at the start

Section at the end (optional)

Start and end point of the extrusion axis

Point in the local xz-plane or Enter (only for 3D)

With the option Arc an arc-shaped extrusion axis is approximated by a selected number of sections.

Both section polygons must have the same number of polygon points. Otherwise the start section is extruded. The extrusion
axis runs between the origins of the two polygons.
Solid properties
The dialog contains the following properties:

Section of elements

Layer of elements

Color of elements

Partial view of elements

Label

Criteria for regulation of the element quality during the mesh generation
- Total volume / Element volume: This ratio (V) limits the size of the elements.
- Circumsphere radius / min. Edge length: This ratio (B) describes the quality of the element shapes.
Small values increase the quality of the elements but also increase the number of elements.
Coordinate system of the stresses. This can be modified with the function Element System.
Surface properties
The following properties can be assigned to each surface of a solid figure using the context menu:
Color

Label

Bedding with the bedding moduli defined for the section

Description of contact problems (see Contact)

To select surfaces the 3D view and the hidden or section representation have to be activated. The surface properties are
numbered.
Division of a solid
With the context function Divide a solid can be cut into pieces by a defined plane.

Dimension
This function allows you to carry out semi-automatic 2D and 3D dimensioning of objects.
1; 2; 3: points to be dimensioned
Position of the dimension line:
4:

Horizontal dimension line

Vertical dimension line

Any kind of dimension line

Input
Point

Select individual points that are to be dimensioned.

Section

Define lines whose intersection points with objects are to be dimensioned.

Objects

Select objects whose basepoints (e.g., beginning, end) are to be dimensioned.

Horizontal

Horizontal orientation of the dimension line in 2D mode.

Vertical

Vertical orientation of the dimension line in 2D mode.

Arbitrary

Orientation of the dimension line through definition of a free direction.

Re-input

Reselect the points to be dimensioned.

Position

Modify the position of the dimension line.

User Interface
Font

The font for the dimension line.

Text height

Specify the height of the measurement figures [m].

Unit

Set the output accuracy to [cm] or [mm].

Type

Define whether partial dimensioning, full dimensioning or both (default) is to be generated.

Selected points can be dimensioned consecutively in multiple directions. With respect to walls, the axes or the edges are
dimensioned using the Objects and Section dimensioning options depending on whether the wall axes are visible or hidden.
The saved dimensioning consists of lines and texts and is not associative.

Snap
The Snap menu contains auxiliary functions for coordinate input. The snap modes are used to specify the exact coordinates
of object points with the crosshair. The snap mode can be enabled while the dialog is running and will remain active until it
is disabled or another mode is selected. The selected mode overrides the automatic snap mode.
Node

Enable the snap function for beam and element nodes.

Endpoint

Enable the snap function for the endpoints of lines, arcs, solids, walls and columns.

Mid-point

Enable the snap function for the mid-point of circles, arcs and columns as well as the middle of
lines.
Enable the snap function for the intersection points of lines, circles, arcs and beams.

Intersection
Perpendicular
Objectpoint

Enable the snap function for perpendicular points. With this function you can calculate the
normal from the last point on a line, wall, circle, arc, beam or area element.
Enable the snap function for the nearest point of lines, walls, circles or arcs.

Relative Coordinates

Enable or disable permanent relative coordinate input.

Basepoint

Define the local reference system.

Orthogonal
Snap mode
Settings...

Enable or disable orthogonal mode.

Enable or disable the snap grid.
Adjust the settings for the snap grid, grid points, orthogonal mode and snap radius.

Relative Coordinates
Use this function to switch to the permanent relative coordinate input. You now no longer need to enter the & character in
front of the coordinate values. If this mode is active, the reference system will be displayed at the current basepoint.

Basepoint
This function is used to specify a local reference system for entering relative coordinates with the keyboard.
Input
New base point
Specify a new basepoint.
Old
Retain old basepoint.
Standard
Reset the reference system to standard setting.
Display
Display the current reference system.
New direction of local x-axis
Specify the point for defining the local x axis.
Old
Retain the old local x axis.
Global
Select the direction of the global x axis.
Angle
Specify the angle [] against the global x axis.

Snap

Snap Settings
This dialog allows you to define the snap functions.
Snap mode
The snap grid is used for coordinate input with the crosshair. If the snap grid is enabled, the crosshair will jump to the next
snap point. The snap points are defined by their distance [m].
Grid points
Enable or disable the auxiliary grid. The distance of the grid points [m] must be specified.
Orthogonal mode
Enable or disable orthogonal mode.
Snap radius for objects
A snap window appears in the center of the crosshair when it is used to select objects. The objects will be selected if they
are located inside the snap window or touched by it. The size of the snap window is defined by the snap radius in pixels.

Object selection with crossing window (from right to left)

If dragging a window, all objects within this window are selected. If this option is activated and a window is dragged from
right to left, all objects within the window plus any objects crossing the boundaries of the window are selected.

Format
The Format menu contains the following functions for formatting tables as well as text and analysis logs.
Font ...
Select the font for the current selection.
Bullet Style
Insert bullet points in the selected lines.
Word Wrap
Word wrap is an option that makes the entire text on the screen visible yet does not affect the appearance of the text when
it is printed.
Paragraph...
Open a dialog in which you can control the formatting of selected paragraphs in the following ways:
Text indent from left margin [cm].

Text indent from right margin [cm].

Text indent of first line from left margin [cm].

You may enter a negative value to create a hanging indent.

The selected paragraph can be aligned to the left, center or right. This function is only available if Word wrap is

switched on.
Tabs...
The function opens the dialog for specifying tab stops in a selected paragraph.
To set a tab stop position, enter the position of the new tab stop (e.g., 0.5) in the Tab Stop field and accept by clicking

the Set button [cm].

To remove a tab stop position from the selected paragraph, select the relevant entry from the list and click the Delete

button.
To remove all tab stop positions from the selected paragraph, click the Clear All button.

Small Font
Select a small print font for printing tables.

User Interface

Options
The Options menu contains the following functions:
List

Display information about the objects.

Coordinates

Determine coordinates.

Distance

Determine distance.

Area

Determine area and perimeter.

Angle

Determine angle.

Variable

Define a numeric variable.

Page Frame

Edit page frame.

System File

Import or export the system file Igraph.dat with user specific settings.

Archive...

Archive the selected project files.

Auto Save...

Set the time interval for automatic save.

Drag Selected Objects

Enable transfer operation of selected objects while holding down the left mouse button.

Design Codes

Open the dialog for setting the design codes included in the user interface.

Language

Change the interface language.

List
This function shows the properties of the selected objects.

Distance
The Distance function calculates the distance between two points or the length of a traverse. The result is shown in the
status bar [m].

Area
This function determines the area and perimeter of a 2D traverse. The results are shown in the status bar.

Angle
The angle between two directions can be determined by entering three basepoints. The
result is shown in the status bar.

Variable
Variables are used to save scalars so that they can be used again during later keyboard input. The beginning of the variable
names may not correspond to a function expression.
Variables can be used together with constants in arithmetic expressions.

Options

Page frame
Page frames are used for printing. The following special functions can be accessed from the File menu in the page frame
window:
New
Create a new page frame. The current page frame will close.
Open
Open an existing page frame.
Save
Save the current page frame.
Save As
Save the current page frame with a new name. The name can be saved in the project file for a specific
project or in the Igraph.dat system file for all projects.
Exit
Quit the page frame window. You are prompted whether you want to save the changes in the current
page frame.
All drawing objects can be used to design the page frame. You can also position the following text variables anywhere on
the page:
@Projekt

Project name. *)

@Titel

Description of the figure. *)

@T1...6
@Text1...9

Additional title lines. *)

Explanations of the respective views. If these text variables are not available, the explanations will be
displayed in the lower left corner of the drawing area.

@Texta, b, c
@Objekt
@Ordner
@Ordner1, 2, 3
@Kapitel

Free variables with additional text. *)

Label text of graphical views of the print list.
Current folder name for entries of the print list.
Folder name of the corresponding level for entries of the print list.
Complete folder path for entries of the print list.

@Mass

Plot scale. *)

@Datum

Current date. *)

@Zeit

Time. *)

@Blatt
@Programm
@Datei
@Pfad

Page number. *)
Version name of InfoCAD.
Name of the project file.
Complete path to the project file.

*) When printing, these variables will be replaced by the text specified in the Page Setup dialog in the File menu. Other
special features are shown in the illustration below:

DIN A3

- Origin in the page center

- Units in [mm]
- Layer > 10 are ignored
- Layer = 11 limits the drawing area

@Projekt
@Titel
@Text4
@Text3
@Text2
@Text1

InfoGraph GmbH
Kackertstrae 10
D-52072 Aachen
Tel. (0241) 88 99 80
Fax (0241) 88 99 888

Scale: 1: @Mass
@Programm

InfoGraph
Software fr die Tragwerksplanung
Date:

@Datum

Page: @Blatt
@Datei

When printing, the zero point of the drawing frame is placed in the middle of the page. The longer side of the drawing area
is aligned based on the longer paper edge regardless of whether you are printing in portrait or landscape mode.
The drawing area is bounded by the rectangle specified on layer 11. If no clear boundary is found on layer 11, the lines on
layers 1-10 are used to determine the borders.

User Interface

Archive
This function is used to archive the input data of project files. Analysis results are generally not archived because they can be
restored from the input data at any time.

Auto Save
You can specify a time interval for the auto save feature. Any input data for the current project file that has not yet been
saved will be saved as Backup of .... If a project file has not been specified, the backup file will be saved in the My
Documents\InfoGraph folder. The backup file will be automatically deleted after the project file is properly closed.

Basics

Finite Elements
Basics
The Finite Element Method (FEM) is used in structural design for numerically solving structural problems involving slab, shell,
frame and continuum analysis. It has become an accepted tool whose handling has been greatly simplified as a result of the
powerful graphical user interface. Especially with complex structures, however, correct modeling and the appropriate
interpretation of the results still require an experienced engineer with a good knowledge of statics.

Static system of a building

Analysis Method
The basic principle for solving problems of structural mechanics using the Method of Finite Elements is the division of an
entire structure into discrete elements that are connected to one another in the element nodes.
The unknowns of each node are the global deformations ux, uy, uz, jx, jy and jz, which can be determined by applying
the six equilibrium conditions to the node. This is done by constructing element stiffness matrices in the respective local
system, transformation to the global coordinates and mapping into the global stiffness matrix of the system. After
transformation of the loads to the global coordinates and insertion of the support conditions of the structure, a linear
system of equations (K u = p) is derived that can be used to determine the unknown node deformations with

K
u
p

global stiffness matrix,

deformation vector of the global node deformations,

global load vector.

Finite Elements

Element Library
The FEM module provides an element library. All elements that are used fulfill the Patch-Test, meaning that regardless of the
type of arrangement, they converge to the exact solution of the boundary value problem as the element mesh is refined.
The beams are analyzed according to the general deformation method and deliver exact results according to first-order
theory.
The plain stress elements with 3 or 4 nodes are hybrid element types with rotational degrees of freedom jz. The plain stress
elements with 6 nodes are pure deformation elements with two unknown displacements per node and a quadratic
displacement function. All plain stress elements are fully compatible and are used for calculation of 2D stress states.
The slab elements are either 'discrete Kirchhoff theory' (DKT) elements or 'Mindlin-Reissner' (MR) elements. For the first
element type (DKT) the distortion-displacement relationship is formulated for thick slabs in order to then introduce the
Kirchhoff conditions for thin slabs at discrete points of the element boundaries. This allows the unknowns of the
deformation formulation to be expressed by the corner node deformation for these elements as well. The advantage over a
purely displacement formulation for slab elements becomes evident in the significantly improved convergence behavior.
Elements of the second element type (MR) are shear-flexible slab elements with independent approaches for the rotations/
curvatures and the shear distortion. As a result, the moments as well as the lateral forces are taken into account in the
equilibrium conditions of the system of equations. With adequate small elements the lateral forces are in equilibrium with
the external forces. Whereas the lateral forces of Kirchhoff elements result from the derivation of the moments, they result
directly from the computed shear distortion according to the Reissner plate theory. To get results comparable to the
Kichhoff plate theory for jointed support of the edges, Navier boundary conditions are to be specified for the supported
nodes (see example Slab with Mindlin-Reissner Elements).
The shell elements are a combination of the element stiffness matrices of the plain stress elements and slab elements,
meaning a curved shell area is approximated using facets. This does not mean, however, that there are any relevant
limitations with respect to the results that can be achieved.
The solid element VQ83 is an element with 8 nodes, up to 4 of which can be identical. This allows the modeling of any 3D
geometry. Use of identical nodes results in reduced accuracy.
The solid element VT10 is a tetrahedron element with 4 corner nodes and 6 side middle nodes. Because of the complete
quadratic displacement formulation herewith linear stress curves can be calculated for all stress components.
The cable elements are calculated according to the theory of large displacements and are based on a quadratic
isoparametric approach for geometry and displacement. The geometry is described by two external nodes specified by the
user and an inner node generated by the program. Each node has the global displacement degrees of freedom ux, uy, and uz.
These make it possible to map a linearly variable curve of the cable force in the element. A linear-elastic material behavior is
assumed.

Cable geometry and global node displacements

The following element approach allows for handling larger deformations. This leads to a nonlinear system of equations that
can be solved by means of a Newton-Raphson iteration. Usually, good convergence behavior is exhibited, but this can vary
from case to case. Here, in addition to the original cable geometry the level of prestressing is of critical importance. The final
cable geometry is load dependent and can only be determined by performing the equilibrium iteration. A superposition of
individual load cases is not permissible due to the nonlinear properties as described above.
The spring elements are also analyzed according to the general deformation method. The force-deformation-curves are
defined separately for each degree of freedom by the user. The curves can have nonlinear characteristics (e.g. contact,
slippage, elastic-plastic).

Basics
Geometry

Name

Element type

Degrees of freedom

3D truss element

ux, uy, uz

3D beam element

ux, uy, uz, jx, jy, jz

SEIL

3D cable element

ux, uy, uz

Spring

3D spring element

ux, uy, uz, jx, jy, jz

SD33

Plain stress element

ux, uy, jz

PD33

Slab element

uz, jx, jy

SH36

Shell element

ux, uy, uz, jx, jy, jz

SD62

Plain stress element

ux, uy

SV43

Plain stress element

ux, uy, jz

PV43

Slab element

uz, jx, jy

SH46

Shell element

ux, uy, uz, jx, jy, jz

VQ83

Solid element

ux, uy, uz

VT10

Solid element
(tetrahedron)

ux, uy, uz

Coordinate Systems
An FEM model consists of the following structure objects with their own (local) coordinate systems:
Beams

Cable elements

Area elements

Solid elements

Supports

Spring elements

All coordinate systems are right-handed systems.

Finite Elements
Beams
The following illustration depicts the local coordinate system of a beam.

The local beam coordinates have their origin in the beam's start node (a). The local x axis runs from (a) to (e), the beam's
end node. The local z direction is determined by a direction vector. When in standard orientation, the local y axis runs
parallel to the global xy plane. If this does not establish a clear direction, then it is oriented along the global y axis.
Cable elements
The local coordinate system of a cable element has its origin in the cable element's start node. The local x axis points to the
cable element's end node.
Area elements
Element System

By default, the local x axis points from the first to the second element node. The local y axis is
aligned perpendicular to the local x axis and runs in the direction of the third element node. The
element properties such as orthotropy and bedding correspond to this coordinate system. It can
be rotated about the local z axis. The z axis points to the underside of the element and must
coincide with the global z axis for slabs and plain stress elements.

Internal forces system

It describes the orientation of the internal forces. By default its x axis runs horizontal and if
possible parallel to the global x axis. This coordinate system can also be rotated about the local z
axis.

Reinforcement system

This coordinate system describes the orientation of the area reinforcement and is by default
oriented like the internal force system. The local y axis may be defined to deviate from a 90
angle.

Element system
(default)

Internal force system

(default)

Reinforcement system
(y direction changed)

Solid elements
The directions of the element stresses are determined by an internal force system that can be freely oriented. For the
orientation of the element system VQ83 the same conditions are valid as for the area elements, however, the z axis must
point into the element.

Solid element VQ83 default orientation Variants of solid elements VQ83

of the element system

Basics
The element system of the tetrahedron element VT10 is unchangeable.

Solid element VT10

Supports
The support system is determined by two direction vectors for the local x and y direction. The default orientation
corresponds to the global coordinate system. The user can define a differing orientation.
Spring elements
The local x axis runs from the start node to the end node. If both nodes are at the same location, the x direction have to be
defined. The local z direction is defined by the user.

Foundation Models
The subsoil can be described by the following models:

The Bedding modulus method is based on the assumption that the subsidence (s) is proportional to the soil stress s0,
meaning s0/s = kb = constant (kb = bedding modulus). This means that a vertical load only causes subsidences under
its direct influence area.

The Modulus of compressibility method is based on the assumption that the subsidence hollow and the deformation of
the foundation body coincide. The subsoil is represented using the theory of elastic, layered half space. The analysis
according to the modulus of compressibility method is performed iteratively. Additional convergence criteria are the
global equilibrium and minimization of the residual.

Bedding modulus method

Modulus of compressibility method

Beam bedding
The modeling of elastically bedded beams is carried out with the help of a cubic element approach under consideration of
the bedding terms within the stiffness matrix. Beam loads are transformed into equivalent node forces. Due to this
approach, bending moments can be represented by linear curves and lateral forces by constant curves. An improvement of
the results can thus only be achieved by setting up a finer beam subdivision. The following example demonstrates the
influence of the beam subdivision.

Example: Bedded beam with point load

Bending (excessive)

Moment curves

Finite Elements

Lateral forces

Bedding forces

Foundation without tensile stress

Both of the above methods can be calculated with the exclusion of tensile stresses in the foundation area. If an area or solid
element rises above the ground, all ground stresses will be lost. For beams, loss of tensile stresses can occur in the y or z
directions of the beam system. If the loss occurs in both directions, then jacket friction (x direction) will be ignored.
Nonlinear bedding
As part of a nonlinear system analysis, a bilinear bedding characteristic is used. The tensile and compressive strength of the
bedding are specified separately for the local directions x, y and z.

Second-Order Theory
The second-order Theory program module is an extension of the Finite Element program and makes it possible to solve the
following elastic problems:
Beam buckling.

In this case the beam forces can relate to either the deformed or undeformed beam chord.
Slab and shell buckling.

Calculation of combined structures according to the second-order theory (equilibrium of the deformed system).

The equilibrium iteration is carried out according to the Lagrangian method based on the total tangential stiffness matrix
according to the second-order theory. The iteration method normally converges after a few steps. Stability failures are
displayed by the singularity of the global stiffness matrix.
The

following requirements must be met:

Elements are assumed to be straight.
Section dimensions are small compared with the system dimensions.
The section form of an element remains unchanged during the structure deformation, meaning that section warping is
also not taken into account.
Deformations are small compared with the other dimensions.
The mathematical curvature is linearized.
The material behaves linear-elastically.
The load is slowly increased to its final value and does not undergo any deviation in direction as a result of the system
deformation.

Formulation for beam elements

The stiffness matrix of the 3D beam element is generated through the formulation of the virtual work of the inner forces.
For the deformations in the beam system (u, v, w, j) the following signs apply:

The following applies:

d Ai

d e sx
V

d j' M x dx
L

(Normal stresses) (St. Venant torsion)

with
70

Basics

u' - y v'' - z w'' - y j w'' + z j v'' +

E (u' - y v'' - z w'') (linearized)

G Ix j'

) ]

1 2
v' + w' 2 + y 2 + z 2 j' 2
2

After implementing the above relationships, neglecting higher order effects and carrying out the variation and integration of
the section-dependent values, we arrive at:

d Ai

[d u' EA u'

+ d v'' EI z v'' + d w'' EI y w''

(Linear shares from normal force and bending)

+ d j' G I x j'
(Linear share from St. Venant torsion)

+ d v' N x v' + d w' N x w' + d j' M rr j'

+ d v'' M y j + d w'' M z j
+ d j M y v'' + d j M z w'' ] dx
(Geometric nonlinear shares)
The section integral Mrr (Kindmann) is described as

M rr

= M rr ( N x , M y , M z ) =

sx ( y

+ z 2 ) dA

and can be formally regarded as an internal force.

Because the consideration of Mrr in the element stiffness matrix requires additional section internal forces that can, in
general, only be determined by complex integration, it is neglected at this point.
The mode of action of the other internal forces follows the common conventions of structural analysis. As long as nothing
to the contrary has been defined, the fixed-end forces relate to the undeformed beam chord.
In order to be able to perform the integration, the four independent deformation functions are replaced with interpolation
polynomials of the node deformations. For u(x) and j(x) linear interpolation is performed, for v(x) and w(x) a cubic
approach is chosen.
Nonlinear iteration
The geometric nonlinear terms of the work equation are linearized by introducing the internal forces Nx, My, Mz, Mrr. To
take into consideration the nonlinearities, an iteration of the internal forces is carried out in the program by repeated
formation of the element stiffness matrices. In this case the convergence criterion is the error vector of the iterated
deformations. The load vector remains unchanged during iteration.
The mentioned shape functions ensure exact results for a calculation according to the first-order theory.
When performing a system analysis according to the second-order theory, the interpolation polynomials only yield an
approximation of the deformation curve. For components subjected to high load, a finer discretization, meaning at least one
intermediate node per compression beam, is recommended.
Formulation for area and solid elements
The tangential stiffness matrix generated by formulating the virtual work and variation according to the nodal degrees of
freedom.
The following applies:

K T = dBL T dV + B0 T D B0 dV + ( B0 T D BL + BL T D BL + BL T D B0 ) dV
V

with

corresponding distortion matrix for small displacements

corresponding distortion matrix for large displacements

Finite Elements

elasticity matrix

stress vector

written in a simpler form:

KT =

geometric
matrix

matrix for
small deformations

matrix for
large deformations

When performing an analysis according to the second-order theory, the influence of the large deformations (third-order
theory) are not taken into account.
The matrix Ks is, in contrast to the linear matrix K0, a function of the unknown node displacements as these are indirectly
contained in the stress vector s. Therefore, as mentioned above, an iterative solution is necessary here as well.

Buckling Eigenmodes
Stability problems of the second-order theory are described by the following eigenvalue problem:

K0 F = l Ks F
with

linear stiffness matrix according to the first-order theory

nonlinear geometric stiffness matrix acc. to the second-order theory

buckling load factors (eigenvalues)

buckling eigenmodes

The basis for the calculation are the internal forces of the load case according to the first-order theory. These are used for
the construction of the geometric stiffness matrix Ks. The determined buckling load factors l correspond to the load case.
While K0 is always positively definite, this cannot be assumed for Ks. This means that in general positive as well as negative
eigenvalues l exist. In order to ensure an unambiguous assignment, only the positive eigenvalues with the corresponding
eigenmodes are made available under the number of the load case. This allows for multiple stability load cases to be
examined side by side. If not enough positive eigenvalues exist in the defined eigenvector space, also the smallest negative
eigenvalues are saved.
The analysis of buckling eigenmodes does not replace a check according to the second-order theory with equilibrium of the
deformed system.

Basics

Contact
There are numerous possible applications for the numeric simulation of contact problems. When bodies without a
monolithic connection interact, normally actions occur which are transferred by contact.
Construction examples are head plate connections, supports, anchor plates, connection of prefabricated components,
reservoir dams etc. Also the case that structural components, which initially do not touch each other but come in contact
because of their deformation, has to be taken into account.
The following figure shows schematically two bodies, which come in contact.

slave

tN
tT

tT
tN

master

Master and slave surface with contact stresses

In this process normal stresses and possibly shear stresses (friction) occur. To define the interacting surfaces a distinction
between slave and master surfaces is made. The contact analysis must ensure that points on the slave surface do not
penetrate the master surface. An essential part of the analysis is the detection of the surface parts that come in contact
considering the structural deformations. Except for a few special cases these are not known.
Because of the reasons given above, contact problems are highly nonlinear.
Contact problems can be modeled with the finite element method by point/point, point/face or face/face contacts. In the
following the handling of contact problems between tetrahedron elements is described. Thereby face/face contact elements
are used. For the derivation we reference to the given literature.
To make the modeling for the program user as simple as possible, the contact elements do not need to be entered directly.
For the description of the contact problem only master and slave surfaces, which are arranged in pairs, have to be defined.

slave
master

Model solids with master and slave surfaces

The figure above shows model solids with master and slave surfaces. Because the exact contact surfaces are not known they
can be selected generously. With these information the program automatically determines the matching contact areas and
internally creates corresponding contact elements. It is not necessary that the meshing of the master and slave surfaces are
identical. But it has to be ensured that the nodes of the master and slave surfaces are not connected.
The contact stiffness is also determined internally by analyzing the involved element stiffnesses.
Beside the input data described above additional contact properties are provided:
Factor for contact stiffness
The user can modify the contact stiffness entering an adjustment factor to reach a more precise compliance with the
contact conditions or a better convergence.
An overvalued contact stiffness leads to a bad condition of the system of equations and therewith to convergence
problems.

Finite Elements
Coefficient of friction
A coefficient of friction must be defined to take into account the Coulomb friction. The friction law is described by the
following yield criterion.

f = || tT || + mtN = 0
non associative

t T2

associative

t T1
sticking friction
Yield surface for Coulomb friction
A transmission of shear forces is only possible for negative normal stresses. As long as the resulting shear stress remain
within the cone, sticking friction occurs otherwise sliding friction. Sliding friction cannot occur in case of static loads. The
consideration of sliding friction requires time step integration and should only be used for dynamic problems.
To fulfill the contact conditions a penalty formulation is implemented.
This method does not increase the number of unknown variables compared with the method of the Lagrange multipliers.
The friction law described above requires the consideration of a non-associative yield law. As a consequence the stiffness
matrix becomes asymmetric. Because currently the program always assumes a symmetric stiffness matrix the friction law for
sliding friction can only be approximated.
Influence radius
The following figure shows schematically the influence radius with the corresponding enclosing sphere. With this value the
user can limit the area where the program searches for tetrahedron elements which are in contact with the current element.
Herewith the installation of internal contact elements is limited to the relevant area. This accelerates the convergence and
reduces the time of calculation.

a2j
a1j

a3j

a4j
a5j

slave

master
element j

= influence radius of the enclosing sphere

aij = spatial distance between element i of the slave surface and element j of the master surface with aij < r.
Elements of the slave surface, which distance from the master element j is larger than the influence radius, do not get an
internal contact element (i-j) and so cannot get into contact during the calculation.

Basics
Special cases
The following figure shows the deformation figure of a head plate connection.

slave 2
slave 1

master 1

master 2
slave 3

master 3

Head plate connection

Three different master/slave areas are used to describe this contact problem:
1. Column flange (inside) / screw nut
2. Column flange (outside) / head plate (inside)
3. Head plate (outside) / screw head
Here a separation of contact areas is absolutely necessary because otherwise they would overlap and unwanted interactions
occur. The prestressing of the screws has been taken into account here. The whole connection is only beard by the contact.
The following figure shows two special cases which cannot be modeled by the face/face contact elements used.

Special cases which cannot be modeled

Even if the contact conditions are strictly satisfied the points of the slave surface which are intended for contact penetrates
the master surface. To prevent this, point/face or line/face contact elements must be used.
Like mentioned above contact problems are highly nonlinear. Therefore always complete weighted load
situations have to be used for actions. Consequently the superposition principle is no longer valid, meaning the
results may not be additively superposed with other results.
Because of the nonlinearities the convergence of the iteration cannot be ensured for all cases.
After their implementation the deactivation of contact conditions is no longer possible because of the node
separation of master and slave surfaces. Otherwise the bodies could penetrate each other or instability of the
structure could appear. To create a structure with monolithic connections a new mesh generation is necessary.

Finite Elements

Equation Solver
Parallel Sparse Solver
The parallel sparse solver is a direct equation solver that is optimized for sparsely populated systems of equations and can be
used for all applications relating to statics and dynamics as well as the analysis of stability problems. Thanks to efficient data
organization, the required amount of memory space is much lower compared to the standard equation solver and the
number of necessary computing operations is minimized. The parallel sparse solver can be selected from the statics analysis
settings.
Parallel processing based on the OpenMP standard results in an additional speed increase on multi-processor systems. All
available processor cores are activated by default. You can override this behavior using the OMP_NUM_THREADS
environment variable. For example, the OMP_NUM_THREADS=1 setting causes the equation solver to use a single processor
core only. The environment variables can be defined in the Control Panel. You may need to restart the system for changes
to take effect.
For very large or densely populated systems of equations, the memory requirement may exceed the address space of the 32bit version of the program. In such cases the calculation will abort with the following error message:
Triangulating system of equations
** Errors **
FEM-F147: Sparse Solver: Not enough addressable memory.
Abort of program,

0 Warning(s), 1 Error(s).

This problem can be avoided by using the 64-bit edition.

For relocatable systems, the calculation will abort either with an error message due to singularity of the system of equations
or with a warning that the deformations are too large. Stability failures are generally displayed by a singularity of the system
of equations.

Iterative Equation Solver

The iterative solution of the system of equations is carried out according to the 'preconditioned conjugated gradient
algorithm' (Schwarz, 1984). The fundamental advantage of this method is the compact storage of the coefficient matrix.
Only the non-zero coefficients of the original system of equations are stored. In addition, a shorter solution time can result
for certain structures. The disadvantage of an iterative solution is that for each load case the iteration must be started anew.
The number of required iteration steps depends on the problem. For larger systems of equations the number of steps often
is between 5 and 15% of the number of unknowns. In contrast to solving by triangulation, a singularity of the system of
equations, for instance due to missing support or stability failure according to the second-order theory, cannot be
determined directly.
The iteration method determines the minimum of the quadratic functional

f ( x) =

1 xT
2

A x + bT x

The necessary condition is given by the system of equations

Ax+b=0
which is to be solved. The minimum of f (x) is determined iteratively by using the direction of the gradient f (x) in every
individual step.
The convergence behavior of an iterative solution method is directly dependent on the condition number of the coefficient
matrix A of the system of equations. The smaller the condition number, the fewer iteration steps are necessary for solving.
The algorithm at hand uses a preconditioning per iteration step with the conditioning matrix

H = I + w E
with

I
E

Identity matrix

Parameter

Lower triangle of the scaled coefficient matrix

Given an optimal selection of the parameter w, the condition number of the preconditioned matrix is equal to the square
root of the original condition number. In the program the parameter w has been set to 1.10.

Basics

Substructure Technique
Substructure engineering represents an alternative direct solution approach. For special structure models such as, for
example, a high-rise whose floor slabs are only weakly linked by the rising parts (walls and columns), this method requires
less memory than the standard equation solver.
The basic concept of this method is to subdivide the structure model into a number of substructures that are coupled via
common (global) nodes. Supports and linking nodes are always global nodes. The degree of freedom of all other (local)
nodes of a substructure can, after condensation, be expressed as a function of the global nodal degrees of freedom. The
following illustration depicts a simple structure with a possible substructure division.

Substructure division of a rain storage reservoir, exploded view

As a result of the condensation process, subelement matrices result that only contain global nodal degrees of freedom.
These are then fed into the global stiffness matrix or global mass matrix of the global nodal degrees of freedom. A similar
approach is used for the load vector. After calculating the global nodal degrees of freedom, the local degrees of freedom
can be determined from the subelement matrices.
Condensation process for static problems
In formal terms, the condensation process can be broken down as follows:
1.

Construct a system of equations for a substructure

Ku=b

Separation of local (index l) and global (index g) degrees of freedom

K ll
K
gl
3.

K lg u l bl

=
K gg u g bg

Elimination of the local degrees of freedom of a substructure

K cond . = K gg - K gl K ll-1 K lg
condensed stiffness matrix

bcond . = bg - K gl K ll-1 bl
condensed load vector

Construction and solution of the global stiffness matrix of the global nodal degrees of freedom

Calculation of the local degrees of freedom of the substructures

u l = K ll-1 (bl - K lg u g )
Condensation process for dynamic eigenvalue problems
In formal terms, the condensation process can be broken down as follows:
1.

Formulate an eigenvalue problem for a substructure

Ku=lMu

Separation of local (index l) and global (index g) degrees of freedom

K ll
K
gl

K lg u l
M ll
= l

K gg u g
M gl

M lg u l

M gg u g

Finite Elements
3.

Elimination of the local degrees of freedom

u l = - ( K ll - l M ll ) -1 ( K lg - l M lg ) u g = Tlg u g
As the eigenvalue l is unknown, it is set to zero in the sense of a static condensation. The following condensed
subelement matrices result:

K cond . = K gg - K gl K ll-1 K lg
condensed stiffness matrix

M cond . = M gg + TlgT M lg + M gl Tlg + TlgT M lg Tlg

condensed mass matrix
4.

Construction of the global stiffness and mass matrices of the global degrees of freedom. Solution of the eigenvalue
problem for the global degrees of freedom.

Calculation of the local degrees of freedom of the eigenvectors of the substructures.

As the condensation of the eigenvalue l is set to zero, the condensed eigenvalue problem does not deliver precise
eigenvalues. For modes of vibration whose predominant share is determined by the global degrees of freedom, however,
the derived values are of sufficient accuracy.
The main advantage of the process described is that the global stiffness and mass matrices of all nodal degrees of freedom
are not needed at any time, having the effect that the required memory space and calculation time are in general
considerably reduced. It should be noted, however, that given an unfavorable relationship between global and local nodes
longer calculation times and larger memory space requirements may result. The use of the substructure technique typically
makes sense for large structure models as the process described is significantly more complex and time-consuming than the
conventional approach. In order to gain an overview of the substructure topology beforehand, you can use the calculation
settings to request an information protocol which provides information regarding the size and number of the local and
global nodes of a substructure. The following example is the list given for the above rain reservoir.

System characteristics overall system

Nodes
488
Elements
458
Unknown variables
2928
Bandwidth
144
Stiffness matrix
2.7 MB
Assembly of the substructures
Subglobal
local
EleBandStiffness
structure
nodes
nodes
ments
width
matrix
------------------------------------------------------------1
171
60
200
66
2.5 MB
2
79
30
84
48
622.9 KB
3
79
30
84
48
622.6 KB
4
45
21
50
60
308.1 KB
5
36
19
40
48
221.1 KB

As the values indicate, in this example the use of a substructure system offers no advantages when compared with a
calculation as an entire system. In general the substructures should be chosen so that the required memory space of the
stiffness matrix of a substructure is smaller than the available core memory as the condensation process would otherwise
take very long.

Singular System of Equations

Global stiffness matrices are solved through triangulation in the standard and sparse equation solver and when using
substructure technique. If the system of equations is not explicitly solvable, meaning it is singular, the calculation is aborted
with an error message.
Load case 1
Assembling total stiffness matrix
Installing supports
Triangulating system of equations
Line
1270
** Errors **
FEM-F001:

Set of equations is singular, line 1273, node 138 (Ux).

Abort of program,

(100 %)

0 Warning(s), 1 Error(s).

Basics
The error indicates the nodal degree of freedom at which the singularity was determined. The following causes are possible:
The system is relocatable.

After a failure of the tensile bedding or tensile support, the degrees of freedom are no longer supported.

When calculating according to the second-order theory, the system fails due to beam or shell buckling.

In structures with tension members or cable elements, the system becomes unstable due to the failure of a beam or

cable element.
When performing a nonlinear system analysis, the creation of plastic hinges leads to a system failure.

In most cases the relocatability of the system is due to erroneous input data:
Beam series in slabs or plain stress structures are not supported. Beam elements always have 6 nodal degrees of

freedom, but are supported by slabs or plain stress elements with only 3 degrees of freedom. The extra degrees of
freedom must be supported.
Slabs or plain stress structures erroneously contain individual shell elements. Of the shell elements' 6 degrees of

freedom, in a slab or plain stress element only 3 degrees of freedom are supported.
Shell structures are only supported in the z direction and thus have open degrees of freedom.

A framework has joint chains that make the system kinematic. When troubleshooting it can be helpful to replace all

joints with stiff connections and then reactivate them one by one until the error occurs.
A linear beam series has a ball joint at the beginning and end and can therefore rotate about its longitudinal axis.

Calculations excluding tensile bedding or tensile support are carried out under unrealistic load assumptions, for

instance without dead load, and lead to lift-off of the structure.

A nonlinear system analysis for structures made of reinforced concrete is carried out without sufficient initial

reinforcement.

Capacity Limit under Windows

For the calculation of larger structures, especially shell and solid structures, the amount of data that is dealt with during the
calculation (global stiffness matrix, mass matrix, load vector, etc.) can reach an order of magnitude of several hundred
megabytes (MB) to several gigabytes (GB). If the available memory space is not sufficient, the calculation is terminated with
an error message. This may be due to one the following causes:
The swap file of the operating system is too small. The size of this file is specified in the control panel.

The maximum capacity of the 32-bit version of the program of 2 GB was reached. This limit is a result of the 32-bit

address space, which is independent of the amount of RAM or hard drive space of the computer.
If the calculation is aborted, you should check the messages listed in the output bar. They can be copied or printed out
using the context menu. The messages for a very large shell structure (high-rise) are given below:
System characteristics
Nodes
Elements
Supports
Unknown variables
Bandwidth
Stiffness matrix
Mass matrix

86359
80968
44
517980
2106
5567.4 MB
104.5 MB

** Errors **
Out of memory.
Abort of program,

0 Warning(s), 1 Error(s).

The above system of equations with 517,980 unknowns has, despite bandwidth optimization and shell-oriented memory
technology, a memory requirement of 5.5 GB, exceeding the capacity of the operating system. The following options are
available to solve the problem:
Use of the parallel sparse solver,

Use of the iterative equation solver,

Use of the 64-bit edition,

Use of the substructure technique,

Reduction of the number of nodes by simplifying the system (e.g., by taking advantage of symmetries).

Using the iterative equation solver usually results in the smallest memory requirement. It should be noted that in contrast to
the direct equation solvers, a singularity of the system of equations, for instance due to missing support or stability failure
according to the second-order theory, cannot be determined directly. This fact is usually only recognized once after a large
number of iterations - around 15% of the number of unknowns - still no convergence is in sight.

Finite Elements

Program Capacities
Nodes
Elements
Load cases
Load case combinations
Tendon groups
Dynamic eigenmodes

999999
999999
9999
999
999
999

Restrictions for the study version

Nodes
1000
Elements (FEM)
1000
Beams (ESW, RSW)
10
Area sections
1
Beam sections
1
Tendon groups
1
Dynamic eigenmodes
1

Analysis Results
The

sections below describe the following results:

Deformations
Internal forces for beams , spring elements and area elements
Stresses and strains for beams and area elements
Stresses for solid elements
Bedding forces for beams
Soil pressure
Support reactions
Velocities and accelerations from time step integration
Stationary response
Eigenmodes and eigenvalues
Buckling eigenmodes
Influence lines and influence surfaces

Deformations
The node deformations refer to the global coordinate system and are designated as follows:
ux, uy, uz
Node displacements [m] in the direction of the global axes.

jx, jy, jz

Node rotations [rad] around the global axes.

For supported nodes additionally the deformations in the coordinate system of the supports are displayed. For beams the
bending curve is also calculated.
Internal forces for beams
The bending moments My and Mz as well as the normal force Nx refer to the section's centroid. The torsional moment Mx
and the lateral forces Qy and Qz relate to the shear center. The program assumes that the shear center and centroid
coincide. For asymmetrical sections the effect of the eccentricity of the shear center on the fixed-end reactions is therefore
not accounted for. The internal beam forces are calculated at the beginning and end of the beam as well as at equidistant
points along the beam. The number of result locations can be set. Moments are given in [kNm] and forces in [kN].
For the calculation of the internal forces according to the second-order theory, the beam forces can correspond to either the
deformed or undeformed beam chord.

Basics

Beam system with positive internal forces

Internal forces for spring elements
Depending on the spring characteristics the forces and moments arise from the following local relations:

Fx= F(Dux= ux,2 - ux,1)

Fy= F(Duy= uy,2 - uy,1)
Fz= F(Duz= uz,2 - uz,1)
Mx= F(Dfx= fx,2 - fx,1)
My= F(Dfy= fy,2 - fy,1)
Deformations and internal forces in the local
coordinate system of the spring elements

Mz= F(Dfz= fz,2 - fz,1)

Internal forces for area elements

Depending on the selection, the internal forces are calculated in the Nodes, in the Centroid or in the Side middle.
The following internal forces are determined:

nx, ny

Normal forces [kN/m].

nxy

Shear force [kN/m].

mx, my

Bending moments [kNm/m].

mxy

Torsional moment [kNm/m].

m1 , m2

Principal moments [kNm/m].

n1, n2

Principal normal forces [kN/m].

qx, qy

Lateral forces [kN/m].

qr = q x2 + q y2

Resultant lateral force [kN/m].

q xr = q x +

q yr = q y +

mxy
y

mxy
x

Edge lateral force [kN/m].

Internal force system with positive internal forces

Finite Elements
Stresses and strains for beams
The following calculation results are determined at the result locations of the internal forces.

sx, sx.top, sx.bottom

Normal stresses [MN/m].

txy, txz

Shear stresses from lateral forces and torsion [MN/m].

s v = s 2x + 3 t 2xy + 3 t 2xz Comparison stress according to the Huber-von Mises yield criterion [MN/m].

Longitudinal strain of the beam axis [].

ex.top , ex.bottom

Edge strain [].

Curvature about the y axis [1/km].

The shear and comparison stresses are determined as part of the stress checks or a nonlinear system analysis. The strain and
the curvature are calculated as part of a nonlinear system analysis.
The edge strain and normal stresses sx.top and sx.bottom relate to the section points that lie on the upper and lower edge,
respectively, of the enclosing rectangle. The other stresses are extreme values on the section edge.

Sections with enclosing rectangles

Stresses and strains for area elements
The stresses [MN/m] and strains [] are defined in the internal force system. They are determined at the result locations of
the internal forces on the upper and lower section edges.

s x . top,bottom =

nx
m
m x
d
d 6

s y . top,bottom =
s xy . top,bottom =

ny
d
nxy
d

my
d 6

mxy
d 6

Normal stresses.

Shear stresses.

s1.top,bottom

Maximum principal stresses.

s2.top,bottom

Minimum principal stresses.

s v = s 2x + s 2y - s x s y + 3 s 2xy Comparison stress according to the Huber-von Mises yield criterion.

e1.top,bottom

Maximum principal strains.

e2.top,bottom

Minimum principal strains.

jtop,bottom

Principal axis angle of the strains [rad].

Stresses for solid elements

The stresses [MN/m] can be calculated either in the nodes or at the centroid. The directions of the stresses are determined
by the internal force system.

sx, sy, sz

Normal stresses.

sxy, syz, szx

Shear stresses.

Maximum principal stress.

Intermediate principal stress.

Minimum principal stress.

s v = s 2x + s 2y + s 2z - (s x s y + s x s z + s y s z ) + 3 (s 2xy + s 2xz + s 2y z)
Comparison stress according to the Huber-von Mises yield criterion.

Basics

Internal force system with positive stresses

Normal forces and stresses for cable elements
The normal forces and stresses relate to the axes of the deformed cable elements and are calculated in the nodes and in the
center of the cable.
Nx
Normal force [kN/m].

Normal stress [MN/m].

Bedding forces for beams

The bedding forces Bx, By and Bz [kN/m] are defined in the beam system and represent the soil pressures corresponding to
the beam width (for instance, Bz = szdy). Tensile forces in the soil have a positive sign. For bedded beams, the reactions
are only calculated in the nodes, and the reaction curve is interpolated linearly between them.
Soil pressures
The soil pressures sx, sy and sz [kN/m] are defined in the element system except for solid elements VT10. The z axis of the
solid element VT10 is perpendicular to the bedded surface and the x axis runs horizontal in the bedded surface and if
possible parallel to the global x axis. Tensile stresses in the soil have a positive sign. Additionally, the soil reactions are
integrated for each element and saved in the following values:
Rx, Ry, Rz
Resultant soil reaction [kN].

dx, dy, dz

Coordinates of the resultant soil reaction [m].

Support reactions
The support reactions are calculated in the coordinate system of the supports. They act on the corresponding support.
The following reactions are provided:
Rx, Ry, Rz
Support forces [kN].

Mx, My, Mz

Support moments [kNm].

Support system with positive support reactions.

Velocities and accelerations
The node velocities and accelerations are calculated for dynamic time step integrations. They refer to the global coordinate
system and are designated as follows:
vx, vy, vz
Node velocities [m/s] in the direction of the global axes.

ax, ay, az

Node accelerations [m/s] in the direction of the global axes.

Finite Elements
Stationary response
A stationary response can be determined as part of a dynamic analysis. The results refer to the global coordinate system and
are designated as follows:
U
Absolute node deflection.
U.real
Real part of the node deflection.
U.imaginary
Imaginary part of the node deflection.
Phase
Phase shift.
DU
Absolute node velocity (first derivative).
DDU
Absolute node acceleration (second derivative).
Eigenmodes and eigenvalues
Dynamic eigenmodes and their corresponding eigenvalues can be determined as part of a dynamic system analysis. The
eigenmodes are standardized.
ux, uy, uz
Node displacements in the direction of the global axes.

jx, jy, jz

Node rotations around the global axes.

Eigen angular frequency [rad/s].

Buckling eigenmodes
Buckling eigenmodes and their corresponding load factors are determined as part of an analysis of load cases with load type
Pki. The buckling eigenmodes are standardized.
ux, uy, uz
Node displacements in the direction of the global axes.

jx, jy, jz

Node rotations around the global axes.

In the listing Finite elements:

Load factors
Buckling load factors of the buckling eigenmodes.
sk.y, sk.z
Buckling lengths [m] of the beams of the first buckling eigenmode.
Pki
Buckling load [m] of the beams of the first buckling eigenmode.
EIy, EIz
Stiffness of the beams [kNm].
Influence lines and influence surfaces
Influence lines or influences surfaces are determined as part of a static analysis of load cases with load type Efl or Eff. The
ordinates of the resulting influence surface are expressed as deformation in the direction of the load to be analyzed.
ux, uy, uz
Ordinate value [m] in the direction of the global axes.

jx, jy, jz

Ordinate value [rad] around the global axes.

Structure Description

Structure Description
The structure is edited using the functions of the following Structure menu and supplementary tabular entries.
Mesh Generation
Beam series
Element Input
Element Properties...
Element Info
View...
Mesh Check
Element System
Number Sort
Supports
Load
Predeformation
Moving Nodes
Condense
Link Elements
Spring Elements
Line Hinges
Prestressing
Point Masses
Design Objects
Print Input Data...
Results...
Reinforcement Export
Punching Shear Check
The general procedure for data input, analysis and data representation of a structure is described in the document
Introductory_Examples.pdf installed in the program directory.

Finite Elements

Mesh Generation
The Mesh Generation menu item is used to create a finite element mesh. The available methods can generally be divided
into two groups:
Mesh generators using model or NURBS objects
These methods allow you to mesh a two- or three-dimensional structure constructed from model objects (Edge, Wall, Hole,
Column, Face, Cone, Solid) or NURBS objects.
Form-Sensitive from Model
Mesh generation of area structures affine to the constraints with consideration of all visible model objects.
Grid-Shaped from Model
Mesh generation of area structures through an orthogonal grid with consideration of all visible model objects.
Beams from Selected Edges
This option generates beams from edges with the meaning Free beam.
Selected Model Faces and Cones
Mesh generation of the selected model faces and cones analogous to the form-sensitive mesh generation with
consideration of all visible model objects within the model faces.
Selected NURBS Objects
Mesh generation of the selected NURBS objects.
Tetrahedrons from Solid
Element generation of structures described by the model object Solid. In this process tetrahedron elements VT10 are
created.

Mesh generators with direct description of the generation area

When using these mesh generators, the generation area is interactively specified in a dialog. The element properties and the
support conditions are assigned manually.
Polygonal Area
Mesh generation of a polygonal bordered area with the Form-Sensitive method.
Circular or Conic Shape
Creates a circular, cylindrical or cone-shaped element mesh.
Parabolic Bordered Square
Creates an element mesh specified through four corner points and four side points.
Triangular Area
Mesh generation of a triangular area where all edges can be freely divided.
Square - Grid on Four Edges
Mesh generation of a square area where all edges can be freely divided.
Square - Variable Grid on Two Edges
Mesh generation of a square area with freely assignable grid spacing in both principal directions.
Square or Cuboid
Mesh generation of a square area or octagonal body with an identical number of elements on the opposite edges.

Structure Description

Form-Sensitive or Grid-Shaped from Model

The Form-Sensitive and Grid-Shaped generators automatically mesh a structure defined by model objects (Edge, Wall, Hole,
Column, Face, Cone). In this process, either an orthogonal grid or a mesh affine to the constraints is created. Optionally,
beam, element, and support properties are adopted from the model objects. Before a new mesh generation all elements
within the area, which is to be meshed, and on the outer edges are deleted together with the corresponding nodal, beam
and element loads. The program distinguishes between the following cases during mesh generation:
1. Model faces or cones are present.
In this case only these are meshed. However, all visible model objects inside the areas are accounted for.

3D mesh generation of a structure defined with 4 model faces.

2. No model faces or cones are present.
A. The model objects are in the xy plane and are displayed in 2D mode. The boundary of the area to be meshed is
automatically recognized. All visible model objects inside the located area are accounted for during mesh generation.

Form-sensitive and grid-shaped 2D mesh generation

B. The model objects are not in the xy plane or are not displayed in 2D mode. A mesh generation plane has to be
defined by selecting model objects. The model objects contained in the mesh generation area must also be selected
here. This process must be performed separately for each plane for which a mesh is to be generated.
Input
Mesh width
Type
Column head
Direction
Form

Grid spacing or average node distance for mesh generation.

Selection of the element type (Slab, Plain stress or Shell).
Enable/disable FEM meshing of the column geometry.
Set the zero point and direction of the grid in case 2. This allows you to center the mesh on a fixed point
and align it along a fixed line.
Choose the preferred element form (triangle or square) for the grid.

Polygonal Area
Automatic mesh generation of an area that is delineated by the constraints listed below. The meshing corresponds to the
result of the Form-sensitive mesh generation. No model objects are necessary for this mesh generation.
Input
Boundary
Hole
Fixed line
Fixed point

The outer edge of the area to be meshed must always be specified.

Holes in the mesh generation area.
Lines within the described area that are considered as boundary conditions during mesh generation.
Points within the described area that are to be considered during mesh generation.

Finite Elements

Circular or Conic Shape

Generates a circular, cylindrical or cone-shaped mesh.
Input
2D

Generation of an annulus with the following determinants: midpoint, arc beginning, opening
angle, start radius (inside), end radius (outside), number of elements in radial and perimeter
direction.

Generation of a truncated cone using the following determinants: first and second center point,
first and second radius, sector, number of elements in the meridian and perimeter direction. The
cylinder or cone shapes can be realized using corresponding determinants.

Variable/constant

The element arrangement in the perimeter direction is variable (flexible) or constant (fixed).

Circular, 2D (variable)

Circular, 3D (constant)

Parabolic Bordered Square

Mesh generation of a parabolic bordered area by specifying four corner points as well as one side point each. The side
points define the parabolic fillet of the edges. Opposite edges are assigned the same number of nodes. Condensation
factors with values from -1 to +1 allow a concentration of the element mesh towards the start point (< 0) or the end point
(> 0) of the corresponding edge. Area or cable elements can be selected for mesh generation.

Points in parentheses where suggested on the side middles and accepted.

Triangular Area
Mesh generation of a triangular area with a variable number of elements on all three edges. The element mesh is focused
towards the first corner. Thus, for an acute-angled triangle, best results are achieved by first specifying the point at the
blunt corner.

Structure Description

Square - Grid on Four Edges

Mesh generation of a square area with variable numbers of elements on all four edges.

Square - Variable Grid on Two Edges

Mesh generation of a square area with preset grid spacing in both principal directions. Opposite edges have the same
number of nodes.

Square or Cuboid
For area and cable elements a square area is meshed which features an identical number of elements on the opposite
edges. An octagonal body is meshed for solid elements (VQ83).

Tetrahedron from Solid

The generator automatically meshes structures described by the model object Solid using the Delaunay triangulation
method. Thereby all visible edges within the solid are taken into account. The mesh generator creates an element mesh of
tetrahedron elements VT10. The properties (Section, Layer and Color of elements) of the solids are adopted. To regulate the
mesh generation the following criteria can be adjusted:
Total volume / Element volume: This ratio (V) limits the size of the elements.

Circumsphere radius / min. Edge length: This ratio (B) describes the quality of the element shapes.

Small values increase the quality of the elements but also increase the number of elements.
For these criteria also the settings of the solid model objects can be used.

Element mesh: V = 1000; B = 3

V = 1; B = 1.5

V = 1; B = 3
89

Finite Elements

Beam Series
This function is used to automatically create beam elements that connect to the existing mesh nodes (modeling of
downstand beams, for example).
Input
Start
Endpoint
Properties

Specify the start point of the beam series.

Specify the end point of the beam series.
The element properties dialog is called up with this option.

Element Input
Individual finite elements can be defined with this menu item. The element types are described in detail in the Element
library section (Basics chapter).
Elements
RS
RF
SEIL
PV43
PD33
SV43
SD33
SD62
SH46
SH36
VQ83
VT10
Input
Starting point
Generate

3D beam element
3D truss element
3D cable element
Square slab element
Triangular slab element
Square plain stress element
Triangular plain stress element
Triangular plain stress element with side middle nodes
Square shell element
Triangular shell element
Solid element with eight corner nodes
Tetrahedron element with side middle nodes

Input a beam from starting to end point.

The entered line is split into n beams of the same length. In conjunction with the polygon, square and
beam section types, you can specify different start and end sections. The program then interpolates the
selected number of sections. This enables the modeling of a haunch. The position of the polygon points
are interpolated for polygon sections. For this to work, the number and arrangement of the polygon
points must match one another.

Interpolated sections
Beam series
Edge points
Properties

Automatic creation of beams that connect to existing net nodes, for example, for modeling downstand
beams.
Specify the individual node coordinates of the elements.
The element properties dialog is called up with this option.

When entering beams in 3D mode, a point in the local xz plane is queried. For 2D input, the program uses the default
orientation.
Slab and plain stress elements must be entered in a clockwise manner and parallel to the xy plane. The form of the area
elements can be varied up to an aspect ratio of 1/10 and an internal angle of 180.

Structure Description

Element Properties
This dialog is used to edit the properties of the selected elements or preset the properties for new elements yet to be
created. The dialog consists of the following pages:
General

Equivalent beam length

Section

General
This dialog shows the general element properties.
Element type
The selected elements' type is shown. Beam elements can be changed into truss elements or slabs into shell elements, for
example. When changing areas in solid elements (VQ83), new nodes are created at an interval corresponding to the
element thickness dz. Solid elements cannot be changed into other types of elements.
Length, Angle
Display of beam or cable length [m], input value for the rotation of the beam section around the beam axis [].
Area
Display the element area [m].
Solid
Display the element volume [m].
Angle for elements, internal forces and reinforcement
Angle of the local coordinate systems in [].
Cable prestress
Input value of the cable prestress [kN].
Nodes
Display the node coordinates.

Joints
The joint properties of beam elements can be specified separately for each degree of freedom. When selected, the
corresponding degree of freedom is defined as jointed. The arrow indicates the selected end of the beam.
Joint springs
Spring rigidity [MN/m, MNm] with which the respective beam end (a = start, b = end) is elastically attached to the node. If
no value is defined, the respective joint property applies.

Equivalent Beam Length

For the buckling check with the equivalent beam method, the equivalent beam length can be defined for beams made of
timber according to EN 338 and EN 14080.
y-axis, z-axis
The specification of an appropriate equivalent beam length under consideration of support and load conditions is subject to
the discretion and the responsibility of the user. If the value 0 is entered no check is carried out for the corresponding
direction.
Note
If a structural member with constant cross-section is divided into multiple beam elements, the buckling length decisive for
the whole structural member shall be applied to all elements. A computational determination of buckling lengths and
buckling eigenmodes by the FEM program is possible for selected load combinations (see description of Load group).
91

Finite Elements

Section
The section describes the following properties of an element:
Section form

Specifications for determination of shear stresses

Material

Bedding

Specifications for reinforced concrete design

Specifications for thermal analysis

Fire exposure for the simplified check according to EN 1995-1-2

Each section is uniquely identified by a number between 1 and 9999. In general a section is not assigned to a single element
but rather a group of elements.

Number
Select the section. You can assign the number freely for a newly generated section. Sections can subsequently be
renumbered using the context menu for the subitem Structure Description / Section properties of the data base.
Section Type
Area

Beam

Polygon

Steel section with profile number.

IPE: Medium I girders according to DIN 1025 Part 5 and Euronorm 19-57.
HEA: Wide I girders, light variant according to Euronorm 53-62 or girders of the IPBI series according to DIN 1025
Part 3.
HEB: Wide I girders according to Euronorm 53-62 or girders of the IPB series according to DIN 1025 Part 2.
HEM: Wide I girders, reinforced variant according to Euronorm 53-62 or girders of the IPBv series according to
DIN 1025 Part 4.
I: Narrow I girders according to DIN 1025 Part 1.
U: U steel according to DIN 1026.

T: T steel according to DIN 1024.

Parameter: Parameterized steel profile with I-, L-, T-, U- or box-shaped cross-section geometry.
Library: Section library with steel sections.
Database: Profile from the user database (Anwend.pro).
Rectangle
Tension member
Composit
Solid

Structure Description
Material Type
B25 to B55: Concrete qualities according to DIN 1045:1988, Table 1.

C12/15 to C100/115: Concrete qualities according to ENV 1992-1-1 or DIN 1045-1

(C55/67 or higher only for design according to DIN 1045-1).

LC12/13 to LC60/66: Concrete qualities according to DIN 1045-1.

C12/15-EN to C90/105-EN: Concrete qualities according to EN 1992-1-1.

C12/15-EN-D to C100/115-EN-D: Concrete qualities according to DIN EN 1992-1-1.

C16/20 to C50/60: Concrete qualities according to OENORM B 4710-1.

NB40: Concrete quality according to OENORM B 4200-10.

NBeton: Concrete according to OENORM with user-defined properties.

SC12/15 to SC50/60: Concrete qualities according to SIA262 or SN EN206-1.

SLC12/13 to SLC50/55: Concrete qualities according to SIA262 or SN EN206-1.

SCX: Concrete according to SIA262 or SN EN206-1 with user-defined properties.

S235, S275, S355, S450: Construction steel according to DIN 18800 T1, Table 1.

S235-EN, S275-EN, S355-EN, S450-EN: Construction steel according to EN 10025-2.

NH1, NH2, NH3: Softwood grade I, II and III according to DIN 1052:1988.

BSH1 , BSH2: Glued laminated lumber grade I and II according to DIN 1052:1988.

C14 to C50, D18 to D70: Solid timber according to EN 338.

GL20h to GL32h, GL20c to GL32c: Glued laminated timber according to EN 14080.

Frei: User-defined material.

Beton: User-defined concrete.

Stahl: User-defined steel.

New
Create a new section.
Copy
Copy the current section.
Delete
Delete the current section.
Label
The section can be labeled with any text.

Depending on the section and material type, further dialogs are available:
Form

Shear stresses

Material

Bedding

Reinforcing steel

DIN 1045-1

DIN EN 1992-1-1

EN 1992-1-1

OENORM B 4700

OENORM EN 1992-1-1

SIA 262

SS EN 1992-1-1

DIN TR 102

EN 1992-2

DIN EN 1992-2

OENORM EN 1992-2

EN 1995-1-2

Thermal analysis

Finite Elements

Area Section
Height dz
Section height of the area elements [m].
Orthotropy dzy/dz
The orthotropy factor is used to reduce the element thickness for the calculation of the stiffness in the local y direction of
the element.
Torsion-free
If selected, the torsion stiffness of the element stiffness matrix is set to zero. In this case, the mixed-term members are
ignored in the differential equation of the slab proportion:

2 mxy
xy

The torsion moments mxy, however, only reach zero if the internal force system and the element system relevant to the
stiffness are identical.
Slab rigidity factor
The normal slab rigidity is multiplied by this value (applies for slab and shell elements).

Polygon Section
A
Display of the calculated section area [m].
Ix
Torsion moment of inertia [m4].
As regards the application in solid construction, a very small stiffness is suggested by the program. For dynamic calculations,
if the torsion stiffness is defined as too small, this will generally lead to unwanted eigenmodes (torsion vibrations), so a
realistic value should be used.
Compute Ix
Calculate the torsion moment of inertia of the polygon. The result is entered into the text field for Ix.
Iy, Iz, Iyz
Display the calculated moments of inertia [m4].
Ignore Iyz in beam stiffness
Ignore lyz in the beam stiffness.
Reduce dead load
Use this option to subtract the slabs' share from the dead load. The effective width is determined from the extremal
dimensions at the top and bottom side in the horizontal direction (y axis). The slab thickness results from the smaller height
when comparing the left and right edge of the polygon. This option is only allowed for section polygons in the form of a
slab or edge beam with horizontal top or bottom sides.
Slab thickness

Edit...
The graphical editing of the section geometry is carried out in a separate window. The section is defined with edge and hole
bordering lines.

Structure Description

Internal storage takes place using a polygon that is calculated based on the by-pass method. The number of polygon points
is limited to 200.
The edge and hole bordering points are automatically numbered such that the leftmost point is assigned number 1. If there
are several eligible points, the one with the smallest z value is chosen.
After the polygon points have been entered in the database, the order of the points that has been determined there is also
valid for the graphical representation for as long as the polygon remains unmodified.
Reinforcem...
Properties of each reinforcing steel layer of the selected sections.

File Menu of the Editing Window

New
Start a new section polygon.
Insert
Insert a section polygon, steel structure or database profile in the current polygon.
Store in database...
Save the current section polygon in the user database Anwend.pro.
Import
Import a drawing of a project file or a DXF file.
Export
Export the section polygon as a DXF file.

Polygon Menu of the Editing Window

Finite Elements
Refresh
Refresh the polygon's displayed label.
Settings
Set the type and scope of label, as well as edge distance for the input of the reinforcing steel.
Take over
edge /
hole
Adopt the edge and/or hole bordering lines from other lines, for example, after the DXF import of a section drawing.
Section properties
Show detailed section properties (e.g. shear center, resistance momenta, unit warping w).
Effective width
Definition of the effective flange width by selection of the areas outside of the effective width. For this purpose the section
is automatically divided into triangles. The selected areas are not taken into account for the calculation of the centroid
coordinates and the bending moments of inertia.
For reinforced concrete sections the following procedure is recommended:
Input of the full polygon with polygon points at the boundaries of the effective width

Selection of the areas outside of the effective width

Positioning of the concrete steel layers within the effective width

Hatched representation of the section parts outside of the effective width

Alternatively the section polygon can be defined reducing the section dimensions based on the effective width. In the bridge
checks according to DIN TR 102 and EN 1992-2 the effective area of the full section can optionally be defined for the
longitudinal force. For the check of the principal stresses or shear stresses on box girders the first method is to be preferred,
because in this case the shear flow is not discontinuous.

Section polygons reduced to the effective width

Reinforcement Properties
Yield strength fyk
Yield strength of the reinforcing steel [MN/m].
Base reinforcement
The base reinforcement is the initial reinforcement for the design. It will never be reduced by the program. By entering
different base reinforcements, a relationship can be established among the steel sections to be calculated.
Fix base reinforcement
A fixed steel layer are not increased during the design.

Structure Description
Zv0
This force is used to take into account an initial strain e0 = Zv0 /EA for calculation of the reinforcing steel stresses.

Rectangle Section
For this section type no reinforced concrete check can be carried out.
Width dy, Height dz
Expansion of the rectangle in the local y or z direction of the beams [m].

Beam Section
No checks can be performed for this section type.
A
Section area [m].
Ix, Iy, Iz, Iyz
Moments of inertia [m4].
Longitudinal bearing
Standard: The beams transmit compressive and tensile forces.

Only pressure: The beams only transmit compressive forces.

Only tension: The beams only transmit tensile forces.

The use of compressive or tensile beams leads to a nonlinear calculation. In this case the principle of superposition no longer
applies.

Tension Member
This section type describes elements without compressive strength and should only be assigned to truss or cable elements.
The use of this section type leads to a nonlinear calculation. In this case the superposition principle is no longer valid. No
checks can be performed for tension members.
A
Section area [m].

Composit Section
This section type can only be used for design objects and single designs.
The section properties of the composite section are calculated with the following formulas:

Av = 1/Emin EiAi
zs,v = 1/(AvEmin) Eizs,iAi

Composite section area

ys,v = 1/(AvEmin) Eiys,iAi

Iy,v = 1/Emin. Ei[Iy,i + (zs,v-zs,i)Ai]

Y ordinate of the centroid

Iz,v = 1/Emin. Ei[Iz,i + (ys,v-ys,i)Ai]

Iyz,v = 1/Emin Ei[Iyz,i + (ys,v-ys,i)(zs,v-zs,i)Ai]

Second-degree area moment around z

Z ordinate of the centroid

Second-degree area moment around y

Deviation moment of inertia

Finite Elements

Shear Stresses
By default the linear-elastic shear stresses are calculated according to the theory of thick-walled profiles.
As a result, in the fillet area of rolled sections or in blunt corners of welded profiles larger stresses occur than those
according to the theory of thin-walled profiles.
Specifying the maximum sheet thickness (open profiles) or the torsion resistance moment (box profiles) allows you to limit
the torsion shear stresses to the maximum value according to the theory of thin-walled profiles.
An average across the section width can be selected for shear stresses from lateral force.

Intersections and shear stress distribution from lateral force at the section polygon according to the theory of thick-walled
profiles (t) and after averaging (tm)

Material
E-Modulus
Modulus of elasticity [MN/m].
G-Modulus
Shear modulus for beams [MN/m].
Poisson's ratio
Poisson's ratio for area and solid elements.
Gamma
Specific weight of the material [kN/m]. This is used for the Dead load load type as well as for determination of the mass
matrix during dynamic structure analysis.
alpha.t
Coefficient of thermal expansion [1/K].
fyk
For the material type Stahl the characteristic yield strength must be entered as well [MN/mm].
Apparent density
Apparent density of lightweight concrete and timber [kg/m].
ke for E-Mod.
Factor for calculation of the modulus of elasticity according to SIA 262, Section 3.1.2.3.3.
Service Class
A service class has to be selected for the timber checks of cross-sections made of timber according to EN 388 and
EN 14080.

Structure Description

For the material type NBeton the concrete properties are defined additionally according to OENORM B 4700, Table 4.
fcwk
Characteristic cube compressive strength, nominal strength of the strength class [MN/m].
fctm
Average concrete tensile strength [MN/m].
fctk
Characteristic concrete tensile strength [MN/m].
taud
Calculation value of shear stress [MN/m].

For the material type SCX the concrete properties are defined additionally according to SIA 262, Table 3.
fck
Characteristic cylinder compressive strength [MN/m].
fck,cube
Characteristic cube compressive strength [MN/m].
fctm
Average concrete tensile strength [MN/m].

For the material type Frei the corresponding strength limits must additionally be specified for a nonlinear system analysis.
Compression
Yield strength for compressive stresses fy,compression (positive value) [MN/m].
Tension strength
Yield strength for tensile stresses fy,tension (positive value) [MN/m].
Yield criterion
For solid and area sections of the material type Frei, the Raghava or the Rankine yield criterion can be chosen.
In general, a nonlinear analysis can only be performed for area, solid, polygon, database and steel sections. For all other
section types and for the material types Beton and Timber an elastic material behavior is assumed.

Note
The modulus of elasticity is part of the stress-strain function according to EN 1992-1-1, Equation (3.14), and SIA 262,
Equation (28). The function has a pole that can move into the decisive strain range, if the given modulus of elasticity is
reduced. As a consequence, results of the nonlinear analysis and the reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete checks
can be affected.

Creep Coefficients
The time-dependent material characteristics for the creep and shrinkage behavior enter into the calculation of the Creep and
shrinkage (Ks) load case. The resulting concrete strains are calculated with the displayed modulus of elasticity.
Creep coefficient phi (t,t0)
Creep coefficient j(t,t0)

Finite Elements
Relaxation coefficient rho
Relaxation coefficient according to Trost (usually rho=0.80).
Shrinkage coefficient epsilon cs(t,ts)*1.e5.
The shrinkage coefficient ecs(t,t0) multiplied with 1105.
Compute coefficients
The button causes the coefficients j(t,t0) and ecs(t,t0) to be calculated from t0, ts, t, Cement curing, Air humidity RH and
Effective height h0 according to the standard apposite to the selected material type. The creep coefficient j(t,t0) is
calculated for DIN 1045-1 according to Book 525, Eq. (H.9-6), for OENORM B 4750 acc. to Eq. (7) and for EN 1992-1-1 acc.
to Annex B, Eq. (B.1). The total shrinkage strain ecs(t,t0) is calculated for DIN 1045-1 according to Book 525, Eq. (H.9-20),
for OENORM B 4750 acc. to Eq. (10) and for EN 1992-1-1 acc. to Eq. (3.8).
Load start t0
Age of concrete at the time of loading in days.
Drying out start ts
Age of concrete at the beginning of drying shrinkage in days.
Concrete age at date t
Age of concrete in days at the moment considered.
Cement curing
The speed of cement curing for assignment to the apposite cement class.
Air humidity RH
Relative humidity of the ambient environment in %.
Effective thickness h0
Effective section thickness with h0 = 2Ac / u in m, where Ac is the cross-sectional area and u is the perimeter of the
member in contact with the atmosphere.

Note:
The mentioned formulas from the standards cannot be used to determine the creep coefficient for any given period from t1
to t2 after the time of loading. Approximately this value can be calculated in the following way:

j(t2,t1) = j(t2,t0) - j(t1,t0)

This procedure can analogously be used for the shrink coefficient.

Bedding
Bedding modulus x, y, z
Bedding moduli for the element directions [MN/m].
Bedding width
For beam sections, each bedding modulus must have the bedded width [m] specified.
Compressive or tensile strength (nonlinear system analysis)
The strengths [MN/m] defined here are only valid for nonlinear system analysis. This can be used to realize a bilinear
bedding characteristic in the compressive and tensile section of the elements (see also 'Foundation Models').

100

Structure Description
Note:
For solid elements VQ83, the bedded surface is defined by the nodes 5 to 8.
For tetrahedron elements VT10 an explicit selection of the bedded surfaces is
necessary. The local direction for the bedding modulus z is always perpendicular to
the selected surface. The bedding direction x of the surface 1 of the tetrahedron
points from node 1 to node 2. It runs parallel to the to the surface 1 for the other
three surfaces. The user cannot modify the directions for tetrahedron elements and is
urgently recommend to choose the same value for the bedding modulus in x and y
direction.

Reinforcing Steel of an Area Section

Selection of layers
Select steel layers by clicking them in the graphic.
New layer
Add a new steel layer.
Delete layer
Delete selected steel layer.
Edge distance in x or y direction
Axis distance of the steel layer to the section edge in the x or y direction [m].

Base reinforcement
Minimum section of the reinforcement for the bending design. This can also be used to establish a relationship between the
steel sections to be determined [cm/m].
Fix base reinforcement
The base reinforcement is not changed during the design.
Quality
420S: Reinforcing rods according to DIN 488 Part 1 and DIN 1045 Table 6.

500S: Reinforcing rods according to DIN 488 Part 1 and DIN 1045 Table 6.

500M: Reinforcing meshes according to DIN 488 Part 1 and DIN 1045 Table 6.

General: Freely definable steel quality.

Yield strength
Yield strength fyk [MN/m].

101

Finite Elements

Element Info
This function shows the following properties of an element graphically at the element and in the status bar:
Element number

Element type

Node numbers

Element system

Section

Material

Joints

View
This menu item is used to display and check the structure properties.

Numbering
You can label elements, nodes, supports and springs with their numbers. Material or section numbers can also be added to
elements. The display of the numbers can be limited to values > 1. Alternatively, the section name can be added to beam
sections.
Text height
Set minimum and maximum text heights [mm].
Beam section
The beam section is drawn at the middle of the beam.
Beam nodes
The beam nodes are marked by a symbol.
Shrink mode
Enable or disable shrunken element representation. Most of the input functions are inactive in this mode.
Shrink factor
Define the shrink factor for the shrink mode.
Joint info in shrink mode
For beams existing beam end joints are labeled in the shrink mode. Joint springs are marked with an asterisk '*'.
Area fill of the elements
The surfaces of the area and solid elements are filled with the selected color. The element edges are shown in black.

102

Structure Description
Transparency
The degree of transparency of area and solid elements can be adjusted.
Full symbols for supports
The properties of the supports are shown in detail. The scroll bar changes the size of the icons in use.
Icons

Fixed

Free

Fixed

Free

Fixed

Free

Fixed

Free

Fixed

Free

Fixed

Free

Fixed

Free

Fixed

Coordinate system
Turn on coordinate system for reinforcement, elements, supports or internal forces.
Coloring
The elements are displayed in the color that corresponds to their material type or section number. The color assignment can
be modified if necessary.
Legend
Enable/disable the color legend.
All off
Turn off all display options.

Mesh Check
The element mesh can be checked with this menu item.
Node distance
The function checks if there are further nodes in the neighborhood of a node within the given tolerance. After confirmation,
the so-called duplicate nodes are marked by red arrows and you are queried if you want to merge them. In this case their
coordinates are averaged.
Element distance
Checks if any elements lie on one another, for instance, due to redundant element entry. The elements that are found are
marked by red arrows.
Contour
All free element edges are highlighted red. This helps you spot non-cohesive mesh areas (slits, for example). The contour
can be changed into a continuous line, if desired.

103

Finite Elements

Element System
The local coordinate systems of selected elements can be changed using this menu item.
Beams

+x, -x
+z, -z

y, z
Angle

By exchanging the start and end nodes of the beam, the positive or negative x axis points to the specified
point.
The spatial orientation of the section is defined by a point in the local xz plane. The point defines the
direction of the positive or negative z axis. As an option, the direction can also be reset to the default
orientation.
The orientation of the selected axis is defined by specifying two points.
The beam is rotated about the beam axis (local x axis).

Area or solid elements

Elements
Rotation of the element system for area and solid elements. As regards shell elements, the direction of
the local z axis can also be reversed. A change of the element system affects the impact of orthotropic
material properties, elastic bedding and local element loads.
Internal forces
Change the internal force system for area and solid elements. The change of the internal force orientation
only takes effect after recalculating the load cases.
Reinforcement
Angular deviation of the reinforcement assembly asy from the 90 direction for area elements. The x
direction of the reinforcement system is always identical to the x direction of the internal force system.
The specification of an angular deviation is only necessary for inclined reinforcements. The change of the
reinforcement direction only takes effect after recalculation.
Options for modification of the coordinate systems:
x, y
x- or y-radial
x and y, x and z

Standard

The orientation of the selected axis is defined by specifying two points.

Specification of a middle point for radial orientation (for circular slabs, for example).
The x direction and the xy plane or xz plane of the internal force system are defined by specifying three
points.
Specification of a rotation axis for radial orientation (e.g. for cylindrical solids).
The rotation angle defines the deviation from the standard orientation in degrees. The rotation occurs
around the z axis of the area or solid element.
Reset to the standard orientation.

+z, z

The positive or negative z axis is oriented towards the indicated point.

Radial
Angle

Orientation of local systems (in this case internal force systems)

104

Structure Description

Number Sort
This menu item is used to change element and node numbers.
Input
Sort
Define
Edit

Sort node or element numbers geometrically.

Define new start values and increments for nodes and element numbers.
Edit node and element numbers.

Sorting of the element numbers in the

perpendicular coordinate system:

Sorting of the element numbers in the polar

coordinate system:

Sorting middle point

Direction of sorting, local x axis

Direction of sorting,
Point in the local xy plane
Order: X-Y-Z

Direction of sorting,
Point in the local xz plane
Order: Angle-Z-Radius

Supports
This function is used to define supports. A support describes the support conditions of a system node. The supported nodes
are labeled with simple or detailed red icons (see View). The direction of the degrees of freedom can deviate from the global
coordinate system.
The individual degrees of freedom can be supported in a fixed or elastic manner. Additionally, the loss of the support for
tensile forces (tensile failure) for the directions x, y, or z can be defined with the following options:
Load case controlled: The tensile failure is only active in the load cases where the No support reaction < 0 option has

been chosen for the Theory or Load group load type.

Always: The tensile failure is always active.

Never: The tensile failure is never active.

Line support
Use this button to input line supports. A line support is defined geometrically through start and end points. For all nodes
that lie between these points and form element edges individual supports will be created. Already existing point supports
are ignored. The local x axis of the support line points from start to end point, the local z axis normally corresponds to the
global coordinate system. The orientation of the line support can be visualized by means of the coordinate systems of its
supports. Please note that a support can belong to multiple line supports (on a slab corner, for example).

Line supports can only be edited as a whole with the following context menu functions:
Properties

Regenerate

Break Up (conversion into point support)

When calculating the structure, the properties of the individual supports that make up the line support are decisive. If
necessary, the specified spring rigidities are internally converted into individual springs by multiplication with the respective
105

Finite Elements
bearing widths. These are provided in a table for verification purposes.
Point support
Start the input of supports through the selection of nodes. The subsequent editing is performed using the context menu
functions:
Support

Orientation

Wall
Start the input of line supports through the selection of walls.
Info
Show the support system with the bound degrees of freedom for a selected point or line support.
Note: Only point and line supports can be selected when the function is active. This improves the handling of these objects.

Predeformation
This function is used to enter and edit stress-free node displacements for a structure (only for frameworks). As part of the
system analysis, these node displacements are added to the initial node coordinates and may serve for example as a
geometric imperfection for calculations according to the second-order theory. Because of these reasons only beam and
nodal loads should be used as load types for predeformed structures. To be considered for calculations, the predeformation
must be activated within the load group definition.
The following options allow you to define predeformations or subsequently change them, if necessary.
Create a copy of the current predeformation.
Add the selected predeformation to the current predeformation.
Start the representation options dialog.
End the predeformation display.
Create a new predeformation.
Display an existing predeformation.
Change the number of the current predeformation.
Delete the predeformation.
Edit the predeformation.
Start the precurvature input.
Start the predeformation input.
Absolute input of the predeformation refers to the initial system, relative input refers to the already deformed system.

2
3
1

L
300

Inclination
1:200
2

Predeformation of a hall construction

Precurvature of a column
1: 1st point of base line, 2: 2nd point of base line, 3: Point in base plane

106

Structure Description

Moving Nodes
This function is used to change the location of selected nodes. In the case of a single element node, simply specify the new
position. If multiple element nodes are to be moved, you should choose the Group or Elements option.
Group
Select the element nodes to be moved.
Elements
Select the elements, whose nodes are to be moved.
Displacement vector
Movement through displacement. The displacement vector is defined by two points.
Rotate
Movement through rotation. A rotation point is defined in 2D mode while a rotation axis is defined in 3D mode.
Mirror
Movement through mirroring. A mirror axis is defined in 2D mode while a mirror plane is defined in 3D mode.
Scaling
Movement through scaling in the global or local reference system. You can align nodes on an axis or plane by specifying a
scaling factor of zero.
Scaling base point
Scaling:
(global)
x = 0.5
y = 0.5
z = 0.5

Scaling:
(To plumb nodes onto a line)

x=1
y=0
z=0
1

1: Scaling base point

2: Direction of local x axis
3: Point in local xy plane

The program checks whether the forms of the adjacent elements remain valid after the node displacements. If desired,
displaced nodes that coincide with non-selected nodes can be merged with these.

Finding Nodes or Elements

If you are looking for a node with a particular number, the functions Select Nodes and Move Nodes can be of help. Enter
the node number you are looking for into this function. If you are looking for an element with a particular number, use the
functions Element Info or Select. The element number can be specified in both functions. If the element is not identifiable
even though it is selected, you can query further information with the Element Properties function. The selected objects'
color and layer are displayed in the toolbar.

107

Finite Elements

Condense
The Condense menu item allows you to modify an existing element mesh.
Point
The element mesh is condensed around the specified point. The type of condensation depends on whether the point is
within an element, on element surfaces or edges, on beams or on existing nodes. The condensation point is given a new
node, if necessary.

Point condensations on element meshes with beams (representation in shrink mode)

Halve
Selected area and solid elements (VQ83) are divided into two. You will be asked to indicate the desired direction of the
division.
Quarter
Selected area elements are quartered. Selected solid elements (VQ83) will have their surfaces divided into four parts.

Element mesh with quartered area elements (representation in shrink mode)

Divide
Selected beams are divided. Enter the desired number of parts.
Adapt
The selected elements are checked as to whether there are nodes touching on their surfaces or edges of their beam axes. If
necessary, the affected elements are condensed in these nodes.

Adapted element mesh with beams (representation in shrink mode)

Merge
All selected triangular elements are merged into square elements, when possible.
Triangulate
All selected rectangular elements are split into two triangular elements.

108

Structure Description

Link Elements
Kinematic dependencies between the global degrees of freedom of two element nodes can be defined with the Link
Elements function. This is done by expressing the nodal degrees of freedom of a dependent node through the degrees of
freedom of the reference node by way of an equation of condition.
for example uz,dep. = f1ux,ref. + f2uy,ref. + f3uz,ref. + f4jx,ref. + f5jy,ref.+ f6jz,ref.
with
f1, f2, f3

Factors for the displacements,

f4, f5, f6

Factors for the rotations.

You can link any number of dependent nodes to a reference node. Nodes with supports may not be defined as dependent
nodes. The link elements are displayed with dotted lines. Additionally, an arrow points to the reference node. The following
types of link elements exist:
Stiff: Stiff link element (abbreviation: SS).

Jointed: One-sided jointed link element with a ball joint at the dependent node (abbreviation: GS).

ux, ... phi.z: Dependent degree of freedom of the user-defined equation of condition. The factors for the displacements

and rotations of the equation of condition have to be defined.

Point link
After selecting the dependent nodes and the reference node, you must define the link element type.
Joint link
This option separates area elements along a common element edge that must be defined and creates link elements
between the original (reference) and newly created (dependent) nodes.
In the 3D representation a point must be given in the separation plane next to the joint. The link elements are created
between the nodes of the elements on the one side and those on the other side of the separation plane.

Examples
Equations of condition for the stiff link elements in the xz plane.
Dependent Reference

ux,3

= ux,2 - dzjy,2

uz,3

= uz,2 - dxjy,2

jy,3

= jy,2

109

Finite Elements
Eccentrically linked girders
Link elements can also be used to take into account the eccentricities of girders. The following figure shows how the
connection of shell elements with 3D beams can be used to model a double-webbed T-beam.

Joint link

Modeling of a joint groove in a floor slab with the help of link elements

110

Structure Description

Spring Elements
This element describes a spring between two nodes. Its x direction points from the first to the second node. The z direction
is defined by the user. If both nodes are at the same location, the x direction must also be defined. The resulting Cartesian
coordinate system defines the six components of the spring. A linear or nonlinear spring characteristic can be defined for
each of the components. As opposed to the beams, the distance between the nodes does not affect the stiffness of the
springs. Spring elements can be used in static and dynamic calculations (direct time step integration). Hysteresis, which may
occur in the dynamic analysis, is not taken into account at this time. For nonlinear spring characteristics, make sure you use
a realistic load combination (see Load group) as a subsequent load case superposition is not allowed here.
Viscous damping in the local x direction of the spring can be defined for the direct time step integration.

Structure with spring element

A nonlinear spring characteristic can consist up of horizontal and inclined sections. If a deformation results outside of the
defined region of the characteristic, it is assumed that the spring has failed for this component and is thus calculated with a
reaction of 0. The characteristics of a spring element can be saved in the Igraph.dat database for use in other structures.
A number of possible load-displacement curves are shown below.

Elastic

Contact

Spring deflection

Elastic-plastic

Plastic with failure

111

Finite Elements

Line Hinges
This Line hinges function is used to define moment joints on area elements. The line hinge is geometrically delineated
through its start and end point as well as a point in the plane of the affected elements. During the FEM calculation, the
elements that are assigned to a line hinge are determined and internally provided with corresponding mechanisms.
Only those elements are assigned that are within the selected element plane and whose nodes lie on the line hinge.
If the line hinge intersects an element, it is not considered.
The elements affected by a line hinge are listed in the Finite elements listing along with the element list.

Line hinges
No. 1
Starting point:
0.000 / -1.000 / 0.000 [m]
End point
:
2.000 / -1.000 / 0.000 [m]
Surface point :
1.000 / -0.500 / 0.000 [m]
Linked elements with mechanisms
2 5 9 12 14 18

The orientation icon of the line hinge points in the direction of the elements attached in a jointed manner.
The following example shows an elastically bedded container under liquid pressure, whose corners are all attached in a
jointed manner.

Internal forces mx and my as a result of liquid pressure

112

Structure Description

Moduli of Compressibility
The model of the layered elastic halfspace (modulus of compressibility method) requires the layer thicknesses as well as their
moduli of compressibility. The depth z of the soil layers is counted from the foundation level (foundation slab) of the
structure. The first soil layer thus begins at z = 0, the last layer reaches up to z = . The ultimate depth of the halfspace can
be defined with a very high modulus of compressibility in the last soil layer. The value can be entered in the Analysis settings
or in the 'Structure description' folder in the database.

Example of the layering of the halfspace below a foundation slab

Requirements for the analysis according to the modulus of compressibility method:
A calculation is only possible for area and solid elements.

All bedded areas must have the same global z component.

The affected elements must be assigned a material with a bedding modulus in z direction. It is needed as the start value

for the calculation.

Arranging Elements
This function is used to align selected elements with a reference element. The local z axes of the elements must point in the
same direction. The orientation is performed through a displacement in the local z direction until the zero levels correspond
to those of the reference element. For area elements their top is considered the zero level. For beams the zero level is
defined at z=0 in the section polygon. Optionally, the level may be defined as follows:
Beams: z=0, area el.: Top (default)

Beams: z=0, area el.: Bottom

Top face

Bottom face

Stiff link elements are additionally created between the old and new nodes. The top node of the link element becomes the
dependent node, as long as it does not have a support defined to it. Link elements that already exist are retained.

Elements before and after the alignment (default)

113

Finite Elements

Models for the Downstand Beam

There are many models for representing downstand beams. A selection of these models is introduced below to illustrate
their effect on calculating a slab.
1.

Modeling of the downstand beam using stronger slab elements:

Advantages
Simple model

Automatic design

Disadvantages
Eccentricity is not taken into account

Slab elements

Modeling of the downstand beam through a beam series with T-beam section:

Slab elements

Beam with
downstand
beam section

Advantages
Easy input

Automatic design

Disadvantages
Redundant (double) stiffness of the slab in the area of the effective

width

The resulting internal forces distribute themselves according to the relationship of the stiffnesses in the slab and downstand
beam. As a result, reinforcement is determined for the downstand beam as well as for the slab during the automatic design.
The error is negligible for large differences in stiffness between T-beam and slab.
3.

Modeling of the downstand using a beam series with T-beam section and orthotropic slab elements in the area of the
effective width:

Slab elements

Advantages
Exact distribution of the stiffnesses and resulting internal forces

Automatic design

Disadvantages
Complicated modeling

Beam with
downstand beam
section
orthotropic
Slab element with small rigidity in
downstand beam direction
When reducing the slab rigidity in the downstand beam direction (orthotropy), the internal forces, and as such the
reinforcement, shift correspondingly. The load performance of the slab remains unchanged in the lateral direction.

Modeling of the downstand beam with shell elements and linked beams:

Beam element
with rectangular
section
Link element (SS)

Shell elements

Modeling of the downstand beam using shell elements:

Shell elements

114

Advantages
Effective width results automatically

Correct static model within the scope of FEM analysis

Disadvantages
Design of the T-beam section is only possible with the help of a

design object
Shell and link elements are necessary

Advantages
Effective width results automatically

Correct static model within the scope of FEM analysis

Disadvantages
Design of the T-beam section is only possible with the help of a

design object
Shell elements are necessary

Load

Load
The following chapter describes load input as well as the different load types.
The specified loads are represented with icons. In 3D mode, point, line, and area loads are scaled according to their load
ordinates. For point loads the resulting load direction is drawn. The orientation of line loads and line moments is indicated
by an arrow.
Beam loads generally act on the centroidal axis of the beams. For asymmetrical sections the effect of the eccentricity of the
shear center on the fixed-end reactions is therefore not accounted for.

Rectangle load
Element load
Nodal load

Point load

Triangle load
Region load
Line load
Load types of area elements
A load case is made up of one or multiple loads. The following options allow you to define load cases or subsequently
change them, if necessary.
Create a copy of the current load case.
Generate load cases according to the rules set out by the Generate function. This leads to the duplication of either all
or only the selected loads.
Import load data, static pseudo loads of an earthquake calculation based on the response spectrum method or
support reactions (only forces as nodal load or point load on area elements).
Start the representation options dialog.
End the load representation.
Create a new load case.
Show an existing load case.
Change the number and name of the current load case.
Start the load input.
Load cases can be renumbered in groups within the database tree.
With the context function Scale load the load values of multiple selected loads can be scaled with a factor.

115

Finite Elements

Input
The dialog box is used to input load data within a load case.

The load types are explained on the following pages. For easier identification they are labeled with load abbreviations.

General
Dead Load
The entire structure is stressed by its dead load (load abbreviation: EG).
Input
Weighting X, Y,
Z direction

The weighting factors allow for defining the direction of effect as well as scaling the dead load. They
refer to the global coordinate system.

Dead Load of an Element Selection

Selected elements are stressed by their dead load (load abbreviation: EGEL).
Input
Weighting X, Y,
Z direction

The weighting factors allow for defining the direction of effect as well as scaling the dead load. They
refer to the global coordinate system.

Influence Surface
This load type (load abbreviation: EFF) can be used to determine influence surfaces for internal forces of area elements.
Input
Field point

Coordinate x, y, z [m].

Influence surface

"nx", "ny", "nxy", "mx", "my", "mxy"

The ordinates of the resulting influence surface are expressed as deformation in the direction of the load to be analyzed.

116

Load
Example: Square slab with four fixed edges

Influence surface "mx"

Field point: Midspan

Influence surface "mx"

Field point: Middle of the left edge

Influence Line
This load type (load abbreviation: SEFL) is used to determine influence lines for internal forces of beams.
Input
Selection of the desired beam.
Load point

Load point in the beam. The distance from the beam start is saved.

Influence line

"Nx", "Qy", "Qz", "Mx", "My", "Mz".

The ordinates of the resulting influence line are expressed as deformation in the direction of the load to be analyzed.

Influence line "My" for a continuous girder

Inserting of Load Case Data

This load type (load abbreviation: EINF) allows you to insert load data from other load cases in the current load case in a
weighted manner. The Superposition and Insert load types may not be present in the inserted load cases.
Input
First load case

First load case that is inserted.

Last load case

Last load case that is inserted.

Weighting factor

Factor by which to multiply all load data.

Buckling Eigenvalues
Using this load type (load abbreviation: PKI), the buckling eigenvalues, buckling eigenmodes and the buckling lengths are
determined for the load case in question. It cannot be used in connection with the iterative equation solver.
Input
Number

Number of desired buckling eigenvalues or buckling eigenmodes (maximum 9).

117

Finite Elements

Creep and Shrinkage

The creep and shrinkage load case is calculated using this load type (load abbreviation: KS). During calculation the creep and
shrinkage coefficients defined in the material properties are taken into consideration.
Permanent load case
Load case of the creep-generating permanent load. This load case combines the dead load, additional load, and prestressing
load cases with the help of the superposition load type. As the load cases are calculated in ascending order and the internal
forces of the permanent load case are needed for creep and shrinkage, the load case number of the permanent load case
should be smaller than the number of the current creep and shrinkage load case.
Optionally, for tendons with bond the redistribution of internal forces between concrete and prestressing steel can be taken
into consideration.

Support Displacement
The support displacement acts on supported nodes in the direction of the bound degrees of freedom (load abbr.: DS).
Input
Selection of the affected supports.
ux, uy, uz

Displacements [mm].

phi.x, phi.y, phi.z

Rotations [rad/1000].

Support displacement uz

Support rotation jy

Superposition of Load Cases

Through superposition (load abbreviation: SUP) the existing results of different load cases can be added and weighted.
Other load types are not permitted in the load case in question. Because the load cases are analyzed in ascending order, the
load numbers of the load cases to be superposed should be smaller than the number of the current load case.
Input
First load case

First load case to be superposed.

Last load case

Last load case to be superposed.

Weighting factor

Factor by which to multiply all results.

Theory
This load type (load abbreviation: TH) is used to specify the calculation theory for the load case in question.
Input
2. order theory

Calculation according to the geometric second-order theory.

Number of iterations

This value is not used at the moment.

Error

Error threshold for the relative size of the remaining residuum in [%].
Only values 1% are permissible.

No soil pressure > 0

Disregard tensile stresses in the foundation area.

No support reaction < 0

Disregard tensile forces in the supports.

When using this load type, make sure to pay attention to the notes provided in the Load group section.
118

Load

Temperature on Area and Solid Elements

Input
Selection of the stressed elements (load abbreviation: TMPF).
tm
Temperature as a difference to the installation temperature [K].
tb - tt
Temperature difference between the bottom and top side of the section (only for area elements) [K].

Color representation of a thermal load

Temperature on Beams and Cable Elements

Input
Selection of the stressed beams and cable elements (load abbreviation: TMPS).
tm
Temperature as a difference to the installation temperature [K].
tb - tt
Temperature difference between the bottom and top side of the section [K].
tr - tl
Temperature difference between the right and left side of the section [K].
For the calculation the following coherences apply:

= aT tm

kT,y = aT (tb - tt)/dz

kT,z = aT (tr - tl)/dy
This load type is inadmissible for the section type Beam, because the dimensions dy and dz are not defined. Alternatively the
load type Initial Strain can be used.

Free Temperature on Solid Elements

This load type (load abbreviation: TMPV) describes an octagonal spatial temperature field with linear temperature curves
along its edges. The temperature of the elements is interpolated between the values at the corners of the temperature field
during the FEM calculation. In this process the solid element VQ83 gets the temperature that is determined at its centroid.
For the solid element VT10 (tetrahedron) a linear variable temperature curve is determined between its four corners, if all
element nodes are within the temperature field. All temperatures are defined to be the difference to the installation
temperature in [K].
Load data load case 1: Temperature field
Temperature solid (TMPV)
No. Pt. t [K]
x [m]
1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

0.000
10.000
10.000
0.000
0.000
10.000
10.000
0.000

y [m]

z [m]

0.000
0.000
10.000
10.000
0.000
0.000
10.000
10.000

0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
10.000
10.000
10.000
10.000

119

Finite Elements

Initial Strain
Initial Strain on Area and Solid Elements
This load type (load abbreviation: VORD) allows you to describe special cases of thermal loads on area and solid elements.
The definition is based on general strain and curvature parameters that relate to the coefficient of expansion aT.
Input
Selection of the stressed elements.
Eps.x, Eps.y, Eps.xy

Strain or shear [K] based on aT.

Kap.x, Kap.y, Kap.xy

Curvature or torsion [K/m] based on aT.

with
Eps

= e0 / aT

Kap

= k0 / aT

Only curvatures can be entered in slab structures, only strains can be entered in plain stress structures.
Uniform temperature load on area elements:
Eps.x
Eps.xy

= Eps.y = tm
= 0

with

= temperature as a difference to the installation temperature.

Non-uniform temperature load on area elements:

Kap.x
Kap.xy

= Kap.y = (tb - tt)/d

= 0

with

tb - tt

= Temperature difference between the bottom and top side of the section.

= Section height.

Uniform temperature load on solid elements:

Eps.x

= Eps.y

= Eps.xy

= tm

Kap.x

= Kap.y

= Kap.xy

with

= Temperature as a difference to the installation temperature.

Initial Strain on Beams and Cable Elements

This load type (load abbreviation: VORD) allows you to describe special cases of thermal loads on beams and cable elements.
The definition is based on general strain and curvature parameters that relate to the coefficient of expansion aT.
Input
Selection of the stressed beams and cable elements.
Eps.x

Strain [K] based on aT.

Kap.x, Kap.y, Kap.z

Torsion or curvature [K/m] based on aT.

with
Eps

= e0/aT

Kap

= k0/aT

120

Load
The parameters are defined as follows for the temperature load:
Eps.x

= tm

Kap.y

= (tb - tt)/dz

Kap.z

= (tr - tl)/dy

with

Temperature as a difference to the installation temperature,

tb - tt

Temperature difference between the bottom and top side of the section,

tr - tl

Temperature difference between the right and left side of the section,

dy, dz

Section dimensions.

Prestressing
The prestressing load type (load abbreviation: VSPG) activates the specified tendon groups within the load case in question.
The load case should not contain any other load data, so that the effect of the prestressing is clearly distinguishable from
the other stresses.

Dynamic Train Load

The train load type (load abbreviation: ZUG) is used to describe a train crossing. When performing a dynamic calculation
(time step integration), the locations of the axle loads, which change over time, are determined. Multiple trains can be
considered simultaneously, allowing you, for example, to analyze the effect trains traveling in opposite directions have on
each other. The axle loads of the trains always act in the global z direction.
Input
Track

Label
No.
Train

The track of a train is represented on the structure through a polygon. This must lie within the section
dimensions of the elements. Area and solid elements as well as beams with polygon sections are
considered here.
Freely selectable.
Freely selectable.
The load of a train is defined by axle loads [kN] and corresponding distances [m] from the start of the
train.

v
Start time

ICE 1, ICE 2, ...: Standard trains with preset axle loads and distances.

User-defined: Freely definable train.

Speed of the train [km/h].

Time until the departure of the train on the track [s]. This can be used to generate a time offset between
different trains.

Dynamic Element Collapse

The load type (load abbreviation: KOLL) defines the failure of elements at a specific point of time. During a direct time step
integration the effective stiffnesses of the selected elements at the time of collapse are reduced with the factor for effective
stiffness. The element dead load is reduced accordingly. For different elements different times of collapse can be taken into
account.

Predeformation
This load type (load abbreviation: VV) is used to predeform the structure. To do so, enter the predeformation number.
This load type is only available for frameworks exclusively. It should only be used in combination with beam or nodal loads.

121

Finite Elements

Fire Scenario
This load type (load abbreviation: FIRE) indicates that this load case will be calculated with respect to the selected fire
scenario. It is only taken into account for nonlinear system analyses (for fire scenarios).

Thermal Action
This load type (load abbreviation: TRMO) is used to calculate solid structures under consideration of the temperature
distribution due to a thermal action. If an instationary thermal action was selected, additionally the desired time step is to be
set. The thermal strains result from the material properties with the help of the installation temperature and the coefficient
of thermal expansion aT.

Load Group
This load type (load abbreviation: GRL) is especially suited for preparing load cases for nonlinear calculation. It allows you to
compile loads from existing load cases by retrieving the necessary load factors and to activate the desired calculation theory.
The load group is used to combine the existing Insert, Theory, Predeformation and Buckling eigenvalues load types into a
single load type.
General
Theory

1. / 2. order theory: Calculation according to geometric first- or second-order theory.

Buckling eigenvalues: Calculation of buckling eigenvalues and buckling eigenmodes.

Error threshold

Error threshold for the relative size of the remaining residuum in [%].
Only values 1% are permissible.

No soil pressure > 0

Disregard tensile stresses in the foundation area.

No support reaction < 0

Disregard tensile forces in the supports.

Add. global load factor

Additional factor for all loads.

Number of eigenvalues

Number of desired buckling eigenvalues or buckling eigenmodes (maximum 9).

Predeformation

Number of the predeformation.

Load cases

Select load cases to add them to the selection list.

Load factor

The individual load cases are weighted by a factor.

Apply

Change the weighting factor for selected load cases.

Concrete creeping
In combination with the nonlinear analysis a load case related definition of the creep coefficients is available for concrete
cross-sections. A description of the calculation method can be found in chapter Nonlinear Structural Analysis.
Consider concrete creeping in the nonlinear analysis
Enables concrete creeping for the cross-sections, which are listed in the table. For first-time
activation available cross- sections are added automatically to the table. Already defined creep
coefficients are taken over.
Refresh

Calculate the creep coefficient for every activated line.

All sec. identical

Takes over the input values of the 1st table entry for the further cross-sections.

phi

Creep coefficient.

Calculated

Yes: The creep coefficient is determined from the further parameters.

t0, t

Load start and concrete age.

Factor

Optional factor for the calculated creep coefficient.

This is used for example for the determination of jef according to EN 1992-1-1:2004 from the
calculated coefficient.

When using this load type, the following should be observed.

122

Load
Calculation according to the second-order theory
Before carrying out a calculation according to the second-order theory, make sure the system is kinematically stable
according to the first-order theory. A failure in stability due to beam buckling or shell buckling is recognized during
calculation according to second-order theory by a singularity of the system of equations or of an element stiffness matrix.
The calculation aborts in this case and informs you about the location and the failed degree of freedom. In borderline cases
it may be necessary to set the error threshold to '0' in order to determine the failure state. When using the iterative
equation solver, a failure of the system cannot be directly determined.
Error threshold
All nonlinear problems are solved iteratively. The length of the error vector, the residuum, is used to control the iteration. It
is shown for each iteration step in the output bar. The iteration is ended when the remaining residuum has reached the
specified error threshold in relation to the initial residuum. The calculation results have, on average, a relative error of the
same extent. If the error threshold cannot be reached, the calculation program issues a corresponding message.
Loss of tensile bedding and tensile support
Unrealistic load combinations (for instance, a missing dead load) can lead to loss of all supports or loss of all bedding (see
also 'Foundation Models'). If the system becomes relocatable due to this, the calculation is aborted because of the
singularity. The relocatable degree of freedom is indicated, provided the iterative equation solver was not selected.
Calculation according to the modulus of compressibility method
When choosing the modulus of compressibility method, the iterative calculation of the subsidence hollow is performed
automatically with an error threshold of 1%. A smaller value can be defined in the load case, and the loss of tensile bedding
can also be selected.
Analysis of cable structures
If a structure contains cable elements, these are automatically calculated according to the theory of large deformations with
an error threshold of 1%. All other elements are calculated according to the first-order theory, unless the second-order
theory has been specified in the load case. The error threshold defined there also applies to the cable elements. If the
system becomes unstable due to the loss of a cable element, the calculation is terminated due to the singular system of
equations, provided the iterative equation solver was not selected.
Consideration of tension and compression beams
For structures with tension and compression beams, the iterative determination of the equilibrium state is automatically
carried out with an error threshold of 1%. In the load case a smaller value can be specified. Instabilities due to beam failure
lead to a singular system of equations and an abortion of the calculation, provided the iterative equation solver was not
selected.
Load combination
In order to combine the decisive actions for calculations according to the deflection theory, with the exclusion of tensile
bedding or loss of tensile support, transfer the affected load cases to the selection list and assign them load factors.
For calculations according to DIN 18800, Part 2, or EN 1993-1-1 the following different cases exist:
a) Calculation according to the geometric second-order theory with linear material law according to elasticity theory and
subsequent elastic-elastic or elastic-plastic check. The internal forces are to be determined according the standard with
gM-fold design values of the actions. To do so, the load cases of the selection list are to be weighted with the factor gF.
Additionally, gM is to be specified as the global load factor.
b) Ultimate limit state check according to the geometric second-order theory with nonlinear material law according to the
plasticity theory. In this case gM is considered on the resistance side according to the standard. The internal forces
calculation is to be carried out with the design values of the actions. Therefore, only gF needs to be provided as a
weighting factor.
Prohibition of superposition
Calculations with cable elements or tension and compression beams, according to the second-order theory, excluding the
tensile bedding or with loss of tensile support, are performed on the basis of nonlinear iteration. So in these cases the
superposition principle is no longer valid, meaning the results may not be additively superposed with other results. Further
processing using load case combinations is only permissible if these only contain mutually exclusive actions.

123

Finite Elements

Point Loads
Free Point Load
The load is assigned to elements section by section during the FEM calculation. For beams and area elements the load must
be within the section, for solid elements it can be anywhere within the element.
Input
Global orientation

Point load in the global system (load abbreviation: PKO+PG).

Local orientation

Point load in the element system (load abbreviation: PKO+PL).

Load point

Coordinates x, y, z [m].

Px, Py, Pz

Load components in the directions of the selected coordinate system [kN].

Nodal Load
Nodal loads act in the global system (load abbreviation: KNL).
Input
Selection of the stressed element nodes.
Px, Py, Pz
Forces [kN].
Mx, My, Mz
Moments [kNm].

Point Load on Beams

Input
Global orientation

Point load in the global system (load abbreviation: SFG).

Local orientation

Point load in the beam system (load abbreviation: SFL).

Load point

Load point in the beam. The distance from the beam start is saved.

Px, Py, Pz

Load components in the directions of the selected coordinate system [kN].

Point Moment on Beams

Input
Load point
Mx, My, Mz

124

Load point in the beam. The distance from the beam start is saved (load abbreviation: SML).
Load components in the beam system [kNm].

Load

Fixed-end Reactions of Beams

The fixed-end reactions at the beam start (load abbreviation:S0A) or beam end (load abbreviation: S0E) must be input
separately.
Input
Selection of the stressed beams.
Nx, Qy, Qz
Normal and lateral force [kN].
Mx, My, Mz
Moments [kNm].

Fixed-end reactions at the beam start and end.

Line Loads
Free Line Load - global
The load is assigned to elements section by section during the FEM calculation. For beam elements the load must lie exactly
on the beam axis and for area elements in the element plane. For solid elements it can also lie within the element (load
abbreviation: LKO+LG).

Input
Starting point

Coordinate x, y, z [m].

End point

Coordinate x, y, z [m].

qxa, qxe

Load ordinates in x direction [kN/m].

qya, qye

Load ordinates in y direction [kN/m].

qza, qze

Load ordinates in z direction [kN/m].

Free Line Load - local

The load is assigned to elements section by section during the FEM calculation. For beam elements the load must lie exactly
on the beam axis and for area elements in the element plane. For solid elements it can also lie within the element (load
abbreviation: LKO+LL).

Input
Starting point

Coordinate x, y, z [m].

End point

Coordinate x, y, z [m].

Point in rs-plane

Coordinate x, y, z [m].

Orientation

r, s, t (see figure).

Load ordinates at the start in selected direction [kN/m].

Load ordinates at the end in selected direction [kN/m].

125

Finite Elements

Local Line Load on Area and Solid Elements in the Element Direction
This load type (load abbreviation: LKO+LLA) differs from the local free line load because it acts in the direction of the
coordinate systems of the affected elements. It cannot be entered graphically. Its input values correspond to the global free
line load.

Line Load on Beams and Cable Elements

Input
Selection of the stressed beams and cable elements.
Global orientation

Line load in the global system (load abbreviation: SLG).

Local orientation

Line load in the beam system (load abbreviation: SLL).

qx, qy, qz

Load components in the directions of the selected coordinate system [kN/m].

Global line load of beams or cable elements (qx, qy, qz)

Local line load on beams

Trapezoidal Loads on Beams

Input
Selection of the stressed beams.
Starting point

Load start.

End point

Load end.

Global x, y, z

Trapezoidal load in the global system (load abbreviation: STA + GX, GY, GZ).

Local x, y, z

Trapezoidal load in the beam system (load abbreviation: STA + LX, LY, LZ).

Projection x, y, z

Projection of the trapezoidal load in the global direction (load abbreviation: STA + PX, PY, PZ).

Starting ordinate

Load ordinate at the load start in the directions of the selected coordinate system [kN/m].

End ordinate

Load ordinate at the load end in the directions of the selected coordinate system [kN/m].

The load is automatically distributed over multiple beams for a trapezoidal load. The distances from the beam starts, the
load lengths and the interpolated load ordinates are automatically determined for the selected beams. This allows you to
describe a trapezoidal load for an entire beam series with a single input.

126

Load

Free Line Moments on Beams and Area Elements

The load is assigned to elements section by section during the FEM calculation. The direction of rotation of the line moment
(load abbreviation: LKO+LM) is defined by its start and end point. The load must lie exactly on the beam axis or in the
element plane.
Input
Starting point

Start coordinate xa, ya, za [m].

End point

End coordinate xe, ye, ze [m].

Line moment [kNm/m].

Line Torsional Moment on Beams

Input
Selection of the stressed beams (load abbreviation: SMT).
mtx

Line torsional moment [kNm/m].

Line torsional moment about the beam axis

Area Loads
Area Element Load
Input
Selection of the stressed elements.
Global orientation

Area load in the global system (load abbreviation: FGX, FGY, FGZ).

Local orientation

Area load in the element system (load abbreviation: FLX, FLY, FLZ).

Projection orientation

Projective area load (load abbreviation: FPX, FPY, FPZ).

x, y, z

Direction of effect of the load in the selected coordinate system.

q1, q2, q3

Load ordinates at the first three element nodes in the directions of the selected coordinate
system [kN/m].

Global area load in 3D representation

Area load in global system (x, y, z)

127

Finite Elements

Area load in element system (x, y, z)

Projective area load (x, y, z)

Uniform Region Load on Area Elements

The regional load (load abbreviation: GKO+GG) acts in the global direction of the area elements. The load geometry is
delineated with the corner points of the enclosing window. The area must be parallel to the xy plane. All area elements that
lie completely within the load area are stressed.
Input
1st point
2nd point
qx, qy, qz

Coordinates of the first corner x, y, z [m].

Coordinates of the second corner x, y, z [m].
Global uniformly distributed load [kN/m].

Free Area Load - Rectangle

This load type can be defined as a constant or variable load. The load area is assigned to elements section by section during
the FEM calculation. For that for area elements the load plane must be parallel to the element plane and within the section
height, for solid elements it can be anywhere within the element.
Input
1st point

1st coordinate x, y, z [m].

2nd point

2nd coordinate x, y, z [m].

3rd point

3rd coordinate x, y, z [m].

Uniform load
qx, qy, qz

Global load ordinates [kN/m] (load abbreviation: GR1+GR2).

Variable
Orientation

The load orientation of the trapezoidal load is global, projected or local to the load contact area (r, s, t)
and thus independent of the element system.

q1, q2, q3

Load ordinates of the three points [kN/m] (load abbreviation: GR1+GRT).

128

Load

Free Area Load - Polygon

This load type can be defined as a constant or variable load. This load area is divided into triangles during the input and is
assigned to elements section by section during the FEM calculation. For that for area elements the load plane must be
parallel to the element plane and within the section height, for solid elements it can be anywhere within the element.
Input
Load area

Corner points of the load area [m].

Uniform load
qx, qy, qz

Global load ordinates [kN/m] (load abbreviation: GD1+GD2).

Variable
Orientation

The load orientation of the trapezoidal load is global, projected or local to the load contact area (r, s, t)
and thus independent of the element system.

q1, q2, q3

Load ordinates of the three points [kN/m] (load abbreviation: GD1+GDT).

Start
Close

Start defining a new area with different load ordinates. The input of the current area is terminated.
Close the current area. The extended dialog allows you to enter further areas with similar load ordinates
within the same plane.
Undo the last point entered.

Back

Liquid Pressure on Area Elements

The liquid pressure (load abbreviation: FD) stresses all selected area elements that are fully below the liquid level. It acts in
the local z direction of the elements.
Input
Upper edge liquid

Z coordinate of the liquid level [m].

Specific weight

Specific weight gF of the liquid [kN/m].

129

Finite Elements

Area Load onto Beams

This load type can be used to distribute an area load to selected beams. The load area can be any polygonal plane area.
Selected beams, which are not within the load plane, are projected to this plane before the beam loads are calculated.
Thereby the load is only assigned to the beams which lie within the load area. The load distribution areas are calculated
using the Voronoi diagram.
After the load definition has been finished, only the resulting beam loads can be edited.
Input
Selection of the stressed beams.
Load geometry

Definition of the corner points of the load area [m].

Load orientation

The load can act in the direction of the global coordinate system based on the real load area (Global x,
y,z) or based on the projected load area (Projection x,y,z) or it can act normal to the load plane.

Load

If variable load distribution is selected, the load is assigned to beams proportionately to their load
distribution area. Alternatively, the load can be assigned to all beams as a constant line load.

Load size

The area load [kN/m] can be constant or variable. For variable area loads the load ordinates are to be
specified for the first three points of the load area.

Properties

With this function the properties of the area load can be modified after the beam loads have been
created. Besides the load sums of the area load are compared with those of the beams.

Further loads can be defined.

Example

Load area and load distribution (Voronoi-Diagram)

for 5 kN/m constant area load

Resulting beam loads [kN/m]

Database
The dialog page Database allows the creation and the import of user-defined load combinations. Therefor point, line and
area loads, which are independent of nodes and elements, can be used. They are stored in the file Igraph.dat.

130

Design objects

Design objects
Purpose
In solid construction calculation models are used that are based on a combination of beam and area elements or, less
commonly, solid elements. These models make possible, for instance, the representation of construction stages and deliver
a detailed picture of the stress acting on the structure. They cannot, however, be used directly for reinforced concrete or
prestressed concrete checks. The reason for this is that the checks are usually section oriented. For instance, for the checks
at the ultimate limit state, several elements must be merged into one object with respect to geometry and stresses. This is
done using so-called Design objects (except design program for DIN 1045:1988).

Definition
A design object is a linear element with a start and end point. The connection between start and end point defines the
element axis and at the same time the local x axis. The local z axis typically corresponds to the global z axis, although it can
be defined to have an angle of tilt. Sections can be defined at any point along the element axis. The sections are
perpendicular to the axis. At the point of each section the FE program integrates the stresses and internal forces of the
elements that lie within the enclosing rectangle of the section. The coordinate system of the design object determines the
orientation of the internal forces.

Design object

Enclosing rectangle

Example
The following illustration shows the section of a simple two-span bridge, built with precast units and a subsequently applied
in-situ concrete slab.
In-situ concrete

Precast units

Bridge section
A possible structure model is shown in the next figure. The precast units are modeled using beam elements and the
roadway slab using eccentrically coupled shell elements.

Shell element

Link element
Beam

Structure model
This system delivers the internal forces in the precast units and the in-situ concrete slab. The internal forces for the design of
the central composite girder are to be determined as the next step. For this purpose a design object is defined.
131

Finite Elements

Design
object
Structure model with design object

The following illustrations show several internal forces in the area of the central girder.

nx in the prismatic shell elements above the central girder [kN/m]

My in the beam elements of the central girder [kNm]

My in the design objects [kNm]

Input
The input function is called up from the Structure menu (Design Objects). After the start and end points have been defined,
the following dialog appears for entering the additional object properties. The angle of tilt refers to an additional rotation of
the object about its longitudinal axis compared with the standard orientation. When in standard orientation, the local y axis
runs parallel to the global XY plane.

132

Design objects

Editing
To edit a design object, select it and open the following dialog using the context menu.

Section
system
v
w

xi
z

y Object
system

The location of the sections is determined by the insert point, described by xi (0 to 1) or x, y, z as well as an optional
subsequent rotation about the object axis. A graphical function for manipulating the location of the section is available
using 'Structure.Design objects.Move cross section'.

Integration
During the integration of the internal forces or stresses at the location of a section, the following elements are considered:
a)

Beams whose axis pierce through the enclosing rectangle of the section.

Area elements whose lines of intersection with the section plane lie within the enclosing rectangle. Thereby also the
parts of cut elements are taken into account.

Solid elements whose planes of intersection with the section plane lie within the enclosing rectangle. Thereby also
subareas are taken into account.
ding re
Surroun

ctangle

intersec

of a s ec

tion

ting line

intersecting plane

Handling of the area and solid elements during integration.

During the calculation of the statically determined and undetermined part of prestressing the tendon groups, who have an
angle smaller than 45 with the design object axis at the intersection point of the enclosing rectangle, are taken into
account.

133

Finite Elements

Analysis
The Analysis menu is used to make program-specific settings and to launch the analysis programs.
Settings...
Batch...
Statics
Dynamics
Thermal Analysis
Section Temperatures
Load Case Combination
DIN 1045-1 Design
DIN EN 1992-1-1 Design
EN 1992-1-1 Design
OENORM B 4700 Design
OENORM EN 1992-1-1 Design
SIA 262 Design
SS EN 1992-1-1 Design
Single Design
DIN Technical Report Bridge Checks
EN 1992-2 Bridge Checks
DIN EN 1992-2 Bridge Checks
OENORM EN 1992-2 Bridge Checks
DIN 18800 Steel Checks
EN 1993-1-1 Steel Checks
DIN 1052 Timber Checks
EN 1995-1-1 Timber Checks
Selected Elements
Stop Analysis
During the analysis the program's progress is shown in the output bar along with any possible warnings and error
messages.

134

Analysis

Settings Statics

Calculate all load cases

All load cases are calculated (default).
Calculate following load cases
The load cases from the left list box are calculated.
Force recalculation
If this switch is activated, all of the selected load cases will be recalculated. Otherwise, the calculation program checks
whether a recalculation is necessary.
Save stiffness matrix
The global stiffness matrix is saved for further use.
Nonlinear analysis
A nonlinear system analysis is performed. The Settings button opens the settings dialog for the ultimate limit state, the
serviceability and the fire scenario check. Load cases selected in the setting dialog (nonlinear analysis) are calculated instead
of the selection made here.
Modulus of compressibility method
The Modulus of compressibility method is used as the subsoil model. The Modulus of compressibility button opens the
dialog for entering the moduli of compressibility. The bedding modulus method is always used for dynamic calculations.
Relate forces to deformed beam axis in case of theory 2. order
For calculations according to the second-order theory, the internal forces and stresses are based on the beam chord of the
deformed system.
Mindlin-Reissner plate theorie
Generally, area elements with an element approach according to the 'discrete Kirchhoff theory' (DKT) are used. Optionally,
an element approach according to 'Mindlin-Reissner' (MR) can be used.

135

Finite Elements
Equation solver
Standard: The equation system is solved directly.

Iterative: The equation system is solved iteratively.

Substructure Standard: The equation system is solved using the substructure technique. The elements are allocated to

the substructures according to the layer they belong to. The layer number corresponds to the number of the
substructure. The elements of a substructure do not have to be placed in an interconnected area.
Substructure Info: The analysis program creates an information log which helps you perform an effective substructure

division.
Parallel Sparse Solver: The equation system is solved directly with additional memory optimization and parallel

processing.
Number of beam result locations
The internal forces are calculated at equidistant points in the beam. Two result locations are used by default (start and end
node). For bedded beams the reactions are only calculated in the nodes.
Result location area elements
Nodes: Internal force calculation in the element nodes (default).

Centroid: Internal force calculation in the centroids of the elements.

Side middle: Internal force calculation in the side middles of the elements.

Listing
No listing: No log is generated by the calculation program.

Create listing: A log is generated during the calculation according to the selection list.

Batch
Use this menu item to run all selected analyses as a batch job.

136

Results

Results
The following chapter describes the representation of the analysis results. Results can be shown graphically as well as in
tables. Their selection takes place in the database or with the Results function of the Structure menu.

Superelevated representation of the deformations of a box girder bridge

Sum of installed loads and support reactions

LC.

Label
1

Fx [kN]

Fy [kN]

Fz [kN]

Dead load
Support reactions

0.000
-0.000

15172.098
15172.098

Cap load location 1

Support reactions

0.000
-0.000

-0.000
-0.000

295.201
295.201

Cap load location 2

Support reactions

0.000
-0.000

0.000
0.000

295.200
295.200

Tabular output of the load sums

Result Bar
The result bar includes the following buttons for representing results:
Start the dialog for result representation.
Turn off result representation.
Ordinate selection for manual labeling.
Enable result representation for the selected elements.
Disable result representation for the selected elements.
Enter section.
Delete section.
Insert result marker for fire scenario stresses. During the analysis the section stress distribution of every time step is
stored for the marked locations. The results can be displayed by double-clicking the corresponding marker.
Output the ordinate value at the marked point in the status bar. If internal forces or reinforcement are displayed on
the sections, their integral will also be shown over the section length.

137

Finite Elements

Result Categories
The following dialog shows possible result categories.

The load case and combination results as well as all presentable result components are listed in the subsection of the
respective category. After making a selection, the Settings tab offers views described below with additional options. The
symbol in front of the item identifies the type of view ( e.g. : table view,
: graphical view of internal forces).
Results of a time step calculation or a fire scenario analysis for a selected time step are
shown like the results of a load case. The progression of results can be represented for a
selected location in a diagram. Alternatively, the results can be animated for the whole
system (colored, deformation figure, result graph), if a superordinate component is
chosen.

Deformation Figure
Scale
The scale can be set automatically or manually. The node displacements are multiplied by the distortion factor and added to
the node coordinates. For load cases the bending curve of beams is displayed as well.
Display original system in dashed manner
Switch on/off the dashed non-deformed system during deformation display.
Label
Auto: Automatically add labels to the nodes listing the length of the displacement vector [mm].

Off: Switch off labeling.

Limit value for labeling

Only displacements exceeding the limit value are labeled.

138

Results
Text height [mm]
The unit depends on the output device.
Decimal places
Standard: Automatic setting of decimal places.

0 - 3: Number of decimal places.

Superelevated deformation figure

Colored, Isosurfaces
For the representation type Colored the area and solid elements are colored according to their results. For the representation
type Isosurfaces results of solid elements are represented by unicolored surfaces of the same value.
Number of colors
Set the number of colors for automatic color grading.
Color shift
Shift of the automatic color grading.
Grading
Enable/disable manual color grading. Color and number values can be changed. The grading can be saved as a template for
other projects with the right mouse button. The context option Database allows you to manage different color gradings in
the Igraph.dat file.
The

icon is used to add another color grade above the selected one.

The

icon is used to delete the selected color grade.

Element mesh
Enable/disable the element mesh during the colored depiction of results.
Legend
Enable/disable the color legend.
Mean values
The displayed results are averaged in the results location if all adjacent elements have the same properties.
Dividing line
Enable/disable dividing lines at the color transitions.
Subtract base reinforcement
The base reinforcements defined for the sections are subtracted from the computed reinforcement and the remaining
reinforcement is displayed.

139

Finite Elements

Colored representation of the internal forces mx

Isolines
In the area elements contours are shown according to their results.
Number of lines
Set the number of contours for automatic grading.
Text height
Set the text height for the labels.
Grading
Enable/disable manual contour grading. Color and number values can be changed. The grading of the area reinforcement
can be saved as a template for other projects with the right mouse button.
The

icon is used to add another contour above the selected one.

The

icon is used to delete the selected contour.

Colored
Enable/disable the coloring of the manual contour grading.
Element mesh
Enable/disable the element mesh when displaying the contours.
Extreme values
Enable/disable the local extreme values.
Subtract base reinforcement
The base reinforcements defined for the sections are subtracted from the computed reinforcement and the remaining
reinforcement is displayed.

Contour representation of the internal forces mx

The contours are created through linear interpolation from node values. If the calculation took place in the side middles
140

Results
and/or in the elements' centroids, the results are extrapolated on the element nodes. The node values are averaged if all
adjacent elements have the same properties.

Numeric
This function is used to display all results in the result location numerically.
Subtract base reinforcement
The base reinforcements defined for the sections are subtracted from the computed reinforcement and the remaining
reinforcement is displayed.
Reinforcement subtraction [cm/m] x-direction or y-direction
The set reinforcement is subtracted from the computed reinforcement. Only the remaining reinforcement is displayed. An
additional button enables you to modify the offered list of reinforcement subtractions.
Lower boundary for presentation
Only results exceeding the limit value are output.
Mean of values
The displayed results are averaged at the results location if all adjacent elements have the same properties.
Text height [mm]
The unit depends on the output device.
Decimal places
Standard: Automatic setting of decimal places.

0 - 3: Number of decimal places.

Switch off coordinate system in the elements

No coordinate system is displayed for reinforcement results.

Numeric representation of the principle stresses s1 in an area with differing element properties with activated averaging.

Numeric representation of the lower reinforcement layer in x direction (top number) and y direction (lower number). The
reinforcement system is displayed in the element along with the numerical results if it is different from the global coordinate
system.

141

Finite Elements

Section View
For area and solid elements the results are applied through user-defined intersections. After selecting the representation
type Section the

icon in the results bar can be used to enter or delete intersections.

Section
Choose a saved group of intersections. The selected group is deleted using the Del key.
Save...
Save the existing intersections by assigning them a number. Changes to a loaded group are indicated by an asterisk.
Scale
The scale of the ordinate display can be set automatically or manually.
Label
Auto: Enable automatic labeling.

Off: Disable labeling.

Everywhere: Label everywhere.

Selectable: Choose manual labeling with the help of the results bar.

Limit value for labeling

Only ordinates exceeding the limit value are labeled.
Show integral
Show the integral of the results for every section.
Decimal places
Standard: Automatic setting of decimal places.

0 - 3: Number of decimal places.

Text height [mm]

The unit depends on the output device.
Subtract base reinforcement
The base reinforcements defined for the sections are subtracted from the computed reinforcement and the remaining
reinforcement is displayed.

Section representation of the internal forces mx

142

Results

Vectors
The principal stresses or principal internal forces of area or solid elements are displayed vectorially in the centroid.
Colored
Positive values are drawn red and negative values blue. If the b/w representation is active the values of the first direction are
drawn with a solid line and the values of the second direction with a dashed line.
Scale
The scale of the vectors can be set automatically or manually.
Label
Auto: Enable automatic labeling.

Off: Disable labeling.

Limit value for labeling

Only ordinates exceeding the limit value are labeled.
Decimal places
Standard: Automatic setting of decimal places.

0 - 3: Number of decimal places.

Text height [mm]

The unit depends on the output device.

Vector representation of the extremal principal stresses

Solid Section
For solid elements the results are applied through user-defined intersections. After selecting the representation type Solid
section the

icon in the results bar can be used to enter or delete intersections.

Section
Choose a saved group of intersections. The selected group is deleted using the Del key.
Save...
Save the existing intersections by assigning them a number. Changes to a loaded group are indicated by an asterisk.
Number of colors
Set the number of colors for automatic color grading.
Color shift
Shift of the automatic color grading.
Grading
Enable/disable manual color grading. Color and number values can be changed. The grading can be saved as a template for
other projects with the right mouse button. The context option Database allows you to manage different color gradings in
the Igraph.dat file.
The

icon is used to add another color grade above the selected one.

The

icon is used to delete the selected color grade.

143

Finite Elements
Legend
Enable/disable the color legend.
Mean values
The displayed results are averaged in the results location if all adjacent elements have the same properties.
Dividing line
Enable/disable dividing lines at the color transitions.

Support Lines
The basis for all representations are the support reactions [kN or kNm] computed in the supported nodes. These are each
defined in the support system. For the linear display of the support reactions, support lines are created. The support lines
are made up of the successive supported element edges. The support reactions are transformed into the coordinate system
of the support lines and distributed along the respective bearing width.
The coordinate system of the support lines is defined as follows:
The x axis shows the direction of the support lines.

The z axis depends on the orientation of the supports.

Mean
Alternatively, the ordinates of the linear representation can be averaged in the following ways:
Linear: The forces and moments are in equilibrium with the representation without averaging (trapezoidal form).

Constant: The forces are in equilibrium with the representation without averaging (rectangular form).

As different load cases are often involved in the extremal reactions of the individual supports in load case combinations,
averaging can, in certain situations, result in an unrealistic sum of the support forces.
Scale
The scale of the ordinate display can be set automatically or manually.
Label
Auto: Enable automatic labeling.

Off: Disable labeling.

Everywhere: Label all ordinates.

Selectable: Choose manual labeling with the help of the results bar.

Limit value for labeling

Only ordinates exceeding the limit value are labeled.
Show integral
Show the integral of the results for every support line.
Decimal places
Standard: Automatic setting of decimal places.

0 - 3: Number of decimal places.

Text height [mm]

The unit depends on the output device.

144

Results

Linear representation of the support reactions

Result Graphs
The results are plotted along either the object axis for beams and design objects or the secants of the spline for tendon
groups. A linear progress of results is assumed between the result locations.
Scale
The scale of the ordinate display can be set automatically or manually.
Label
Auto: Enable automatic labeling.

Off: Disable labeling.

Everywhere: Label all ordinates.

Selectable: Choose manual labeling with the help of the results bar.

Limit value for labeling

Only ordinates exceeding the limit value are labeled.
Decimal places
Standard: Automatic setting of decimal places.

0 - 3: Number of decimal places.

Text height [mm]

The unit depends on the output device.
Show ordinates in global z direction
This selection refers to the results for tendon groups that are displayed by default in the principal bending plane of the
spline.
Steel layer grouping...
Define the grouping of the steel layers with this function.

During automatic grouping, all steel layers with a z component smaller than the z component of the centroid are displayed
145

Finite Elements
on the upper side of the elements, all other layers on the lower side.
For manual grouping, steel layers can be moved between the list boxes using the mouse. The steel layers of the middle list
box are not displayed.
Subtract base reinforcement
The base reinforcements defined for the sections are subtracted from the computed reinforcement and the remaining
reinforcement is displayed.

Result Diagram
The results of dynamic calculations or a thermal analysis are shown in a diagram. For the results of a time step integration,
the desired result location has to be specified on the structure.

System response ux to a instationary excitation

With the context option Copy diagram values of the diagram the illustrated pairs of values can be copied to the clipboard.

Section Stresses
The stress curve is illustrated on a beam section in a dialog window. This can be accessed via the context menu of the
beams when displaying result graphs for stresses or internal forces.
Load case
Select the calculated load cases and combinations.
Set
Select the internal force set for the stress determination. The absolute extreme values of the stresses from all internal force
sets are displayed using Extreme value.
Beam
Number of the selected beam.
Location
Select the result location in the beam.
Section
Description of the displayed section.

146

Results
Nx, Qy, Qz, Mx, My, Mz
Internal forces at the selected result location, from which the displayed stress curve results.
Stress
The stresses are generally calculated while taking the linear elastic material behavior into consideration. For results from a
nonlinear system analysis, the stresses of the plastic state are displayed on polygon sections and steel sections made of
construction steel (S235 to S450 or S235-EN to S450-EN) or Stahl.
Sigma.x: Longitudinal stresses from bending moments and longitudinal force.

Sigma.v: Comparison stresses according to the Huber-von Mises yield criterion.

Sigma.1,2: Main stresses from bending moments, longitudinal force, lateral forces and torsion.

Tau.r: Shear stresses from lateral forces and torsion parallel to the edge.

Tau.xy: Shear stresses from lateral forces and torsion in y direction.

Tau.xz: Shear stresses from lateral forces and torsion in z direction.

Label
Labeling of extreme values. With the right mouse button the labels for chosen ordinate values can be optionally activated or
deactivated.
Print
Print the section stresses.
->Print list
Insert the current view in the printing list.
Representation
The stresses can be represented either as lines along the edge or as a 3D face.
The view can be rotated with the help of the mouse. The area displayed can be moved by holding down the Shift key. Use
the Ctrl key to change the size of the zoom section. If you place the mouse pointer over an ordinate and wait a moment,
the stress present at that location is displayed.
Section stress Tau.xz (Elastic)
Beam 1, result point 1, section Polygon - C20/25
Load case 1
Nx / Qy / Qz = 0.00 / -0.00 / 5865.00 kN; Mx / My / Mz = -0.00 / -58650.00 / 0.00 kNm
Range of values of the stresses: -0.00157631 bis 4.18786 MN/m.

Shear stress txz represented as lines along the edge and as 3D face

147

Finite Elements

Result List
The result list is output for selected elements in the data editor. It can be accessed over the context menu for the elements.

The output can be limited to certain load cases using the Load Case Selection option of the context menu.

Combination Information
The Combination information option can be used to determine the load cases involved in a combination result with their
respective weightings. This function is available during the display of combination results. After the selection of the desired
result location with the right mouse button, the Combination information function appears in the context menu.
The following functions are available in the context menu of the dialog:
Copy (clipboard)

Create load group...

Create superposition load case

Associated deformations

Associated support forces

Last Combination
Shows result values corresponding to the last Combination information.

148

Results

Reinforcement Export
The displayed bending reinforcement of the area elements (1st and 2nd layer of both directions) is written to a file for
transfer to construction programs.
The following formats are available:
ALLPLOT transfer files (*.asf)

STRAKON transfer files (*.cfe)

ISBCAD transfer files (*.fem)

ZEICON transfer files (fax*)

These formats require a plane area structure. For other structures it makes sense to export the reinforcement for one plane
after another. If the selected elements are not on the same plane, a projection plane has to be defined. If required, also a
local coordinate system has to be defined.
Averaged values are transferred for calculation at the nodes or side middles.

Punching Shear Check

The punching shear check can be accessed from the Structure menu and is performed interactively for selected element
nodes. The following figure shows a punching object on a column. The required bending and shear reinforcement is noted.

Punching object
Input
Off
Listing
Enter

Turns off the representation of punching objects.

Log and show punching shear check for all punching objects. The log is stored in the database.
Create a punching object at the selected node and perform the punching shear check.

The standard used for the check is chosen according to the concrete class used. A selection dialog appears if this cannot be
identified automatically. More information can be found in the respective chapters about Reinforced Concrete Design.

149

Finite Elements

Examples
Slab with Mindlin-Reissner Elements
This example shows the lateral force behavior of the Mindlin-Reissner elements. The type of support has a decisive effect on
the progress of the lateral forces. The following pictures show comparably the results of a jointed and a Navier support.

Slab, Mindlin-Reissner
C20/25, EN 1992-1-1
Height = 20 cm
Uniform load: 5 kN/m

System with dimensions

Jointed supports

Support reactions Rz [kN/m]

Lateral forces qx [kN/m]

Navier supports

Support reactions Rz [kN/m]

150

Lateral forces qx [kN/m]

Navier supports

Examples

Buckling Eigenmodes of a Column

The illustrated structure was analyzed by Rubin and Aminbaghai (Stahlbau (1997), Issue 5). To detect buckling eigenmodes
of structures, the load type Pki should be entered in the corresponding load case.

Case 1:

EI1 = 15000 kNm , EI2= 20000 kNm

H11 = 3 kN,

V11 = 200 kN,

H5 = 2 kN,

V5 = 300 kN,

P = 400 kN

H5 = 2 kN,

V5 = 0 kN,

P = 400 kN

Case 2:

EI1 = EI2= 15000 kNm

H11 = 3 kN,

V11 = 0 kN,

Material properties
No. Mat.
EModule GModule Poisson alpha.t
gamma
type
[MN/m]
ratio
[1/K]
[kN/m]
---------------------------------------------------1 S235
210000
81000 0.30 1.200e-05
78.500
2 S235
210000
81000 0.30 1.200e-05
78.500
3 S235
210000
81000 0.30 1.200e-05
78.500
Section properties
No.

ST
A = 1.000e+00 [m]
Ix = 1.000e+00 [m4],
No. 2 ST
A = 1.000e+00 [m]
Case 1: Ix = 1.000e+00 [m4],
Case 2: Ix = 1.000e+00 [m4],
No. 3 ST
A = 1.000e+00 [m]
Ix = 1.000e+00 [m4],

Iy = 7.140e-05 [m4], Iz = 1.000e+00 [m4]

Iy = 9,520e-05 [m4], Iz = 1.000e+00 [m4]
Iy = 7.140e-05 [m4], Iz = 1.000e+00 [m4]
Iy = 1.000e+00 [m4], Iz = 1.000e+00 [m4]

151

Finite Elements
Node description
No.
x [m]
y [m]
z [m]
--------------------------------------1
0.000
0.000
0.000
2
0.000
0.000
-1.000
3
0.000
0.000
-2.000
4
0.000
0.000
-3.000
5
0.000
0.000
-4.000
6
0.000
0.000
-5.000
7
0.000
0.000
-6.000
8
0.000
0.000
-7.000
9
0.000
0.000
-8.000
10
0.000
0.000
-9.000
11
0.000
0.000
-10.000
12
4.000
0.000
-2.800
13
-4.000
0.000
-2.800
Beam elements
No.

Ele- Start
End
Angle CrS Mat
Joints
Length Layer
ment Node
Node
[]
Q M
Q M
[m]
type
xyzxyz xyzxyz
------------------------------------------------------------------------1 RS
1
2
-0.00
2
2
0
0
1.000
2
2 RS
2
3
-0.00
2
2
0
0
1.000
2
3 RS
3
4
-0.00
2
2
0
0
1.000
2
4 RS
4
5
-0.00
2
2
0
0
1.000
2
5 RS
5
6
-0.00
1
1
0
0
1.000
2
6 RS
6
7
-0.00
1
1
0
0
1.000
2
7 RS
7
8
-0.00
1
1
0
0
1.000
2
8 RS
8
9
-0.00
1
1
0
0
1.000
2
9 RS
9
10
-0.00
1
1
0
0
1.000
2
10 RS
10
11
-0.00
1
1
0
0
1.000
2
11 RF
5
12
-0.00
3
3
0
0
4.176
2
12 RF
12
11
-0.00
3
3
0
0
8.237
2
13 RF
5
13
-0.00
3
3
0
0
4.176
2
14 RF
13
11
-0.00
3
3
0
0
8.237
2
Supports
Node Angle [] "F"=fixed, "-"=free, coeff. of resilience [MN/m bzw.MNm] Tenno.
x
y
z
ux
uy
uz
phi.x
phi.y
phi.z sion loss
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------1 0.0 0.0 0.0
F
F
F
F
F
F
L:x-y-z
2 0.0 0.0 0.0
F
F
F
L:x-y-z
3 0.0 0.0 0.0
F
F
F
L:x-y-z
4 0.0 0.0 0.0
F
F
F
L:x-y-z
5 0.0 0.0 0.0
F
F
F
L:x-y-z
6 0.0 0.0 0.0
F
F
F
L:x-y-z
7 0.0 0.0 0.0
F
F
F
L:x-y-z
8 0.0 0.0 0.0
F
F
F
L:x-y-z
9 0.0 0.0 0.0
F
F
F
L:x-y-z
10 0.0 0.0 0.0
F
F
F
L:x-y-z
11 0.0 0.0 0.0
F
F
F
L:x-y-z
12 0.0 0.0 0.0
F
F
F
L:x-y-z
13 0.0 0.0 0.0
F
F
F
L:x-y-z
Load data Load case

1 (Case 1)

KNL : Nodal load

Node
Px
Py
Pz
from to
[kN]
5
5
2.00
0.00
300.00
11
11
3.00
0.00
200.00
12
13
0.00
0.00
400.00
PKI : Buckling eigenvalues and mode shapes
Number of eigenvalues 4
Load data Load case

Mx
0.00
0.00
0.00

My
[kNm]
0.00
0.00
0.00

0.00
0.00
0.00

2 (Case 2)

KNL : Nodal load

Node
Px
Py
Pz
from to
[kN]
5
5
2.00
0.00
0.00
11
11
3.00
0.00
0.00
12
13
0.00
0.00
400.00
PKI : Buckling eigenvalues and mode shapes
Number of eigenvalues 4

Mx
0.00
0.00
0.00

0.00
0.00
0.00

The stability analysis delivers, in complete agreement with the above publication, the following buckling eigenmodes and
results:

152

Examples
Case 1

Case 2

Buckling load factor = 2.14

Buckling load factor = 3.58

Buckling lengths:

sk group 1 = 7.724 m
sk group 2 = 8.425 m

Buckling lengths:

sk group 1 = 6.559 m
sk group 2 = 7.185 m

Excerpt from the finite elements log

Load factors of the mode shapes

load case

No.
load factor rel. tol.
-----------------------------1
3.5836e+00 6.2365e-07
2
7.0151e+00 6.2251e-07
3
1.9320e+01 4.1153e-07
4
3.2522e+01 6.4108e-07
Buckling length's load case

Beam
Pki [kN] EIy [kNm] sk.y [m]
EIz [kNm] sk.z [m]
-------------------------------------------------------------1
-2866.85 1.4994e+04
7.185
2.1000e+08 850.270
2
-2866.85 1.4994e+04
7.185
2.1000e+08 850.270
3
-2866.85 1.4994e+04
7.185
2.1000e+08 850.270
4
-2866.85 1.4994e+04
7.185
2.1000e+08 850.270
5
-3440.22 1.4994e+04
6.559
2.1000e+08 776.187
6
-3440.22 1.4994e+04
6.559
2.1000e+08 776.187
7
-3440.22 1.4994e+04
6.559
2.1000e+08 776.187
8
-3440.22 1.4994e+04
6.559
2.1000e+08 776.187
9
-3440.22 1.4994e+04
6.559
2.1000e+08 776.187
10
-3440.22 1.4994e+04
6.559
2.1000e+08 776.187

Lateral Torsional Buckling of a Shell Structure

The following shell model of a compression beam is supported on one side in a fixed manner according to Euler case 1. The
profile and system dimensions are illustrated below. The system is made of S235 construction steel.

According to Peterson, the ideal buckling load is (formula according to Steinbach) PKi = 56.4 kN. The load P is represented
by a line load along the element edges on the face. Its load sum is equivalent to 1 kN.
153

Finite Elements
For the system detailed above, the FEM calculation delivers the following results for the first 4 buckling eigenmodes.
Influences such as shear strain and warping are taken into account.

Buckling eigenmode 1, load factor = 54.12 (torsional buckling)

Buckling eigenmode 2, load factor = 190.52 (buckling around the z axis of the section)

Buckling eigenmode 3, load factor = 345.88 (buckling around the y axis of the section)

Buckling eigenmode 4, load factor = 422.60 (buckling around the z axis, second eigenmode)

154

Examples

Silo Foundation Based on the Modulus of Compressibility Method

The use of this method for slab calculations is illustrated based on the example of a silo surface foundation (H.Ahrens and
Winselmann, 1984). The four silo cells are led over nine constant area loads into the 0.8 m thick, 10 x 10 m foundation slab
that rests on the layered subsoil. The slab measurements and the load contact areas can be seen in the illustration.

= 520

= 800

= 1120 kN

Slab: B25
Element thickness d = 0.8 m

Foundation slab with load

The slab elements must be assigned a material with a bedding modulus in z direction (kbz). It is needed as a start value for
the calculation. The ultimate depth (rock) of the halfspace can be given a very high modulus of compressibility
(100000 MN/m, for example) in the last soil layer.
Material properties
No. Mat.
EModule GModule Poisson alpha.t
gamma
type
[MN/m]
ratio
[1/K]
[kN/m]
---------------------------------------------------1 B25
30000
13000 0.20 1.000e-05
25.000
Bedding properties
Sec.
kbx
kby
kbz
bx
by
bz
No.
[MN/m]
[m]
---------------------------------------------------1
0.0
0.0
10.0
1.00
1.00
1.00
Soil properties for the stiffness module method
Layer no.
from z [m]
Module Es [MN/m]
-----------------------------------------------1
0.00
40.00
2
5.00
120.00
3
20.00
100000.00
The last layer extends up to z=infinite.
Section properties
No.

FL d=0.8

155

Finite Elements
Load data Load case

1 (Silo load)

GR2 : Uniformly distributed load - rectangular area (global)

x [m]
y
z
qx[kN/m] qy
0.000
0.00
0.00
2. Point:
1.250
0.750
0.000
3. Point:
1.250
1.250
0.000
1. Point:
4.750
0.750
0.000
0.00
0.00
2. Point:
5.250
0.750
0.000
3. Point:
5.250
1.250
0.000
1. Point:
8.750
0.750
0.000
0.00
0.00
2. Point:
9.250
0.750
0.000
3. Point:
9.250
1.250
0.000
1. Point:
0.750
4.750
0.000
0.00
0.00
2. Point:
1.250
4.750
0.000
3. Point:
1.250
5.250
0.000
1. Point:
4.750
4.750
0.000
0.00
0.00
2. Point:
5.250
4.750
0.000
3. Point:
5.250
5.250
0.000
1. Point:
8.750
4.750
0.000
0.00
0.00
2. Point:
9.250
4.750
0.000
3. Point:
9.250
5.250
0.000
1. Point:
0.750
8.750
0.000
0.00
0.00
2. Point:
1.250
8.750
0.000
3. Point:
1.250
9.250
0.000
1. Point:
4.750
8.750
0.000
0.00
0.00
2. Point:
5.250
8.750
0.000
3. Point:
5.250
9.250
0.000
1. Point:
8.750
8.750
0.000
0.00
0.00
2. Point:
9.250
8.750
0.000
3. Point:
9.250
9.250
0.000
TH : Calculation theory 1. order

emente 12.20c 1.
x64Point:
InfoGraph
0.750 GmbH
0.750

Global equilibrium control

qz
2080.00
3200.00
2080.00
3200.00
4480.00
3200.00
2080.00
3200.00
2080.00

load case 1

Rx [kN]
Ry
Rz
----------------------------------------------------Load
:
0.00
0.00
6400.00
Support reaction:
0.00
0.00
0.00
Bedding forces
:
0.00
0.00
6400.00
----------------------------------------------------Sum
:
0.00
0.00
0.00

Element mesh and dimensions (illustration limited to half of the system)

Moment curve mx [kNm/m] in section AA

Soil pressure sz [kN/m] in section AA

156

H_Silo.fem - Blatt 1

Examples

Construction Stages, Creep Redistribution

Following the creation and process of construction stages are described. For every construction stage a separate project file
is created for which all calculation options are available.
At a simple example, the calculation of creep redistribution as a result of a system change is explained with the help of
construction stages.
Construction stages
The system 'inherits' all the properties from one construction stage to the next. During this process, the subsequent stage
stores all the information about its predecessor. This information prevents the redundant use of load cases, elements and
similar items when the subsequent stage is being processed.
The program assigns an attribute to the project files to ensure their coherency. Hence there is no need to bypass the system
to add or delete construction stages.
When calculating a construction stage, the results of the preceding stage are copied and then processed so that they can be
combined or superposed with the results from the current file.
Procedure:
1. First the original system for the first construction stage is to be entered.
2. To save the file a file name ending in (1) is to be used. For example, bridge(1).FEM (this activates the Construction
Stage... function).
3. The necessary calculations and checks for this project are to be performed before editing the next construction stage.
4. With the function Construction Stage... and the dialog option New the second construction stage (here: Bridge(2).fem)
is automatically generated and activated.
5. Now the desired system modifications or additions can be made.
6. When the internal force calculation begins, the results from the previous system are copied and made available for load
case combinations and superpositions, as if they are calculated for the current construction stage.
7. With this method additional construction stages can be created.

It can be switched between the individual construction stages by simply double-clicking them.
The function New can be used to attach or add a subsequent stage after the currently selected construction stage.
The preceding stage has to be fully processed before generating the next construction stage. Later changes to a
construction stage concerning information inherited by the subsequent stage must be manually added to the successor
using the Edit... option.
Exceptions:
1. Changes within a load case. To update the results, the construction stage and the subsequent stage have to be
recalculated in sequential order.
2. Changes to the element properties.
Creep redistribution as a result of a system change
The original system, construction stage 1, consists of 2 single-span beams with a length of 4.00 m and 6.00 m. Material:
C20/25 acc. to EN 1992-1-1, Section: T-beam.

157

Finite Elements
For the original system the following is calculated (results see below):
Load case 1:

Dead load

Load case 2:

Creep t0 = 10 to t1 = 30 days; with j(t1,t0) = j(30,10) = 0.87; creep-generating continuous load:

LC 1

Now the construction stage 2 is generated and the system changes are implemented here. By removing the joint, a
continuous model is created. The additional load is applied and calculated:
Load case 3:

Additional load 10 kN/m

The internal forces and deformations after 30 days result from the dead load + creep + the additional load:
Load case 4:

Superposition LC 1, 2 and 3 (superposition of the results)

The creep redistribution up to the final state is calculated by:

Load case 5:

Creep t1 = 30 to final state; Dj(,30) = j(,10) - j(30,10) = 2.51 - 0.87 = 1.64; creep-generating
continuous load: LC 4

The final state results from load case 4 and 5:

Load case 6:

Final state (superposition of the results LC 4+LC 5)

The superposition load type is especially suitable for adding the results of different load cases (which can derive from
different construction stages).
Construction
stage
Load case 1:
Dead load
Load case 2:
Creep
j(30,10)

Bridge(1).fem

Load case 3:
Additional load

Load case 4:
LF 1+2+3
Bridge(2).fem
Load case 5:
Creep
Dj(,30)
Load case 6:
Final state

For comparison:

Monolithic model

158

Internal forces My

Deformations
(1000-fold superelevated)

Examples

Cable Mesh
This example shows a 2D cable mesh. As can be seen in the following illustrations, normal forces result in the cables
because of the point load active vertical to the mesh.
Cable section:
E-modulus:
Prestressing:

1.625 cm
150000 MN/m
0.0 kN

System measurements with load [kN]

Deformation figure superelevated by a factor of 2

Internal forces Nx [kN]

159

Finite Elements

High-Rise Based on the Substructure Technique

The following example shows a 17-floor high-rise, which was calculated as a global system as part of a dynamic analysis. For
this reason the floor slabs were discretized relatively roughly. A much finer division for a static analysis would have been
possible without an appreciable increase in the calculation time, as the number of global nodes would not have increased.
The substructural division was performed by assigning each floor slab or vertical element of a floor to one substructure. The
numbering is illustrated in the figure.
Assembly of the substructures
Subglobal
structure nodes
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
120
125
130
135
140
145
150
155
160
165
170
175
180

115
198
115
561
115
198
115
198
115
198
115
198
115
198
115
198
115
198
115
198
115
198
115
198
115
198
115
198
115
198
115
198
73
198
73

local
nodes

Ele- Bandments width

50
100
50
100
50
100
50
100
50
100
50
100
50
100
50
100
50
100
50
100
50
100
50
100
50
100
50
100
50
100
50
82
41
82
41

146
243
146
617
146
243
146
243
146
243
146
243
146
243
146
243
146
243
146
243
146
243
146
243
146
243
146
243
146
243
146
234
98
234
98

84
150
84
300
84
150
84
150
84
150
84
150
84
150
84
150
84
150
84
150
84
150
84
150
84
150
84
150
84
150
84
150
60
150
60

Stiffness
matrix
1.7
3.7
1.7
13.0
1.7
4.0
1.7
3.7
1.7
3.7
1.7
3.7
1.7
3.7
1.7
3.7
1.7
3.7
1.7
3.7
1.7
3.7
1.7
3.7
1.7
3.7
1.7
3.7
1.7
3.7
1.7
3.5
936.4
3.5
936.4

MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
MB
KB
MB
KB

System characteristics overall system

Structure model of a high-rise with substructural division

Nodes
Elements
Unknown variables
Bandwidth
Stiffness matrix

6597
7019
39582
2184
429.5 MB

Information protokoll
The information log from the substructurization shows that, except for substructure 25, the information can be condensed
into small work units. The data for the entire system illustrates the advantage of substructuring. The required memory for
the calculation of a load case is 130 MB in this application.

160

References

References
Ahrens, H.; Winselmann, D.
Finite Elemente, Anwendungen in der Baupraxis (Finite Elements, Applications in Construction); FEM '84'.
Ernst & Sohn Verlag, Berlin 1984.
Bathe, K. J.
Finite-Elemente-Methoden (Finite Element Methods).
Springer Verlag, Berlin 1986.
Bathe, K. J.; N. Dvorkin E.
A four-node plate bending element based on Mindlin/Reissner plate theory and a mixed interpolation.
International journal for numerical methods in enginieering, Vol. 21, P. 367-383
John Wiley & Sons, New York 1985.
Crisfield, M.A.
Non-Linear Finite Element Analysis of Solids and Structures.
Wiley Ltd, Chichester 1997.
Duddeck, H.; Ahrens, H.
Statik der Stabwerke (Statics of Frameworks), Betonkalender 1985.
Ernst & Sohn Verlag, Berlin 1985.
Ernst, G.C.; Smith G.M.; Riveland A.R.; Pierce D.N.
Basic reinforced concrete frame performance under vertical and lateral loads.
ACI Material Journal 70(28), P. 261-269.
American Concrete Institute, Farmingten Hills 1973.
Hampe, E.
Statik rotationssymmetrischer Flchentragwerke, Band 2, Kreiszylinderschale
(Statics of Rotationally Symmetric Shell Structures, Volume 2, Cylindrical Shells).
VEB Verlag fr Bauwesen, Berlin 1968.
Hirschfeld, K.
Baustatik Theorie und Beispiele (Structural Analysis Theory and Examples).
Springer Verlag, Berlin 1969.
Jofriet, J.C.; M. McNeice
Finite element analysis of reinforced concrete slabs.
Journal of the Structural Division (ASCE) 97(ST3), 785-806.
American Society of Civil Engineers, New York 1971.
Katili, I.
A new discrete Kirchhoff-Mindlin element based on Mindlin-Reissner plate theory and assumed shear strain fields
Part I: An extended DKT element for thick-plate bending analysis.
International journal for numerical methods in enginieering, Vol. 36, P. 1859-1883
John Wiley & Sons, New York 1993.
Kindmann, R.
Traglastermittlung ebener Stabwerke mit rumlicher Beanspruchung
(Limit Load Determination of 2D Frameworks with 3D Loads).
Institut fr Konstruktiven Ingenieurbau,
Ruhr Universitt Bochum, Mitteilung Nr. 813, Bochum 1981.
Knig, G.; Weigler, H.
Schub und Torsion bei elastischen prismatischen Balken (Shear and Torsion for Elastic Prismatic Beams).
Ernst & Sohn Verlag, Berlin 1980.
Krtzig, W.B.; Meschke, G.
Modelle zur Berechnung des Stahlbetonverhaltens und von Verbundphnomenen unter Schdigungsaspekten
(Models for Calculating the Reinforced Concrete Behavior and Bonding Phenomena under Damage Aspects).
Ruhr Universitt Bochum, SFB 398, Bochum 2001.
Link, M.
Finite Elemente in der Statik und Dynamik (Finite Elements in Statics and Dynamics).
Teubner Verlag, Stuttgart 1984.
Petersen, Ch.
Statik und Stabilitt der Baukonstruktionen (Statics and Stability of Constuctions).
Vieweg Verlag, Braunschweig 1980.
Quast, U.
Nichtlineare Stabwerksstatik mit dem Weggrenverfahren (Non-linear Frame Analysis with the Displacement-Method).
Beton- und Stahlbetonbau 100.
Ernst & Sohn Verlag, Berlin 2005.

161

Finite Elements
Rubin, H.; Aminbaghai, M.
Ein Stabilittsproblem mit berraschungen (A Stability Problem with Surprises).
Stahlbau 66, Issue 5.
Ernst & Sohn Verlag, Berlin 1997.
Schwarz, H. R.
Methode der finiten Elemente (Method of Finite Elements).
Teubner Studienbcher.
Teubner Verlag, Stuttgart 1984.
Stempniewski, L.; Eibl, J.
Finite Elemente im Stahlbetonbau (Finite Elements in Reinforced Concrete Construction) Betonkalender 1993.
Ernst & Sohn Verlag, Berlin 1993.
Wriggers, P.
Nichtlineare Finite-Element-Methoden (Nonlinear Finite Elements Method).
Springer Verlag, Berlin 2001.
Zienkiewicz, O. C.
Methode der finiten Elemente, Studienausgabe (Method of Finite Elements, Study Edition).
Hanser Verlag, Mnchen 1984.
Zienkiewicz, O. C.; Taylor, R. L.
Finite Element Method for Solid and Structural Mechanics.
Butterworth-Heinemann Ltd, Oxford 2006.
Zhi-Hua Zhong
Finite Element Procedures for Contact-Impact Problems.
Oxford University Press, Oxford 1993.

162

Basics

3D Frame
Basics
The 3D Frame program system is designed for the analysis of 2D and 3D framework and truss constructions. The following
example image shows a beam model of a hall construction.

Static system with activated section representation

Bending momnets min,max My [kNm]

Notes on the bases of calculation are in chapter 'Finite Elements / Basics'.

163

3D Frame

Structure Description
The following Structure menu functions allow you to edit the framework model and graphically represent the results:
Element Input
Element Properties...
Element Info
View...
Mesh Check
Element System
Number Sort
Supports
Load
Predeformation
Moving Nodes
Condense
Link Elements
Print Input Data...
Results...

The general procedure for data input, analysis and data representation of a structure is described in the document
Introductory_Examples.pdf installed in the program directory.

Element Input
This menu item is used to input beams.
Input
Starting point
Properties
Generate

Input a beam from starting to end point.

The beam properties dialog is called up with this option.
The entered line is split into n beams of the same length. In conjunction with the polygon, square and
beam section types, you can specify different start and end sections. The program then interpolates the
selected number of sections. This enables the modeling of a haunch. The position of the polygon points
are interpolated for polygon sections. For this to work, the number and arrangement of the polygon
points must match one another.

Interpolated sections
When entering beams in 3D mode, a point in the local xz plane is queried. For 2D input, the program uses the default
orientation.

164

Structure Description

Element Properties
This dialog is used to edit the properties of selected beams or preset the properties for new beams yet to be created. The
dialog consists of the following pages:
General

Equivalent beam length

Section

General
This dialog shows the general beam properties.
Nodes
Display the node coordinates.
Length
Display the beam length [m].
Angle
Rotation of the local coordinate system about the x axis with respect to the default orientation in [].

Joints
The joint properties can be specified separately for each degree of freedom. When selected, the corresponding degree of
freedom is defined as jointed. The arrow indicates the selected end of the beam. A beam with two ball joints is treated like
a truss element.
Joint springs
Spring rigidity [MN/m, MNm] with which the respective beam end (a = start, b = end) is elastically attached to the node. If
no value is defined, the respective joint property applies.

Equivalent Beam Length

Section
The section describes the following properties of a beam:
Section form

Specifications for determination of shear stresses

Material

Bedding

Specifications for reinforced concrete design

Specifications for thermal analysis

Fire exposure for the simplified check according to EN 1995-1-2

165

3D Frame
Each section is uniquely identified by a number between 1 and 9999. In general a section is not assigned to a single beam
but rather a group of beams.

Polygon

Steel section with profile number.

T: T steel according to DIN 1024.

Material Type
B25 to B55: Concrete qualities according to DIN 1045:1988, Table 1.

C12/15 to C100/115: Concrete qualities according to ENV 1992-1-1 or DIN 1045-1

(C55/67 or higher only for design according to DIN 1045-1).

LC12/13 to LC60/66: Concrete qualities according to DIN 1045-1.

C12/15-EN to C90/105-EN: Concrete qualities according to EN 1992-1-1.

C12/15-EN-D to C100/115-EN-D: Concrete qualities according to DIN EN 1992-1-1.

C16/20 to C50/60: Concrete qualities according to OENORM B 4710-1.

NB40: Concrete quality according to OENORM B 4200-10.

NBeton: Concrete according to OENORM with user-defined properties.

SC12/15 to SC50/60: Concrete qualities according to SIA262 or SN EN206-1.

SLC12/13 to SLC50/55: Concrete qualities according to SIA262 or SN EN206-1.

SCX: Concrete according to SIA262 or SN EN206-1 with user-defined properties.

166

Structure Description

S235, S275, S355, S450: Construction steel according to DIN 18800 T1, Table 1.
S235-EN, S275-EN, S355-EN, S450-EN: Construction steel according to EN 10025-2.
NH1, NH2, NH3: Softwood grade I, II and III according to DIN 1052:1988.
BSH1 , BSH2: Glued laminated lumber grade I and II according to DIN 1052:1988.
C14 to C50, D18 to D70: Solid timber according to EN 338.
GL20h to GL32h, GL20c to GL32c: Glued laminated timber according to EN 14080.
Frei: User-defined material.
Beton: User-defined concrete.
Stahl: User-defined steel.

New
Create a new section.
Copy
Copy the current section.
Delete
Delete the current section.
Label
The section can be labeled with any text.
Depending on the section and material type, further dialogs are available:
Form

Shear stresses

Material

Bedding

DIN 1045-1

DIN EN 1992-1-1

EN 1992-1-1

OENORM B 4700

OENORM EN 1992-1-1

SIA 262

SS EN 1992-1-1

EN 1995-1-2

Thermal analysis

Polygon Section
A
Display of the calculated section area [m].
Ix
Torsion moment of inertia [m4].
With regards to use in solid construction, a very small stiffness is suggested by the program. For dynamic calculations,
defining an overly small torsion stiffness generally leads to unwanted eigenmodes (torsion vibrations), so a realistic value
should be used.
Compute Ix
Calculate the torsion moment of inertia of the polygon. The result is entered into the text field for Ix.
Iy, Iz, Iyz
Display the calculated moments of inertia [m4].
Ignore Iyz in beam stiffness
Ignore lyz in the beam stiffness.

167

3D Frame
Edit...
The graphical editing of the section geometry is carried out in a separate window. The section is defined with edge and hole
bordering lines.

File Menu of the Editing Window

Polygon Menu of the Editing Window

168

Structure Description
Label
Switch the labeling of the polygon on or off.
Refresh
Refresh the displayed polygon labeling.
Settings
Set the type and scope of labeling as well as edge distance for the input of the reinforcing steel.
Take over
edge /
hole
Adopt the edge and/or hole bordering lines from other lines, for example, after the DXF import of a section drawing.
Section properties
Show detailed section properties (e.g. shear center, resistance momenta, unit warping w).
Effective width
Definition of the effective flange width by selection of the areas outside of the effective width. For this purpose the section
is automatically divided into triangles. The selected areas are not taken into account for the calculation of the centroid
coordinates and the bending moments of inertia.
For reinforced concrete sections the following procedure is recommended:
Input of the full polygon with polygon points at the boundaries of the effective width

Selection of the areas outside of the effective width

Positioning of the concrete steel layers within the effective width

Hatched representation of the section parts outside of the effective width

Alternatively, the section polygon can be defined reducing the section dimensions based on the effective width.

Section polygons reduced to the effective width

169

3D Frame
Zv0
This force is used to take into account an initial strain e0 = Zv0 /EA for calculation of the reinforcing steel stresses.

Rectangle Section
For this section type no reinforced concrete check can be carried out.
Width dy, Height dz
Expansion of the rectangle in the local y or z direction of the beams [m].

Only pressure: The beams only transmit compressive forces.

Only tension: The beams only transmit tensile forces.

The use of compressive or tensile beams leads to a nonlinear calculation. In this case the principle of superposition no longer
applies.

Tension Member
This section type describes beams without compressive strength. They should be attached flexibly, if possible. The use of this
section type leads to a nonlinear analysis. In this case, the superposition principle is no longer valid. No check can be
performed for tension members.
A
Section area [m].

170

Structure Description

Intersections and shear stress distribution from lateral force at the section polygon according to the theory of thick-walled
profiles (t) and after averaging (tm)

Material
E-modulus
Modulus of elasticity [MN/m].
G-Modulus
Shear modulus [MN/m].
Gamma
Specific weight of the material [kN/m]. This is used for the Dead load load type.
alpha.t
Coefficient of thermal expansion [1/K].
fyk
For the material type Stahl the characteristic yield strength must be entered as well [MN/mm].
Apparent density
Apparent density of lightweight concrete and timber [kg/m].
ke for E-Mod.
Factor for calculation of the modulus of elasticity according to SIA 262, Section 3.1.2.3.3.
Service Class
A service class has to be selected for the timber checks of cross-sections made of timber according to EN 388 and
EN 14080.

3D Frame

For the material type Frei the corresponding strength limits must additionally be specified for a nonlinear system analysis.
Compression
Yield strength for compressive stresses fy,compression (positive value) [MN/m].
Tension strength
Yield strength for tensile stresses fy,tension (positive value) [MN/m].
In general, a nonlinear analysis can only be performed for polygon sections, database sections and steel sections. For all
other section types and for the material types Beton and Timber an elastic material behavior is assumed.

Bedding
Bedding modulus x, y, z
Bedding moduli for beam directions [MN/m].
Bedding width
For each bedding modulus an bedded width [m] is to be specified.
Compressive or tensile strength (nonlinear system analysis)
The strengths [MN/m] defined here are only valid for nonlinear system analysis. This can be used to realize a bilinear
bedding characteristic in the compressive and tensile section (see also 'Foundation Models').

Element Info
This function shows the following beam properties graphically at the beam and in the status bar:
Beam number

Node numbers

Beam system

Section

Material

Joints

172

Structure Description

View
This menu item is used to display and check the structure properties.

Numbering
You can label beams, nodes and supports with their numbers. Material or section numbers can also be added to beams.
The display of the numbers can be limited to values > 1. Alternatively, the section name can be added to beams.
Text height
Set minimum and maximum text heights [mm].
Beam section
The beam section is drawn at the middle of the beam.
Beam nodes
The beam nodes are marked by a symbol.
Shrink mode
Enable or disable shrunken beam representation. Most of the input functions are inactive in this mode.
Shrink factor
Define shrink factor for the shrink mode.
Joint info in shrink mode
In shrink mode the existing beam end joints are labeled. Joint springs are labeled with '*'.
Full symbols for supports
The properties of the supports are shown in detail. The scroll bar changes the size of the icons in use.
Icons

Fixed

Free

Fixed

Free

Fixed

Free

Fixed

Free

Fixed

Free

Fixed

Free

Fixed

Free

Fixed

173

3D Frame

Coordinate system
Activates the coordinate system for beams or supports.
Coloring
The beams are displayed in the color that corresponds to their material or section number. The color assignment can be
modified if necessary.
Legend
Enable/disable the color legend.
All off
Turn off all display options.

Mesh Check
With this menu item beams and nodes can be checked.
Node distance
The function checks if there are further nodes in the neighborhood of a node within the given tolerance. After confirmation,
the so-called duplicate nodes are marked by red arrows and you are queried if you want to merge them. In this case their
coordinates are averaged.
Beam distance
Checks if any beams lie on one another, for instance, due to redundant beam entry. The beams that are found are marked
by red arrows.

Element System
This menu item is used to change the coordinate system of selected beams.

+x, -x
+z, -z
y, z
Angle

By exchanging the start and end nodes of the beam, the positive or negative x axis points to the specified
point.
The spatial orientation of the section is defined by a point. The point defines the direction of the positive
or negative z axis. As an option, the direction can also be reset to the default orientation.
The orientation of the selected axis is defined by specifying two points.
The beam is rotated about the beam axis (local x axis).

Number Sort
This menu item is used to change beam and node numbers.
Input
Sort
Define
Edit

174

Sort node or beam numbers geometrically.

Define new start values and increments for node and beam numbers.
Edit node and beam numbers.

Structure Description

Supports
This function is used to define supports. A support describes the support conditions of a system node. The individual
degrees of freedom can be supported in a fixed or elastic manner. The direction of the degrees of freedom can deviate from
the global coordinate system. The supported nodes are labeled with simple or detailed red icons (see View).
Create
Start the input of supports through the selection of nodes. The subsequent editing takes place using the context menu
functions:
Support

Orientation

Info
Displays the support system with the bound degrees of freedom for a selected support.
Note: When the function is active only supports can be selected. This improves the handling of these objects.

Predeformation
This function is used to enter and edit stress-free node displacements for a structure. As part of the system analysis, these
node displacements are added to the initial node coordinates and may serve for example as a geometric imperfection for
calculations according to the second-order theory. To be considered for calculations, the predeformation must be activated
within the load group definition.
The following options allow you to define predeformations or subsequently change them, if necessary.
Create a copy of the current predeformation.
Add the selected predeformation to the current predeformation.
Start the representation options dialog.
End the predeformation display.
Create a new predeformation.
Display an existing predeformation.
Change the number of the current predeformation.
Delete the predeformation.
Edit the predeformation.
Start the precurvature input.
Start the predeformation input.
Absolute input of the predeformation refers to the initial system, relative input refers to the already deformed system.

2
3
1

L
300

Inclination
1:200
2

Predeformation of a hall construction

Precurvature of a column
1: 1st point of base line, 2: 2nd point of base line, 3: Point in base plane

175

3D Frame

Moving Nodes
This function is used to change the location of selected nodes. In the case of a single beam node, simply specify the new
position. If multiple beam nodes are to be moved, you should choose the Group or Beams option.
Group
Select the beam nodes to be moved.
Beams
Select the beams, whose nodes are to be moved.
Displacement vector
Movement through displacement. The displacement vector is defined by two points.
Rotate
Movement through rotation. A rotation point is defined in 2D mode while a rotation axis is defined in 3D mode.
Mirror
Movement through mirroring. A mirror axis is defined in 2D mode while a mirror plane is defined in 3D mode.
Scaling
Movement through scaling in the global or local reference system. You can align nodes on an axis or plane by specifying a
scaling factor of zero.
Scaling base point
Scaling:
(global)
x = 0.5
y = 0.5
z = 0.5

Scaling:
(To plumb nodes onto a line)

x=1
y=0
z=0
1

1: Scaling base point

2: Direction of local x axis
3: Point in local xy plane

If desired, displaced nodes that coincide with non-selected nodes can be merged with these.

Finding Nodes or Beams

If you are looking for a node with a particular number, the functions Select Nodes and Move Nodes can be of help. Enter
the node number you are looking for into this function.
If you are looking for a beam with a specific number, use the functions Element Info or Select. The beam number can be
entered in both functions. If the beam is not identifiable even though it is selected, you can query further information using
the Element Properties function. The selected objects' color and layer are displayed in the toolbar.

176

Structure Description

Condense
This function is used to condense existing beams.
Point
At the point specified a node is inserted on the beam axis.
Divide
Selected beams are divided. Enter the desired number of parts.
Adapt
The selected beams are checked for whether any nodes touch their axes. If necessary, the beams in question are divided at
these nodes.

Arranging Beams
This function is used to align selected beams with a reference beam.
The local z axes of the beams must point in the same direction. The orientation is performed through displacement in the
local z direction until the zero levels correspond to those of the reference beam.
The zero level is at z = 0 in the section polygon. Optionally, the level may be defined as follows:
z=0 (default)

Top face

Bottom face

Additionally, stiff link elements are created between the old and new nodes. The top node of the link element becomes the
dependent node, as long as it does not have a support defined to it. Link elements that already exist are retained.

Beams before and after the alignment (default)

Link Elements
Kinematic dependencies between the global degrees of freedom of two beam nodes can be defined with the Link Elements
function. This is done by expressing the nodal degrees of freedom of a dependent node through the degrees of freedom of
the reference node by way of an equation of condition.
for example uz,dep. = f1ux,ref. + f2uy,ref. + f3uz,ref. + f4jx,ref. + f5jy,ref.+ f6jz,ref.
with
f1, f2, f3

Factors for the displacements,

f4, f5, f6

Factors for the rotations.

You can link any number of dependent nodes to a reference node. Nodes with supports may not be defined as dependent
nodes. The link elements are displayed with dotted lines. Additionally, an arrow points to the reference node.
After selecting the dependent nodes and the reference node, you must define the link element type.
Type
Stiff: Stiff link element (abbreviation: SS).

Jointed: One-sided jointed link element with a ball joint at the dependent node (abbreviation: GS).

ux, ... phi.z: Dependent degree of freedom of the user-defined equation of condition. The factors for the displacements

and rotations of the equation of condition have to be defined.

177

3D Frame
Equations of condition for the stiff link elements in the xz plane.
Dependent

178

Reference

ux,3

= ux,2 - dzjy,2

uz,3

= uz,2 - dxjy,2

jy,3

= jy,2

Load

Load
The following chapter describes load input as well as the different load types.
The specified loads are represented with icons. In 3D mode, point and line loads are scaled according to their load
ordinates. For point loads the resulting load direction is drawn. The orientation of line loads and line moments is indicated
by an arrow.
Beam loads generally act on the centroidal axis of the beams. For asymmetrical sections the effect of the eccentricity of the
shear center on the fixed-end reactions is not accounted for.
A load case is made up of one or multiple loads. The following options allow you to define load cases or subsequently
change them, if necessary.

Create a copy of the current load case.

Generate load cases according to the rules set out by the Generate function. This leads to the duplication of either all
or only the selected loads.
Import load data.
Start the representation options dialog.
End the load representation.
Create a new load case.
Show an existing load case.
Change the number and name of the current load case.
Start the load input.
Load cases can be renumbered in groups within the database tree.
With the context function Scale load the load values of multiple selected loads can be scaled with a factor.

Input
The dialog box is used to input load data within a load case.

The load types are explained on the following pages. For easier identification they are labeled with load abbreviations.

179

3D Frame

Dead Load
The entire structure is stressed by its dead load (load abbreviation: EG).
Input
Weighting X, Y,
Z direction

The weighting factors allow for defining the direction of effect as well as scaling the dead load. They
refer to the global coordinate system.

Influence Line
Input
Selection of the desired beam (load abbreviation: EFL).
Load point

Load point in the beam. The distance from the beam start is saved.

Influence line

"Nx", "Qy", "Qz", "Mx", "My", "Mz".

The ordinates of the resulting influence line are expressed as deformation in the direction of the load to be analyzed.

Influence line "My" for a continuous girder

Inserting of Load Case Data

First load case that is inserted.

Last load case

Last load case that is inserted.

Weighting factor

Factor by which to multiply all load data.

Support Displacement
The support displacement acts on supported nodes in the direction of the bound degrees of freedom (load abbr.: DS).
Input
Selection of the affected supports.
ux, uy, uz

Displacements [mm].

phi.x, phi.y, phi.z

Rotations [rad/1000].

Support displacement uz

Support rotation jy

180

Load

Superposition of Load Cases

First load case to be superposed.

Last load case

Last load case to be superposed.

Weighting factor

Factor by which to multiply all results.

Temperature
Input
Selection of the stressed beams (load abbreviation: TEMP).
tm

Temperature as a difference to the installation temperature [K].

tb - tt

Temperature difference between the bottom and top side of the section [K].

tr - tl

Temperature difference between the right and left side of the section [K].

For the calculation the following coherences apply:

= aT tm

kT,y = aT (tb - tt)/dz

kT,z = aT (tr - tl)/dy
This load type is inadmissible for the section type Beam, because the dimensions dy and dz are not defined. Alternatively the
load type Initial Strain can be used.

Temperature, Initial Strain

Input
Selection of the stressed beams (load abbreviation: TMPA).
tm

Temperature as a difference to the installation temperature [K].

(tb - tt)/dz

Temperature difference between bottom and top side of the section with respect to the section height [K/m].

(tr - tl)/dy

Temperature difference between right and left side of the section with respect to the section width [K/m].

Section with thermal load

Theory
This load type (load abbreviation: TH) is used to specify the calculation theory for the load case in question.
Input
2. order theory

Calculation according to the geometric second-order theory.

Number of iterations

This value is not used at the moment.

Error

Error threshold for the relative size of the remaining residuum in [%].
Only values 1% are permissible.

No soil pressure > 0

Disregard tensile stresses in the foundation area.

When using this load type, make sure to pay attention to the notes provided in the Load group section.

181

3D Frame

Predeformation
This load type (load abbreviation: VV) is used to predeform the structure. To do so, enter the predeformation number.

Load Group
This load type (load abbreviation: GRL) is especially suited for preparing load cases for nonlinear calculation. It allows you to
compile loads from existing load cases by retrieving the necessary load factors and to activate the desired calculation theory.
The load group is used to group the existing load types Insert, Theory and Predeformation into a load type.
General
Theory

1. / 2. order theory: Calculation according to geometric first- or second-order theory.

Error threshold

Error threshold for the relative size of the remaining residuum in [%].
Only values 1% are permissible.

No soil pressure > 0

Disregard tensile stresses in the foundation area.

Add. global load factor

Additional factor for all loads.

Predeformation

Number of the predeformation.

Load cases

Select load cases to add them to the selection list.

Load factor

The individual load cases are weighted by a factor.

Apply

Change the weighting factor for selected load cases.

Calculate the creep coefficient for every activated line.

All sec. identical

Takes over the input values of the 1st table entry for the further cross-sections.

phi

Creep coefficient.

Calculated

Yes: The creep coefficient is determined from the further parameters.

t0, t

Load start and concrete age.

Factor

Optional factor for the calculated creep coefficient.

This is used for example for the determination of jef according to EN 1992-1-1:2004 from the
calculated coefficient.

When using this load type, the following should be observed.

Calculation according to the second-order theory
Before carrying out a calculation according to the second-order theory, make sure the system is kinematically stable
according to the first-order theory. A failure in stability due to beam buckling is recognized during calculation according to
the second-order theory by a singularity of the system of equations or of a beam stiffness matrix. The calculation aborts in
this case and informs you about the location and the failed degree of freedom. In borderline cases it may be necessary to
set the error threshold to '0' in order to determine the failure state.
Error threshold
All nonlinear problems are solved iteratively. The length of the error vector, the residuum, is used to control the iteration. It
is shown for each iteration step in the output bar. The iteration is ended when the remaining residuum has reached the
specified error threshold in relation to the initial residuum. The calculation results have, on average, a relative error of the
same extent. If the error threshold cannot be reached, the calculation program issues a corresponding message.

182

Load
Loss of tensile bedding
Unrealistic load combinations (for instance, a missing dead load) can lead to loss of all bedding (see also 'Foundation
Models'). If the system becomes relocatable due to this, then the calculation is aborted because of a singular system of
equations. The relocatable degree of freedom is provided.
Consideration of tension and compression beams
For structures with tension and compression beams, the iterative determination of the equilibrium state is automatically
carried out with an error threshold of 1%. In the load case a smaller value can be specified. Instabilities due to beam failure
lead to a singular system of equations, in which case the calculation will abort.
Load combination
In order to combine the decisive actions for calculations according to the second-order theory or with loss of tensile
bedding, transfer the corresponding load cases to the selection list and assign them load factors.
For calculations according to DIN 18800, Part 2, or EN 1993-1-1 the following different cases exist:
a) Calculation according to the geometric second-order theory with linear material law according to elasticity theory and
subsequent elastic-elastic or elastic-plastic check. The internal forces are to be determined according to the standard
with gM-fold design values of the actions. To do so, the load cases of the selection list are to be weighted with the
factor gF. Additionally, gM is to be specified as the global load factor.
b) Ultimate limit state check according to the geometric second-order theory with nonlinear material law according to the
plasticity theory. In this case gM is considered on the resistance side according to the standard. The internal forces
calculation is to be carried out with the design values of the actions. Therefore, only gF needs to be provided as a
weighting factor.
Prohibition of superposition
Calculations with tension and compression beams, according to the second-order theory or excluding tensile bedding are
performed on the basis of nonlinear iteration. So in these cases the superposition principle is no longer valid, meaning the
results may not be additively superposed with other results. Further processing using load case combinations is only
permissible if these only contain mutually exclusive actions.

Point Load
Input
Global orientation

Point load in the global system (load abbreviation: FG).

Local orientation

Point load in the beam system (load abbreviation: FL).

Load point

Load point in the beam. The distance from the beam start is saved.

Px, Py, Pz

Load components in the directions of the selected coordinate system [kN].

Point Moment
Input
Load point
Mx, My, Mz

Load point in the beam. The distance from the beam start is saved (load abbreviation: ML).
Load components in the beam system [kNm].

Point moment on the beam

183

3D Frame

Nodal Load
Nodal loads act in the global system (load abbreviation: KNL).
Input
Selection of the stressed beam nodes.
Px, Py, Pz
Forces [kN].
Mx, My, Mz
Moments [kNm].

Line Load
Input
Selection of the stressed beams.
Global orientation

Line load in the global system (load abbreviation: LG).

Local orientation

Line load in the beam system (load abbreviation: LL).

qx, qy, qz

Load components in the directions of the selected coordinate system [kN/m].

Global line load (qx, qy, qz)

Local line load

Line Torsional Moment

Input
Selection of the stressed beams (load abbreviation: MT).
mtx
Line torsional moment [kNm/m].

Line torsional moment about the beam axis

184

Load

Trapezoidal Load
Input
Selection of the stressed beams.
Starting point

Load start.

End point

Load end.

Global x, y, z

Trapezoidal load in the global system (load abbreviation: TA + GX, GY, GZ).

Local x, y,

Trapezoidal load in the beam system (load abbreviation: TA + LX, LY, LZ).

Projection x, y, z

Projection of the trapezoidal load in the global system

(load abbreviation: TA + PX, PY, PZ).

Starting ordinate

Load ordinate at the load start in the directions of the selected coordinate system [kN/m].

End ordinate

Load ordinate at the load end in the directions of the selected coordinate system [kN/m].

The load is automatically distributed over multiple beams for a trapezoidal load. The distances from the beam starts, the
load lengths, and the interpolated load ordinates are automatically determined for selected beams. This allows you to
describe a trapezoidal load for an entire beam series with a single input.

Trapezoidal load on beam

Fixed-end Reactions
The fixed-end reactions at the beam start (load abbreviation:S0A) or beam end (load abbreviation: S0E) must be input
separately.
Input
Selection of the stressed beams.
Nx, Qy, Qz
Normal and lateral force [kN].
Mx, My, Mz
Moments [kNm].

Fixed-end reactions at the beam start and end.

185

3D Frame

Analysis
The Analysis menu is used to make program-specific settings and to launch the analysis programs.
Settings...
Batch...
Statics
Section Temperatures
Load Case Combination
DIN 1045-1 Design
DIN EN 1992-1-1 Design
EN 1992-1-1 Design
OENORM B 4700 Design
OENORM EN 1992-1-1 Design
SIA 262 Design
SS EN 1992-1-1 Design
Single Design
DIN 18800 Steel Checks
EN 1993-1-1 Steel Checks
DIN 1052 Timber Checks
EN 1995-1-1 Timber Checks
Selected Elements
Stop Analysis
During the analysis the program's progress is shown in the output bar along with any possible warnings and error
messages.

Settings Statics

Calculate all load cases

All load cases are calculated (default).

186

Analysis
Calculate following load cases
The load cases from the left list box are calculated.
Force recalculation
If this switch is activated, all of the selected load cases will be recalculated. Otherwise, the calculation program checks
whether a recalculation is necessary.
Save stiffness matrix
The global stiffness matrix is saved for further use.
Nonlinear analysis
A nonlinear system analysis is performed. The Settings button opens the settings dialog for the ultimate limit state, the
serviceability and the fire scenario check. Load cases selected in the setting dialog (nonlinear analysis) are calculated instead
of the selection made here.
Number of beam result locations
The internal forces are calculated at equidistant points in the beam. By default five result locations are used. For bedded
beams the reactions are only calculated in the nodes.
Listing
No listing: The calculation program generates no log.

Create listing: A log is generated during the calculation according to the selection list.

Batch
Use this menu item to run all selected analyses as a batch job.

187

3D Frame

Selected internal forces representation My of a hall construction

Sum of installed loads and support reactions

LC.

Label

Fx [kN]

Fy [kN]

Fz [kN]

Dead load
Support reactions

-0.000
0.000

0.000
-0.000

1224.149
1224.149

Wind
Support reactions

82.426
82.426

34.142
34.142

0.000
-0.000

Deflection theorie
Support reactions

123.639
123.639

51.213
51.213

1837.119
1837.119

Tabular output of the load sums

Result Bar
The result bar includes the following buttons for representing results:
Start the dialog for result representation.
Turn off result representation.
Ordinate selection for manual labeling.
Enable result representation for the selected beams.
Disable result representation for the selected beams.
Insert result marker for fire scenario stresses. During the analysis the section stress distribution of every time step is
stored for the marked locations. The results can be displayed by double-clicking the corresponding marker.
Output the ordinate value at the marked point in the status bar.

188

Results

Result Categories
The following dialog shows possible result categories.

The load case and combination results as well as all presentable result components are listed in the subsection of the
respective category. After making a selection, the Settings tab offers views described below with additional options. The
symbol in front of the item identifies the type of view ( e.g. : table view,
: graphical view of internal forces).
Results of a fire scenario analysis for a selected time step are shown like the results of a
load case. The progression of results can be represented for a selected location in a
diagram. Altenatively, the results can be animated for the whole system (deformation
figure, result graph), if a superordinate component is chosen.

Deformation Figure
Scale
The scale can be set automatically or manually. The node displacements are multiplied by the distortion factor and added to
the node coordinates. For load cases the bending curve is displayed as well.
Display original system in dashed manner
Switch on/off the dashed non-deformed system during deformation display.
Label
Auto: Automatically add labels to the nodes listing the length of the displacement vector [mm].

Off: Disable labeling.

Limit value for labeling

Only displacements exceeding the limit value are labeled.
Text height [mm]
The unit depends on the output device.

189

3D Frame
Decimal places
Standard: Automatic setting of decimal places.

0 - 3: Number of decimal places.

Superelevated deformation figure

Numeric
This view displays the support reactions or deformations numerically.
Lower boundary for presentation
Only results exceeding the limit value are output.
Text height [mm]
The unit depends on the output device.
Decimal places
Standard: Automatic setting of decimal places.

0 - 3: Number of decimal places.

Display of the support reactions with the components Rx, Ry, Rz [kN] and Mx, My, Mz [kNm]

Result Graphs
The results are plotted along the beam axis. A linear progress of results is assumed between the result locations.
Scale
The scale of the ordinate display can be set automatically or manually.

190

Results
Label
Auto: Enable automatic labeling.

Off: Disable labeling.

Everywhere: Label all ordinates.

Selectable: Choose manual labeling with the help of the result bar.

Limit value for labeling

Only ordinates exceeding the limit value are labeled.
Decimal places
Standard: Automatic setting of decimal places.

0 - 3: Number of decimal places.

Text height [mm]

The unit depends on the output device.
Steel layer grouping...
Define the grouping of the steel layers with this function.

During automatic grouping, all steel layers with a z component smaller than the z component of the centroid are displayed
on the upper side of the elements, all other layers on the lower side.
For manual grouping, steel layers can be moved between the list boxes using the mouse. The steel layers of the middle list
box are not displayed.
Subtract base reinforcement
The base reinforcements defined for the sections are subtracted from the computed reinforcement and the remaining
reinforcement is displayed.

Section Stresses
The stress curve is illustrated on a section in a dialog window. This can be accessed via the context menu of the beams
when displaying result graphs for stresses or internal forces.
Load case
Select the calculated load cases and combinations.
Set
Select the internal force set for the stress determination. The absolute extreme values of the stresses from all internal force
sets are displayed using Extreme value.
Beam
Number of the selected beam.
Location
Select the result location in the beam.

191

3D Frame
Section
Description of the displayed section.
Nx, Qy, Qz, Mx, My, Mz
Internal forces at the selected result location, from which the displayed stress curve results.
Stress
The stresses are generally calculated while taking the linear elastic material behavior into consideration. For results from a
nonlinear system analysis, the stresses of the plastic state are displayed on polygon sections and steel sections made of
construction steel (S235 to S450 or S235-EN to S450-EN) or Stahl.
Sigma.x: Longitudinal stresses from bending moments and longitudinal force.

Sigma.v: Comparison stresses according to the Huber-von Mises yield criterion.

Sigma.1,2: Main stresses from bending moments, longitudinal force, lateral forces and torsion.

Tau.r: Shear stresses from lateral forces and torsion parallel to the edge.

Tau.xy: Shear stresses from lateral forces and torsion in y direction.

Tau.xz: Shear stresses from lateral forces and torsion in z direction.

Shear stress txz represented as lines along the edge and as 3D face
192

Results

Result List
The result list is output for selected beams in the data editor. It can be accessed via the beam context menu.

The output can be limited to certain load cases using the Load Case Selection option of the context menu.

Create load group...

Create superposition load case

Associated deformations

Associated support forces

Last Combination
Shows result values corresponding to the last Combination information.

193

3D Frame

Example - Steel Hall According to the Second-Order Theory

In the following example a 3D steel hall (S235) is analyzed according to the second-order theory.

Static system

Section properties
HEA 360

0.35

Main axis angle [Grad]

0.3
HEA 300

0.29

0.171

HEA 180

0.18

194

Centroid [m]
Area [m]
Moments of inertia [m4]
Main axis angle [Grad]

0.3
3

Centroid [m]
Area [m]
Moments of inertia [m4]

Centroid [m]
Area [m]
Moments of inertia [m4]
Main axis angle [Grad]

ys
A
Ix
Iy
Iz
Phi

= 0.000
= 1.4300e-02
= 1.4900e-06
= 3.3090e-04
= 7.8900e-05
= 0.000

ys
A
Ix
Iy
Iz
Phi

= 0.000
= 1.1300e-02
= 8.5600e-07
= 1.8260e-04
= 6.3100e-05
= 0.000

ys
A
Ix
Iy
Iz
Phi

= 0.000
= 4.5300e-03
= 1.4900e-07
= 2.5100e-05
= 9.2500e-06
= 0.000

zs = 0.000
Iyz = 0.0000e+00
I1 = 3.3090e-04
I2 = 7.8900e-05
zs = 0.000
Iyz = 0.0000e+00
I1 = 1.8260e-04
I2 = 6.3100e-05
zs = 0.000
Iyz = 0.0000e+00
I1 = 2.5100e-05
I2 = 9.2500e-06

Example - Steel Hall According to the Second-Order Theory

Load data Load case

1 (Dead load)

DEAD LOAD

Load data Load case

2 (Wind)

Load data Load case 3 (second-order theory)

The illustrated predeformation is taken into account for the analysis according to the second-order theory.

Load data load case 3: Second-order theory

Load group (GRL)
Theory: 2. order theory
No soil pressure > 0: No; No support reac. < 0: No; Error threshold [%]: 1.00
Additional global load factor: 1.10; Predeformation: 1
Consider concrete creeping in the nonlinear analysis: No
Selected load cases
No.
Label
Factor
1
2

Dead load
Wind

1.35
1.5

195

3D Frame

Selected internal forces My [kNm] from load case 3

Selected internal forces Nx [kN] from load case 3

Design per DIN 18800-1 (2008)
The design according to the method Elastic-Elastic is carried out considering
chapter 7.5.2 with the Clauses 746 to 749.
The design according to the method Elastic-Plastic is carried out considering
chapter 7.5.3 with the Clauses 753 and 755.
The action combinations are calculated according to chapter 7.2.2 with the
Equations (12)-(15) and (17). For the design, the appropriate extremum
of Equations (13) and (14) is decisive.
Designing occurs for the extreme values of actions.
Terms in Printout
Sigma.x, Sigma.v:
Tau.xy, Tau.xz :
x
:
A
:
Ix,Iy,Iz,Iyz
:
Aqy,Aqz
:
Wqy, Wqz, Wt
:
Pl. Util.
:

Normal stresses, comparison stresses acc. to Eq. (36).

Shear stresses from lateral forces Qy, Qz and tors. moment Mx.
Location in the beam, measured by the startpoint [m].
Sectional area.
Moments of inertia.
Shear subareas of the polygon section for Qy und Qz.
Resistance moments of the ext. shear stress of Qy, Qz, Mx.
Plastic utilization, defined as the ratio of the load
internal forces and the plastic limit state internal forces.

Stress Calculation
The normal stresses and shear stresses are calculated for homogeneous
polygon sections from normal force, bending moments, lateral force and torsion.
The shear characteristics are calculated acc. to the Boundary-Element-Method.
The calculation points for all stresses are edge points of the cross-section.
Calculation of the Plastic Limit State Internal Forces
The plastic limit state internal forces are calculated by integration
on the polygon section. With it the interaction of all internal forces
Nx, Qy, Qz, Mx, My and Mz is considered.
For simplification the following assumptions are made:
- The lateral forces produce with their corresponding subareas
constant shear stresses Tau=Qy/Aqy and/or Tau=Qz/Aqz.
- For the subareas and the remaining area, the torsional moment Mx
produces constant shear stresses, which are equal to the maximum
shear stress at the edge of each area.
If no subareas are defined, the following assumptions are made:
- The lateral forces produce constant shear stresses Tau=Qy/Wqy
and/or Tau=Qz/Wqz for the whole section area.
- The torsional moment Mx produces the constant shear stress
Tau=Mx/Wt for the whole section area.

196

Example - Steel Hall According to the Second-Order Theory

The shear characteristics are calculated with use of the BoundaryElement-Method at the section edge.
The Huber-v. Mises-Condition as per Eq. (36) is used as yield criterion.
The plastic limit state moments are limited to the 1.25-fold value
of the elastic limit state moments (DIN 18800, Clause 755).
Partial Safety Factors for Steel
gamma.M
1.10
1.10
1.00

Fundamental combination
Accidental combination
Special combination
Characteristic Properties

Yield stresses of steel as per Table 1 for t <= 40 mm [MN/m].

Limiting stresses according to Clause 746.
Material fyk
S235
240

Fundam. C.
Sigma.Rd Tau.Rd
218.18 125.97

Accid. C.
Sigma.Rd Tau.Rd
218.18 125.97

Special C.
Sigma.Rk Tau.Rk
240.00 138.56

Cross-Section Properties
Cross-section
1 HEA 360

Material
S235

A[mm]
14300

2 HEA 300

S235

11300

3 HEA 180

S235

4530

Aqy[mm]
Aqz[mm]
10500
2859
8400
1986
3420
814

Iy[m4]
Iz[m4]
3.3090e-04
7.8900e-05
1.8260e-04
6.3100e-05
2.5100e-05
9.2500e-06

Ix[m4]
Iyz[m4]
1.4900e-06
0.0000e+00
8.5600e-07
0.0000e+00
1.4900e-07
0.0000e+00

DIN 18800 actions

Standard design group
G - Dead load
Gamma.sup / gamma.inf = 1.35 / 1
Load cases
---------1
Dead load
QW - Wind load
Gamma.sup / gamma.inf = 1.5 / 0
Combination coefficients for: Standard
Standard
Psi.0 / Psi.1 / Psi.2 = 0.9 / 0 / 0

Maximum elastic utilization sv / sR

Load cases 1. Variant, inclusive

-------------------------------2
Wind
Fd - Design values of actions
Load cases
---------3
second-order theory
1. Fundamental combination
Final state
G - Dead load
QW - Wind load
1. Special combination
Final state

Maximum plastic utilization

Fd - Design values of actions

197

2D Frame

2D Frame
Basics
The 2D Frame program system is designed for calculating 2D beam constructions. The following example image shows the
beam model of a hall frame.

Static system of a hall frame

Notes on the bases of calculation are in chapter 'Finite Elements / Basics'.

Coordinate Systems
A framework model consists of the following structure objects with their own (local) coordinate systems. All coordinate
systems are right-handed systems.
Beams
The following illustration depicts the local coordinate system of a beam.

The local beam coordinates have their origin in the beam's start node (a). The local x axis runs from (a) to (e), the beam's
end node.
Supports
Normally, the support system corresponds to the global coordinate system. The support system can by changed by rotating
the local axes.

local x axis rotated

Support system with rotated x axis

198

Structure Description

The general procedure for data input, analysis and data representation of a structure is described in the document
Introductory_Examples.pdf installed in the program directory.

Element Input
This menu item is used to input beams.
Input
Starting point
Properties
Generate

Input a beam from start to end point.

Interpolated sections

199

2D Frame

Element Properties
This dialog is used to edit the properties of selected beams or preset the properties for new beams yet to be created. The
dialog consists of the following pages:
General

Equivalent beam length

Section

General
This dialog shows the general beam properties.
Nodes
Display the node coordinates.
Length
Display the beam length [m].

Joints
The joint properties can be specified separately for each degree of freedom. When selected, the corresponding degree of
freedom is defined as jointed. The arrow indicates the selected end of the beam.
Joint springs
Spring rigidity [MN/m, MNm] with which the respective beam end (a = start, b = end) is elastically attached to the node. If
no value is defined, the respective joint property applies.

Equivalent Beam Length

Section
The section describes the following properties of a beam:
Form

Specifications for determination of shear stresses

Material

Bedding

Specifications for reinforced concrete design

Specifications for thermal analysis

Fire exposure for the simplified check according to EN 1995-1-2

Each section is uniquely identified by a number between 1 and 9999. In general, a section is not assigned to a single beam
but rather to a group of beams.

200

Structure Description

Polygon

Steel section with profile number.

Library: Section library with steel sections.

Database: Profile from the user database (Anwend.pro).

Rectangle

Tension member

Material Type
B25 to B55: Concrete qualities according to DIN 1045:1988, Table 1.

C12/15 to C100/115: Concrete qualities according to ENV 1992-1-1 or DIN 1045-1

(C55/67 or higher only for design according to DIN 1045-1).

LC12/13 to LC60/66: Concrete qualities according to DIN 1045-1.

C12/15-EN to C90/105-EN: Concrete qualities according to EN 1992-1-1.

C12/15-EN-D to C100/115-EN-D: Concrete qualities according to DIN EN 1992-1-1.

C16/20 to C50/60: Concrete qualities according to OENORM B 4710-1.

NB40: Concrete quality according to OENORM B 4200-10.

NBeton: Concrete according to OENORM with user-defined properties.

SC12/15 to SC50/60: Concrete qualities according to SIA262 or SN EN206-1.

SLC12/13 to SLC50/55: Concrete qualities according to SIA262 or SN EN206-1.

SCX: Concrete according to SIA262 or SN EN206-1 with user-defined properties.

S235, S275, S355, S450: Construction steel according to DIN 18800 T1, Table 1.

S235-EN, S275-EN, S355-EN, S450-EN: Construction steel according to EN 10025-2.

NH1, NH2, NH3: Softwood grade I, II and III according to DIN 1052:1988.
201

2D Frame

BSH1 , BSH2: Glued laminated lumber grade I and II according to DIN 1052:1988.
C14 to C50, D18 to D70: Solid timber according to EN 338.
GL20h to GL32h, GL20c to GL32c: Glued laminated timber according to EN 14080.
Frei: User-defined material.
Beton: User-defined concrete.
Stahl: User-defined steel.

Shear stresses

Material

Bedding

DIN 1045-1

DIN EN 1992-1-1

EN 1992-1-1

OENORM B 4700

OENORM EN 1992-1-1

SIA 262

SS EN 1992-1-1

EN 1995-1-2

Thermal analysis

Polygon Section
A
Display of the calculated section area [m].
Iy
Display of the calculated bend moment of inertia [m4].
Edit...
The graphical editing of the section geometry is carried out in a separate window. The section is defined with edge and hole
bordering lines.

Structure Description
are several eligible points, the one with the smallest z value is chosen.
After the polygon points have been entered in the database, the order of the points that has been determined there is also
valid for the graphical representation for as long as the polygon remains unmodified.
Reinforcem...
Properties of each reinforcing steel layer of the selected sections.

File Menu of the Editing Window

Polygon Menu of the Editing Window

Line
Enter an individual edge or hole bordering line.
Circle
Tube
Rectangle
Downstand Beam
Upstand Beam
These section types are created automatically after the relevant parameters have been entered. Optionally, reinforcing steel
can be simultaneously defined in the specified edge distance.
Reinforcing steel
The reinforcing steel for the bending design can be freely positioned in the section. A guide line with the set edge distance
is displayed as a visual aid. The displayed reinforcing steel number helps to identify the steel layers during output of the
results. The steel properties (e.g. yield strength fyk, base reinforcement) are preset. For marked reinforcing steel, properties
can be edited in the context menu.
Label
Switch the labeling of the polygon on or off.
Refresh
Refresh the displayed polygon labeling.
Settings
Set the type and scope of labeling as well as edge distance for the input of the reinforcing steel.
Take over
edge /
hole
Adopt the edge and/or hole bordering lines from other lines, for example, after the DXF import of a section drawing.
Section properties
Show detailed section properties (e.g. shear center, resistance momenta, unit warping w).

203

2D Frame
Effective width
Definition of the effective flange width by selection of the areas outside of the effective width. For this purpose the section
is automatically divided into triangles. The selected areas are not taken into account for the calculation of the centroid
coordinates and the bending moments of inertia.
For reinforced concrete sections the following procedure is recommended:
Input of the full polygon with polygon points at the boundaries of the effective width

Selection of the areas outside of the effective width

Positioning of the concrete steel layers within the effective width

Hatched representation of the section parts outside of the effective width

Alternatively, the section polygon can be defined reducing the section dimensions based on the effective width.

Section polygons reduced to the effective width

Rectangle Section
For this section type no reinforced concrete check can be carried out.
Width dy, Height dz
Expansion of the rectangle in the local y or z direction of the beams [m].

204

Structure Description

Beam Section
No checks can be performed for this section type.
A
Section area [m].
Iy
Bend moment of inertia [m4].
Longitudinal bearing
Standard: The beams transmit compressive and tensile forces.

Only pressure: The beams only transmit compressive forces.

Only tension: The beams only transmit tensile forces.

The use of compressive or tensile beams leads to a nonlinear calculation. In this case the principle of superposition no longer
applies.

Tension Member
This section type describes beams with no compressive strength. They should be attached flexibly, if possible. The use of this
section type leads to a nonlinear calculation. This means the superposition principal is no longer valid. No checks can be
performed for tension members.
A
Section area [m].

Intersections and shear stress distribution from lateral force at the section polygon according to the theory of thick-walled
profiles (t) and after averaging (tm)

Material
E-Modulus
Modulus of elasticity [MN/m].
G-Modulus
Shear modulus [MN/m].
205

2D Frame

Gamma
Specific weight of the material [kN/m]. This is used for the Dead load load type.
alpha.t
Coefficient of thermal expansion [1/K].
fyk
For the material type Stahl the characteristic yield strength must be entered as well [MN/mm].
Apparent density
Apparent density of lightweight concrete and timber [kg/m].
ke for E-Mod.
Factor for calculation of the modulus of elasticity according to SIA 262, Section 3.1.2.3.3.
Service Class
A service class has to be selected for the timber checks of cross-sections made of timber according to EN 388 and
EN 14080.

For the material type Frei the corresponding strength limits must additionally be specified for a nonlinear system analysis.
Compression
Yield strength for compressive stresses fy,compression (positive value) [MN/m].
Tension strength
Yield strength for tensile stresses fy,tension (positive value) [MN/m].
In general, a nonlinear analysis can only be performed for polygon sections, database sections and steel sections. For all
other section types and for the material types Beton and Timber an elastic material behavior is assumed.

206

Structure Description
Note
The modulus of elasticity is part of the stress-strain function according to EN 1992-1-1, Equation (3.14), and SIA 262,
Equation (28). The function has a pole that can move into the decisive strain range, if the given modulus of elasticity is
reduced. As a consequence, results of the nonlinear analysis and the reinforced concrete checks can be affected.

Bedding
Bedding modulus x, z
Bedding moduli for beam directions [MN/m].
Bedding width
For each bedding modulus an bedded width [m] is to be specified.
Compressive or tensile strength (nonlinear system analysis)
The strengths [MN/m] defined here are only valid for nonlinear system analysis. This can be used to realize a bilinear
bedding characteristic in the compressive and tensile section (see also 'Foundation Models').

Element Info
This function shows the following beam properties graphically at the beam and in the status bar:
Beam number

Node numbers

Beam system

Section

Material

Joints

View
This menu item is used to display and check the structure properties.

Numbering
You can label beams, nodes and supports with their numbers. Section numbers can also be added to beams. The display of
the numbers can be limited to values > 1. Alternatively, the section name can be added to beam.
Text height
Set minimum and maximum text heights [mm].
Beam section
The beam section is drawn at the middle of the beam.
207

2D Frame

Beam nodes
The beam nodes are marked by a symbol.
Shrink mode
Enable or disable shrunken beam representation. Most of the input functions are disabled in this mode.
Shrink factor
Define the shrink factor for the shrink mode.
Joint info in shrink mode
In shrink mode the existing beam end joints are labeled. Joint springs are marked with an asterisk '*'.
Full symbols for supports
The properties of the supports are shown in detail. The scroll bar changes the size of the icons in use.
Icons

Fixed

Free

Fixed

Free

Fixed

Free

Fixed

Free

Fixed

Coordinate system
Activate the coordinate system for beams or supports.
Coloring
The beams are filled with the color that corresponds to their section number. The color assignment can be modified if
necessary.
Legend
Enable/disable the color legend.
All off
Turn off all display options.

Mesh Check
This menu item is used to check beams and nodes.
Node distance
The function checks if there are further nodes in the neighborhood of a node within the given tolerance. After confirmation,
the so-called duplicate nodes are marked by red arrows and you are queried if you want to merge them. In this case their
coordinates are averaged.
Beam distance
Checks if any beams lie on one another, for instance, due to redundant beam entry. The beams that are found are marked
by red arrows.

208

Structure Description

Element System
This menu item is used to change the coordinate system of selected beams.
Input
+x, -x, +z, -z

By exchanging the start and end nodes of the beam, the positive or negative axis is directed at the
specified point.

Number Sort
This menu item is used to change beam and node numbers.
Input
Sort
Define
Edit

Sort node or beam numbers geometrically.

Define new start values and increments for node and beam numbers.
Edit node and beam numbers.

Supports
This function is used to define supports. A support describes the support conditions of a system node. The individual
degrees of freedom can be supported in a fixed or elastic manner. The direction of the degrees of freedom can deviate from
the global coordinate system (described by an angle). The supported nodes are labeled with simple or detailed red icons (see
View).
Create
Start the input of supports through the selection of nodes. The subsequent editing is performed using the context menu
functions:
Support

Orientation

Info
Display the support system with the bound degrees of freedom for a selected support.
Note: When the function is active only supports can be selected. This improves the handling of these objects.

209

2D Frame

Inclination 1:150

2
L

L
300

Predeformation of the selected node of a frame

1st

point of base line, 2:

2nd

1
Precurvature of a column

point of base line

Structure Description

Scaling
Movement through scaling in the global or local reference system. You can align nodes on an axis by specifying a scaling
factor of zero.
Scaling:
(To plumb nodes onto a line)

x=1
y=0
z=0
1

1: Scaling base point

2: Direction of local x axis
3: Point in local xy plane

If desired, displaced nodes that coincide with non-selected nodes can be merged with these.

Finding Nodes or Beams

If you are looking for a node with a particular number, the functions Select Nodes and Move Nodes can be of help. Enter
the node number you are looking for into this function.
If you are looking for a beam with a specific number, use the functions Element Info or Select. The beam number can be
entered in both functions. If the beam is not identifiable even though it is selected, you can query further information using
the Element Properties function. The selected objects' color and layer are displayed in the toolbar.

Link Elements
Kinematic dependencies between the global degrees of freedom of two beam nodes can be defined with the Link Elements
function. This is done by expressing the nodal degrees of freedom of a dependent node through the degrees of freedom of
the reference node by way of an equation of condition.
for instance ux,dependent = f1ux,reference + f2uz,reference + f3jy,reference
with

f1, f2

Factors for the displacements,

Factor for the rotation.

You can link any number of dependent nodes to a reference node. Nodes with supports may not be defined as dependent
nodes. The link elements are displayed with dotted lines. Additionally, an arrow points to the reference node.
After selecting the dependent nodes and the reference node, you must define the link element type.

211

2D Frame
Type
Stiff: Stiff link element (abbreviation: SS).

Jointed: One-sided jointed link element with a ball joint at the dependent node (abbreviation: GS).

ux, uz, phi.y: Dependent degree of freedom of the user-defined equation of condition. The factors for the

displacements and rotations of the equation of condition have to be defined.

User-defined equations of condition for a stiff link element
Dependent

Reference

ux,3

= ux,2 - dzjy,2

uz,3

= uz,2 - dxjy,2

jy,3

= jy,2

Arranging Beams
This function is used to align selected beams with a reference beam.
The local z axes of the beams must point in the same direction. The orientation is performed through displacement in the
local z direction until the zero levels correspond to those of the reference beam.
The zero level is at z=0 in the section polygon. Optionally, the level may be defined as follows:
z=0 (default)

Top face

Bottom face

Beams before and after the alignment (default)

212

Load

Load
The following chapter describes load input as well as the different load types. The specified loads are represented with
icons.
Beam loads generally act on the centroidal axis of the beams. For asymmetrical sections the effect of the eccentricity of the
shear center on the fixed-end reactions is not accounted for.
A load case is made up of one or multiple loads. The following options allow you to define load cases or subsequently
change them, if necessary.

Create a copy of the current load case.

Input
The dialog box is used to input load data within a load case.

The load types are explained on the following pages. For easier identification they are labeled with load abbreviations.

213

2D Frame

Dead Load
The entire structure is stressed by its dead load in the global z direction (load abbreviation: EG).

Influence Line
Input
Selection of the desired beam (load abbreviation: EFL).
Load point

Load point in the beam. The distance from the beam start is saved.

Influence line

"Nx", "Qz", "My".

The ordinates of the resulting influence line are expressed as deformation in the direction of the load to be analyzed.

Influence line "My" for a continuous girder

Inserting of Load Case Data

First load case that is inserted.

Last load case

Last load case that is inserted.

Weighting factor

Factor by which to multiply all load data.

Support Displacement
The support displacement acts on supported nodes in the direction of the bound degrees of freedom (load abbr.: DS).
Input
Selection of the affected supports.
ux, uz
Displacements [mm].
phi.y
Rotations [rad/1000].

Support displacement uz

Support rotation jy

214

Load

Superposition of Load Cases

First load case to be superposed.

Last load case

Last load case to be superposed.

Weighting factor

Factor by which to multiply all results.

Temperature
Input
Selection of the stressed beams (load abbreviation: TEMP).
tm

Temperature as a difference to the installation temperature [K].

tb - tt

Temperature difference between the bottom and top side of the section [K].

For the calculation the following coherences apply:

= aT tm

kT,y = aT (tb - tt)/dz

This load type is inadmissible for the section type Beam, because the dimension dz is not defined. Alternatively the load type
Initial Strain can be used.

Temperature, Initial Strain

Input
Selection of the stressed beams (load abbreviation: TMPA).
alpha.t

Coefficient of thermal expansion [1/K].

Temperature as a difference to the installation temperature [K].

(tb - tt)/d

Temperature difference between bottom and top side of the section with respect to the section height [K/m].

Section with thermal load

Theory
This load type (load abbreviation: TH) is used to specify the calculation theory for the load case in question.
Input
2. order theory

Calculation according to the geometric second-order theory.

Number of iterations

This value is not used at the moment.

Error

Error threshold for the relative size of the remaining residuum in [%].
Only values 1% are permissible.

No soil pressure > 0

Disregard tensile stresses in the foundation area.

When using this load type, make sure to pay attention to the notes provided in the Load group section.

215

2D Frame

Predeformation
This load type (load abbreviation: VV) is used to predeform the structure. To do so, enter the predeformation number.

Load Group
This load type (load abbreviation: GRL) is especially suited for preparing load cases for nonlinear calculation. It allows you to
compile loads from existing load cases by retrieving the necessary load factors and to activate the desired calculation theory.
The load group is used to combine the existing Insert, Theory and Predeformation load types into a single load type.
General
Theory

1. / 2. order theory: Calculation according to geometric first- or second-order theory.

Error threshold

Error threshold for the relative size of the remaining residuum in [%].
Only values 1% are permissible.

No soil pressure > 0

Disregard tensile stresses in the foundation area.

Add. global load factor

Additional factor for all loads.

Predeformation

Number of the predeformation.

Load cases

Select load cases to add them to the selection list.

Load factor

The individual load cases are weighted by a factor.

Apply

Change the weighting factor for selected load cases.

Calculate the creep coefficient for every activated line.

All sec. identical

Takes over the input values of the 1st table entry for the further cross-sections.

phi

Creep coefficient.

Calculated

Yes: The creep coefficient is determined from the further parameters.

t0, t

Load start and concrete age.

Factor

Optional factor for the calculated creep coefficient.

This is used for example for the determination of jef according to EN 1992-1-1:2004 from the
calculated coefficient.

When using this load type, the following should be observed.

216

Load
Loss of tensile bedding
Unrealistic load combinations (for instance, a missing dead load) can lead to loss of all bedding (see also 'Foundation
Models'). If the system becomes relocatable due to this, the calculation is aborted because of a singular system of
equations. The relocatable degree of freedom is provided.
Consideration of tension and compression beams
For structures with tension and compression beams, the iterative determination of the equilibrium state is automatically
carried out with an error threshold of 1%. In the load case a smaller value can be specified. Instabilities due to beam failure
lead to a singular system of equations, in which case the calculation will abort.
Load combination
In order to combine the decisive actions for calculations according to the second-order theory or with loss of tensile
bedding, transfer the corresponding load cases to the selection list and assign them load factors.
For calculations according to DIN 18800, Part 2, or EN 1993-1-1 the following different cases exist:
a) Calculation according to the geometric second-order theory with linear material law according to elasticity theory and
subsequent elastic-elastic or elastic-plastic check. The internal forces are to be determined according to the standard
with gM-fold design values of the actions. To do so, the load cases of the selection list are to be weighted with the
factor gF. Additionally, gM is to be specified as the global load factor.
b) Ultimate limit state check according to the geometric second-order theory with nonlinear material law according to the
plasticity theory. In this case gM is considered on the resistance side according to of the standard. The internal forces
calculation is to be carried out with the design values of the actions. Therefore, only gF needs to be provided as a
weighting factor.
Prohibition of superposition
Calculations with tension and compression beams, according to the second-order theory or excluding tensile bedding are
performed on the basis of nonlinear iteration. So in these cases the superposition principle is no longer valid, meaning the
results may not be additively superposed with other results. Further processing using load case combinations is only
permissible if these only contain mutually exclusive actions.

Point Load
Input
Global orientation

Point load in the global system (load abbreviation: EGX, EGZ).

Local orientation

Point load in the beam system (load abbreviation: EL).

Load point

Load point in the beam, which is specified depending on the load orientation.

Px, Pz, My

Global orientation x, z:

Coordinate difference Dx, Dz to the beginning of the beam.

Local orientation:

Distance from the beginning of the beam.

Load components in the directions of the selected coordinate system [kN] or [kNm].

Nodal Load
Nodal loads act in the global system (load abbreviation: KNL).
Input
Selection of the stressed beam nodes.
Px, Pz
Forces [kN].
My
Moment [kNm].

217

2D Frame

Line Load
Input
Selection of the stressed beams.
Global orientation

Line load in the global system (load abbreviation: LG).

Local orientation

Line load in the beam system (load abbreviation: LL).

Projection orientation

Projection of the trapezoidal load in the global system (load abbreviation: LP).

qx, qz

Load components in the directions of the selected coordinate system [kN/m].

Global line load

Local line load

Projective line load

Trapezoidal Load
Input
Selection of the stressed beams.
Starting point

Load start.

End point

Load end.

Global orientation

Trapezoidal load in the global system (load abbreviation: TG).

Local orientation

Trapezoidal load in the beam system (load abbreviation: TL).

Projection orientation

Projection of the trapezoidal load in the global system (load abbreviation: TP).

Starting ordinate

Load ordinate at the load start in the directions of the selected coordinate system [kN/m].

End ordinate

Load ordinate at the load end in the directions of the selected coordinate system [kN/m].

218

Load

Fixed-end Reactions
Input
Selection of the stressed beams (load abbreviation: S0).
Na, Qa, Ne, Qe

Normal and lateral force at the start and end of a beam [kN].

Ma, Me

Moment at the start and end of a beam [kNm].

Fixed-end forces at the start and end of a beam.

219

2D Frame

Settings Statics

Calculate all load cases

220

Create listing: A log is generated during the calculation according to the selection list.

Analysis

Batch
Use this menu item to run all selected analyses as a batch job.

Results
The following chapter describes the representation of the analysis results. Results can be shown graphically as well as in
tabular form. Their selection takes place in the database or with the Results function of the Structure menu.

Internal forces representation My of a hall construction

Sum of installed loads and support reactions
LC

Label

Fx [kN]

Fz [kN]

Dead load
Support reactions

0.000
0.000

227.550
227.550

Traffic from above

Support reactions

0.000
-0.000

30.000
30.000

Traffic span 1
Support reactions

0.000
0.000

37.500
37.500

Traffic span 2
Support reactions

0.000
-0.000

30.000
30.000

Wind from left

Support reactions

42.000
42.000

0.000
-0.000

Wind from right

Support reactions

-32.000
-32.000

0.000
0.000

Brunt load
Support reactions

10.000
10.000

0.000
-0.000

Tabular output of the load sums

221

2D Frame

Result Bar
The result bar includes the following buttons for representing results:
Start the dialog for result representation.
Turn off result representation.
Ordinate selection for manual labeling.
Enable result representation for the selected beams.
Disable result representation for the selected beams.
Insert result marker for fire scenario stresses. During the analysis the section stress distribution of every time step is
stored for the marked locations. The results can be displayed by double-clicking the corresponding marker.
Output the ordinate value at the marked point in the status bar.

Result Categories
The following dialog shows possible result categories.

The load case and combination results as well as all presentable result components are listed in the subsection of the
respective category. After making a selection, the Settings tab offers views described below with additional options. The
symbol in front of the item identifies the type of view ( e.g. : table view,
: graphical view of internal forces).
Results of a fire scenario analysis for a selected time step are shown like the results of a
load case. The progression of results can be represented for a selected location in a
diagram. Altenatively, the results can be animated for the whole system (colored,
deformation figure, result graph), if a superordinate component is chosen.

222

Results

Deformation Figure
Scale
The scale can be set automatically or manually. The node displacements are multiplied by the distortion factor and added to
the node coordinates. For load cases the bending curve is displayed as well.
Display original system in dashed manner
Switch on/off the dashed non-deformed system during deformation display.
Label
Auto: Automatically add labels to the nodes listing the length of the displacement vector [mm].

Off: Disable labeling.

Limit value for labeling

Only displacements exceeding the limit value are labeled.
Text height [mm]
The unit depends on the output device.
Decimal places
Standard: Automatic setting of decimal places.

0 - 3: Number of decimal places.

Superelevated deformation figure

Numeric
This view displays the support reactions or node deformations numerically.
Lower boundary for presentation
Only results exceeding the limit value are output.
Text height [mm]
The unit depends on the output device.
Decimal places
Standard: Automatic setting of decimal places.

0 - 3: Number of decimal places.

Result Graphs
Beam internal forces of load cases are applied with their exact curve along the beam axis. For all other results, a linear
progress of results is assumed between the result locations.
Scale
The scale of the ordinate display can be set automatically or manually.

223

2D Frame
Label
Auto: Enable automatic labeling.

Off: Disable labeling.

Everywhere: Label all ordinates.

Selectable: Choose manual labeling with the help of the results bar.

Limit value for labeling

Only ordinates exceeding the limit value are labeled.
Decimal places
Standard: Automatic setting of decimal places.

0 - 3: Number of decimal places.

Text height [mm]

The unit depends on the output device.
Steel layer grouping...
Define the grouping of the steel layers with this function.

224

Results
Section
Description of the displayed section.
Nx, Qy, Qz, Mx, My, Mz
Internal forces at the selected result location, from which the displayed stress curve results.
Stress
The stresses are generally calculated while taking the linear elastic material behavior into consideration. For results from a
nonlinear system analysis, the stresses of the plastic state are displayed on polygon sections and steel sections made of
construction steel (S235 to S450 or S235-EN to S450-EN) or Stahl.
Sigma.x: Longitudinal stresses from bending moment and longitudinal force.

Sigma.v: Comparison stresses according to the Huber-von Mises yield criterion.

Sigma.1,2: Main stresses from bending moment, longitudinal force and lateral force.

Tau.r: Shear stresses from lateral force parallel to the edge.

Tau.xy: Shear stresses from lateral force in y direction.

Tau.xz: Shear stresses from lateral force in z direction.

Shear stress txz represented as lines along the edge and as 3D face

225

2D Frame

Result List
The result list for selected elements is output in the data editor. It can be accessed over the context menu for the elements.

The output can be limited to specific load cases using the Load Case Selection option of the context menu.

Create load group...

Create superposition load case

Associated deformations

Associated support forces

Last Combination
Shows result values corresponding to the last Combination information.

226

Examples

Examples
Reinforced Concrete Frame
The reinforced concrete frame illustrated (C20/25, BSt 500/550, 3 cm overlap) is calculated and subsequently designed
according to DIN 1045-1.

Static system and section polygons

Load cases

DEAD LOAD

Load case 1: Dead load

Load case 2: Traffic from above

Load case 3: Traffic span 1

Load case 4: Traffic span 2

Load case 5: Wind from left

Load case 6: Wind from right

Load case 7: Impact load point load 1.4 m from support

227

2D Frame
DIN 1045-1 actions
Standard design group

G - Dead load

A - Accidental action

Gamma.sup / gamma.inf = 1.35 / 1

Load cases 1. Variant, exclusive

Load cases
1

Impact load

Dead load

1. Permanent and temporary situation

QN - Imposed load, traffic load

Final state

Gamma.sup / gamma.inf = 1.5 / 0

G
QN
QW

Combination coefficients for: Superstructures

Working load - category A - living rooms and lounges
Psi.0 / Psi.1 / Psi.2 = 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.3

Dead load
Imposed load, traffic load
Wind load

1. Accidental situation
Load cases 1. Variant, inclusive
Final state
2
3
4

Traffic from above

Traffic span 1
Traffic span 2

G
QN
QW
A

QW - Wind load

Dead load
Imposed load, traffic load
Wind load
Accidental action

Gamma.sup / gamma.inf = 1.5 / 0

1. Rare (characteristic) situation

Combination coefficients for: Superstructures

Wind loads
Psi.0 / Psi.1 / Psi.2 = 0.6 / 0.5 / 0

Final state
G
QN
QW

Load cases 1. Variant, exclusive

5
6

Dead load
Imposed load, traffic load
Wind load

Wind from left

Wind from right

Design overview DIN 1045-1 (2008-08)

Se. Class, Prestress
of component
1 E Not prestressed
2 E Not prestressed
(M)
(R)
(B)
(Q)
(T)
(S)
(P)
(C)

Reinforc.
M R B Q T
. . x x .
x . x x .

Fatig.
S P C
. . .
. . .

Crack- DeStress checks

width comp. Comp. S P
.
.
.
. .
.
.
.
. .

Nominal reinforcement to guarantee robustness (ductility).

Nominal reinforcement for crack width limitation.
Flexural reinforcement at ultimate limit state.
(Nominal-)lateral force reinforcement at ultimate limit state.
Torsional reinforcement at ultimate limit state.
Reinforcing steel at stress and fatigue check.
Prestressing steel at stress and fatigue check.
Concrete at fatigue check.

Settings for flexural and lateral reinforcement

fyk
Theta
Slabs
Asl
rhow
cvl

Quality of stirrups [MN/m].

Angle of concrete truss. Program-sided, the given value of cot Theta
is limited to the range of values acc. to equ. (73).
(Method of variable truss angle).
Beams are designed like slabs.
Given reinforcement according to picture 32, increase to maximum.
Minimum reinf. min rhow = Factor * rho with rho according to table 29.
Laying measure of the long. reinforcement to limt the lever arm z.

Se. Concr.
1 C20/25
2 C20/25

Density
[kg/m]
.
.

Design
fyk
Truss
for
Stirr. cot
M and N
[MN/m] Theta
Compression
500
1.00
Standard
500
1.00

Dsn. Asl [cm]

like
Pic. 32
Sl. given
max
.
0.00
.
.
0.00
.

Fac.
for
rhow
1.00
1.00

Dsn. L.m.
for
cvl
x,y
[m]
. 0.030
. 0.030

Shear sections
Se.
1
2

228

Width [m]
Eff. width
bw
bw.nom
bn [m]
0.300
.
.
0.300
.
.

Height [m] Eff.height

h
h.nom
d [m]
.
.
0.370
.
.
0.470

Torsion section [m]

z1
z2
teff B.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Examples
Results

Top and bottom bending reinforcement at the ultimate limit state [cm]

Stirrup reinforcement Asb [cm/m]

Influence Lines
The following example illustrates the calculation of influence lines (Hirschfeld. p. 355).

Static system with the field points for Nx, Qz, My

Material properties
No. Mat.EModule
alpha.t gamma
kbx
kbz
bx
bz
type
[MN/m]
[1/K] [kN/m]
[MN/m]
[m]
-------------------------------------------------------------------1 Frei
1 1.000e-05 25.000
0.0
0.0
1.00
1.00
Section properties
No.

ST
A = 1.000e+05 [m], Iy = 1.000e+00 [m4]

Node description
No.
x [m]
z [m]
---------------------------1
0.000
0.000
2
3.000
0.000
3
9.000
0.000
4
19.000
0.000
5
9.000
4.000

229

2D Frame
Beam elements
No.

Kn 1

Kn 2

CrS Joints
Length Layer
Mat NQM NQM
[m]
---------------------------------------------1
1
2
1
0
0
3.000
1
2
2
3
1
0
0
6.000
1
3
3
4
1
0
0 10.000
1
4
3
5
1
0
0
4.000
1
Supports
Node
No.

x - Direction
z - Direction
Rotation
F=
Spring Angle
F=
Spring Angle
F=
Spring
fixed [MN/m] [grad] fixed [MN/m] [grad] fixed [MNm]
-----------------------------------------------------------------2
0.00
F
0.00
4
0.00
F
0.00
5
F
0.00
F
0.00
F
Load data Load case

SEFL: Influence line for stress resultant My

Beam
2
distance from beginning

6.00 [m]

Influence line My for the load direction z global

Load data Load case

SEFL: Influence line for stress resultant Qz

Beam
2
distance from beginning

6.00 [m]

Influence line Qz for the load direction z global

Load data Load case

SEFL: Influence line for stress resultant Nx

Beam
4
distance from beginning

Influence line Nx for the load direction z global

230

0.00 [m]

Basics

Axisymmetric Shell
Basics
The Axisymmetric Shell program system was designed for the analysis of rotationally symmetric shell structures under
rotationally symmetric load. The following example image shows the shell model of a septic tank.

Static system of a septic tank with filling

Analysis Method
The analysis program works according to the method of finite elements and takes advantage of rotational symmetry. The
structure is subdivided into elements that are connected with one another in the system nodes. Unknowns that arise for
each node are the global deformations ur, uz and j, which can be determined by formulating the three equilibrium
conditions at the node. This is done by constructing element stiffness matrices in the respective local system, transformation
to the global coordinates and mapping into the global stiffness matrix of the system. After transformation of the loads to
the global coordinates and introduction of the support conditions of the structure, a linear system of equations (K u = p)
is derived that can be used to determine the unknown node deformations with
K Global stiffness matrix,
u Deformation vector of the global node deformations,
p Global load vector.

231

Axisymmetric Shell

Coordinate Systems
Global coordinate system
The global coordinate system is a right-handed system located on the rotation axis.

Global coordinate system with rotation axis

Element System

Local coordinate system of an element

The coordinate system is a right-handed system. The local element coordinates have their origin in the element's start node
(a). The local z axis runs from (a) to (e), the element's end node. The r axis points toward the upper side of the elements.
Support system
Normally, the support system corresponds to the global coordinate system. The support system can be changed by rotating
the local axes.

Support system with rotated r axis

232

Basics

Element Bedding
The element bedding is modeled with the help of the bedding modulus method. This is based on the assumption that the
subsidence (s) is proportional to the soil stress, meaning s0/s = kb = constant (kb = bedding modulus). That means a load
only induces subsidences in their direction of effect.

Bedding modulus method

Loss of tensile bedding
The structure can be calculated given the loss of tensile bedding. The r axis of the element system points toward the
ground. If a loss of tensile stresses in the r direction occurs, the skin friction (z direction) is not considered.

Singular System of Equations

Global stiffness matrices are solved in the equation solver by triangulation. If the system of equations is not explicitly
solvable, meaning it is singular, the calculation terminates with an error message.
Load case 1
Assembling total stiffness matrix
Installing supports
Triangulating system of equations
Line
1270
** Errors **
ROS-F001:

(100 %)

Set of equations is singular, line 1273, node 138 (Ux).

Abort of program,

0 Warning(s), 1 Error(s).

The error indicates the nodal degree of freedom at which the singularity was determined. The following causes are possible:
The system is relocatable.

After a loss of the tensile bedding, the degrees of freedom are no longer supported.

In most cases the relocatability of the system is due to erroneous input data:
Joint chains have been defined that make the system kinematic. When troubleshooting it can be helpful to replace all

joints with stiff connections and then reactivate them one by one until the error occurs.
Calculations excluding tensile bedding are carried out under unrealistic load assumptions, for instance without dead

load, and lead to lift-off of the structure.

Analysis Results
The

sections below describe the following results:

Deformations
Internal forces
Stresses
Soil pressures
Support reactions

Deformations
The node deformations refer to the global coordinate system and are designated as follows:
ur, uz
Node displacements [m] in the direction of the global axes.

Node rotation [rad].

Additionally, bending curves are calculated.
Internal forces
The following internal forces are calculated in the element nodes:
Nj, Qj
Meridian force and lateral force [kN/m].

Meridian moment [kNm/m].

233

Axisymmetric Shell

Ring force [kN/m].

Ring moment [kNm/m].

Element system with positive internal forces

Stresses
The stresses [MN/m] are determined at the upper and lower section edges.

s j. top,bottom =
s J. top,bottom =

Nj
d

Mj
d2 6

NJ
MJ
m
d
d2 6

Normal stresses in the meridian direction.

Normal stresses in the ring direction.

The section edges are defined as follows:

Soil pressures
The soil pressures sr and sz [kN/m] are defined in the element system. Tensile stresses in the soil have a positive sign.
Support reactions
The support reactions are calculated in the coordinate system of the supports. They act on the corresponding support.
The following support reactions are determined:
Rr, Rz
Support forces [kN/m].

Support moment [kNm/m].

Support system with positive support reactions

234

Basics

Program Capacities
Nodes

99999

Elements

99999

Load cases

9999

Load case combinations

999

Restrictions for the study version

Nodes

Elements

Sections

Structure Description
The following Structure menu functions allow you to edit the structure model and graphically represent the results:

Element Input
Element Properties...
Element Info
View...
Mesh Check
Element System
Number Sort
Supports
Load
Moving Nodes
Condense
Link Elements
Print Input Data...
Results...

The general procedure for data input, analysis and data representation of a structure is described in the document
Introductory_Examples.pdf installed in the program directory.

Element Input
This menu item is used to input elements.
Input
Starting point
Properties
Generate

Input an element from start to end point.

The element properties dialog is called up with this option.
The entered line is subdivided into n elements of the same length. Different start and end sections can be
specified. The program then interpolates the selected number of sections. This enables the modeling of a
haunch.
235

Axisymmetric Shell

Element Properties
This dialog is used to edit the properties of selected elements or preset the properties for new elements yet to be created.
The dialog consists of the following pages:
General

Section

General
This dialog shows the general element properties.
Length
Display the element length [m].
Nodes
Display the node coordinates.

Section
The section describes the following properties of an element:
Thickness

Material

Bedding

Specifications for reinforced concrete design

Each section is uniquely identified by a number between 1 and 9999. In general a section is not assigned to a single element
but rather a group of elements.

Structure Description

Material Type

B25 to B55: Concrete qualities according to DIN 1045:1988, Table 1.

C12/15 to C100/115: Concrete qualities according to ENV 1992-1-1 or DIN 1045-1
(C55/67 or higher only for design according to DIN 1045-1).
LC12/13 to LC60/66: Concrete qualities according to DIN 1045-1.
C12/15-EN to C90/105-EN: Concrete qualities according to EN 1992-1-1.
C12/15-EN-D to C100/115-EN-D: Concrete qualities according to DIN EN 1992-1-1.
C16/20 to C50/60: Concrete qualities according to OENORM B 4710-1.
NB40: Concrete quality according to OENORM B 4200-10.
NBeton: Concrete according to OENORM with user-defined properties.
SC12/15 to SC50/60: Concrete qualities according to SIA262 or SN EN206-1.
SLC12/13 to SLC50/55: Concrete qualities according to SIA262 or SN EN206-1.
SCX: Concrete according to SIA262 or SN EN206-1 with user-defined properties.
S235, S275, S355, S450: Construction steel according to DIN 18800 T1, Table 1.
S235-EN, S275-EN, S355-EN, S450-EN: Construction steel according to EN 10025-2.
NH1, NH2, NH3: Softwood grade I, II and III according to DIN 1052:1988.
BSH1 , BSH2: Glued laminated lumber grade I and II according to DIN 1052:1988.
C14 to C50, D18 to D70: Solid timber according to EN 338.
GL20h to GL32h, GL20c to GL32c: Glued laminated timber according to EN 14080.
Frei: User-defined material.
Beton: User-defined concrete.
Stahl: User-defined steel.

New
Create a new section.
Copy
Copy the current section.
Delete
Delete the current section.
Label
The section can be labeled with any text.
Further dialogs include:
Material

Bedding

Reinforcing steel

DIN 1045-1

DIN EN 1992-1-1

EN 1992-1-1

OENORM B 4700

OENORM EN 1992-1-1

SIA 262

SS EN 1992-1-1

237

Axisymmetric Shell

Material
E-Modulus
Modulus of elasticity in the meridian direction j [MN/m].
E-Modulus ring direction
Modulus of elasticity in the ring direction u [MN/m].
Poisson's ratio
Poisson's ratio for both directions.
Gamma
Specific weight of the material [kN/m]. This is used for the Dead load load type.
Alpha.t
Coefficient of thermal expansion [1/K].
fyk
For the material type Stahl, the characteristic yield strength must be entered as well [MN/m].
Apparent density
Apparent density of lightweight concrete and timber [kg/m].
ke for E-Mod.
Factor for calculation of the modulus of elasticity according to SIA 262, Section 3.1.2.3.3.

For the material type SCX, the concrete properties are defined additionally according to SIA 262, Table 3.
fck
Characteristic cylinder compressive strength [MN/m].
fck,cube
Characteristic cube compressive strength [MN/m].
fctm
Average concrete tensile strength [MN/m].

238

Structure Description

Bedding
Bedding modulus r,z
Bedding moduli for the element directions [MN/m].

Reinforcing Steel
Selection of layers
Select steel layers by clicking them in the graphic.
New layer
Add a new steel layer.
Delete layer
Delete selected steel layer.
Edge distance in meridian or ring direction
Axis distance of the steel layer from the section edge in the meridian direction j or ring direction u [m]

500S: Reinforcing rods according to DIN 488 Part 1 and DIN 1045 Table 6.

500M: Reinforcing meshes according to DIN 488 Part 1 and DIN 1045 Table 6.

General: Freely definable steel quality.

Yield strength
Yield strength fyk [MN/m].

Element Info
This function shows the following properties of an element graphically at the element and in the status bar:
Element number

Node numbers

Element system

Section

Material

Joints

239

Axisymmetric Shell

View
This menu item is used to display and check the structure properties.

Numbering
You can label elements, nodes and supports with their numbers. Section numbers can also be added to elements. The
display of the numbers can be limited to values > 1. Alternatively, the section name can be added to elements.
Text height
Set minimum and maximum text heights [mm].
Element section
The element section is drawn at the middle of the element.
Element nodes
The element nodes are marked by a symbol.
Shrink mode
Enable or disable shrunken element representation. Most of the input functions are disabled in this mode.
Shrink factor
Define the shrink factor for the shrink mode.
Joint info in shrink mode
In shrink mode the existing element end joints are labeled.
Full symbols for supports
The properties of the supports are shown in detail. The scroll bar changes the size of the icons in use.
Coordinate system
Activate the coordinate system for elements or supports.
Coloring
The elements are filled with the color that corresponds with their section number. The color assignment can be modified if
necessary.
Legend
Enable/disable the color legend.
All off
Turn off all display options.

240

Structure Description

Mesh Check
This menu item is used to check elements and nodes.
Node distance
The function checks if there are further nodes in the neighborhood of a node within the given tolerance. After confirmation,
the so-called duplicate nodes are marked by red arrows, and you are asked whether you want to merge them. In this case
their coordinates are averaged.
Element distance
Check if any elements lie on one another, for instance, due to redundant element entry. The elements that are found are
marked by red arrows.

Element System
This menu item is used to change the coordinate system of selected elements.
Input
+r, -r, +z, -z

By exchanging the start and end nodes of the element, the positive or negative axis is directed at the
specified point.

Number Sort
This menu item is used to change element and node numbers.
Input
Sort
Define
Edit

Sort node or element numbers geometrically.

Define new start values and increments for nodes and element numbers.
Edit node and element numbers.

Supports
This function is used to define supports. A support describes the support conditions of a system node. The individual
degrees of freedom can be supported in a fixed or elastic manner. The direction of the degrees of freedom can deviate from
the global coordinate system (described by an angle). The supported nodes are labeled with simple or detailed red icons (see
View).
Enter
Start the input of supports through the selection of nodes. The subsequent editing is performed using the context menu
functions:
Support

Orientation

Info
Display the support system with the bound degrees of freedom for a selected support.
Note: When the function is active only supports can be selected. This improves the handling of these objects.

241

Axisymmetric Shell

Moving Nodes
This function is used to change the location of selected nodes. In the case of a single element node, simply specify the new
position. If multiple element nodes are to be moved, you should choose the Group or Elements option.
Group
Select the element nodes to be moved.
Elements
Select the elements, whose nodes are to be moved.
Displacement vector
Movement through displacement. The displacement vector is defined by two points.
Rotate
Movement through rotation.
Mirror
Movement through mirroring.
Scaling
Movement through scaling in the global or local reference system. You can align nodes on an axis by specifying a scaling
factor of zero.
Scaling:
(To plumb nodes onto a line)

x=1
y=0
z=0
1

1: Scaling base point

2: Direction of local x axis
3: Point in local xy plane

If desired, displaced nodes that coincide with non-selected nodes can be merged with these.

Finding Nodes or Elements

If you are looking for a node with a particular number, the functions Select Nodes and Move Nodes can be of help. Enter
the node number you are looking for into this function.
If you are looking for an element with a specific number, use the functions Element Info or Select. The element number can
be specified in both functions. If the element is not identifiable even though it is selected, you can query further information
with the Element Properties function. The selected objects' color and layer are displayed in the toolbar.

Condense
This function is used to condense existing elements.
Point
At the point specified a node is inserted on the element axis.
Divide
Selected elements are divided. Enter the desired number of parts.
Adapt
For the selected elements a check is performed to determine whether any nodes touch their axes. If necessary, the elements
in question are divided at these nodes.

242

Structure Description

Link Elements
Kinematic dependencies between the global degrees of freedom of two element nodes can be defined with the Link
Elements function. This is done by expressing the nodal degrees of freedom of a dependent node through the degrees of
freedom of the reference node by way of an equation of condition.
For instance, ux,dependent = f1ux,reference + f2uz,reference + f3jreference
with

f1, f2

Factors for the displacements,

Factor for the rotation.

You can link any number of dependent nodes to a reference node. Nodes with supports may not be defined as dependent
nodes. The link elements are displayed with dotted lines. Additionally, an arrow points to the reference node.
After selecting the dependent nodes and the reference node, you must define the link element type.
Type
Stiff: Stiff link element (abbreviation: SS).

Jointed: One-sided jointed link element with a ball joint at the dependent node (abbreviation: GS).

ux, uz, phi.y: Dependent degree of freedom of the user-defined equation of condition. The factors for the

displacements and rotations of the equation of condition have to be defined.

User-defined equations of condition for a stiff link element
Dependent

Reference

ux,3

= ux,2 - dzjy,2

uz,3

= uz,2 - dxjy,2

jy,3

= jy,2

243

Axisymmetric Shell

Load
The following chapter describes load input as well as the different load types. The specified loads are represented with
icons.
A load case is made up of one or multiple loads. The following options allow you to define load cases or subsequently
change them, if necessary.
Create a copy of the current load case.
Generate load cases according to the rules set out by the Generate function. This leads to the duplication of either all
or only the selected loads.
Import load data.
Start the representation options dialog.
End the load representation.
Create a new load case.
Show an existing load case.
Change the number and name of the current load case.
Start the load input.
Load cases can be renumbered in groups within the database tree.
With the context function Scale load the load values of multiple selected loads can be scaled with a factor.

Input
The dialog box is used to input load data within a load case.

The load types are explained on the following pages. For easier identification they are labeled with load abbreviations.

Dead Load
The entire structure is stressed by its dead load in the global z direction (load abbreviation: EG).

Inserting of Load Case Data

This load type (load abbreviation: EINF) allows you to insert load data from other load cases in the current load case in a
weighted manner. The Superposition and Insert load types must not be present in the inserted load cases.
Input
First load case

First load case that is inserted.

Last load case

Last load case that is inserted.

Weighting factor

Factor by which to multiply all load data.

244

Load

Point Load
Input
Global orientation

Point load in the global system (load abbreviation: EGK).

Local orientation

Point load in the element system (load abbreviation: EL).

Load point

Load point on the element axis defined depending on the load direction.

Pr, Pz, Mphi

Global orientation:

Global coordinates r and z.

Local orientation:

Distance from the element start.

Load components in the directions of the selected coordinate system [kN/m] or [kNm/m].

Liquid Pressure
The liquid pressure stresses all selected elements (load abbreviation: FD).
Input
Selection of the stressed elements.
Upper edge liquid z

Z coordinate of the liquid level [m].

Specific weight

Specific weight gF of the liquid [kN/m].

Orientation (-1, 1)

Set orientation of the load in the r direction.

-1
: In direction -r
1
: In direction +r

Elements with liquid pressure

Nodal Load
Nodal loads act in the global direction (load abbreviation: KNL).
Input
Selection of the stressed element nodes.
Pr, Pz
Forces [kN/m].
Mphi
Meridian moment [kNm/m].

245

Axisymmetric Shell

Support Displacement
The support displacement acts on supported nodes in the direction of the bound degrees of freedom (load abbr.: DS).
Input
Selection of the affected supports.
ur, uz
Displacements [mm].
Phi
Rotations [rad/1000].

Support rotation j

Support displacement uz

Superposition of Load Cases

First load case to be superposed.

Last load case

Last load case to be superposed.

Weighting factor

Factor by which to multiply all results.

Temperature
Input
Selection of the stressed elements (load abbreviation: TEMP).
tm
Temperature as a difference to the installation temperature [K].
tb - tt
Temperature difference between the bottom and top side of the section [K].

Top and bottom sides of the section

Temperature, Initial Strain

Input
Selection of the stressed elements (load abbreviation: TMPA).
alpha.t
Coefficient of thermal expansion [1/K].
tm
Temperature as a difference to the installation temperature [K].
(tb - tt)/d
Temperature difference between bottom and top side of the section with respect to the section thickness
[K/m].

246

Load

Theory
This load type (load abbreviation: TH) is used to specify the calculation theory for the load case in question.
Input
Number of iterations

This value is not used at the moment.

Error

Error threshold for the relative size of the remaining residuum in [%].
Only values 1% are permissible.

No soil pressure > 0

Disregard tensile stresses in the foundation area.

When using this load type, make sure to pay attention to the notes provided in the Load group section.

Trapezoidal Load
Input
Selection of the stressed elements.
Starting point

Load start.

End point

Load end.

Global orientation

Trapezoidal load in the global system (load abbreviation: TG).

Local orientation

Trapezoidal load in the element system (load abbreviation: TL).

Projection orientation

Projection of the trapezoidal load in the global system (load abbreviation: TP).

Starting ordinate

Load ordinate at the load start in the directions of the selected coordinate system [kN/m].

End ordinate

Load ordinate at the load end in the directions of the selected coordinate system [kN/m].

The load is automatically distributed over multiple elements for a trapezoidal load. The interpolated load ordinates at the
nodes of the selected elements are determined automatically. The trapezoidal loads always act on the entire element length.

Local trapezoidal load

Global trapezoidal load

Projection of the trapezoidal load

247

Axisymmetric Shell

Load Group
This load type (load abbreviation: GRL) is especially suited for preparing load cases for nonlinear calculation. It allows you to
compile loads from existing load cases by retrieving the necessary load factors and to activate the desired calculation theory.
The Load group is used to combine the existing load types Insert and Theory into a single load type.
Input
Error threshold

Error threshold for the relative size of the remaining residuum in [%].
Only values 1% are permissible.

No soil pressure > 0

Disregard tensile stresses in the foundation area.

Add. global load factor

Additional factor for all loads.

Load cases

Select load cases to add them to the selection list.

Load factor

The individual load cases are weighted by a factor.

Apply

Change the weighting factor for selected load cases.

When using this load type, the following should be observed.

Error threshold
The nonlinear bedding problem is solved iteratively. The length of the error vector, the residuum, is used to control the
iteration. It is shown for each iteration step in the output bar. The iteration is ended when the remaining residuum has
reached the specified error threshold in relation to the initial residuum. The calculation results have, on average, a relative
error of the same extent. If the error threshold cannot be reached, the calculation program issues a corresponding message.
Loss of tensile bedding
Unrealistic load combinations (for instance, a missing dead load) can lead to loss of all bedding. If the system becomes
relocatable due to this, the calculation is aborted because of a singular system of equations. The relocatable degree of
freedom is provided.
Load combination
In order to combine the decisive actions for calculations with loss of tensile bedding, transfer the corresponding load cases
to the selection list and assign them load factors.
Prohibition of superposition
Calculations excluding the tensile bedding deliver their results after nonlinear iteration. So in these cases the superposition
principle is no longer valid, meaning the results may not be additively superposed with other results. Further processing
using load case combinations is only permissible if these only contain mutually exclusive actions.

Fixed-end Reactions
Input
Selection of the stressed elements (load abbreviation: S0).
Nphia, Qphia
Meridian force and lateral force at the start of the element [kN/m].
Nphie, Qphie
Meridian force and lateral force at the end of the element [kN/m].
Mphia, Mphie
Meridian moment at the element start or end [kNm/m].

Fixed-end reactions at the start and end of an element.

248

Analysis

Analysis
The Analysis menu is used to make program-specific settings and to launch the analysis programs.
Settings...
Batch...
Statics
Load Case Combination
DIN 1045-1 Design
DIN EN 1992-1-1 Design
EN 1992-1-1 Design
OENORM B 4700 Design
OENORM EN 1992-1-1 Design
SIA 262 Design
SS EN 1992-1-1 Design
Selected Elements
Stop Analysis
During the analysis the program's progress is shown in the output bar along with any possible warnings and error
messages.

Settings Statics
This page shows the settings for the shell calculation.

Calculate all load cases

All load cases are calculated (default).
Calculate following load cases
The load cases from the left list box are calculated.

249

Axisymmetric Shell
Force recalculation
If this switch is activated, all of the selected load cases will be recalculated. Otherwise, the calculation program checks
whether a recalculation is necessary.
Save stiffness matrix
The global stiffness matrix is saved for further use.
Listing
No listing: No log is generated by the calculation program.

Create listing: A log is generated during the calculation according to the selection list.

Batch
Use this menu item to run all selected analyses as a batch job.

Results
The following chapter describes the representation of the analysis results. Results can be shown graphically as well as in
tabular form. They are selected in the database or using the Results function of the Structure menu.

Representation of the ring reinforcement of a septic tank [cm/m]

250

Results
Soil pressures load case 1
Element
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35

Sigma.r
[kN/m]

Sigma.z
[kN/m]

-20.97
-16.90
-53.50
-47.11
-82.06
-75.41
-107.87
-104.27
-133.44
-135.74

0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

Tabular output of soil pressures of the 1st load case

Result Categories
The following dialog shows possible result categories.

251

Axisymmetric Shell

Deformation Figure
Scale
The scale can be set automatically or manually. The node displacements are multiplied by the distortion factor and added to
the node coordinates. For load cases the bending curve is displayed as well.
Display original system in dashed manner
Switch on/off the dashed non-deformed system during deformation display.
Label
Auto: Automatically add labels to the nodes listing the length of the displacement vector [mm].

Off: Disable labeling.

Limit value for labeling

Only displacements exceeding the limit value are labeled.
Decimal places
Standard: Automatic setting of decimal places.

0 - 3: Number of decimal places.

Text height [mm]

The unit depends on the output device.

Superelevated deformation figure

0 - 3: Number of decimal places.

Numerical representation of the deformations uz [mm]

252

Results

Result Graphs
The results are plotted along the element axis. A linear progress of results is assumed between the result locations.
Scale
The scale of the ordinate display can be set automatically or manually.
Label
Auto: Enable automatic labeling.

Off: Disable labeling.

Everywhere: Label all ordinates.

Selectable: Choose manual labeling with the help of the results bar.

Limit value for labeling

Only ordinates exceeding the limit value are labeled.
Decimal places
Standard: Automatic setting of decimal places.

0 - 3: Number of decimal places.

Text height [mm]

The unit depends on the output device.
Steel layer grouping ...
Define the grouping of the steel layers with this function.

During automatic grouping, all steel layers whose r component is greater than the r component of the centroid are
displayed on the upper side of the elements, all other layers on the lower side.
For manual grouping, steel layers can be moved between the list boxes using the mouse. The steel layers of the middle list
box are not displayed.
Subtract base reinforcement
The base reinforcements defined for the sections are subtracted from the computed reinforcement and the remaining
reinforcement is displayed.

253

Axisymmetric Shell

Result List
The result list for selected elements is output in the data editor. It can be accessed over the context menu for the elements.

The output can be limited to specific load cases using the Load Case Selection option of the context menu.

Create load group...

Create superposition load case

Associated deformations

Associated support forces

Last Combination
Shows result values corresponding to the last Combination information.

254

Examples

Examples
Water Tank
The following example (Hampe, Volume 2, P. 187) illustrates the analysis of a water tank.

Water tank, system and dimensions

Material and section properties
No.

Mat.
EModule [MN/m] Poisson-R.alpha.t gamma thickBedding[MN/m]
type
E.phi E.theta mue.phi
[1/K] [kN/m] ness [m]
kbr
kbz
------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 Frei
21000
21000
0.17 1.000e-05 25.000
0.1600
0.0
0.0
Creep and shrinkage properties
Material
phi.t
rho
epsilon.s
-------------------------------------1
0.000
0.800
0.00E-05
Node description
No.
r [m]
z [m]
---------------------------1
12.000
0.000
2
12.000
1.000
3
12.000
2.000
4
12.000
3.000
5
12.000
3.500
6
12.000
4.000
7
12.000
4.500
8
12.000
5.000
Elements
No.

Kn 1 Kn 2 CrS Joints
Length Layer
Mat NQM NQM
[m]
---------------------------------------------1
1
2
1
0
0
1.000
1
2
2
3
1
0
0
1.000
1
3
3
4
1
0
0
1.000
1
4
4
5
1
0
0
0.500
1
5
5
6
1
0
0
0.500
1
6
6
7
1
0
0
0.500
1
7
7
8
1
0
0
0.500
1
Supports
Node
No.

r - Direction
z - Direction
Rotation
F=
Spring Angle
F=
Spring Angle
F=
Spring
fixed [MN/m] [grad] fixed [MN/m] [grad] fixed [MNm]
-----------------------------------------------------------------8
F
0.00
F
0.00
F
Load data Load case
FD

: Liquid pressure
Element
liquid level z
from to
[m]
1
7
0.00

specific gravity of the liquid

[kN/m]
10.00

sign
1

Internal forces load case 1

Qj [kN/m]

Mj [kNm/m]

Nu [kN/m]

Mu [kNm/m]
255

Axisymmetric Shell

Septic Tank
The septic tank shown is elastically bedded and is stressed by liquid pressure.

Septic tank with filling, C 20/25, cover 5 cm

Material and section properties
No.

Mat.
EModule [MN/m] Poisson-R.alpha.t gamma thickBedding[MN/m]
type
E.phi E.theta mue.phi
[1/K] [kN/m] ness [m]
kbr
kbz
------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 C20/25
24900
24900
0.20 1.000e-05 25.000
0.2500
0.0
0.0
2 C20/25
24900
24900
0.20 1.000e-05 25.000
0.3000
0.0
0.0
3 C20/25
24900
24900
0.20 1.000e-05 25.000
0.4000
0.0
0.0
4 C20/25
24900
24900
0.20 1.000e-05 25.000
0.5000
40.0
0.0
5 C20/25
24900
24900
0.20 1.000e-05 25.000
0.5000
10.0
0.0
6 C20/25
24900
24900
0.20 1.000e-05 25.000
0.8000
10.0
0.0
Load data Load case
EG

: Dead load

Load data Load case

1 (Dead load)

2 (Liquid pressure)

: Liquid pressure
Element
liquid level z
from to
[m]
6
45
-22.04

specific gravity of the liquid

[kN/m]
10.00

sign
1

DIN 1045-1 actions

Standard design group

G - Dead load

QH - Variable hydrostatic pressure

Gamma.sup / gamma.inf = 1.35 / 1

Gamma.sup / gamma.inf = 1.5 / 0

Load cases

Combination coefficients for: Superstructures

Sonstige Einwirkungen
Psi.0 / Psi.1 / Psi.2 = 0.8 / 0.7 / 0.5

Dead load

Load cases 1. Variante, inclusive

256

Liquid pressure

Examples
1. Permanent and temporary situation
Final state
G
QH

Dead load
Variable hydrostatic pressure

Bending reinforcement from DIN 1045-1

Ring reinforcement [cm/m]

Meridian reinforcement [cm/m]

257

Load Case Combination

Basics
Load case combinations are used to combine the results of a structure analysis as well as results of other load case
combinations to determine minimum and maximum boundary curves.
To accomplish this, the load cases and combinations are assigned to the following action groups:
Permanent: The individual load cases and combinations are always taken in consideration (dead load, for example).

Variable inclusive: The individual load cases and combinations can act simultaneously (such as traffic loads on

individual floor bays). They are only combined if they make a adverse contribution.
1. (-6.) Variable exclusive: Only load cases and load case combinations which offer the lowest (<0) or the highest

(>0) contribution are taken in consideration. The individual load cases and combinations cancel each other out (heavy
truck positions, for example). You may describe up to six independent simultaneously acting action groups of this kind.
Exclusive selection: The individual load cases and combinations cancel each other out. The most adverse contribution

of this group is always taken into consideration.

Input
The combination rule is entered into the database or in the analysis settings for the load case combination and saved with
an associated number. The individual parts of the 'Load Case Combination' dialog are described below:

Label
Load case combination name.
Load cases
Select load cases or load case combinations to add them to the current action.
Multi-select
Load cases and combinations can be added to the actions more than once.
Action
Select the action. The selected action is checked off if it contains entries.
Factor
The individual load cases and combinations are weighted by a factor.
Apply
The weighting factor of selected load cases and combinations is changed.
Do not recalculate contained combinations
This switch prevents the recalculation of the included load case combinations.
Combinations...
Opens a dialog that contains the first 9999 load case variants to be combined for the selected design situation and includes
an option to create load groups for selected variants. These variants can be used for second-order theory analysis or
nonlinear analysis.
258

Analysis Settings

Analysis Settings
Calculate all combinations
All the existing load case combinations are calculated (default).
Calculate following selection
Only the load case combinations present in the left list box are calculated. The context menu available in the list box allows
the load case combinations to be edited.

Create listing for ...

Normally, only one log with the combination descriptions is created by the load case combination program. The log can also
record combination results. The log is not needed in most cases.

Results
The load case combination calculates all minimum and maximum boundary curves and all associated values for the
following results.
For example:

min ux and associated

uy, uz, jx, jy, jz

max ux

uy, uz, jx, jy, jz

Beam internal forces:

Mx, My, Mz, Nx, Qy, Qz

Shell internal forces

mx, my, mxy, nx, ny, nxy, qx, qy

Slab internal forces

mx, my, mxy, qx, qy

Plain stress element internal forces

nx, ny, nxy

Axisymmetric shell internal forces

Mj, Nj, Mu, Nu, Qj

Deformations

ux, uy, uz, jx, jy, jz

Accelerations

ax, ay, az

Velocities

vx, vy, vz

Stresses on solid elements

sx, sy, sz, sxy, sxz, syz

Support reactions

Rx, Ry, Rz, Mx, My, Mz

Soil reactions

sx, sy, sz

Note on the load case combination:

If the absolute value of the considered control value is smaller than the threshold value (10-3, for deformations 10-6), this
and the associated values will be ignored during superposition. Below, results from three load cases are illustrated, which
are subsequently combined inclusively.
Results of load cases:
Nr.
Nx(kN)
Qz(kN)
My(kNm)
-------------------------------------LF.1
0.00
40.00
-35.00
LF.2
0.00
-10.00
20.00
LF.3
100.00
0.00
0.00

Results of load cases combination:

Nx(kN)
Qz(kN)
My(kNm)
-------------------------------------min NX
0.00
0.00
0.00
max NX
100.00
0.00
0.00
min MY
0.00
40.00
-35.00
max MY
0.00
-10.00
20.00
min QZ
0.00
-10.00
20.00
max QZ
0.00
40.00
-35.00

As load case 1 and 2 do not contribute to min./max. Nx, there are no associated values.

259

Load Case Combination

Example
Load Case Combination on a Multi-Span Girder
In this example a multi-span girder with the following loads is analyzed: dead load g (load case 1) and the variable inclusive
traffic load q on a span-by-span basis (load cases 2 to 5). The internal forces min. My and max. My illustrated below result
from the load case combination.

min My [kNm]

max My [kNm]

Load case combination log:

Load case combination 1 - permanent action
Load case
Factor
-----------------------------------------------------1
Dead load g = 40 kN/m
1.000
Load case combination 1 - variable inclusive action
Load case
Factor
-----------------------------------------------------2
Span 1 q = 100 kN/m
1.000
3
Span 2 q = 100 kN/m
1.000
4
Span 3 q = 100 kN/m
1.000
5
Span 4 q = 100 kN/m
1.000

260

Example

Load Case Combination for a Floor Slab

The following example shows a floor slab with 15 load cases.

Floor construction and load

The load cases 1 and 2 are constantly active. The four area loads defined on a field-by-field basis act inclusively, which
means they can act simultaneously. The load cases 7-15 are considered as exclusive traffic loads, which means they cancel
each other out.
The following log of the load case combination shows the assignment of the load cases to the action groups.
Load case combination 1 - permanent action
Load case
Factor
-----------------------------------------------------1
Dead load
1.000
2
Additional load
1.000
Load case combination 1 - variable inclusive action
Load case
Factor
-----------------------------------------------------3
Span-1
1.000
4
Span-2
1.000
5
Span-3
1.000
6
Span-4
1.000
Load case combination 1 - 1. variable exclusive action
Load case
Factor
-----------------------------------------------------7
GS-1
1.000
8
GS-2
1.000
9
GS-3
1.000
10
GS-4
1.000
11
GS-5
1.000
12
GS-6
1.000
13
GS-7
1.000
14
GS-8
1.000
15
GS-9
1.000

261

Prestressed Concrete

Prestressed Concrete
Basics
This program component was designed for prestressed concrete structures with internal prestressing, especially for the
analysis of bridges, containers and floor slabs. It is based on the method of 3D tendon guides, which can be used for beam,
shell and solid models. The area of application includes prestressed components without bond and with subsequent bond.
The analysis of a prestressed concrete structure is carried out in three steps:
Input of the tendon groups, prestressing system and prestressing procedure with the Prestressing function of the

Structure menu.
Definition of a load case using the Prestressing load type.

FEM analysis for load processing and internal forces calculation. The statically determined (P0) and undetermined (P1)

part of the internal forces are additionally saved for beams and design objects.
If actions from creep and shrinkage are to be taken into account, perform the following additional steps:
Input of the creep and shrinkage coefficients in the section dialog.

Input of a creep-generating permanent load case. This load case combines the dead load, additional load and

prestressing load cases with the help of the Superposition load type.
Definition of a load case using the Creep and shrinkage load type and specification of the creep-generating continuous

load case. Optionally, the internal force redistribution between concrete and prestressing steel can be taken into
account, for instance for prestressing with subsequent bond.
FEM analysis for determination of internal forces. If the relocation of internal forces is selected the resulting tendon

forces are additionally saved.

The rest of the procedure depends on the standards to be used and is described in the corresponding sections:
DIN Technical Report Bridge Checks.

DIN 1045-1 Design.

OENORM B 4700 Design.

EN 1992-1-1 Design.

EN 1992-2 Bridge checks.

SIA 262 Design.

In general, when working with prestressed structures, the model should be designed with special care. In practice the use of
mixed systems is advisable. For instance, for a multi-rib T-beam bridge it is advisable to combine prestressed beam elements
for the bridge longitudinal direction (T-beam section) with slab elements (lateral direction). This provides a simple solution
for the problem of load distribution. It is possible to additionally design the bridge in the lateral direction in the same step.
However, due to the complexity of the problem, it is not possible to make a general statement concerning recommendable
structure models.

Composite Section
The redistributions of the internal forces between concrete and prestressing steel at the composite section as a result of
creep and shrinkage are of interest for the check of prestressed concrete structures. As a simplification, these can be
specified as a percentile share of the prestressing load case. Alternatively, the composite section can be treated directly. In
this case, the prestressing steel layers are included in the calculation of the creep and shrinkage load case while the global
stiffness matrix is being processed. This results in quasi-composite elements whose strain state is taken to determine the
corresponding share of internal forces of the composite components. This approach is implemented for all element types.
Creep redistribution can therefore also be determined for area and solid models. Due to this, however, the complexity of
the calculation, which depends directly on the number of tendon groups, increases considerably, especially for determining
the global stiffness matrix. The internal forces (normal forces, bending moments, lateral forces) given by the program always
correspond to the concrete section. When analyzing composite elements, these alone are not in equilibrium with the
external forces since the tendon group forces must be applied while taking into account their spatial orientation. As the
integration of the prestressing steel stiffnesses is based on a finite element approach, an adequate FEM mesh is
especially important for beam elements. Area and solid models, on the other hand, generally exhibit a sufficiently fine
discretization.

262

Basics

Creep and Shrinkage

In prestressed concrete construction, taking into account time-dependent material behavior is especially important for
reasons of load-bearing safety. In general, an estimation is made for framework models using an approximation for statically
determined composite structures with one tendon group layer (according to Trost or Rsch). In the calculation model at
hand, area and solid models are also used. For these, no comparable approximations can be made.
The program determines concrete creep and shrinkage based on a time-dependent stress-strain law developed by Trost.

s b (t ) =

Eb
e b (t ) - j e b,0 - e b,S
1+r j

with

sb(t)

Concrete stress from creep and shrinkage at time t.

E-modulus of the concrete.

r
j
eb(t)

Relaxation coefficient according to Trost for time t (normally r= 0.80).

eb,0

Concrete strain from creep-generating permanent load.

eb,s

Concrete strain from shrinkage.

Creep coefficient for time t.

Concrete strain from creep and shrinkage at time t.

Under consideration of these relationships, a time-dependent global stiffness matrix and the associated load vectors are
constructed which, in turn, provide the internal forces and deformations of the concrete.
The creep and shrinkage coefficients are entered in the section dialog. To be taken into account in the FEM analysis, a load
case must be defined that contains the Creep and shrinkage load type and specifies the creep-generating permanent load
case.

Actions from Prestressing

The definition of the tendon groups is carried out independent of elements. This allows for maximum flexibility for the
graphical input and modification of the tendon group geometry. The allocation of the tendon groups to the elements is
performed via geometric conditions when calculating the internal forces. The following types of tendon groups will be
differentiated:
Beam: The tendon group is allocated to a beam, if it

- penetrates both front faces,

- penetrates one front face and starts or ends within the beam or
- starts and ends within the beam.
Depending on user selection, the tendon group can be located
- within the cross-section,
- within the exterior polygon or
- within the bounding rectangle.
The last two options allow a simplified tendon guide mainly for hollow sections during the design phase.
Area: This type can be used for area and solid elements. The tendon group is allocated to an area element, if it

- penetrates two lateral faces or

- penetrates one lateral face and starts or ends within the element.
For solid elements the tendon group can penetrate any face of the element.
Mixed: This type of tendon group is used for the simultaneous prestressing of beam, area and solid elements. The main

applications are the calculation and the check of composite sections. There are no limitations for the course within the
element, but for beam elements the tendon group has to be located in the beam cross-section as well.
The basis for the analysis of actions from prestressing is provided by a tendon group force curve that considers strain
increase, release and slippage. The influence of the tendon friction is taken into account using the typical method of cable
element friction so that the prestressing procedure can generally be formulated in parameter form as follows:

V ( p ) = V (0) e -m (a +l ( p )b)
with

p
V ( p)
V (0 )
m

Curve parameter.
Prestressing force at the curve parameter p.
Prestressing force at the prestressing anchor.
Friction coefficient.
263

Prestressed Concrete

a
l ( p)

Intentional deviation angle of the tendon.

Tendon length at the curve parameter p.
Unintentional deviation angle.

Corresponding approaches apply to the release. Here other friction coefficients might also enter the calculation. The actions
(forces and moments) from prestressing result from the corresponding tendon group and friction force for the element
location being analyzed.
For the practical calculation, the tendon group is subdivided into a finite number of intervals and the eccentric friction and
deviation forces are determined at the corresponding interval points. These are then applied to the corresponding element
as 3D individual forces and moments. Tendon groups of the type Area and Mixed are divided equally spaced at the full
tendon length, whereas tendon groups of the type Beam are divided equally spaced within a beam. Even with the same
tendon group geometry small differences in the application of force can occur.

Deviation and friction forces from prestressing

The method described allows for the determination of the 3D internal force state of the prestressed concrete. This contains
the statically determined as well as the statically undetermined internal force shares. The sum of the support reactions is
always zero here as the slippage, friction and deviation forces form an equilibrium system.
To include prestressing in the FEM analysis, you need to define a load case with the Prestressing load type.

264

Basics

Tendon Group Geometry

The tendon curve on which the calculation approach is based is represented by a 3D cubical spline function, which is
defined by a so-called tendon group polygon. This makes available an ordered set of points that represent the supporting
points of the spline function. The spline function is the 3D curve that runs through all spline points with the least amount of
curvature. If only two supporting points are specified, a straight line results. Three supporting points result in a quadratic
parabola. More than three supporting points create a cubic spline function.

Tendon group polygon and spline function

Input
Prestressing
The Prestressing menu item allows you to input or edit tendon groups. Existing tendon groups are automatically loaded.
Input
Off

Remove tendon groups from the graphical view.

Save

Save all tendon groups in the project file.

Define

Call up the Tendon group properties dialog to define a new tendon group. The spline points of the
tendon group can be defined either graphically or using a table.

Spline points

Edit selected spline points.

View...

X, Y, Z

Edit coordinates of the selected spline points.

Insert

Insert new spline point before the selected point.

Delete

Delete selected spline point.

Select a tendon group view.

New

Enter a new tendon group view.

Standard

Select the Standard view.

Zero point

Set new origin for the coordinate system of the view.

Base points

The values selected under View... are depicted tabulary for the sectional and beam views at discrete
supporting points.
Spline points

Each spline point of visible tendon groups defines a supporting point.

Variable

Supporting points are defined by the sectionally specification of divisions.

Equidistant

Supporting points result from the entered constant division.

|---x---|

Input of new divisions for the options Variable and Equidistant.

265

Prestressed Concrete

Tendon Group Properties

The tendon group properties are edited using the following dialog box.

Number
Number of the tendon group or start value for a new numbering.
Label
Name of the tendon group.
Prestressing System
The prestressing system to be used. Its properties are defined on the dialog page of the same name.
Number of tendons
Number of tendons that are bundled in this tendon group.
Type
Beam: Tendon group for beam prestressing. The second combo box allows to define geometrical correlation of tendon

groups and beams.

Area: Tendon group for area and solid prestressing.

Mixed: Tendon group for simultaneous prestressing of beam, area and solid elements, e.g. for composite sections.

Inactive: Tendon group is not active.

For further explanations, see section Actions from prestressing.

Ignore in prestress load
For the FEM analysis of a load case with the Prestressing load type, this tendon group is ignored. When creating
construction stages, this option is set for all existing tendon groups.
Prestressing Procedure
The prestressing procedure to be used. Its properties are defined on the dialog page of the same name.
Spline points
Coordinates of the spline points of the tendon group.

266

Input

Prestressing System
The prestressing system combines typical properties that are then assigned to the tendon groups using a number.

Number, Label
Number and name of the prestressing system. The option <Database> enables to load or to store properties by use of the
file Igraph.dat.
Certification
DIN 1045-1

DIN 4227

EC2

OENORM

SIA 262

By selection of the certification, the prestressing force Pm0 is determined according to the standard.
Area Ap
Section area Ap of a tendon [mm].
s, 02
Yield strength or 0.2 limit of the prestressing steel according to DIN 4227 [MN/m].
fp0,1k
Characteristic value of the 0.1% strain limit of the prestressing steel per DIN 1045-1, OENORM, SIA 262 and EC2 [MN/m].
E-Modulus
E-modulus of the prestressing steel [MN/m].
z
Tensile strength of the prestressing steel according to DIN 4227 [MN/m].
fpk
Characteristic value of the tensile strength of the prestressing steel per DIN 1045-1, OENORM, SIA 262 and EC2 [MN/m].
Pm0
The permissible prestressing force of a tendon [kN] that corresponds to the selected certification is displayed where the
minimum of the two possible values is decisive. After releasing the input field, a different prestressing force can be defined.
Certification as per DIN 1045-1:
Pm0 = Ap 0.85 fp0,1k or Ap 0.75 fpk according to DIN 1045-1, Eq. (49).

267

Prestressed Concrete
Certification as per DIN 4227:
Pm0 = Ap 0.75 s or Ap 0.55 z according to DIN 4227, Tab. 9, Row 65.
Certification as per EC2:
Pm0 = Ap 0.85 fp0,1k or Ap 0.75 fpk according to EN 1992-1-1, Eq. (5.43).
Certification as per OENORM:
Pm0 = Ap 0.80 fp0,1k or Ap 0.70 fpk according to OENORM B 4750, Eq. (4) and (5),
and OENORM B 1992-1-1, Chapter 8.9.6.
Certification as per SIA 262:
Pm0 = Ap 0.7 fpk according to SIA 262, Eq. (22), Chapter 4.1.5.2.2.
Duct diameter
Is only used for beam tendons to calculate the net and ideal section values [mm].
Friction coefficients
Friction coefficients m for prestressing and release.
Slippage
Slippage at the prestressing anchor [mm].
Unintentional deviation angle '
Unintentional deviation angle of a tendon [/m].

Prestressing Procedure
The prestressing procedure differentiates between the start and end of the tendon group. The size of the maximum
prestressing force is determined by factors regarding the permissible prestressing. In general, this is Pm0 (see Prestressing
system). Using the factor specified for the release, the maximum prestressing force remaining in the tendon group is defined
with respect to Pm0. The prestressing force that remains at the prestressing anchor is calculated from this by the program.
Each prestressing anchor can be prestressed and released twice. The prestressing procedures are numbered.

Number, Label
Number and name of the prestressing procedure.
Tensioning with Pmax
Selecting this check box causes the factors for tensioning correspond to the maximim force Pmax for tendons certified
according to DIN 1045-1 or EC2 (see the following example).
Kappa
If tensioning with Pmax is selected, the permissible maximum force is calculated using the allowance value k to ensure there
is an overstressing reserve.
268

Input

1. Tensioning
Factor relating to Pm0 or Pmax for the prestressing force at the tie at the 1st instance of tensioning.
1. Release
Factor relating to Pm0 for the maximum remaining prestressing force at the 1st release. '0': no release!
2. Tensioning
Factor relating to Pm0 or Pmax for the prestressing force at the tie for the 2nd tensioning. '0': no 2nd tensioning!
2. Release
Factor relating to Pm0 for the maximum remaining prestressing force at the 2nd release. '0': no 2nd release!
The prestressing force curve is determined in the following sequence:
-

Tensioning and release at the start,

Tensioning and release at the end,

Slippage at the start,

Slippage at the end.

The differences between tensioning with Pm0 and Pmax are described in the following examples.
The user is responsible for checking the permissibility of the maximum force during the stressing process.

Examples for Prestressing Procedures

Tensioning with Pm0
The mode of action of the factors Tensioning and Release can be clarified using the example of an St 1570 / 1770 single
tendon with prestressing anchor at the tendon start certified according to EC2.

The permissible prestressing forces ar defined by:

Pmax = min(Ap 0.80 fpk , Ap 0.90 fp0.1k ) = 3591.0 kN

Pm0 = min(Ap 0.75 fpk , Ap 0.85 fp0.1k ) = 3391.5 kN
The first prestressing force curve of the following illustration results after overstressing with 5% using a factor of 1.05
relating to Pm0, i.e., the maximum prestressing force is 3561.1 kN < Pmax.
The second prestressing force curve results after tensioning and release with the factors 1.05 and 1.0, i.e., the maximum
prestressing force that remains in the tendon after it is fixed into place is 3389.3 kN < Pm0.

269

Prestressed Concrete

0
0

Single tendon, 10 times superelevated

3520.8

3481.0

3441.6

3385.5

3301.5

3171.2

3064.1

2990.1

2944.6

2911.3

2878.4

0.00

5.00

10.00

15.00

20.00

25.00

30.00

35.00

40.00

45.00

50.00

55.00

2847.9

3561.1 [kN]

3561.1

60.00

xv
[m]

Prestressing force curve after the 1st tensioning with a factor of 1.05

0.00

5.00

10.00

15.00

20.00

25.00

30.00

35.00

40.00

2911.3

2878.4

45.00

50.00

55.00

2847.9

2944.6

2990.1

3064.1

3171.2

3301.5

3385.4

3342.1

3304.3

3267.0

3230.0 [kN]

3389.3

60.00

xv
[m]

Prestressing force curve after the 1st release with a factor of 1.0
Potential slippage was not taken into account here to illustrate the effects described above. Slippage would result in an
additional variation of the prestressing force curve. A second prestressing and release procedure would have similar effects.
The same holds true for prestressing and release at the tendon end.

Tensioning with Pmax

For tendons with certification as per DIN 1045-1 and EC2 the maximum force applied to the tendon during the stressing
process may not exceed the smaller value from the following:
DIN 1045-1 rep. Book 525, Chapter 8.7.2
Pmax = Ap 0.80 fpk e-mg(k-1) or Ap 0.90 fp0.1k e-mg(k-1)
DIN TR 102, Chapter 4.2.3.5.4(2)*P
DIN EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 5.10.2.1(NA.3)
with

Friction coefficient according to the general certification from the building authorities.

F + kx
F = sum of planned deviation angle over the length x,
k = unintentional deviation angle per unit of length ( in the dialog),
x = the distance between the prestressed anchor and the fixed anchor in the case of one-sided prestressing or the
influence length of the respective anchor in the case of two-sided prestressing.

Allowance value for ensuring an overstressing reserve with 1.5 k 2 for tendons with supplemental bond and
k = 1 for all other cases.

The program uses the specified allowance value k to determine the maximum permissible value Pmax. The influence length
x is assumed to be the tendon length for one-sided prestressing or simply half of the tendon length for two-sided
prestressing.
In this setting the overstressing factor refers to Pmax, which means the value 1.0 is used to select the maximum
force permitted by the standard.
The release factor continues to refer to Pm0. Setting the value to 1.0 also assures that the force remaining in the tendon
after it fixed into place is within the permissible range.
Using an St 1570 / 1770 single tendon prestressed on both sides with certification as per EC2, the prestressing force curve
is illustrated for a value of k = 1.5. Slippage is ignored for the sake of simplicity.

270

Input

The program will determine the permissible prestressing forces as follows:

Pmax = e-mg(k-1) min(Ap 0.80 fpk , Ap 0.90 fp0.1k ) = 0.9457 3591 = 3395.9 kN
Pm0 = min(Ap 0.75 fpk , Ap 0.85 fp0.1k ) = 3391.5 kN
The maximum force Pmax is automatically maintained with a tensioning factor of 1.0. As shown in the following force
curve, 3391.2 kN remain in the tendon after it is fixed into place. Thus the limit Pm0 is also observed.
0
0

Single tendon, 10 times superelevated

Force function of tendon group 2 (1 tendon(s), l = 60.16 m)
Prestressing system 2 - SUSPA EC 140. Certification according to EC2.
Pm0
= 3391.5 kN,
Ap = 2660.0 mm, a = 0.21, Angle ' = 0.30 /m
E-Modulus= 190000 MN/m, Ah = 7389.8 mm, n = 0.21, Slippage = 0.00 mm
Prestressing procedure 2 - DIN
Tensioning with Pmax (DIN Report, DIN 1045-1, DIN EN 1992-1-1). Kappa = 1.5.
Pre. anchor
:
Start
End
Normal. force : 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
Pre. force [kN]: 3395.9 3387.1 3395.9 3387.1
Extension [mm]: 362.2
-0.0
26.0
-0.0

3357.5

3319.5

3281.9

3228.5

3148.3

3037.9

3148.3

3228.5

3281.9

3319.5

3357.5

0.00

5.00

10.00

15.00

20.00

25.00

30.00

35.00

40.00

45.00

50.00

55.00

3387.1

3387.1 [kN]

3391.2

60.00

xv
[m]

Prestressing force curve after tensioning and release

If the force calculated during prestressing is less than the value during release, then the program will make sure that the
smaller value is not exceeded after the component is fixed into place.

271

Prestressed Concrete

Tendon Group View

The following tendon group views are available:

Sectional view: View of a section through area or solid elements.

Beam: View of a longitudinal section through beams.
Cross section: View of the beam section at any location along the beam axis.

Views
List of the existing views.
Representation
Nothing: Do not display any tendon group properties.

Height zv: Output the tendon group ordinates.

Force: Display the prestressing force curve.

Radius: Output curvature radii.

Superelevation
Set the superelevation for the view.
Text height
Set the text height for the labels.
Visible, remaining tendon groups
The tendon groups can be moved between both list boxes of the view.
The intersection and beam display represent the selected tendon group in a display plane xv-zv defined by three points.
Also, all corresponding elements are displayed with their section thicknesses to allow the viewer to evaluate the height level
of the tendon groups in the section.
The following illustration shows the superelevated display of a tendon group, its ordinates and the corresponding
prestressing force curve.

272

Input
Tendon groups in beam series 1, [-0.50/0.00/0.00] - [60.50/0.00/0.00] / [-0.50/0.00/1.00]
Superelevation = 5
0
0

Tendon group ordinates zv [cm] at the base points

0.00

6.10

12.20

18.30

24.40

30.50

36.60

42.70

48.80

54.90

61.00

52.0

114.4

159.0

151.9

94.0

36.0

94.0

151.9

159.0

114.4

52.0

Force function of tendon group 1 (10 tendon(s), l = 61.22 m)

Prestressing system 1 - LH Holzmann. Certification according to DIN 4227.
Pm0
= 1226.6 kN,
Ap = 1260.0 mm, a = 0.20, Angle ' = 0.20 /m
E-Modulus= 195000 MN/m, Ah = 4071.5 mm, n = 0.20, Slippage = 5.00 mm
Prestressing procedure 1 - Beispiel
Pre. anchor
:
Start
End
Normal. force : 1.080 1.050 1.080 1.050
Pre. force [kN]: 1324.7 1252.2 1324.7 1252.2
Extension [mm]: 301.7
-2.6
16.9
-2.6

12.20

18.30

24.40

30.50

36.60

42.70

48.80

54.90

11824.6

11895.1

12103.6

12381.0

12446.7

12097.2

12446.7

6.10

12381.0

11895.1

0.00

12103.6

11824.6 [kN]

12515.2

61.00

xv
[m]

Explanations of the intersection and beam display

[...]-[...] / [...]

Coordinates [m] of the three points defining the display plane. The first two points determine the xv
direction, the third point indicates the zv direction.

Tendon group ordinate zv

The ordinates [cm] relate to the origin that has been specified. This is indicated in the longitudinal
section (in this case on the section's upper edge).
Prestressing System
Pm0

Permissible prestressing force for each tendon [kN].

E-modulus

E-modulus of the prestressing steel [MN/m].

Section area of a tendon [mm].

Section area of a duct [mm].

ma, mn

Friction coefficient for prestressing and release.

Angle '

Unintentional deviation angle of a tendon [/m].

Slippage

Slippage at the prestressing anchor [mm].

Prestressing Procedure Number and name of the prestressing procedure.

Normalized force

The factor for the tensioning and release at the start and end of a tendon.

Prestressing force

Prestressing force at the start and end of the tendon for tensioning and release [kN].

Extension

Calculated change in length of the tendon at the start and end of the tendon due to tensioning and
release regardless of slippage and structure deformation [mm].

The maximum prestressing force in the tendon group is shown on the left side.

273

DIN 1045-1 Design

Basics
The reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete design according to DIN 1045-1 can be used for all engineering structures
that need not be checked according to the guidelines of the DIN Technical Report 102. In the calculation settings you can
select which version of the standard will be used:
DIN 1045-1:2001-07 with revision A2:2005-06

DIN 1045-1:2008-08

Permitted structure models include beam, area and solid structures. Prestressed structures can only be checked in the FEM
module.
Differing components can be combined in a structure model:
Non-prestressed components

Prestressed components with subsequent bond

Prestressed components without bond

Components with external prestressing

Mixed-construction components

The design is carried out after the static calculation. To do so, you need to assign the calculated load cases to the actions in
accordance with DIN 1055-100. The program will take into account the preset safety factors and combination coefficients
for the desired design situations to automatically calculate the decisive design internal forces for either the entire system or
a group of selected elements.
The actions and check selection dialogs can be opened from the analysis settings. Detailed check specifications and
reinforcement data must be entered during section definition.
The checks are limited to elements with materials C12/15 to C100/115 and LC12/13 to LC60/66. For strength classes
C55/67 and LC55/60 or higher, guideline 5.3.3 (9) of the standard applies.
For beams and design objects, all checks are carried out at the polygon section. For general notes on using design objects,
refer to the relevant chapter of the manual.
In the DIN 1045-1 Design folder of the database you can also perform a single design for user-defined polygon sections or
composite sections.

274

Input

Input
Actions and Design Situations
The load design values are calculated based on the internal forces of individual load cases and load case combinations. To
do so, the existing load cases and load case combinations must be assigned to actions. These actions are then used to
establish the desired design situations.
The following dialog is opened from the database or the Settings in the Analysis menu.

Action...
Open the dialog for entering new actions:
Permanent actions (G, GE, GH)

Prestressing (P)

Creep and shrinkage, relaxation (CSR1, CSR2)

These actions are only available if a P action has been defined. In the combinations they are treated, along with P, as a
single action.
Variable actions (QN, QS, QW, QT, QH, QD)

Accidental actions (A)

Actions due to earthquakes (AE)

Design values of actions (Fd)

These actions already contain the partial safety factors and combination coefficients. They are combined exclusively.
Cyclic fatigue actions (Qfat)

275

DIN 1045-1 Design

Calculate
Calculate the defined design situations. Once calculated, the extremal results (internal forces, support reactions) can be
accessed for all situations in the database. This allows you to evaluate the results without having to execute the checking
module. Each time you execute the checking module, all results will be automatically recalculated using the currently valid
actions and then stored in the database for the elements to be checked.
The following table demonstrates how the situations are used in
chapters.
Situation
Ultimate limit state
Chapter
Permanent and temp.
Longitudinal reinf.
10.2
Accidental
Lateral reinf.
10.3
Earthquake
Torsional reinf.
10.4
Characteristic
Robustness reinf.
5.3.2
(rare)
(following DIN TR 102,
4.3.1.3)

Frequent

Fatigue, simplified

10.8.4

Fatigue reinf. steel

Fatigue prestr. steel
Fatigue concrete

10.8.3
10.8.3
10.8.3

Quasi-continuous

Fatigue

the various checks. The numbers refer to the DIN 1045-1

Serviceability limit state

Chapter

Concrete compr. stress

Reinforcing steel stress
Prestressing steel stress
Decompression Class A
Crack reinforcement
Crack width Class B
Decompression Class B
Crack width Class C, D
Concrete compr. stress
Prestressing steel stress
Decompression Class C
Crack width Class E, F
Deformations

11.1.2
11.1.3
11.1.4
11.2.1
11.2.2
11.2.4
11.2.1
11.2.4
11.1.2
11.1.4
11.2.1
11.2.4
11.3

Definition of an Action
The illustration below shows an example of the dialog field for entering a variable action. The dialog fields for other action
types are of a similar appearance.

Label
User-defined label for the action.
Gamma.sup, Gamma.inf
Partial safety factors gsup and ginf.

276

Input
Combination coefficients psi for:
Input fields for selecting the combination coefficients for variable actions. The
selected combination coefficients y0, y1 and y2.

button allows you to view and change the

Load cases
List of possible load cases or load case combinations. You can choose an item from the list by selecting it and clicking the
corresponding button or by using drag & drop.
Multi-select
Load cases and combinations can be added to the actions more than once.
Exclusive variants
Variable actions may consist of multiple exclusive variants that are mutually exclusive. The variants themselves contain both
inclusive and exclusive parts. You can add or delete action variants with the

buttons.

Inclusive load cases

Selected load cases and combinations that can act simultaneously.
Exclusive load cases
Selected load cases and combinations that exclude each other.
Prestressing loss from relaxation of prestressing steel
The prestressing loss is defined as a constant percentage reduction of prestress.
CS as constant reduction of prestress
As an alternative to defining load cases, you can allow for the effect of creep and shrinkage (CS) by defining a constant
percentage reduction of prestress.
Internal prestressing
Selected load cases that describe internal prestressing. The reactions of the individual load cases are added up.
External prestressing
Selected load cases that describe external prestressing. The reactions of the individual load cases are added up.

Partial Safety Factors

The partial safety factors of the construction materials are preset with the values specified by DIN 1045-1, Table 1, and can
be modified if necessary. In design situations resulting from earthquakes, the factors of the permanent and temporary
design situation apply as specified in DIN 4149:2005-04, Chapter 8.1.3 (3). In version 6.12 or higher, the partial safety
factors for actions are determined by the definition of actions in accordance with Table 2 of the standard. These factors
appear in the Partial Safety Factors dialog for compatibility reasons only and therefore cannot be modified.

277

DIN 1045-1 Design

Section Input
The section inputs contain all of the specific settings made for checks in the ultimate limit and serviceability states. An
overview of the design specifications can be accessed in the DIN 1045-1 Design section of the database.

Checks
The following dialog is used to define which ultimate limit state and serviceability checks are available for the section. The
analysis settings allow to override this selection for the entire structure.

Prestress of component
The type of prestressing can be selected for each section separately:
not prestressed

subsequent bond

without bond

external

mixed construction

Requirement class
The check conditions for the decompression and crack width check are defined in DIN 1045-1, Chapter 11.2.1, Table 18,
based on the requirement classes A through F. The minimum requirement class is derived from Table 19 depending on the
exposure class of the structure and the prestress type of the component.
Robustness
This check determines the minimum reinforcement for ensuring ductile component behavior according to DIN 1045-1,
Chapter 5.3.2 (also referred to as robustness reinforcement in Book 525).

278

Input

Base Values
The base values apply for all checks in the ultimate limit and serviceability states.

Design mode
Standard: Standard design mode for bending with normal force throughout the load range. Reinforcement will be

calculated in the tensile section to the greatest degree possible.

Symmetrical: Design for symmetrical reinforcement. As opposed to the standard mode, all of the reinforcement layers

will be increased if a reinforcement increase is necessary. The predefined relationships between the reinforcement layers
will not be affected.
Compression member: For compression members, a symmetrical design is carried out with allowance for the minimum

reinforcement according to DIN 1045-1, Chapter 13.5.2.

Alternative concrete
This value is necessary to perform a design according to the standard if the material type Beton is selected.
Reduction factor of prestr. for robustness
In the program the regulations of the DIN Technical Report 102, Section 4.3.1.3(108) are decisive for the arrangement of
the robustness reinforcement. Thus for the determination of the tensile zone the statically determined effect of prestressing
is not taken into account. Because this cannot be determined for area elements the prestress can alternatively be reduced by
a reduction factor. The specification of an appropriate value is subject to the discretion of the user.
Effective height
Effective static height for the shear design of area elements [m].
cot Theta, Method

cot Q defines the concrete strut angle according to DIN 1045-1, Chapter 10.3.4 (3). The program will suggest a value of 1
(45 strut angle). You can choose to ignore the suggestion and pick any value between 0.58 and 3 (normal concrete) or 2
(lightweight concrete). Entering a higher number will normally result in a lower necessary lateral force reinforcement Asw, a
lower absorbable lateral force VRd,max and a larger displacement a1 according to Eq. (147). Three calculation methods can
be chosen for the check:
Standard: The input value is limited to the range permitted in accordance with DIN 1045-1, Eq. (73) for lateral force,

torsion and combined loads (method with load-dependent strut angle).

Constant: The check is carried out using the chosen value for cot Q without further limitations (cf. interpretation No.
24 of NABau).

Std./45: For lateral force cot Q is limited according to Eq. (73), for torsion a constant strut angle of 45 is assumed for
simplification according to Chapter 10.4.2(2).
The actual effective concrete strut angle is logged for each check location.

279

DIN 1045-1 Design

Bending reinforcement Asl according to picture 32
The bending reinforcement to be added according to DIN 1045-1, Chapter 10.3.3, Figure 32 [cm].
Automatic extension of Asl to
You can optionally specify a maximum value for area elements and the program will automatically increase the above input
value until that maximum value is reached in order to avoid stirrup reinforcement [cm].
Quality of stirrups
420S: Reinforcing rods according to DIN 488, Part 1.

500S: Reinforcing rods according to DIN 488 Part 1 and DIN 1045-1 Tab. 11.

500M: Reinforcing meshes according to DIN 488 Part 1 and DIN 1045-1 Tab. 11.

General: User-definable steel quality [MN/m].

Factor for min rhow

The minimum reinforcement level min rw complies with DIN 1045-1, Chapter 13.2.3 (5), and is defined using a factor
related to the base values r according to Tab. 29. The program will suggest a factor of 1 for beams and design objects and
a factor of 0.6 for area elements as per 13.3.3 (2). The factor can be any number between 0 and 1.6, which is the nominal
value for structured sections with prestressed tension chord.
Design like slabs
Beams or design objects are treated like slabs, which means that a minimum lateral force reinforcement will not be
determined as per 13.3.3 (2) if no lateral force reinforcement is required for computation.
Laying measure cv,l
In DIN 1045-1:2008-08, Chapter 10.3.4(2), and NABau No. 24, the internal lever arm z is limited to the maximum value
derived from z = d cv,l 30 mm and z = d 2cv,l. Note that cv,l is the laying measure of the longitudinal reinforcement in
the concrete compressive zone. For cv,l the program will suggest the shortest axis distance of the longitudinal reinforcement
from the section edge d1.
Separate check for x and y direction
For two-axes stressed slabs, the lateral force check can be performed separately in the x and y stress directions as described
in DIN 1045-1:2008-08, Chapter 10.3.1(5), and NABau No. 76. The user is responsible for properly aligning the
reinforcement directions.

Shear Section
For polygon sections, additional section dimensions are required for the lateral force and torsion design according to DIN
1045-1. These dimensions are explained in the following.

280

Input
Width
Section width for calculating the lateral force load-bearing capacity for Qz [m].
Height
Section height for calculating the lateral force load-bearing capacity for Qy [m].
Effective height
Effective static height for calculating the lateral force load-bearing capacity for Qz [m].
Effective width
Effective static width for calculating the lateral force load-bearing capacity for Qy [m].
Nom. width, nom. height
The nominal width or height of internally prestressed components as per DIN 1045-1, Chapter 10.3.4 (8) for including the
duct diameter in the calculation of the design value of the lateral load-bearing capacity VRd,max.
Core section Ak= z1 * z2
Dimensions of the core section for calculating the torsion reinforcement [m].
teff
The effective wall thickness of the torsion section according to DIN 1045-1, Figure 36 [m].
Box section
Data for determining the factor ac,red in DIN 1045-1, Eq. (93) and the torsion section utilization according to Eq. (94) or
(95).

Concrete Stress

Concrete compressive stress

The concrete compressive stress sc must be limited to 0.60 fck under the rare (characteristic) combination in the
construction stages and final states according to DIN 1045-1, Chapter 11.1.2 (1). This condition is normally checked by the
program. If serviceability is significantly influenced by creep, the limit 0.45 fck should be maintained under the quasicontinuous combination according to 11.1.2 (2).
Decompression
Decisive stress for the decompression check for area elements (s1, sx, sy).
281

DIN 1045-1 Design

Crack Width
These specifications apply to the minimum crack reinforcement calculation and the crack width check.

wk,per
Calculation value of the crack width according to DIN 1045-1, Chapter 11.2.1, Table 18 [mm]. The program will suggest a
tabular value based on the selected requirement class and the prestressing of the component. This value can be modified
after the input field is enabled.
max. ds
Largest existing bar diameter of the reinforcing steel reinforcement according to 11.2.2 (6), Eq. (131) [mm].
Coefficient Xi1
The bond coefficient x1 according to DIN 1045-1, Eq. (130) defines the extend to which prestressing steel as per 11.2.2 (7)
can be taken into account for the minimum crack reinforcement. It is also used in the calculation of the effective
reinforcement level according to Eq. (133) and thus the direct calculation of the crack width. Data input is blocked for area
elements since prestressing steel is normally not taken into account here.
Determ. of the tensile zone
You can specify the tensile zone where the minimum crack reinforcement described in Chapter 11.2.2 will be placed by
selecting either an action combination (AC) or a restraint (bending, centrical tension).
Thick component
Based on Chapter 11.2.2(8) of edition 2008 the minimum reinforcement for the crack width limitation in the case of thicker
components under centrical restraint can be determined to Equation (130a). Therewith a reduction compared to the
calculation with Equation (127) can be achieved.
Coefficient k
Coefficient used to take into account nonlinearly distributed concrete tensile stresses in the section according to 11.2.2 (5).
Concrete age
The age of the concrete is used to determine the effective concrete tensile strength fct,eff as per 11.2.2 (5). This is done
separately for the minimum reinforcement calculation and the crack width calculation.
Check method
The crack width check can be performed either through direct calculation of the standard as described in Chapter 11.2.4 or
by simply limiting the bar distances according to the information provided in Table 21. According to Zilch and Rogge (2002,
p. 277), the simplified method only yields definitive results for single-layer tensile reinforcement with d1 = 4 cm. The user is
responsible for the evaluation of these requirements.

282

Input
sr,max
When calculating the crack width, by default the crack distance is determined using Equation (137) of the standard.
Alternatively, you can preset an upper limit for sr,max [mm] so that, for example, the special conditions of Equation (138) or
Paragraph (8) of Chapter 11.2.4 are taken into account.
max. s
Largest existing bar distance of the reinforcing steel reinforcement for the simplified crack width check [mm].

Fatigue

dSigma.Rsk,s, dSigma.Rsk,b
The permissible characteristic stress range DsRsk (N*) of the longitudinal reinforcement and shear reinforcement at N* load
cycles according to the Whler curves specified in Chapter 10.8.3 [MN/m]. The value found in Table 16, Row 1 (beam
sections) resp. Row 2 (area sections, edition 2008-08), is suggested in the dialog. For the shear reinforcement, the mandrel
diameter is taken to be dbr = 4 ds.
dSigma.Rsk,p
The permissible characteristic stress range DsRsk (N*) of the prestressing steel at N* load cycles according to the Whler
curves specified in Chapter 10.8.3 [MN/m]. The value found in Table 17, Row 4, is suggested in the dialog.
Eta
Increase factor h for the reinforcing steel stress of the longitudinal reinforcement. This factor is used to take into account
the varying bonding behavior of concrete and prestressing steel as per Chapter 10.8.2 (3), Eq. (118).
fcd,fat
Concrete compressive strength before onset of cyclic load according to DIN 1045-1, Chapter 10.8.4, Eq. (124) [MN/m]. In
general, the following applies:

f cd, fat = cc (t 0 ) f cd 1 - ck
250

(124)

with

cc (t 0 ) = e
t0

0.2 (1- 28 / t0 )

Time of the initial stressing of the concrete.

fcd,fat for t0 = 28 and fcd = 0.85 fck / gc,fat is suggested in the dialog.

283

DIN 1045-1 Design

Simplified check
The simplified check according to Chapter 10.8.4 bases on the frequent action combination including the traffic loads used
for the serviceability checks. The method for concrete is defined in Chapter 10.8.4(4), the permissible stress ranges for steel
are suggested according to Chapter 10.8.4(2) in the dialog. For shear reinforcement this value is reduced analogous to
Table 16.
Limit design variants
For area elements, the variants for determining the stress range can be limited to the corresponding sets of design internal
forces. For more information see chapter 'Fatigue Checks / Special Characteristic for Shell Structures'.

Scattering Coefficients

The coefficients used to take into account the scattering of prestressing force are defined in DIN 1045-1 depending on the
prestressing type. In the dialog, values are suggested according to Chapter 8.7.4 (2) for subsequent bond. Lower scattering
levels can be specified in the construction stage as shown in Book 525. The defined scattering coefficients are taken into
account for the effects from internal prestressing in the following checks:
Decompression check

Minimum reinforcement for crack width limitation

Crack width check

Regarding the effects from external prestressing, the scattering coefficients correspond to rsup = rinf = 1 on the basis of DIN
Technical Report 102, Chapter 2.5.4.2 (4).

284

Input

Analysis Settings
The DIN 1045-1 dialog page can be opened using the Settings function of the Analysis menu.

Edition of the standard

The edition you select will be used for all subsequent calculations.
Check selection
When selecting checks, the following cases are to be distinguished:
The check is performed according to the settings in the section dialog (see section inputs).
The check is performed for all sections of the structure.
The check is performed for no sections of the structure.
Corresponding section settings are bundled as follows:
Reinforcement

Fatigue
Crack width

Bend and longitudinal force

Lateral force
Torsion
Robustness
Fatigue for concrete
Fatigue for reinforcing and prestressed steel
Minimum crack reinforcement
Calculation of the crack width

An overview of the checks can be accessed using the Design Settings function in the DIN 1045-1 Design folder of the
database.
Concrete curve fatigue
For the fatigue checks, the curve to determine the concrete compressive stresses can be selected.
All checks for the extreme values of actions (simplifying)
When you make a selection, the minimum and maximum values are generated for each internal force component. They will
then be used together with their associated values to execute the design. Alternatively, all possible combinations of load
cases can be generated and designed as well. This option can, however, greatly slow down calculation if there is a large
number of load cases.

285

DIN 1045-1 Design

Actions...
Open the dialog for describing actions.
Partial safety factors...
Open the dialog for modifying partial safety factors.
Listing
No: No log is generated by the checking program.

Standard: Log with tabular output of results.

Detailed: Additional output of the decisive combination internal forces at the check locations.

Standard > permissible: Standard log limited to check locations where the permissible limit values are exceeded.

Detailed > permissible: Detailed log limited to check locations where the permissible limit values are exceeded.

Single Design
The single design function allows you to analyze individual sections independently of the global system using predefined
internal forces. The following data needs to be entered in the Single Design table, which is located in the DIN 1045-1
Design folder of the database.
Section
Number of the section to be designed. Both polygon and composite sections can be designed.
Concrete
Concrete class C12/15, ... C100/115 or LC12/13, ... LC60/66
Apparent density
Apparent density of the lightweight concrete [kg/m].
Combination
Design situation according to DIN 1045-1, Table 2:
0: Permanent and temporary design situation.

1: Accidental design situation.

Nsd, Mysd, Mzsd

Internal forces being designed. The internal forces refer to the centroid in polygon sections or the section zero point in
composite sections.
Mode
Standard: Standard design mode for bending with normal force throughout the load range. Reinforcement will be

calculated in the tensile section to the greatest degree possible.

Symmetrical: Design for symmetrical reinforcement. As opposed to the standard mode, all of the reinforcement layers

will be increased if a reinforcement increase is necessary. The predefined relationships between the reinforcement layers
will not be affected.
Compression member: For compression members a symmetrical design is carried out with allowance for the minimum

reinforcement according to DIN 1045-1, Chapter 13.5.2.

Strains: Determine strain state for existing reinforcing steel layers.

Strains SLS: Determine strain state in the serviceability limit state for existing reinforcing steel layers. A linear strain
stress curve of the concrete is used in the compression zone to determine the strain state.
Strains SLS2: Determine strain state in the serviceability limit state for existing reinforcing steel layers. A nonlinear strain
stress curve of the concrete is used as shown in Figure 22. Note that a horizontal progression is assumed for strains
exceeding ec1.
Load bearing capacity: Calculation of the load bearing capacity in the ultimate limit state.

Inactive: Design disabled.

The calculation can be carried out while the input table is open using the Single Design or Page Preview menu item.

286

Input

Punching Shear Check

When you select a check node, the key data for the checks is displayed in a dialog field. This dialog is divided into three
pages.
1a. Input data, column
The column forms Rectangle and Round, with the locations Intern, Edge parallel to x, Edge parallel to y and Corner are
available. When you enter a new column, the program will suggest the dimensions of existing columns. The edge distances
ax and ay are used to calculate the perimeters ui of the check sections. Alternatively the check locations Wall end and Wall
corner can be chosen.
1b. Input data, slab
This section shows the material properties, the existing reinforcement as well as additional coefficients for calculating
punching shear resistances.
1c. Input data, action
The action VEd can either be added as a support force from a previous design according to DIN 1045-1 or defined directly.
All medium soil pressures s0 lower the design value of the lateral force by 0.5s0Acrit. The medium longitudinal forces NEd
are used to calculate the normal concrete stress.
1d. Book 525
The option allows the reduction of the load rising factor according to Eq. (H.10-8).
2. Aperture
This dialog page is used to define the geometry and location of an opening.
3. Results
This dialog page shows the calculated punching shear resistances, the necessary punching shear reinforcement (if
applicable) and the minimum bending reinforcement. You can call up an improved bending reinforcement by clicking the
Proposal button.
Example

Punching shear check node 4312

0.45

The check is performed according to DIN 1045-1:2008-08.

1. Measurements, situation and material
Rectangular column with width bx = 0.45 m and height by = 0.45 m
Situation: Inside; b = 1.05
0.45

287

DIN 1045-1 Design

Critical perimeter u = 3.59 m (distance = 0.29 m); Acrit = 0.97 m
Slab height h = 0.240 m
Effective height of the slab dx = 0.190 m; dy = 0.190 m
Available longitudinal reinforcement asx = 31.42 cm/m; asy = 31.42 cm/m
Truss angle a = 90.0
Concrete: C35/45

Reinforce.: BSt 500

fck = 35.00 N/mm

a = 0.85

gc = 1.50

fcd = a fck / gc = 19.83 N/mm

fck = 500.00 N/mm

gc = 1.15

fyd = fyk / gs = 434.78 N/mm

2. Action from fundamental combination

s0 = 0.00 kN/m

VEd = 809.00 kN
NEd = 0.00 kN/m
vEd = b VEd / u = 236.57 kN/m
3. Punching resistance without punching reinforcement

v Rd,ct = (0,21 / g c ) h1 k (100 rl fck )1/ 3 - 0,12 s cd d

with h1 = 1.00

k = 2.00

rl = 0.0165

fck = 35.00 N/mm

scd = 0.00 N/mm

d = 0.19 m

vRd,ct = 205.79 kN/m

vEd / vRd,ct = 1.15 > 1

Punching reinforcement is required!

4. Punching reinforcement (normal)

A s w,1 =

( v Ed - v Rd,c ) u1
k s f yd

A s w, i =

( v Ed - v Rd,c ) u i s w
k s f yd d

Asw,min = minrw sw ui
with

vRd,c = 205.79 kN/m

fyd = 434.78 N/mm

ks = 0.70

sw = 0.142 m

minrw = 0.102 %

d = 0.19 m

Row 1:

Distance = 0.10 m;

u1 = 2.40 m;

vEd,1 = 354.39 kN/m;

Row 2:

Asw,1 = 11.70 cm
Distance = 0.24 m;

> Asw,1,min = 3.47 cm

u2 = 3.29 m;

vEd,2 = 258.26 kN/m;

< Asw,2,min = 4.76 cm

Asw,2 = 4.24 cm
External perimeter: Distance = 0.52 m; ua = 5.08 m; vEd,a = 167.22 kN/m;
ka = 0.897; vRd,ct,a = 184.52 kN/m
vEd,a vRd,ct,a The check is OK!
5. Minimum momenta and corresponding longitudinal reinforcement according to section 10.5.6
mEd,x = hx VEd = 0.125 809.00 = 101.13 kNm/m
corresponding longitudinal reinforcement asx,min=12.93 cm/m asx=31.42 cm/m
mEd,y = hy VEd = 0.125 809.00 = 101.13 kNm/m
corresponding longitudinal reinforcement asy,min=12.93 cm/m asy=31.42 cm/m

288

Prestressed Structures

Prestressed Structures
Internal Prestressing
For internal prestressing, the tendon groups as well as the prestressing system and procedures are entered using the
Prestressing function of the Structure menu. To include them in the FEM calculation, you then need to define a load case of
the Prestressing load type. For more information, refer to the Prestressed Concrete section of the manual.
Prestressing with bond and prestressing without bond are differentiated in the section inputs and the specifications for the
Creep and shrinkage load case.

External Prestressing, Mixed Construction

External prestressing can be taken into account by entering the external forces directly in the program. For mixed
construction, the additional tendons with bond must be entered as described above.

Scattering of Prestressing
For checks in the ultimate limit state, the following applies for the design value of the prestressing force according to DIN
1045-1, Chapter 8.7.5 (1):

Pd = gP Pm,t
with

Pm,t

Mean value of prestressing force at time t including prestressing losses from friction, slippage, creep, shrinkage and
relaxation.

Partial safety factor of prestressing force, gP = 1 as specified in Chapter 8.7.5 (1).

In the serviceability limit state, two characteristic values for the prestressing force are defined in Chapter 8.7.4 (1):

Pk,sup

= rsup Pm,t

Upper characteristic value according to Eq. (52).

Pk,inf

= rinf Pm,t

Lower characteristic value according to Eq. (53).

The scattering coefficients for internal prestressing are defined separately for construction stages and final states. They are
used in the following checks:

Minimum reinforcement for crack width limitation.

Crack width check.
Decompression check.

Regarding the effects from external prestressing, the scattering coefficients are set to rsup = rinf = 1 on the basis of DIN
Technical Report 102, Chapter 2.5.4.2 (4).

289

DIN 1045-1 Design

Creep and Shrinkage

Similar to prestressing, creep and shrinkage are taken into account by specifying a corresponding load case (Creep and
shrinkage load type) in the FEM calculation. Besides the creep-generating permanent load case, you also need to specify
whether the internal forces relocation between concrete and prestressing steel is to be taken into account. This option is
only useful in the case of tendons with bond.
The decisive creep and shrinkage coefficients for calculating the Creep and shrinkage load case are entered in the section
dialog. Alternatively, you can also use this dialog to calculate the coefficients according to Book 525, Section 9.1.4.

The program determines concrete creep and shrinkage based on a time-dependent stress-strain law developed by Trost.

s b (t ) =

Eb
e b (t ) - j e b,0 - e b,S
1+r j

In this case:

sb(t)

Concrete stress from creep and shrinkage at time t.

E-modulus of the concrete.

Relaxation coefficient according to Trost for time t (normally r = 0.80).

Creep coefficient for time t.

eb(t)

Concrete strain from creep and shrinkage at time t.

eb,0

Concrete strain from creep-generating continuous load.

eb,s

Concrete strain from shrinkage.

Under consideration of these relationships, a time-dependent global stiffness matrix and the associated load vectors are
constructed which, in turn, yield the internal forces and deformations of the concrete. The resulting stress changes in the
prestressing steel are also determined provided they are selected in the load case. Any influence from the relaxation of the
prestressing steel will be ignored in this case. According to Zilch/Rogge (2002, p. 256), this influence can be calculated
separately (see following section) and combined with the changes from creep and shrinkage for all time-dependent
prestressing losses:

Dsp,csr = Dspr + Ep Decpt

with

Dspr

Prestressing loss from relaxation of the prestressing steel.

Decpt

Concrete strain change from creep and shrinkage.

E-modulus of the prestressing steel.

290

Prestressed Structures

Relaxation of Prestressing Steel

According to DIN 1045-1, Chapter 8.7.3, the stress change Dspr in the tendons at position x caused by relaxation must be
taken into account in addition to the stress loss from concrete creep and shrinkage. The relaxation can be defined by the
ratio of initial stress to characteristic tensile stress (sp0/fpk) from the building inspection certification with an initial stress of
(51)

sp0 = spg0 0.3 Dsp,csr

with

Dsp,csr

Stress change in the tendons due to creep, shrinkage and relaxation at position x at time t.

spg0

Initial stress in the tendons from prestressing and permanent actions.

Since the entire stress loss cannot be known in advance, the input value Dsp,csr for Eq. (51) must be estimated and then
iteratively corrected if necessary (cf. Knig et al. 2003, p. 38). Alternatively, you can set sp0 = spg0 and for conventional
buildings sp0 = 0.95 spg0 according to DIN 1045-1 for the sake of simplicity and to be on the safe side. The following
table shows an example of stress loss due to relaxation.

sp0/fpk
0.45
0.50
0.55
0.60
0.65
0.70
0.75
0.80

Characteristic values of the stress losses Dspr in % of the initial tension sp0
for prestressing steel strand St 1570 / 1770 with very low relaxation
Time interval after prestressing in hours
1
10
200
1000
5000
5 105
106

1.0

1.2
2.0

1.0
2.5
4.0

1.3
2.0
3.0
5.0

1.2
2.0
3.0
4.5
6.5

1.0
2.5
4.5
6.5
9.0
13.0

1.2
2.8
5.0
7.0
10.0
14.0

For tendons with DIN 4227 certification, the example of t = with a permissible utilization of 0.55 according to DIN 4227,
Tab. 9, Row 65, results in a stress loss of around 1%, which generally can be ignored.
Tendons with new certification may be utilized by up to 0.65 according to DIN 1045-1, Chapter 11.1.4. This results in
significantly higher stress losses that must be accounted for.
You can define the stress losses in the CSR actions of the DIN 1045-1 Actions dialog.

291

DIN 1045-1 Design

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States

The

following checks are available:

Bending with or without longitudinal force or longitudinal force only (DIN 1045-1, Chapter 10.2).
Ensuring ductile component behavior (Chapter 5.3.2).
Lateral force (Chapter 10.3).
Torsion and combined stressing (Chapter 10.4).
Punching shear (Chapter 10.5).
Fatigue check (Chapter 10.8).

Design Combinations
The following combinations in accordance with DIN 1055-100, Chapter 9.4, are taken into account in the ultimate limit
states:

Combination for permanent and temporary design situations

E g G, j Gk, j g P Pk g Q,1 Qk,1 g Q,i y 0,i Qk,i

j 1

i >1

Combination for accidental design situations

E g GA, j Gk, j g PA Pk Ad y1,1 Qk,1 y 2,i Qk,i

j 1

i >1

(14)

(15)

Combination for design situations resulting from earthquakes

E Gk, j Pk g1 AEd y 2,i Qk,i

j 1

i 1

(16)

The weighting factor for the earthquake action is assumed as g1 = 1 according to DIN 4149, Eq. (37).
For the check against fatigue two alternative action combinations can be used:
Frequent combination for simplified checks according to DIN 1055-100, Chapter 10.4, Equation (23), in conjunction

with DIN 1045-1, Chapter 10.8.4.

E Gk, j Pk y1,1 Qk,1 y 2,i Qk,i

j 1

i >1

(23)

Fatigue combination according to DIN EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 6.8.3, Equation (6.69), for checks with damage equivalent
stress ranges based on DIN 1045-1, Chapter 10.8.3.

E Gk, j Pk y1,1 Qk,1 y 2,i Qk,i Qfat

j 1

i >1

(6.69)

In this equation Qk,1 and Qk,i are non-cyclic, non-permanent actions, whereas Qfat defines the action of the relevant
fatigue load.
For each combination you can define different design situations for the construction stages and final states. When
conducting the check, the extreme value deriving from all combinations and situations is decisive.

292

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States

Stress-Strain-Curves
The

following characteristics are used for section design:

Concrete: parabola-rectangle diagram according to DIN 1045-1, Figure 23.
Reinforcing steel: stress-strain curve according to Figure 27, with rising upper branch.
Prestressing steel: stress-strain curve according to Figure 29, with horizontal upper branch according to Chapter
9.3.3 (2).

For the fatigue checks, the user defines one of the following curves to determine the concrete compressive stresses:
Stress-strain curve according to Figure 22, with fc = fcm.

Parabola-rectangle diagram according to Figure 23.

Linear curve with the gradient arctan Ecm.

Design Internal Forces

The design internal forces are derived from the action combinations, with separate results for the variants defined in the
construction stages and final states.
For area elements the design internal forces correspond to the plasticity approach from Wolfensberger and Thrlimann. This
approach takes into account how much the reinforcement deviates from the crack direction. Due to the current lack of
precise data regarding the combined load of reinforced concrete shell structures from bending and normal force, the design
internal forces for bending and normal force are calculated independently according to the static limit theorem of the
plasticity theory and then used together as the basis for the design. This approach should always lead to results that are on
the safe side.
For 3D stressed beams and design objects, the shear design is performed separately for the Qy and Qz lateral forces. The
simultaneous effect of shear and torsion stress is taken into account in accordance with DIN 1045-1, Chapter 10.4.
Depending on the section type and reinforcement configuration, the variants of design internal forces listed below are taken
into account.
Beam reinforcement
Design for m, n

Shear and torsion design

min Nx,

corresp. My,

corresp. Mz

min Qy

min Qy,

corresp. Mx

max Nx,

corresp. My,

corresp. Mz

max Qy

max Qy,

corresp. Mx

min My,

corresp. Mz,

corresp. Nx

min Qz

min Qz,

corresp. Mx

max My,

corresp. Mz,

corresp. Nx

max Qz

max Qz,

corresp. Mx

min Mz,

corresp. Nx,

corresp. My

min Mx

min Mx,

corresp. Qy

max Mz,

corresp. Nx,

corresp. My

max Mx

max Mx,

corresp. Qy

min Mx,

corresp. Qz

max Mx,

corresp. Qz

Orthogonal area reinforcement

Slabs

min mx

- |corresp. mxy|;

max mx

+ |corresp. mxy|

min my

- |corresp. mxy|;

max my

+ |corresp. mxy|

corresp. mx

|min mxy|;

corresp. mx

|max mxy|

corresp. my

|min mxy|;

corresp. my

|max mxy|

Plain stress

min nx

- |corresp. nxy|;

max nx

+ |corresp. nxy|

elements

min ny

- |corresp. nxy|;

max ny

+ |corresp. nxy|

corresp. nx

|min nxy|;

corresp. nx

|max nxy|

corresp. ny

|min nxy|;

corresp. ny

|max nxy|

293

DIN 1045-1 Design

Shells

min mx

- |corresp. mxy|,

corresp. nx

|corresp. nxy|

max mx

+ |corresp. mxy|,

corresp. nx

|corresp. nxy|

min my

- |corresp. mxy|,

corresp. ny

|corresp. nxy|

max my

+ |corresp. mxy|,

corresp. ny

|corresp. nxy|

corresp. mx

|min mxy|,

corresp. nx

|corresp. nxy|

corresp. mx

|max mxy|,

corresp. nx

|corresp. nxy|

corresp. my

|min mxy|,

corresp. ny

|corresp. nxy|

corresp. my

|max mxy|,

corresp. ny

|corresp. nxy|

min nx

- |corresp. nxy|,

corresp. mx

|corresp. mxy|

max nx

+ |corresp. nxy|,

corresp. mx

|corresp. mxy|

min ny

- |corresp. nxy|,

corresp. my

|corresp. mxy|

max ny

+ |corresp. nxy|,

corresp. my

|corresp. mxy|

corresp. nx

|min nxy|,

corresp. mx

|corresp. mxy|

corresp. nx

|max nxy|,

corresp. mx

|corresp. mxy|

corresp. ny

|min nxy|,

corresp. my

|corresp. mxy|

corresp. ny

|max nxy|,

corresp. my

|corresp. mxy|

Axisymmetric shells

min Nj,

corresp. Mj;

max Nj,

corresp. Mj

min Mj,

corresp. Nj;

max Mj,

corresp. Nj

min Nu,

corresp. Mu;

max Nu,

corresp. Mu

min Mu,

corresp. Nu;

max Mu,

corresp. Nu

Oblique area reinforcement

The bending design of slabs with oblique reinforcement assemblies is carried out based on Kuyt/Rsch. The design
moments are calculated with the help of principal moments m1, m2 based on the equations outlined in Book 166 of the
DAfStb (German Committee of Reinforced Concrete).
For load case combinations, the calculation is based on the extreme values of m1, m2. For combined loads (bending and
longitudinal force), both the design moments and the normal design forces are independently derived from n1, n2. The
normal design forces are then used together as the basis for the design. This should also result in an upper limit for the
load.
Extreme values (principal bending moments):

m1,2 =

1 (m
x
2

+ my )

2
12 ( mx - m y ) 2 + 4mxy

with m1 m2
The angle d assigned to m1 is:

tan d =
Coordinate Systems

2 mxy
2
( mx - m y ) + ( mx - m y ) 2 + 4 mxy

Design moments:

mh =
mx =

1
sin

[m sin (d + y) + m
y
1

[m sin
y
1

2 cos

(d + y ) m1 sin d sin (d + y ) + m2 cos d cos(d + y )

d+m2 cos 2 d m1 sin d sin (d + y ) + m2 cos d cos(d + y )

The formulas apply accordingly for the normal design forces.

294

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States

Shear design for slabs and shells
The shear design of slabs or shells is carried out for the maximum resulting lateral force of a design point. Consequently, the
size of the stirrup reinforcement is independent of the internal force direction and has the dimension [cm/m]. The
following design variants are derived:

min q x2 + corresp. q y2
min q y2 + corresp. q x2

,
,

max q x2 + corresp. q y2
max q y2 + corresp. q x2

For two-axes stressed slabs, the lateral force check can be performed separately in the x and y stress directions as described
in Chapter 10.3.1(5). Consequently, the design is carried out for the following variants:
min qx,
max qx

min qy,

max qy

Design for Bending with and without Longitudinal Force or Longitudinal

Force only
The design for longitudinal force and bending moment is performed according to DIN 1045-1, Chapter 10.2. The
reinforcement required for each internal force combination at the reinforced concrete section is determined iteratively based
on the formulation of equilibrium conditions as well as the limit strain curve depicted in the illustration below. The final
result is derived from the extreme value of all calculated reinforcements.

Strain areas for the design

You can control the result of the design by specifying the reinforcement geometry and choosing one of three design
modes:
Mode Standard
This is the standard design mode for bending with longitudinal force throughout the entire load area. Reinforcement will be
calculated in the tensile section to the greatest degree possible. Due to reasons of economy and to limit the compression
zone height according to Chapter 8.2(3), the compression reinforcement in strain area 3 will be determined in such a way
that the following applies for steel strain es1:

e s1 max e yd , c 2 u - e c 2 u
x/d

[].

with

eyd

The steel strain associated with the design value for strength fyd.

x/d

Referenced compressive zone height.

0.45 for concrete qualities up to C50/60.
0.35 for concrete qualities C55/67 or higher and lightweight concrete.

The procedure in strain areas 4 and 5 is the same as with symmetrical design.
Mode Symmetrical
In contrast to the standard design, the reinforcement will be applied at all predefined locations in all strain areas, if
necessary. The specified relationships between the reinforcement layers will not be affected.
Mode Compression member
The design is performed symmetrically. In addition, the minimum reinforcement required by Chapter 13.5.2 is calculated:

295

DIN 1045-1 Design

As,min = 0.15 | NEd | / fyd

(155)

with

NEd

Design value of the longitudinal force to be absorbed.

fyd

Design value of the reinforcing steel strength at the yield strength.

Concrete compression according to Chapter 10.2(6) cannot be checked.

Inclusion of tendons with bond
When designing beams and design objects, the internal forces of the concrete section is reduced by the statically
determined portions which result from prestressing minus the losses from creep, shrinkage and prestressing steel relaxation
(CSR). Situations prior to the grouting of the tendons are excluded. So only the restraint portions from 'P+CSR' and the
external loads are contained in the remaining internal forces for the composite section. If necessary, the reinforcing steel
positioned by the user will be increased until the composite internal forces can be absorbed.
The position of the tendon groups in the section, the prestressing losses from CSR, the statically determined portions and
the internal forces of the concrete section and the composite section are written to the detailed log.
As a separation into statically determined and undetermined shares of the internal forces from prestressing is not possible
for shell structures, the prestressing is taken into account fully on the action side when designing the longitudinal
reinforcement. As a result, on the resistance side only mild steel and concrete are considered whereas the strain reserves of
the tendons with bond are not used.

Minimum Reinforcement for Ensuring Ductile Component Behavior

According to DIN 1045-1, Chapter 5.3.2, component failures that occur without warning during initial crack formation
must be prevented (ductility criterion). This requirement is fulfilled for reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete
components as long as a minimum reinforcement is included as described in Chapter 13.1.1. This minimum reinforcement,
which is also referred to as the Robustness reinforcement in Book 525 and Technical Report 102, must be calculated for the
crack moment (given prestressing without taking into account the prestressing force) using the average tensile strength of
concrete fctm and the steel stress ss = fyk:

As = Mcr / ( fyk zs )
with

Mcr

Crack moment by which a tensile stress of fctm occurs without prestressing effect at the section edge.

Lever arm of internal forces.

The reinforcement must be distributed throughout the tensile zone based on the constructive guidelines set forth in
Chapter 13.1.1 (3). DIN 1045-1 provides no information on the action combination that is used to determine the tensile
zone. The corresponding rule specified in DIN Technical Report 102, Chapter 4.3.1.3, is therefore used in the program.
Based on that rule, the minimum reinforcement should be placed in areas where tensile stresses in the concrete occur under
the infrequent action combination. According to Technical Report 102, Chapter 4.3.1.3 (107), the statically undetermined
prestressing effect should be taken into account in this combination rather than the statically determined prestressing
effect. Since the infrequent combination is not defined in DIN 1045-1, to be on the safe side it is replaced by the rare
(characteristic) combination for the check. It is the responsibility of the user to observe the remaining constructive guidelines
of Chapter 13.1.1 (3).
The program determines all stresses at the gross section. The statically determined prestressing effect can only be subtracted
for beams and design objects. For area elements the prestress is alternatively reduced by a user-defined reduction factor.
The crack moment results in Mcr = Wc fctm, the lever arm zs of the internal forces is assumed to be 0.9 d for the sake of
simplicity. The calculated reinforcement is evenly distributed to the reinforcement layers in the tensile zone. In the design
mode symmetrical reinforcement is also applied to the remaining layers. This will not affect the predefined relationships
between the individual reinforcement layers. For sections with mode compression member the robustness reinforcement is
not checked because minimum reinforcement is already determined during the design for bending with longitudinal force.
The option to take tendons into account as per Chapter 13.1.1 (2) remains unused.

Minimum Surface Reinforcement for Prestressed Members

A minimum surface reinforcement must always be specified for prestressed components in accordance with DIN 1045-1,
Chapter 13.1.2, regardless of the guidelines on robustness or crack reinforcement. The reinforcement determined according
to Table 29 and 30 can be entered into the program by specifying a base reinforcement in the reinforcing steel description.

296

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States

Design for Lateral Force

Lateral force design involves determining the lateral force tensile reinforcement and includes a concrete strut check as
defined by DIN 1045-1, Chapter 10.3. The following special conditions apply:
The angle of the lateral force reinforcement is assumed to be 90.

In the calculation, the value for cot Q is limited to the range permitted in accordance with Eq. (73) (method with loaddependent strut angle), unless the check with a constant value is selected in the section dialog. The actual effective
concrete strut angle is logged for each check location. Edition 2008, Chapter 10.3.4(3): For perpendicular stirrups or
longitudinal tensile load, cot Q should not fall below the limit value of 1.0. This is guaranteed by the program provided
the user does not specify a smaller value.
The minimum reinforcement is maintained in the calculated stirrup reinforcement as described in Chapter 13.2.3 of the
standard while the reinforcement level r specified in Table 29 is weighted with a user-defined factor. For areas, the
minimum reinforcement will only be determined if a lateral force reinforcement is required for computation (cf.
Building and Civil Engineering Standards Committee (NABau) No. 131).

Slab and shell elements are designed for lateral force qr = (qx + qy). Depending on which has a negative effect,

either the principal compressive force or principal tensile force is used for the associated longitudinal force. If selected,
the check will be carried out separately for the reinforcement directions x and y in accordance with Chapter 10.3.1(5). If
lateral force reinforcement is necessary, it must be added from both directions.
There is no reduction of the action from loads near supports, as specified in Chapter 10.3.2, Section (1) or (2).
For beams and design objects, the decisive values of the equivalent rectangle are determined by the user independently
of the normal section geometry.
As described in Chapter 10.3.4 (2), the internal lever arm is assumed as z = 0.9 d and is limited to the maximum value
derived from z = d cv,l 30 mm and z = d 2cv,l (cf. NABau No. 24). Note that cv,l is the laying measure of the

longitudinal reinforcement in the concrete compressive zone. If cv,l is not specified, the program will use the shortest
axis distance of the longitudinal reinforcement from the section edge d1 in its place.

For beam sections with internal prestressing, the design value of lateral load-bearing capacity VRd,max according to
Chapter 10.3.4 (8) is determined using the nominal value bw,nom of the section width.

Edition 2008: The lateral load-bearing capacity VRd,max is only checked for lateral forces VEd > VRd,ct as explained in

Chapter 10.3.1(4) .
The necessity of a lateral force reinforcement is analyzed according to Chapter 10.3.3 of the standard. As in the
previous case, no reduction of the action from loads near supports occurs.

The formulas of DIN 1045-1 that are used are listed below.
Components without computationally necessary lateral force reinforcement
The design value VRd,ct of the absorbable lateral force in a component without lateral force reinforcement results from
Equation (70).

VRd,ct = 0.10 k h1 (100 r l f ck )1 / 3 - 0.12 s cd bw d

(70:2001)

0.15

VRd,ct =
k h1 (100 r l f ck )1 / 3 - 0.12 s cd bw d
gc

(70:2008)

Edition 2008: In this case you may use a minimum value for the lateral load-bearing capacity VRd,ct,min based on Equation
(70a):
(70a)

VRd,ct,min = [h1 vmin 0.12 scd ] bw d

with

vmin

k1
k 3 f ck
gc

where

200
2.0
d

is a scale factor with

is the partial safety factor for reinforced concrete as per 5.3.3(6), Table 2.

= 1.0 for normal concrete; for lightweight concrete Table 10 applies.

k = 1+

(71)

297

DIN 1045-1 Design

is the longitudinal reinforcement level with

rl =

Asl

Asl
0.02
bw d

is the area of the tensile reinforcement that extends beyond the section being viewed by at least measure d and
is effectively fixed at that position (see Figure 32). For prestressing with immediate bond, the entire prestressing
steel area can be taken into account for Asl.

is the smallest section width in the tensile zone of the section in mm.

d
fck

is the effective static height of the bending reinforcement in the viewed section in mm.

scd

is the design value of the concrete longitudinal stress at the level of the section's centroid with

is the characteristic value of the concrete compressive strength in N/mm.

scd = NEd / Acin N/mm.

NEd

is the design value of the longitudinal force in the section as a result of external actions or prestressing
(NEd < 0 as longitudinal compressive force).

= 0.0525 for d 600 mm

= 0.0375 for d 800 mm
For 600 mm < d < 800 mm, k1 can be interpolated linearly.

Components with computationally necessary lateral force reinforcement

The design value of the absorbable lateral force that is limited by the load-bearing capacity of the lateral force reinforcement
is determined according to Equation (75).

VRd,sy =

Asw
f yd z cot Q
sw

(75)

where

Asw

is the section area of the lateral force reinforcement.

is the distance of the reinforcement perpendicular to the component axis measured in the direction of the
component axis.

= 0.9d < max (d - 2 cv,l , d - cv,l - 30 mm) with cv,l the laying measure of the longitudinal reinforcement according
to Chapter 10.3.4(2).

The strut angle Q of the truss is limited to the following value:

0.58 cot Q

1.2 - 1.4 s cd / f cd 3.0 for normal concrete

1 - VRd,c / VEd 2.0 for lightweight concrete

(73)

Edition 2008: cot Q < 1 should only be used as an exception. In the case of longitudinal tensile stress this lower limit applies
basically (ref. also Book 525, Corr. 1:2005-05). The program takes the limit into account as long as the user does not enter
a smaller value.
where
1/ 3
VRd,c = ct 0.10 h1 f ck
(1 + 1.2
1/ 3
VRd,c = c j 0.48 h1 f ck
(1 + 1.2

s cd
) bw z
f cd

= 2.4

= 0.50

= 1.0 for normal concrete; for lightweight concrete Table 10 applies.

scd

is the design value of the concrete longitudinal stress at the level of the section's centroid with

scd = NEd / Ac in N/mm

NEd

is the design value of the longitudinal force in the section as a result of external actions or prestressing
(NEd < 0 as longitudinal compressive force).

VEd
298

is the design value of the acting lateral force.

(74:2001)

(74:2008)

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States

The design value of the maximum lateral load-bearing capacity VRd,max is determined according to Equation (76).

b z a c f cd
VRd, max = w
cot Q + tan Q

(76)

where

is the reduction factor for the strut strength.

ac = 0.75 h1 with h1 = 1.0 for normal concrete; for lightweight concrete Table 10 applies.
Lateral force reinforcement

rw =

Asw
s w bw sin a

(151)

where

is the reinforcement level of the lateral force reinforcement.

is the angle between the lateral force reinforcement and the beam axis.

min rw

is the minimum value of rw according to 13.2.3(5)

In general: rw = 1.0 r
Slabs: rw = 0.6 r
Structured sections with prestressed tension chord: rw = 1.6 r

is the basis value for the determination of the minimum reinforcement according to Table 29 of the standard.

Design for Torsion and Combined Loads

The design for torsion is carried out according to DIN 1045-1, Chapter 10.4. This design involves determining the diagonal
tensile reinforcement and the longitudinal reinforcement and includes a concrete strut check under maximum torsion stress
and a concrete strut check under simultaneously acting lateral force. The strut angle is determined according to Equation
(73) with the lateral force according to Equation (90). Alternatively a strut angle of 45 for torsion according to Chapter
10.4.2(2) or a constant value cot Q for lateral force and torsion (cf. interpretation No. 24 of NABau) can be chosen in the
section dialog.
The equivalent section on which this design is based is defined by the user independently of the normal section geometry.
Formulas used from the standard:

V b
TEd Ed w
4.5

(87)

4.5 TEd
VEd 1 +
VRd,ct
V
Ed bw

(88)

VEd, T =

TEd z
2Ak

(89)

where

VEd,T

is the shear force in a wall of the check section as a result of a torsion moment.

is the area enclosed by the center lines of the walls.

is the height of the wall, which is defined by the distance of the intersection points of the wall center line to the
center lines of the adjacent walls.

VEd, T + V = VEd, T +

VEd t eff
bw

(90)

where

VEd

is the design value of the acting lateral force according to 10.3.2.

teff

is the effective thickness of a wall; teff is twice the distance from the center line to the exterior but not greater
than the thickness of the existing wall (see Figure 36).

299

DIN 1045-1 Design

TRd,sy =

Asw
f yd 2 Ak cot Q
sw

(91)

TRd,sy =

Asl
f yd 2 Ak tan Q
uk

(92)

where

TRd,sy

is the design value of the absorbable torsion moment of the section.

Asw

is the section area of the torsion reinforcement perpendicular to the component axis.

is the distance of the torsion reinforcement measured in the direction of the component axis.

Asl

is the section area of the torsion longitudinal reinforcement.

is the perimeter of area Ak.

is the strut angle of the truss.

TRd, max =

a c, red f cd 2 Ak t eff
cot Q + tan Q

(93)

where

TRd,max

is the design value of the maximum absorbable torsion moment of the section.

ac,red

= 0.7ac in general (with ac according to 10.3.4(6)).

ac,red

= ac for box sections with reinforcement at the inner and outer sides of the walls.
2

TEd
VEd

+
1 for compact sections
VRd, max
TRd, max

(94)

TEd
VEd
+
1
TRd,max VRd,max

(95)

for box sections

where

VRd,max

is the design value of the absorbable lateral force according to Equation (76).

Punching Shear
The load-bearing safety check against punching shear is carried out according to DIN 1045-1, Chapter 10.5. This check is
used to determine the necessary punching reinforcement. The following special conditions apply:
The average static height d is determined based on the input parameters dx and dy at

d = (dx+dy) /2. They are selected as shown in Figure 37, 42, 43 or 45.
The action can be entered directly or taken from the analyzed design situation at the ultimate limit state. In this case,
VEd is set to the maximum support force Rz for each corresponding action combination.

The check is considered fulfilled if:

1. For slabs w i t h o u t punching reinforcement

vEd vRd,ct .

(101)

2. For slabs w i t h punching reinforcement

vEd vRd,max ,

(102)

vEd vRd,sy ,

(103)

vEd vRd,ct,a .

(104)

300

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States

3. The minimum longitudinal reinforcement is maintained.
with

vEd =

VEd
u

(100)

vEd

Lateral force to be absorbed in the check section under consideration for each unit of length.

VEd

Design value of the entire lateral force to be absorbed.

Coefficient for taking into account the non-rotationally symmetric distribution of lateral force in the perimeter of
the edge and corner columns and for internal columns in irregular systems. For edge and corner columns in
conventional buildings, this value may be reduced when performing the ultimate limit state check outside the
punching reinforcement (vEd vRd,ct,a) according to Book 525, Eq. (H.10-8).

red =

1.1
1 + 0.1 l w / d

Width of the area with punching reinforcement outside of the load discharge area (see Figure 45).

Average effective height in mm.

d = (dx+dy) /2

dx, dy

Effective height of the slab in the x or y direction in the perimeter under consideration.

u
vRd,ct

Circumference of the perimeter under consideration according to Figure 45.

(H.10-8)

Design value of the lateral force bearing capacity along the critical perimeter of a slab without punching
reinforcement.

vRd,ct,a

Design value of the lateral force bearing capacity along the external perimeter outside the punching reinforced
area. This design value describes the transfer of the punching resistance without lateral force reinforcement
vRd,ct to the lateral force resistance according to 10.3.3 in relation to the width lw of the punching reinforced
area (see Figure 45).

vRd,sy

Design value of the lateral force bearing capacity with punching reinforcement along the internal check sections.

vRd,max

Maximum lateral force bearing capacity for slabs with punching reinforcement in the critical perimeter.

Figure 45 Check sections of the punching reinforcement

The load discharge areas and check sections as per Chapter 10.5.2, Section (1) to (9), are taken into consideration. The userspecified opening dimensions are used to calculate the check sections.

301

DIN 1045-1 Design

Punching resistance without punching reinforcement is calculated as

[
= [ (0.21 / g ) h k (100 r f

vRd,ct = 0.14 h1k (100 r l f ck )1 / 3 - 0.12 s cd d

vRd,ct

1/ 3
ck )

(105:2001)

- 0.12 s cd d

(105:2008)

where

k = 1+

200
2.0
d

(106)

= 1.0 for normal concrete; for lightweight concrete Table 10 applies.

is the longitudinal reinforcement level with

rlx, rly

0.40 f cd f yd
r l = r l x r ly
0.02

(Edition 2001-07)

0.50 f cd f yd
r l = r l x r ly
0.02

(Edition 2008)

is the reinforcement level based on the tensile reinforcement in the x or y direction which is located inside the
perimeter under consideration and fixed in place outside the perimeter under consideration. For corner and edge
columns, see 10.5.2 (9).

scd

is the design value of the normal concrete stress within the perimeter under consideration with

scd = NEd / slab thickness

NEd

is the design value of the average longitudinal force

(NEd < 0 as longitudinal compressive force).

Punching resistances with punching reinforcement are calculated as

1) vRd,max = 1.5 vRd,ct

(107)

2a) For the first reinforcement row with a distance of 0.5 d from the column edge, the following applies:

vRd,sy = vRd,c +

k s Asw f yd
u

(108)

2b) For the other reinforcement rows with a distance of sw 0.75 d from each other, the following applies:

vRd,sy = vRd,c +

k s Asw f yd d

(109)

u sw

where

vRd,c

is the concrete bearing portion; vRd,c = vRd,ct from Equation (105) can be assumed.

is the coefficient for taking into account how the component height influences the efficiency of the
reinforcement with

k s = 0.7 + 0.3

d - 400
400

0.7
with d in mm

1.0

(110)

3) For diagonal bars (45 a 60) as punching reinforcement, the following applies:

vRd,sy = vRd,c +

1.3 As sin a f yd
u

(111)

4) For the external perimeter with a distance of 1.5 d from the last reinforcement row, the following applies:

vRd,ct,a = kavRd,ct

(112)

with

The coefficient for taking into account the transition to the slab area with the load-bearing capacity as per 10.3.3
with

302

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States

ka = 1 -

0.29 l w
0.71
3.5 d

(113)

5) For the minimum required punching reinforcement of the internal check sections, the following applies:

rw =

Asw
min r w
sw u

(114)

A sin a
rw = s
min r w with min r according to 13.2.3 (5).
w
d u
In accordance with 13.3.3 (7), the following also applies:
If only one reinforcement row is computationally necessary with respect to stirrups as the punching reinforcement, a second
row with the minimum reinforcement according to equation (114) must always be provided. In this case use sw = 0.75 d.
The minimum longitudinal reinforcement is found based on the design of the minimum moments:

mEd,x = hx VEd and mEd,y = hy VEd

(115)

where

hx, hy

are the moment coefficients as per Table 14 for the x or y direction.

Check against Fatigue

The user can select two alternative methods for design:
Simplified check for the frequent action combination according to DIN 1045-1, Chapter 10.8.4, taking the relevant

traffic loads at serviceability limit state into account.

Check with damage equivalent stress ranges for the fatigue combination according to DIN 1045-1, Chapter 10.8.3,

considering the specific fatigue load Qfat specified in EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 6.8.3.
The curve to determine the concrete compressive stresses in state II is selected in the settings dialog.

Fatigue of longitudinal reinforcement, shear reinforcement and prestressing steel

The fatigue check is carried out according to DIN 1045-1, Chapter 10.8. The steel stresses are calculated for longitudinal
reinforcement from bending and longitudinal force as well as for prestressing steel in beams and design objects under the
assumption of a cracked concrete section. For shear and longitudinal reinforcement from lateral force and torsion, the
stresses are calculated according to 10.8.2 (4) based on a truss model with the strut angle tan Qfat = tan Q acc. to
10.8.2 (5). The prestressing steel stresses in area elements are determined at the uncracked concrete section. Tendons
without bond and external tendons are not checked.
Simplified check
According to Chapter 10.8.4(2), adequate fatigue resistance may be assumed if the stress range under the frequent action
combination does not exceed 70 MN/m for unwelded reinforcing bars. The condition described in Chapter 10.8.4(3) for
couplings in prestressed components is not examined by the program.
Check with damage equivalent stress ranges
The check is considered completed if the following applies for reinforcing steel and prestressing steel:

gF,fat gEd,fat Dss,equ DsRsk(N*) / gs,fat

(119)

with

gF,fat = gEd,fat

= 1 as specified in Chapter 5.3.3 (2).

gs,fat

= 1.15 for reinforcing steel and prestressing steel with new certification.
= 1.25 for reinforcing steel with DIN 4227-1 certification in accordance with ARS 11/03 (13).

DsRsk(N*)

Permitted characteristic stress range at N* load cycles based on the Whler curves specified in Tab.17 for
prestressing steel or Tab.16 for reinforcing steel.

Dss,equ

Damage equivalent stress range with Dss,equ = max Dss according to 10.8.3 (5).

303

DIN 1045-1 Design

max Dss

Calculated maximum stress range for longitudinal reinforcement from bending and longitudinal force
including increase factor h as specified in Chapter 10.8.2 (3) to account for the varying bond behavior of
reinforcing and prestressing steel.

The values for DsRsk(N*) and h are specified by the user in the Section dialog.
Calculation method
The maximum from the robustness, crack and bending reinforcement is taken as the existing bending reinforcement. If as a
result the load from the fatigue combination in state II cannot be absorbed, the design will be repeated using the existing
reinforcement and the check internal forces.
The maximum stress range per steel layer that results from the strain state in state II or the truss model is determined
separately for each check situation. Multiplying the coefficient h yields the damage equivalent stress range Dss,equ. If for
longitudinal and shear reinforcement this range exceeds the permitted stress range according to Eq. (119), the necessary
reinforcement will be iteratively increased until the check succeeds for all situations. In the Symmetrical and Compression
member design modes the longitudinal reinforcement is applied at all predefined locations. This will not affect the
predefined relationships between the individual reinforcement layers.
The decisive reinforcement used for the check, which may have been increased, is recorded in the check log and saved for
graphical representation.

Fatigue of concrete under compressive stress

The fatigue check for concrete that is subject to compressive stress is performed for bending and longitudinal force at the
cracked section. This check takes into account the final longitudinal reinforcement and may include an increase applied
during the fatigue check for reinforcing steel. The struts of components subject to lateral force stress are not analyzed.
Simplified check
The check according to Chapter 10.8.4(4) is considered successfully if Eq. (123) is fulfilled.

max s cd
f cd, fat

0.5 + 0.45

min s cd
f cd, fat

0.9 for concrete up to C50/60 or LC50/55

0.8 for concrete of at least C55/67 or LC55/60

(123)

with

max |scd|, min |scd| Design values of the maximum and minimum concrete compressive stress. In the case of tensile
stresses, min |scd| is assumed to be zero.

fcd,fat

Design value of the concrete compressive strength before cyclic load is applied. You can specify this
value in the Section dialog.

Check with damage equivalent concrete compressive stresses

The check according to Chapter 10.8.3(6) is proved, if Eq. (120) is fulfilled:

Ecd ,max,equ + 0.43 1 - Requ 1

(120)

with

Requ

= min | scd,equ | / max | scd,equ |

(121)

Ecd,max,equ

= max | scd,equ | / fcd,fat

(122)

In that max | scd,equ | and min | scd,equ | are the upper and lower compressive stress of the damage equivalent stress range
for N = 106 cycles.

304

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States

Special characteristic of shell structures

In shell structures the strain state at the cracked concrete section under general stress cannot be determined
unambiguously. The design is therefore carried out separately for the reinforcement directions x and y with the design
internal forces from Wolfensberger/Thrlimann or Rsch as described above. The reinforcement calculated in this manner
yields a reliable load-bearing capacity.
When calculating the stress range for reinforcing steel and concrete, this method can lead to unrealistic results in the case
of torsional or shear stresses as shown in the following example:
Assume two identical sets of slab internal forces:
Set
mx [kNm/m]
my [kNm/m]
mxy [kNm/m]
1
300
200
100
2
300
200
100
According to Wolfensberger/Thrlimann, this results in design variants for the x direction:
Set
Variant
m [kNm/m]
1
1
mx + |mxy| = 400
2
mx - |mxy| = 200
2
1
mx + |mxy| = 400
2
mx - |mxy| = 200
The torsional moments generate a variation of the design moments and thus a calculatory stress range. This may lead to a
necessary reinforcement increase in the fatigue check due to apparent overstressing. For normal design forces, this applies
correspondingly to the shear forces.
Selecting Limit design variants in the Section dialog allows you to avoid the described effect. In this case only the
corresponding variants are compared when determining the stress range, i.e. only the first and second variants of both sets
in this example. Assuming constant stress, the stress range is thus correctly determined to be zero.
This alternative, however, does not ensure that all conceivable stress fluctuations are analyzed. You should
therefore be particularly careful when assessing the results. For this purpose the detailed log indicates the main
variants and design internal forces used for the check.
When determining the design internal forces according to Rsch for inclined reinforcement, the described relationships
apply accordingly.

305

DIN 1045-1 Design

Checks in the Serviceability Limit States

The

following checks are performed:

Limiting the concrete compressive stresses (DIN 1045-1, Chapter 11.1.2).
Limiting the reinforcing steel stresses (Chapter 11.1.3).
Limiting the prestressing steel stresses (Chapter 11.1.4).
Check of decompression (Chapter 11.2.1).
Minimum reinforcement for crack width limitation (Chapter 11.2.2).
Calculation of the crack width (Chapter 11.2.3 and 11.2.4).
Limiting deformations (Chapter 11.3).

Design Combinations
In accordance with DIN 1055-100, Chapter 10.4, the following combinations are taken into account in the serviceability
limit states:

Combination for rare (characteristic) situations

E Gk, j Pk Qk,1 y 0,i Qk,i

j 1

i >1

Combination for frequent situations

E Gk, j Pk y1,1 Qk,1 y 2,i Qk,i

j 1

i >1

(22)

(23)

Combination for quasi-continuous situations

E Gk, j Pk y 2,i Qk,i

j 1

i 1

(24)

For each combination you can define different design situations for the construction stages and final states. If necessary, the
combination required by the check will automatically be determined from the section specifications. Each check is carried
out for all the situations of a combination.

Stress Determination
For uncracked concrete sections, the program assumes that concrete and steel under tensile and compressive stress behave
elastically. With respect to cracked concrete sections, the concrete compressive stresses are determined by the strain-stress
curve shown in Figure 22 with fc = fcm. Note that a horizontal course is assumed for strains exceeding ec1 (cf. Reg. No. 098
in the Knowledge Base of the Building and Civil Engineering Standards Committee (NABau)).
Area elements
For area elements the concrete stresses are calculated at the gross section. The steel stress check is carried out for
reinforcing steel by determining the strain state at the cracked concrete section and for the prestressing steel at the
uncracked concrete section.
Beams and design objects
The action combination stresses that can be determined without checks are always calculated at the gross section.
Conversely, in the checks the stresses are determined as follows and are graphically displayed or logged:
When checking the crack reinforcement and crack width, the concrete stress is calculated at the gross section

When checking the decompression and concrete compressive stresses, the concrete stress is calculated

- without internal tendons at the gross section

- with internal tendons without bond at the net section
- with internal tendons with bond for situations before being grouted at the net section or otherwise at the ideal
section
The reinforcing and prestressing steel stresses are checked by determining the strain state at the cracked concrete

section
306

Checks in the Serviceability Limit States

Limiting the Concrete Compressive Stresses

The concrete compressive stress check is carried out according to DIN 1045-1, Chapter 11.1.2. Based on DIN Technical
Report 102, Chapter 4.4.1.1 (5), the cracked state is assumed if the tensile stress calculated in the uncracked state under
the rare action combination exceeds the value fctm.
The calculation in the cracked state is performed by determining the strain state with the final longitudinal reinforcement
(maximum from robustness, crack and bending reinforcement including a possible increase from the fatigue check). For
beams and design objects, the tendons with bond are taken into account on the resistance side provided that they are
grouted in the check situation. For area elements the compressive stress for both reinforcement directions is determined
separately and the extreme value is checked since the general strain state cannot be determined unambiguously.
In the construction stages and final states, the concrete compressive stress sc as defined in Chapter 11.1.2 (1) is to be
limited to 0.60 fck under the rare combination. If serviceability is significantly impacted by the effect of creep, the limit 0.45 fck
should be maintained under the quasi-continuous combination according to 11.1.2 (2). Both options are considered based
on the user's specifications.

Limiting the Reinforcing and Prestressing Steel Stresses

Reinforcing steel
For reinforcing steel, the limitation of steel stress under the rare combination to 0.80 fyk is checked in accordance with
11.1.3. In this check the reinforcement corresponds to the maximum value from the robustness, crack and bending
reinforcement, including a possible increase as a result of the fatigue check. The determination of the strain state is
performed at the cracked concrete section. If for beams and design objects tendons with bond are grouted in the check
situation, they will be taken into account on the resistance side.
Prestressing steel
For tendons with bond, the limitation of steel stress is checked at the cracked concrete section for beams and design objects
and at the uncracked concrete section for area elements. In such cases the following limits apply:
Tendons with DIN 1045-1 and EC2 certification
0.65 fpk as per Chapter 11.1.4 (1) under the quasi-continuous combination

0.90 fp0.1k or 0.80 fpk as per Chapter 11.1.4 (2) under the rare combination

Tendons with DIN 4227 certification

0.75 s or 0.55 z according to DIN 4227, Tab. 9, Row 65, under the quasi-continuous combination and rare

combination
For situations prior to grouting and for tendons without bond, the stress spm0 is checked in accordance with DIN 1045-1,
Eq. (49) or DIN 4227, Tab. 9, Row 65. External tendons are not checked.

Check of Decompression
This check is carried out for prestressed components of requirement classes A-C with the combinations specified in
DIN 1045-1, Table 18. For area sections, the principal tensile stress s1 or one of the longitudinal stresses sx or sy are
checked based on the user's selection. The latter can be used to limit the check to the direction of the prestressing if the
internal force systems are appropriately aligned (cf. Reg. No. 069 of the Knowledge Base of the Building and Civil
Engineering Standards Committee (NABau) on DIN Technical Report 102). In all other cases, the rules for stress analysis
listed above apply. The permissible stress limits are defined in Chapter 11.2.1 (9) as follows:
Construction stage
In the construction stage, the section 'at the edge of the precompressed tensile zone as a result of prestressing' (i.e., at the
section edge facing the tendon) must be subjected to compressive stresses. The program determines the respective edge as
follows:
Beams and design objects: If the edge point next to the tendon is above the centroid, the stress on the upper side of

the section will be checked. If not, the lower side of the section will be checked.
Area elements: The check will be carried out for the upper or lower section edge if the tendon next to the check point

is located above or below the centroid level of the element in question. Tendons outside of the element are taken into
account at a distance of up to five times the section height.
If the tendon guide is ambiguous, the check will be carried out for both sides.

307

DIN 1045-1 Design

Final state
In the final state the section must be completely subjected to compressive stresses.

Minimum Reinforcement for Crack Width Limitation

The minimum reinforcement for crack width limitation is defined in DIN 1045-1, Chapter 11.2.2. According to 11.2.2(5),
minimum reinforcement is to be applied in areas where tensile forces are expected. Areas under tension can be defined in
the section dialog by choosing either an action combination or a restraint (bending, centrical tension). Reinforcing steel
layers that are not under tension are also provided with reinforcement in the symmetrical and compression member design
modes. This will not affect the predefined relationships between the individual reinforcement layers.
For profiled sections, each subsection (web or flange) should be checked individually in accordance with Section (4). This
cannot be done if any polygonal section geometries are taken into consideration. For this reason, the program always
determines the minimum reinforcement based on the entire section. For full rectangular sections, Equation (128) is used. In
all other cases, Equation (128a) applies.
Determining the minimum reinforcement
The minimum reinforcement As is determined using Equation (127) of the standard:

As = kc k fct,eff Act / ss

(127)

In this formula

is the coefficient for consideration of stress distribution prior to crack formation.

For rectangular sections and webs of T-beams and box girders:

kc = 0.4 (1 +sc / (k1 fct,eff)) 1

(128)

For tension flanges of T-beams and box girders:

kc = 0.9 Fcr / Act / fct,eff 0.5

(128a)

with the tensile force Fcr in the tension chord in state I directly before crack formation with the edge
stress fct,eff. The tensile force is calculated by integrating the tensile stresses over the area Act.

is the concrete stress at the level of the centroidal axis of the section or subsection, which, in an uncracked state,
is subject to the action combination that leads to the initial crack formation on the entire section. (sc < 0 for
compressive stress).

= 1.5 h/h'

for compressive normal force

= 2/3

for tensile normal force

h
h'
k
Act

is the height of the section or subsection.

= min(h; 1 m).
is the coefficient for taking into account nonlinearly distributed tensile stresses entered by the user.
is the area of the concrete tensile zone at initial crack formation in state I. Here the program scales the bending
moments caused by the action combination until the maximum edge stress in state I reaches the value fct,eff.

fct,eff

is the effective concrete tensile strength depending on the age of the concrete according to 11.2.2 (5):

fct,eff = 0.5 fctm at an age of 3-5 days,

fct,eff = fctm

at an age of 6-28 days,

fct,eff = fctm

but not less than 3 MN/m, if older than 28 days.

is the maximum permitted stress in the reinforcing steel reinforcement in relation to the limiting diameter of the

reinforcing steel.
The largest available bar diameter ds is specified in the section dialog. Equation (129) provides a modified limiting diameter

ds* to be used as an input value for Table 20:

ds = ds* kc k ht / (4(h-d)) fct,eff / fct0 ds* fct,eff / fct0
where

ds*
308

is the effective area of the reinforcement according to Table 20.

(129)

Checks in the Serviceability Limit States

h
d
ht

is the component height.

fct0

is the tensile strength of the concrete from which the values in Table 20 are derived (fct0 = 3.0 MN/m).

is the effective static height.

is the height of the tensile zone in the section or subsection before initial crack formation.

According to Zilch/Rogge (2002, p. 277), the expression kc k ht / (4(h-d)) is generalized to 0.6 kc k Act / Ac,eff with
the effective tensile zone Ac,eff as shown in Figure 53. Using the modified limiting diameter ds* and the allowed crack
width wk, the permissible reinforcing steel stress ss for equation (127) can be determined from Table 20.
If the crack width check is to be carried out at the same time, the program will determine whether the specified crack width
according to Chapter 11.2.4 is maintained by inserting the calculated minimum reinforcement. If necessary, the minimum
reinforcement can be increased iteratively until the check limit is reached. The increased reinforcement is indicated by an
exclamation mark "!" in the log.
Guideline 11.2.1(13) for the reinforcing mesh joint areas is not considered by the program.
Edition 2008: Based on Chapter 11.2.2(8), the minimum reinforcement for the crack width limitation in the case of thicker
components under centrical restraint can be determined to Equation (130a), but the value may not fall below the value in
Equation (130b). It is not necessary to insert more reinforcing steel as results from Equation (127). The rules specified before
will be used, if the option is selected by the user, whereas the possibility of lower reinforcement for slowly hardening
concrete according to Section (9) will not be used.

Special characteristic of prestressed concrete structures

According to Chapter 11.2.2(7), for a 300 mm square section around a tendon with immediate or subsequent bond, the
minimum reinforcement required for this region may be reduced by x1 Ap.
Where

is the section area of the prestressing steel in the tendon.

is the ratio of the prestressing and reinforcing steel bond strengths.

For beams and design objects, the tendons with bond can be added using the x1 value specified in the section dialog as
long as they are grouted in the check situation. Note that prestressed steel cannot be taken into account for area elements.
According to Section (3) of Chapter 11.2.2, the minimum reinforcement for prestressed components with bond is not
necessary in areas in which compressive concrete stresses larger than 1 MN/m occur at the section edge under the rare
(characteristic) action combination and the characteristic prestress values. This condition is automatically checked by the
program.

Calculation of the Crack Width

The crack width check is performed by means of direct calculation as per DIN 1045-1, Chapter 11.2.4, with the action
combination that is based on the requirement class specified in Tab. 18. Enter the limit diameter and the age of the
concrete in the Section dialog to determine the effective tensile strength.
Depending on concrete edge stress sc in state I, the following crack states must be differentiated (cf. Book 525, p. 191):

sc fct,eff

Stage of single crack formation

sc > fct,eff

Stage of completed crack formation

with

fct,eff

Effective concrete tensile strength depending on the age of the concrete according to 11.2.2 (5).
Edition 2008: In this case a minimum concrete tensile strength is not included.

By limiting the maximum crack distance and the difference of the strains, the formulas in Section 11.2.4 of the standard as
specified in Book 525, p. 104, can be used for the both the single crack formation and the completed crack formation
stages. This is why the program checks the crack width for all cases where sc > 0.

309

DIN 1045-1 Design

The program performs the check according to the following steps:
Determine strain state II under the check combination defined by the requirement class with the stress-strain curve

shown in Figure 22. For beams and design objects, all tendons in a bond are considered on the resistance side.

Define effective tensile zone Ac,eff (see next section), determine reinforcing steel and prestressing steel layers within Ac,
eff.

Calculate reinforcement level:

eff r

= (As + x1 Ap) / Ac,eff

(133)

rtot

= (As + Ap) / Ac,eff

(134)

with

Bond coefficient according to user specification.

Determine individually for each reinforcing steel layer:

Difference of the average strain for concrete and reinforcing steel

esm - ecm = [ss - 0.4 fct,eff / eff r ( 1 + aE eff r)] / Es 0.6 ss / Es

(136)

with

= Es / Ecm

= s2 + 0.4 fct,eff ( 1/eff r - 1/rtot )

Reinforcing steel stress from strain state II.

fct,eff

Effective concrete tensile strength at the considered time according to 11.2.2 (5).

(132)

Edition 2008: In this case a minimum concrete tensile strength is not taken into account.
Maximum crack spacing

sr,max

= ds / (3.6 eff r) ss ds / (3.6 fct,eff )

(137)

If an upper limit for the crack distance based on Equation (137) was specified in the section dialog, then the special
conditions of Equation (138) and Paragraph (8) of Chapter 11.2.4 can be taken into account.
Calculated crack width

= sr,max ( esm - ecm )

(135)

The layer with the largest calculated crack width is shown in the log.

For sections under tension, the check is performed separately for each of the two effective tensile zones. The maximum
value is shown in the log.

310

Checks in the Serviceability Limit States

Determining the Effective Area Ac,eff

According to DIN 1045-1, Figure 53, the effective tensile zone Ac,eff defines the area of a rectangular, uniaxially stressed
concrete section in which the model assumptions specified in Book 466 are applicable (cf. Book 525, Figure 53). Although
the program can apply this model to any section and stress situation, the user has the responsibility and discretion to do so.
When determining Ac,eff, the program performs the following steps:
Determine tensile zone Act in state I: when calculating the minimum reinforcement, use the stress that led to the initial

crack; when calculating the crack width, use the check combination based on the requirement class.
Define the centroid line of the reinforcement as a regression line through the reinforcing steel layers in the tensile zone.
In 2D frameworks and for area elements, a horizontal line through the centroid of the reinforcement layers under
tension is assumed.
Determine the truncated residual area Ar to the edge and the sum of section lengths ls. The average overlap is then

assumed as d1 = Ar /ls, yet not less than the smallest edge distance of the reinforcing steel layers in the tensile zone.
Shift the centroid line in parallel by 1.5 d1. For area elements, 2.5 d1 (h-x) / 2 is maintained

(x = compression zone height in state I).

The resulting polygon is intersected with the tensile zone and then defines the effective tensile zone Ac,eff.

If all the reinforcing steel layers of the section are under tension, then two zones will be determined; one for the layers
above the centroid and the other for layers below the centroid. The area of each zone is limited to Ac / 2.

Edition 2008:

If the minimum reinforcement for thicker components under central restraint is selected in the
section dialog, the height of Ac,eff is heff 2.5 d1 according to Figure 53 d).

The following illustrations show the effective tensile zones determined by the program in typical situations. The last case
(edge beam) deviates from the model assumptions in Book 466 to such a degree that it is questionable as to whether it
should be used.

A c,eff
A ct
d1
Ar

2.5 d1

Effective tensile zones at a rectangular section under uniaxial bending, normal force with double bending and centrical
tension

Effective tensile zones at a bridge section under uniaxial bending

d1
1.5

ls
Effective tensile zone at an edge beam under uniaxial bending

311

DIN 1045-1 Design

Crack Width Check by Limitation of the Bar Distances

As an alternative to direct calculation of the crack width according to DIN 1045-1, Chapter 11.2.4, the simplified check as
specified in 11.2.3(2) for limiting the bar distances as specified in Table 21 can be selected in the section dialog.
The program performs the check according to the following steps:
Determine the strain state II under the check combination specified by the requirement class with the stress-strain curve

shown in Figure 22. For beams and design objects, all tendons with bond are considered on the resistance side.

Calculate the reinforcing steel stress ss for every reinforcement layer using Equation (132).

Compare the value given in the dialog (max. s) with the table value (perm. s), which results from the calculated steel
stress ss and the permissible crack width wk. The position with the largest (max. s / perm. s) quotient is indicated in
the protocol.

If the minimum reinforcement check for limiting the crack width is not selected, the program will automatically determine a
crack reinforcement that is required to maintain the permissible bar distances. For that purpose a design calculation is
carried out using the action combination relevant for the check. The resulting calculated reinforcement is indicated by an
exclamation mark "!" in the check log.
The bar distance check is then carried out for the final longitudinal reinforcement (maximum from the robustness, crack and
bending reinforcement including a possible increase resulting from the fatigue check).
Note:
According to Chapter 11.2.3(2), the simplified check can only be applied in the case of crack formation resulting from
mainly direct actions (loads). Further, according to Zilch and Rogge (2002, p. 277) this method only provides safe results
with a single layer of tensile reinforcement with d1= 4 cm. The user is responsible for the evaluation of these requirements.

Limiting Deformations
According to DIN 1045-1, Chapter 11.3.1, the deformations of a component or structure may not impair its proper
functioning or appearance. Consequently, a beam, slab or cantilever under the quasi-continuous action combination should
not sag more than 1/250th of the span as specified in Section (8). To avoid damaging adjacent components, the
deformation should be limited to 1/500th of the span.
The standard does not include a method for direct calculation of deformations. Book 525, Section 11.3.2, only makes
references to various bibliographic sources.
The InfoCAD program system allows you to perform a realistic check as part of a nonlinear system analysis for beam and
shell structures that takes geometric and physical nonlinearities into account. The resistance of the tendons with bond is
currently not included in the calculation.
Editing is performed in the following steps:
Define the check situation with the Load group function in the Load dialog through grouping the decisive individual

load cases. The variable loads must first be weighted with the combination coefficients y2 for the quasi-continuous

312

combination.
Select the check load cases in the Nonlinear Analysis / Serviceability dialog of the analysis settings for the FEM or
framework analysis.
Set the reinforcement determined in the ultimate limit state in the Start reinforcement selection field (maximum from
bending, robustness, crack check and fatigue).
Perform the FEM or framework analysis to determine the deformations in state II.
Check the system deformations displayed graphically or in tabular form.

Checks in the Serviceability Limit States

For a detailed description of the nonlinear system analysis, refer to the relevant chapter of the manual.

Results
The extremal values for internal forces, support reactions, deformations, soil pressures and stresses are saved for all check
situations. The resulting bending, robustness and crack reinforcement, the decisive maximum value and the stirrup and
torsion reinforcement are provided for the graphical representation as well.
The log shows the design internal forces and necessary reinforcements, checked stresses or crack widths at each result
location. If the permissible limit values are exceeded, they are reported as warnings and indicated at the check location. The
detailed log also lists the decisive combination internal forces of all design situations.
Stresses for beams and design objects

Longitudinal stresses in the decompression and concrete compressive stress checks [MN/m].

ss, Dss

Stresses and stress ranges for reinforcing steel [MN/m].

sp, Dsp

Stresses and stress ranges for prestressing steel [MN/m].

scd, Dscd

Stresses and stress ranges in the fatigue check for concrete under longitudinal compression [MN/m].

Dssb,y, Dssb,z

Stress ranges for shear reinforcement from Qy and Qz [MN/m].

Dssb,T, Dssl,T

Stress ranges for shear reinforcement from torsion and for longitudinal torsion reinforcement
[MN/m].

Stresses for area elements

sx, sy, s1

Longitudinal stress in x or y direction or principal tensile stresses in the decompression check

(depending on user specification) [MN/m].

Principal compressive stresses [MN/m].

ssx, Dssx

Stresses and stress ranges for reinforcing steel in the x direction [MN/m].

ssy, Dssy

Stresses and stress ranges for reinforcing steel in the y direction [MN/m].

sp, Dsp

Stresses and stress ranges for prestressing steel [MN/m].

scd,x, Dscd,x,

Stresses and stress ranges in the concrete fatigue check under longitudinal compression in the

scd,y, Dscd,y

x- and y-direction [MN/m].

Dss,b

Stress ranges for shear reinforcement [MN/m].

313

DIN 1045-1 Design

Bending reinforcement

Bending reinforcement [cm] for beams and design objects.

asx, asy

Bending reinforcement [cm/m] for area elements in x and y direction.

asj

Meridian reinforcement [cm/m] for axisymmetric shell elements.

asu

Ring reinforcement [cm/m] for axisymmetric shell elements.

Reinforcement from lateral force

asb

Stirrup reinforcement [cm/m] of area and axisymmetric shell elements from qr.

asbx , asby

Stirrup reinforcement [cm/m] of area elements from qx and qy.

Asb.y , Asb.z

Stirrup reinforcement [cm/m] of beams and design objects from Qy and Qz.

Asl for asb=0

Longitudinal reinforcement [cm] of area elements.

Torsion reinforcement

Asb.T

Torsional stirrup reinforcement [cm/m] of beams and design objects from Mx.

Asl.T

Torsional longitudinal reinforcement [cm] of beams and design objects from Mx.

Design values

VRd,ct , vRd,ct

Absorbable design lateral force without shear reinforcement [kN or kN/m].

vRd,max

Absorbable design lateral force of concrete struts for area elements [kN/m].

VRd,max

Absorbable design lateral force of concrete struts for beams and design objects [kN].

TRd,max

Design value of the maximum absorbable torsion moment [kNm].

Q/VRd+Mx/TRd

For compact sections: (Q /VRd,max) + (Mx /TRd,max)

For box sections: Q /VRd,max + Mx /TRd,max

314

Examples

Examples
Slab with Downstand Beam
In this example a rectangular slab (d = 20 cm, C30/37, BSt 500 S, requirement class E) with a downstand beam will be
analyzed. This slab supported with joints will be subjected to its dead load and a traffic load of 10 kN/m.
The checks will be carried out for all possible combinations of load cases. This method is selected in the calculation settings
and can take a very long time to complete if there is a large number of load cases.

The following image shows the dimensions of the downstand beam. The axis distance of the reinforcing steel from the
section edge is 3 cm. The dead load of the downstand beam is reduced by the portion attributed to the slab.

Design specifications and reinforcing steel description of the slab (section 1):
Edge distance of the reinforcing steel for the x and y direction of the upper (1st) and lower (2nd) layer: 0.03 m

Bending design mode: Standard

Steel quality: 500S

Effective height: 0.17 m

Strut angle cot Q: 3.0.

The default value is limited to the range specified in DIN 1045-1, Eq. (73) when the design is carried out.
Bending tensile reinforcement Asl for the lateral force design: 1.88 cm

Design specifications of the torsion-flexible downstand beam (section 2):

Bending design mode: Standard

Steel quality of the stirrups: 500S

Shear section:

Width: 0.30 m
Effective height: 0.57 m

Strut angle cot Q: 3.0.

The default value is limited to the range specified in DIN 1045-1, Eq. (73) when the design is carried out.
Bending tensile reinforcement Asl for the lateral force design: 2.90 cm

315

DIN 1045-1 Design

DIN 1045-1 actions
Standard design group

G - Dead load
Gamma.sup / gamma.inf = 1.35 / 1
Load cases
1

Dead load

QN - Imposed load, traffic load

Gamma.sup / gamma.inf = 1.5 / 0
Combination coefficients for: Superstructures
Working load - category A - living rooms and lounges
Psi.0 / Psi.1 / Psi.2 = 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.3
Load cases 1. Variant, inclusive
2
3

Traffic span 1
Traffic span 2

1. Permanent and temporary situation

Final state
G
QN

Dead load
Imposed load, traffic load

1. Rare (characteristic) situation

Final state
G
QN

Dead load
Imposed load, traffic load

1. Quasi-continuous situation
Final state
G
QN

Dead load
Imposed load, traffic load

Design according to DIN 1045-1 (2008-08)

Design overview
Se. Class, Prestress
of component
1 E Not prestressed
2 E Not prestressed
(M)
(R)
(B)
(Q)
(T)
(S)
(P)
(C)

Reinforc.
M R B Q T
x x x x .
x x x x .

Fatig.
S P C
. . .
. . .

Crack- DeStress checks

width comp. Comp. S P
x
.
x
x .
x
.
x
x .

Nominal reinforcement to guarantee robustness (ductility).

Settings for flexural and shear reinforcement

M,N
fyk
Theta
Slabs
Asl
rhow
x,y
cvl
Red.

Design mode for bend and longitudinal force:

(ST) Standard, (SY) Symmetrical, (CM) Compression member.
Quality of stirrups.
Angle of concrete truss. Program-sided, the given value of cot Theta
is limited to the value range according to Eq. (73).
Beams are designed like slabs.
Given reinforcement according to picture 32, increase to maximum.
Minimum reinf. min rhow = Factor * rho with rho according to table 29.
Separate lateral force design for reinforcement directions x and y.
Laying measure of the long. reinforcement to limt the lever arm z.
Reduction factor of prestress for determining the tensile zone for
distribution of robustness reinforcement for area elements.

Se. Concr.
1 C30/37
2 C30/37

316

Density
[kg/m]
.
.

Dsn. fyk
M,N [MPa]
ST
500
ST
500

cot
Theta
3.00
3.00

Dsn.
Asl [cm]
like
Pic. 32
slabs given max
.
0.00
0.00
.
0.00
.

Fac.
rhow
0.60
1.00

Dsn. cvl
x,y [mm]
.
30
.
30

Red.
prestr.
.
.

Examples
Shear sections
bw.nom
h.nom
z1, z2
teff
B.
Se.
1
2

Nominal width of the prestressed section acc. to 10.3.4 (8).

Nominal height of the prestressed section acc. to 10.3.4 (8).
Height and width of the core section for torsion.
Thickness of the torsion box.
Box section.

Width [m]
Eff. width
bw
bw.nom
bn [m]
1.000
.
.
0.300
.
0.270

Height [m] Eff.height

h
h.nom
d [m]
0.200
.
0.170
0.600
.
0.570

Torsion section [m]

z1
z2
teff B.
.
.
.
.
0.540 0.240 0.060 .

Settings for the check of crack widths

ds
max.s
Xi1
k
sr,max
Method
TM

Maximal given bar diameter of the reinforcing steel.

Maximal given bar spacing of the reinforcing steel.
Bond coefficient of prestressing steel for beam sections.
Coefficient for consideration of non-linear distributed tensile stress.
Upper limit for the crack spacing from equ. (137).
Direct calculation of the crack width as per chapt. 11.2.4 or
check by limiting the bar spacing according to table 21.
Thick member according to chapt 11.2.2(8) to determine As,min.

Se. wk,per ds max.s

[mm] [mm] [mm]
1 0.30
12
.
2 0.30
12
.

Coeff. sr,max Concr. age

Xi1
k
[mm] As,min
wk
.
1.00
. 3- 5d > 28d
.
1.00
. 3- 5d > 28d

Method for
crack w.
Calcul.
Calcul.

Tensile zone TM
for As,min
Cmb. per class .
Cmb. per class .

Settings for the check of concrete stresses

(CC) Characteristic combination (QC) Quasi-continuous combination
Se.
1
2

per.sigma.c
(CC)
0.60 fck
0.60 fck

per.sigma.c
(QC)
.
.

Dekompression
Stress
.
.

The calculated reinforcements are shown in the illustrations below.

Longitudinal reinforcement of the beams in the ultimate limit state [cm]

Longitudinal reinforcement of the beams to ensure robustness (ductility) [cm]

Longitudinal reinforcement of the beams to limit the crack width [cm]

317

DIN 1045-1 Design

Maximum longitudinal reinforcement of the beams [cm]

Maximum slab reinforcement in the intersection direction based on the robustness (ductility), crack width and design checks
in the ultimate limit state [cm/m]

Lateral force reinforcement of the beams [cm/m]

Averaged lateral force reinforcement of the slab at the nodes [cm/m]

An excerpt of the detailed log for the midspan of the downstand beam is provided below.
Design of longitudinal reinforcement
(M) Nominal reinforcement to guarantee robustness (Charact. C.).
fctm
Average centric concrete tensile strength [MN/m].
zs,t/b Lever arm of inner strengths top/bottom [m].
fyk,t/b Strength of longitudinal reinforcement top/bottom [MN/m].
max Sc Maximal concrete edge stress from Charact. C. [MN/m].
(R) Nominal or required reinforcement for crack width limitation.
Increase of reinforcement due to crack width check is marked by "!".
wk,per Permissible crack width [mm].
ds
Maximal given steel diameter [mm].
k
Coefficient for consideration of non-linear distributed tensile stress.
fct,eff Concrete strength at date of cracking [MN/m].
kc
Coefficient to consider stress distribution in tensile zone.
max Sx Maximal concrete edge stress from action combination [MN/m].
(B) Design of reinforement at ultimate limit state.
In case of dominant bending, compression reinforcement is marked with "*".
fck
Concrete strength for design of reinforcement [MN/m].

318

Examples
Location 1
Beam 70, x = 0.00 m (Beam length 0.83 m)
Cross-section 2: Polygon - C30/37
Steel 2; Design mode: Standard
(M) fctm=2.9; zs,t/b=0.513/0.513; fyk,t/b=500/500
(R) wk,per=0.3; ds=12; k=1; fct,eff=1.45
(B) fck=30
Section properties
gross :

A [m]
0.460

ys [m]
0.850

zs [m]
0.178

Iy [m4]
0.0107

Iz [m4]
0.0828

Iyz[m4]
0.0000

1. Characteristic (rare) combination (CC.1): G+QN, Final state

Relevant concrete internal forces from 4 sets of internal forces
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
1
:
0.00
69.95
0.00
2
:
0.00
196.53
0.00
Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces
Set
Combination
1
: L1
2
: L1+L2+L3
1. Quasi-continuous combination (QC.1): G+QN, Final state
Relevant concrete internal forces from 4 sets of internal forces
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
1
:
0.00
69.95
0.00
2
:
0.00
107.92
0.00
Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces
Set
Combination
1
: L1
2
: L1+0.30*L2+0.30*L3
1. Permanent and temporary comb. (PC.1): G+QN, Final state
Relevant concrete internal forces from 8 sets of internal forces
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
2
:
0.00
284.31
0.00
5
:
0.00
69.95
0.00
Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces
Set
Combination
2
: 1.35*L1+1.50*L2+1.50*L3
5
: L1
Design of longitudinal reinforcement
Reinforcement Nx
Lay. Type
[kN]
1
M
0.00
R
0.00
B
0.00
2
M
0.00
R
0.00
B
0.00
3
M
0.00
R
0.00
B
0.00
4
M
0.00
R
0.00
B
0.00

My
[kNm]
69.95
69.95
69.95
69.95
69.95
69.95
196.53
107.92
284.31
196.53
107.92
284.31

Mz
max Sc
[kNm] [MN/m]
0.00
.
0.00
2.75
0.00
.
0.00
.
0.00
2.75
0.00
.
0.00
7.73
0.00
.
0.00
.
0.00
7.73
0.00
.
0.00
.

kc
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Ap'
[cm]
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

req.As
[cm]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
1.44
2.28!
5.57
1.44
2.28!
5.57

Situation
CC.1,1
QC.1,1
PC.1,5
CC.1,1
QC.1,1
PC.1,5
CC.1,2
QC.1,2
PC.1,2
CC.1,2
QC.1,2
PC.1,2

Design of shear reinforcement

The percentage of nominal reinforcement acc. to 13.2.3 (5) is considered.
bw
bn
kb
h
d
kd
Angle
Asl giv.
min rhow
Qy, Qz
VRdct
VRdmax
z
cvl
Asb.y,z
Asl

Effective width for calculation of shear stresses from Qz and Mx [m]

Statically effective width for shear design using Qy [m]
Factor to calculate the inner lever arm from bn
Effective height for calculation of shear stresses from Qy and Mx [m]
Statically effective height for shear design using Qz [m]
Factor to calculate the inner lever arm from d
Angle cot Theta between the compressive strut and the beam axis
Chargeable longitudinal reinf. acc. to Pic. 32 [cm]
Minimal percentage of lateral reinforcement acc. to 13.2.3 (5)
Lateral forces for design in y- and z-direction [kN]
Resisting lateral force without shear reinforcement [kN]
Resisting lateral force of the concrete struts [kN]
Inner lever arm z=kb*bn resp. z=kd*d [m]; z<=max(d-2cvl,d-cvl-30mm)
Laying measure of the long. reinforcement to limit the lever arm z [m]
Req. stirrup reinforcement from Qy resp. Qz [cm/m]
Req. longitudinal reinf. acc. to Pic. 32 [cm] for req.Asb

Location 1
Beam 70, x = 0.00 m (Beam length 0.83 m)
Cross-section 2: Polygon - C30/37
bw/bn/kb=0.3/0.27/0.9; h/d/kd=0.6/0.57/0.9
cvl=0.03; fyk=500; Asl giv./max=0/0; min rhow=1*rho

319

DIN 1045-1 Design

1. Permanent and temporary comb. (PC.1): G+QN, Final state
Relevant concrete internal forces from 8 sets of internal forces
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
Mx[kNm]
Qy[kN]
Qz[kN]
2
:
0.00
284.31
0.00
0.00
0.00
-30.79
Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces
Set
Combination
2
: 1.35*L1+1.50*L2+1.50*L3
Check of the shear reinforcement and the compressive struts
Action
max
Qy
Qz
Action
max
Qy
Qz

:
:

z
[m]
0.21
0.51

Q/
Asb.y
Asb.z
Asb.T
Angle VRdct [cm/m] [cm/m] [cm/m]
3.00 0.00
0.00
.
.
3.00 0.47
.
2.79
.

:
:

z
[m]
0.21
0.51

Qy/
Angle VRdmax
3.00 0.00
3.00
.

Qz/
VRdmax
.
0.05

Mx/
TRdmax
.
.

Asl.T
[cm]
.
.

Q/VRd+
Mx/TRd
.
.

Asl
[cm]
0.00
0.00

Situation
-,PC.1,2

Check of crack widths

The check calculates the crack width directly.
(CC) Charact. (rare), (TC) Frequent, (QC) Quasi-continuous combination
wk,per
ds
fct,eff
Sigma.c
wk
sr,max
Ac,eff
As,eff
Ap,eff
Sigma.s

Permissible crack width [mm]

Maximal given steel diameter [mm]
Concrete strength at date of cracking [MN/m]
Maximal concrete edge stress in state I [MN/m]
Calculated value of crack width [mm]
Calculated resp. given value of maximal crack spacing [mm]
Effective region of reinf. [m] acc. to Pic. 53
Reinforcing steel within Ac,eff [cm]
Prestressing steel with bond within Ac,eff [cm]
Reinf. steel stress in state II [MN/m]

Location 1
Beam 70, x = 0.00 m (Beam length 0.83 m)
Cross-section 2: Polygon - C30/37
wk,per=0.3; ds=12; fct,eff=2.9
Section properties
gross :

A [m]
0.460

ys [m]
0.850

zs [m]
0.178

Iy [m4]
0.0107

Iz [m4]
0.0828

Iyz[m4]
0.0000

1. Quasi-continuous combination (QC.1): G+QN, Final state

Relevant concrete internal forces from 4 sets of internal forces
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
2
:
0.00
107.92
0.00
Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces
Set
Combination
2
: L1+0.30*L2+0.30*L3
Check of crack width for reinf. layer 4 (bottom)
Nx
My
Mz
Sigma.c
Situation

:
0.00
:
107.92
:
0.00
:
4.25
: QC.1,2

kN
kNm
kNm
MN/m

As,eff
Ap,eff
Ac,eff
Sigma.s
sr,max
wk

: 11.15
:
.
:
0.023
: 176.55
: 67.37
:
0.05

cm
cm
m
MN/m
mm
per. 0.30 mm

Check of concrete compressive stress

For the check, a cracked concrete section (II) is assumed if the tensile stress
from the decisive c. exceeds the value of fctm. Otherwise, a non-cracked section
(I) is used. If the strain is not treatable on cracked section, (I*) is marked.
fck
min Sigma.x
top, bottom

Characteristic compressive concrete strength [MN/m]

Total maximal longitudinal compressive stress [MN/m]
Position of the edge point: above, below of centre

Location 1
Beam 70, x = 0.00 m (Beam length 0.83 m)
Cross-section 2: Polygon - C30/37
0.6*fck=18
Section properties
gross :

A [m]
0.460

ys [m]
0.850

zs [m]
0.178

Iy [m4]
0.0107

Iz [m4]
0.0828

1. Characteristic (rare) combination (CC.1): G+QN, Final state

320

Iyz[m4]
0.0000

Examples
Check of compressive stress in concrete for the Characteristic (rare) combination
Side

Se.Pnt.
top
4
bottom
7

min Sigma.x
[MN/m]
(II) -6.37
(II)
0.00

per. Sigma.x
[MN/m]
-18.00
-18.00

Period

Situation

Final
Final

CC.1,2
CC.1,1

Check of steel stress

For the check, a cracked concrete section is assumed.
Type S
fck

Long. reinf. from N and M, layer number, Charact. C. (CC)

Concrete strength to determine the strain state [MN/m]

Location 1
Beam 70, x = 0.00 m (Beam length 0.83 m)
Cross-section 2: Polygon - C30/37
fck=30; Steel 2
Section properties
gross :

A [m]
0.460

ys [m]
0.850

zs [m]
0.178

Iy [m4]
0.0107

Iz [m4]
0.0828

Iyz[m4]
0.0000

1. Characteristic (rare) combination (CC.1): G+QN, Final state

Nx
[kN]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

My
[kNm]
69.95
69.95
196.53
196.53

Mz
[kNm]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

As
[cm]
0.00
0.00
5.57
5.57

Sigma.s
[MN/m]
.
.
321.62
321.62

per.
[MN/m]
400.00
400.00
400.00
400.00

Situation
CC.1,1
CC.1,1
CC.1,2
CC.1,2

Prestressed Roof Construction

This example involves the wide-spanned roof construction of an entrance hall that is represented as a continuous girder over
two spans with a double-sided cantilever. A T-beam is selected as the section. The figure below shows the system in
longitudinal and lateral section view.
Limited prestressing with subsequent bond is applied to the roof construction in the longitudinal direction. Prestressing in
the lateral direction is not applied for reasons of economy. The construction is designed to meet requirement class D.
According to Table 18 of the DIN 1045-1, a decompression check is not necessary for this class.

Static system and dimensions (longitudinal and lateral section)

Material
Concrete
Reinforcing steel

C45/55
BSt 500, axis distance from edge 5 cm

Section

321

DIN 1045-1 Design

Prestressing steel and prestressing system
Prestressing steel quality
Certification of the prestressing system
Number of tendons in the bundle
Section surface Ap

St 1500/1770
DIN 1045-1, Cona 1206
4
1800 mm

E-modulus of the prestressing steel

0.1% strain limit (yield strength) of the prestressing steel fp0.1k

195000 MN/m
1500 MN/m

Tensile strength of the prestressing steel fpk

1770 MN/m

Permissible prestressing force of a tendon Pm0

2295 kN

Friction coefficients when prestressing and releasing m

Unintentional deviation angle of a tendon
Slippage at prestressing anchor
Duct diameter dh

0.2
0.3 /m
6 mm
82 mm

Allowance value for ensuring an overstressing reserve k

1.5

Scattering coefficients of the internal prestressing as per DIN 1045-1, Eq. (52), (53)
Construction stage according to Book 525 (rsup / rinf )

1.0 / 1.0

Final state (rsup / rinf )

1.1 / 0.9

The tendon guide is shown in the next figure. 4 bundled tendons are arranged such that they stretch across the entire
girder length and are prestressed at both girder ends. The prestressing system, prestressing procedure and prestressing
curve for a tendon group are also shown.
Tendon groups in beam series view 1, [-16.00/0.00/0.00] - [112.00/0.00/0.00] / [-16.00/0.00/1.00]
Superelevation = 10
0
0

Tendon group ordinates zv [cm] at the base points

xv 0.00 6.40

12.80 19.20 25.60 32.00 38.40 44.80 51.20 57.60 64.00 70.40 76.80 83.20 89.60 96.00 102.40 108.80 115.20 121.60 128.00

1 70.0 52.0 19.2 42.0

120.2 180.1 208.8 201.5 157.4

78.3 18.5 78.3

157.4 201.5 208.8 180.1 120.2

42.0 19.2 52.0 70.0

Force function of tendon group 1 (4 tendon(s), l = 128.41 m)

Prestressing system 1 - CONA 1206. Certification according to DIN 1045-1.
Pm0
= 2295.0 kN,
Ap = 1800.0 mm, a = 0.20, Angle ' = 0.30 /m
E-Modulus= 195000 MN/m, Ah = 5281.0 mm, n = 0.20, Slippage = 6.00 mm
Prestressing procedure 1 - Example
Tensioning with Pmax (DIN Report, DIN 1045-1, DIN EN 1992-1-1). Kappa = 1.5.
Pre. anchor
:
Start
End
Normal. force : 1.000 1.000
Pre. force [kN]: 2203.9 2203.9
Extension [mm]: 667.0
70.0

7758.6

7621.1

7504.2

7255.9

7504.2

7621.1

7758.6

7902.2

8041.1

8168.7

8280.7

8217.0

32.00

38.40

44.80

51.20

57.60

64.00

70.40

76.80

83.20

89.60

96.00

102.40

108.80

115.20 121.60

322

7980.4

7902.2

25.60

Tendon guide and prestressing curve in the longitudinal section (4 tendons).

8090.8

8041.1

8280.7

12.80 19.20

8168.7

0.00 6.40

8217.0

8090.8

7980.4 [kN]

8366.4

128.00

xv
[m]

Examples
Loads
Load case 1

Dead load (G1).

Load case 2

Additional loads q=11.06 kN/m (G2).

Load case 3

Traffic load (snow load) q=7.90 kN/m (Q).

Load case 10

Prestressing (P).

Load case 15

Creep-generating permanent load: G1+P+G2

Load case 20

Creep and shrinkage (CSR).

Coefficients: jt = 2.55; r = 0.8; et = -24.8 10-5
Creep-generating permanent load case: 15
The redistribution of internal forces between concrete and prestressing steel are taken into account.

DIN 1045-1 actions

Standard design group

G - Dead load
Gamma.sup / gamma.inf = 1.35 / 1
Load cases
1

Dead load

G - Additional dead load

Gamma.sup / gamma.inf = 1.35 / 1
Load cases
2

Additional dead load

P - Prestressing
Gamma.sup / gamma.inf = 1 / 1
Load cases internal prestressing
10

Prestressing

CSR1 - Creep, shrinkage, relaxation

Prestressing loss from relaxation of prestressed steel: 4.5 %.
Load cases
20

Creep, shrinkage

QS - Snow and ice load

Gamma.sup / gamma.inf = 1.5 / 0
Combination coefficients for: Superstructures
Snow and ice load - places to NN + 1000 m
Psi.0 / Psi.1 / Psi.2 = 0.5 / 0.2 / 0
Load cases 1. Variant, inclusive
3

Snow load

In this example all possible combinations of load cases are generated and designed. This method is selected in the
calculation settings and can be very slow when applied for a large number of load cases.
Below you will find an example of the curve of bending moment My for design situations in the ultimate limit states.
1. Permanent and temporary situation - Structural cond.
Construction stage - Ungrouted
G
P

Dead load
Prestressing

323

DIN 1045-1 Design

Bending moment My [kNm]

2. Permanent and temporary situation - t0
Final state
G
G
P
QS

Dead load
Additional dead load
Prestressing
Snow and ice load

Bending moment My [kNm]

3. Permanent and temporary situation - too
Final state
G
Dead load
G
Additional dead load
P
Prestressing
CSR1 Creep, shrinkage, relaxation
QS Snow and ice load

Bending moment My [kNm]

Design according to DIN 1045-1 (2008-08)
Design overview
Se. Class, Prestress
of component
1 D supplem. bond
(M)
(R)
(B)
(Q)
(T)
(S)
(P)
(C)

Reinforc.
M R B Q T
x x x x .

Fatig.
S P C
. . .

Crack- DeStress checks

width comp. Comp. S P
x
.
x
x x

Nominal reinforcement to guarantee robustness (ductility).

Dispersion of prestressing
The dispersion of prestressing is considered at the following checks:
- Check of decompression
- Nominal reinforcement for crack width limitation
- Check of crack width
All other checks are made using the mean value Pm,t of prestressing.
Se.
1

324

Prestressing of
component
supplem. bond

Const.period
r.sup r.inf
1.00
1.00

Final state
r.sup r.inf
1.10
0.90

Examples
Settings for flexural and shear reinforcement
M,N

Design mode for bend and longitudinal force:

fyk
Theta
Slabs
Asl
rhow
x,y
cvl
Red.

Se. Concr.
1 C45/55

Density
[kg/m]
.

Dsn. fyk
M,N [MPa]
ST
500

cot
Theta
3.00

Dsn.
Asl [cm]
like
Pic. 32
slabs given max
.
0.00
.

Fac.
rhow
1.60

Dsn. cvl
x,y [mm]
.
50

Red.
prestr.
.

Shear sections
bw.nom
h.nom
z1, z2
teff
B.
Se.
1

Nominal width of the prestressed section acc. to 10.3.4 (8).

Nominal height of the prestressed section acc. to 10.3.4 (8).
Height and width of the core section for torsion.
Thickness of the torsion box.
Box section.

Width [m]
Eff. width
bw
bw.nom
bn [m]
0.500 0.380
0.450

Height [m] Eff.height

h
h.nom
d [m]
2.300 2.220
2.250

Torsion section [m]

z1
z2
teff B.
2.200 0.400 0.100 .

Settings for the check of crack widths

ds
max.s
Xi1
k
sr,max
Method
TM

Maximal given bar diameter of the reinforcing steel.

Se. wk,per ds max.s

[mm] [mm] [mm]
1 0.20
20
.

Coeff. sr,max Concr. age

Xi1
k
[mm] As,min
wk
0.27 1.00
. 3- 5d 3- 5d

Method for
crack w.
Calcul.

Tensile zone TM
for As,min
Cmb. per class .

Settings for the check of concrete stresses

(CC) Characteristic combination (QC) Quasi-continuous combination
Se.
1

per.sigma.c
(CC)
0.60 fck

per.sigma.c
(QC)
0.45 fck

Dekompression
Stress
Sigma.x

The following illustrations show the curve of the required bending and shear reinforcement.

Longitudinal reinforcement As from the design in the ultimate limit states [cm]
(upper reinforcement with dashed lines).

Minimum reinforcement As for ensuring robustness (ductility) [cm]

(upper reinforcement with dashed lines).

Reinforcement As for limiting the crack width [cm]

(upper reinforcement with dashed lines).

325

DIN 1045-1 Design

Enclosing reinforcement As from the checks [cm]

(upper reinforcement with dashed lines).

(Minimum) lateral force reinforcement Asb,z in the ultimate limit states [cm/m].
The following pages contain excerpts from the detailed check log for beam 16 at location 2 (middle column).
Design of longitudinal reinforcement
(M) Nominal
fctm
zs,t/b
fyk,t/b
max Sc

reinforcement to guarantee robustness (Charact. C.).

Average centric concrete tensile strength [MN/m].
Lever arm of inner strengths top/bottom [m].
Strength of longitudinal reinforcement top/bottom [MN/m].
Maximal concrete edge stress from Charact. C. [MN/m].
without the statically determined part of prestressing.
(R) Nominal or required reinforcement for crack width limitation.
Increase of reinforcement due to crack width check is marked by "!".
wk,per Permissible crack width [mm].
ds
Maximal given steel diameter [mm].
k
Coefficient for consideration of non-linear distributed tensile stress.
fct,eff Concrete strength at date of cracking [MN/m].
kc
Coefficient to consider stress distribution in tensile zone.
Ap'
Part of prestr. steel area Xi1*Ap which was used to reduce req.As.
Xi1
Bond coefficient for prestressing steel.
max Sx Maximal concrete edge stress from action combination [MN/m].
(B) Design of reinforement at ultimate limit state.
In case of dominant bending, compression reinforcement is marked with "*".
fck
Concrete strength for design of reinforcement [MN/m].
N0, M0 Statically determined forces of tendons with bond [kN, kNm].
Location 2
Beam 16, x = 4.00 m (Beam length 4.00 m)
Cross-section 1: Polygon - C45/55, 1 tendon group with bond
Steel 1; Design mode: Standard
(M) fctm=3.8; zs,t/b=2.025/2.025; fyk,t/b=500/500
(R) wk,per=0.2; ds=20; k=1; fct,eff=1.9; Xi1=0.27
r.sup/inf(Constr.)=1/1; r.sup/inf(Final)=1.1/0.9
(B) fck=45
Section properties
gross :
net
:
ideally:

A [m]
2.926
2.905
2.962

ys [m]
3.950
3.950
3.950

zs [m]
0.525
0.527
0.521

Iy [m4]
1.2560
1.2535
1.2601

Iz [m4]
9.8822
9.8822
9.8822

Iyz[m4]
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000

Tendon groups with bond

No. E-Modul fp0,1k
fpk
[MN/m] [MN/m] [MN/m]
1 195000
1500
1770

y
[m]
3.950

z
[m]
0.185

Ap
[mm]
7200

Duct
d [mm]
82

Prestress
[kN]
7255.93

1. Characteristic (rare) combination (CC.1): G.1+P, Construction stage ungrouted

Relevant concrete internal forces from 1 sets of internal forces
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
1
: -7255.87 -4530.46
0.00
Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces
Set
Combination
1
: L1+L10
2. Characteristic (rare) combination (CC.2): G.1+G.2+P+QS, Final state grouted
No set of internal forces in this situation was relevant.
3. Characteristic (rare) combination (CC.3): G.1+G.2+P+CSR1+QS, Final state grouted
Loss of prestress by CSR in tendon groups
No. CSR[%]
No. CSR[%]
No. CSR[%]
1
9.63
-.-.-

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

Stat. determ. part (P+CSR): Nx0=-6557.10 kN; My0=2229.41; Mz0=0.00 kNm

Relevant values from 2 sets of internal forces
Concrete section
Bond section
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
2
: -6430.65 -9821.11
0.00
126.44 -12050.52

Mz[kNm]
0.00

Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces

Set
Combination
2
: L1+L2+0.96*L10+L20+L3

326

Inclin.
[]
0.00

Examples
1. Frequent combination (TC.1): G.1+G.2+P+QS, Final state grouted
Relevant concrete internal forces from 4 sets of internal forces
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
1
: -7981.45 -5822.38
0.00 r.sup
Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces
Set
Combination
1
: L1+L2+L10
2. Frequent combination (TC.2): G.1+G.2+P+CSR1+QS, Final state grouted
Relevant concrete internal forces from 4 sets of internal forces
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
2
: -5787.59 -9486.58
0.00 r.inf
Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces
Set
Combination
2
: L1+L2+0.96*L10+L20+0.20*L3
1. Permanent and temporary comb. (PC.1): G.1+P, Construction stage ungrouted
No set of internal forces in this situation was relevant.
2. Permanent and temporary comb. (PC.2): G.1+G.2+P+QS, Final state grouted
No set of internal forces in this situation was relevant.
3. Permanent and temporary comb. (PC.3): G.1+G.2+P+CSR1+QS, Final state grouted
Loss of prestress by CSR in tendon groups
No. CSR[%]
No. CSR[%]
No. CSR[%]
1
9.63
-.-.-

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

Stat. determ. part (P+CSR): Nx0=-6557.10 kN; My0=2229.41; Mz0=0.00 kNm

Relevant values from 8 sets of internal forces
Concrete section
Bond section
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
2
: -6430.65 -17307.98
0.00
126.44 -19537.39

Mz[kNm]
0.00

Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces

Set
Combination
2
: 1.35*L1+1.35*L2+0.96*L10+L20+1.50*L3
Design of longitudinal reinforcement
Reinforcement Nx
Lay. Type
[kN]
1
M
126.44
R -5787.59
B -6430.65
2
M
126.44
R -5787.59
B -6430.65
3
M
0.06
R -7981.45
B -6430.65
4
M
0.06
R -7981.45
B -6430.65

My
[kNm]
-12050.52
-9486.58
-17307.98
-12050.52
-9486.58
-17307.98
-6997.47
-5822.38
-17307.98
-6997.47
-5822.38
-17307.98

Mz
max Sc kc
[kNm] [MN/m]
0.00
5.08
.
0.00
1.99 0.50
0.00
.
.
0.00
5.08
.
0.00
1.99 0.50
0.00
.
.
0.00
.
.
0.00 -0.29
.
0.00
.
.
0.00
.
.
0.00 -0.29
.
0.00
.
.

Ap'
[cm]
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

req.As
[cm]
44.91
59.91
22.06
44.91
59.91
22.06
0.00
0.00
9.03*
0.00
0.00
9.03*

Situation
CC.3,2
TC.2,2
PC.3,2
CC.3,2
TC.2,2
PC.3,2
CC.1,1
TC.1,1
PC.3,2
CC.1,1
TC.1,1
PC.3,2

Design of shear reinforcement

The percentage of nominal reinforcement acc. to 13.2.3 (5) is considered.
bw
bw.nom
bn
kb
h
h.nom
d
kd
Angle
Asl giv.
min rhow
Qy, Qz
VRdct
VRdmax
z
cvl
Asb.y,z
Asl

Effective width for calculation of shear stresses from Qz and Mx [m]

Nominal value of the width when deducting the duct diameter [m]
Statically effective width for shear design using Qy [m]
Factor to calculate the inner lever arm from bn
Effective height for calculation of shear stresses from Qy and Mx [m]
Nominal value of the height when deducting the duct diameter [m]
Statically effective height for shear design using Qz [m]
Factor to calculate the inner lever arm from d
Angle cot Theta between the compressive strut and the beam axis
Chargeable longitudinal reinf. acc. to Pic. 32 [cm]
Minimal percentage of lateral reinforcement acc. to 13.2.3 (5)
Lateral forces for design in y- and z-direction [kN]
Resisting lateral force without shear reinforcement [kN]
Resisting lateral force of the concrete struts [kN]
Inner lever arm z=kb*bn resp. z=kd*d [m]; z<=max(d-2cvl,d-cvl-30mm)
Laying measure of the long. reinforcement to limit the lever arm z [m]
Req. stirrup reinforcement from Qy resp. Qz [cm/m]
Req. longitudinal reinf. acc. to Pic. 32 [cm] for req.Asb

Location 2
Beam 16, x = 4.00 m (Beam length 4.00 m)
Cross-section 1: Polygon - C45/55, 1 tendon group with bond
bw/bw.nom/bn/kb=0.5/0.38/0.45/0.9; h/h.nom/d/kd=2.3/2.22/2.25/0.9
cvl=0.05; fyk=500; Asl giv./max=0/0; min rhow=1.6*rho
1. Permanent and temporary comb. (PC.1): G.1+P, Construction stage ungrouted
No set of internal forces in this situation was relevant.
2. Permanent and temporary comb. (PC.2): G.1+G.2+P+QS, Final state grouted
No set of internal forces in this situation was relevant.

327

DIN 1045-1 Design

3. Permanent and temporary comb. (PC.3): G.1+G.2+P+CSR1+QS, Final state grouted
Relevant concrete internal forces from 8 sets of internal forces
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
Mx[kNm]
Qy[kN]
Qz[kN]
2
: -6430.65 -17307.98
0.00
0.00
0.00 -3080.21
Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces
Set
Combination
2
: 1.35*L1+1.35*L2+0.96*L10+L20+1.50*L3
Check of the shear reinforcement and the compressive struts
Action
max
Qy
Qz
Action
max
Qy
Qz

:
:

z
[m]
0.37
2.02

Q/
Asb.y
Asb.z
Asb.T
Angle VRdct [cm/m] [cm/m] [cm/m]
3.00 0.00
0.00
.
.
1.76 5.35
.
19.83
.

:
:

z
[m]
0.37
2.02

Qy/
Angle VRdmax
3.00 0.00
1.76
.

Qz/
VRdmax
.
0.49

Mx/
TRdmax
.
.

Asl.T
[cm]
.
.

Q/VRd+
Mx/TRd
.
.

Asl
[cm]
0.00
0.00

Situation
-,PC.3,2

Check of crack widths

The check calculates the crack width directly.
(CC) Charact. (rare), (TC) Frequent, (QC) Quasi-continuous combination
wk,per
ds
fct,eff
Sigma.c
wk
sr,max
Ac,eff
As,eff
Ap,eff
Sigma.s
Xi1

Permissible crack width [mm]

Location 2
Beam 16, x = 4.00 m (Beam length 4.00 m)
Cross-section 1: Polygon - C45/55, 1 tendon group with bond
wk,per=0.2; ds=20; fct,eff=1.9; Xi1=0.27
r.sup/inf(Constr.)=1/1; r.sup/inf(Final)=1.1/0.9
Section properties
gross :
net
:
ideally:

A [m]
2.926
2.905
2.962

ys [m]
3.950
3.950
3.950

zs [m]
0.525
0.527
0.521

Iy [m4]
1.2560
1.2535
1.2601

Iz [m4]
9.8822
9.8822
9.8822

Iyz[m4]
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000

Tendon groups with bond

No. E-Modul fp0,1k
fpk
[MN/m] [MN/m] [MN/m]
1 195000
1500
1770

y
[m]
3.950

z
[m]
0.185

Ap
[mm]
7200

Duct
d [mm]
82

Prestress
[kN]
7255.93

Inclin.
[]
0.00

1. Frequent combination (TC.1): G.1+G.2+P+QS, Final state grouted

No set of internal forces in this situation was relevant.
2. Frequent combination (TC.2): G.1+G.2+P+CSR1+QS, Final state grouted
Loss of prestress by CSR in tendon groups
No. CSR[%]
No. CSR[%]
No. CSR[%]
1
9.63
-.-.-

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

Stat.determ.part (P+CSR)*r.inf: Nx0=-5901.39 kN; My0=2006.47; Mz0=0.00 kNm

Relevant values from 4 sets of internal forces
Concrete section
Bond section
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
2
: -5787.59 -9486.58
0.00
113.80 -11493.06

Mz[kNm]
0.00 r.inf

Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces

Set
Combination
2
: L1+L2+0.96*L10+L20+0.20*L3
Check of crack width for reinf. layer 1 (top)
Nx
My
Mz
Sigma.c
Situation

: -5787.59 kN
: -9486.58 kNm
:
0.00 kNm
:
1.99 MN/m
: TC.2,2

As,eff
Ap,eff
Ac,eff
Sigma.s
sr,max
wk

: 119.83
:
0.00
:
0.987
: 63.13
: 184.60
:
0.03

cm
cm
m
MN/m
mm
per. 0.20 mm

Check of concrete compressive stress

Characteristic compressive concrete strength [MN/m]

Total maximal longitudinal compressive stress [MN/m]
Position of the edge point: above, below of centre

Location 2
Beam 16, x = 4.00 m (Beam length 4.00 m)
Cross-section 1: Polygon - C45/55, 1 tendon group with bond
0.45*fck=20.25; 0.6*fck=27

328

Examples
Section properties
gross :
net
:
ideally:

A [m]
2.926
2.905
2.962

ys [m]
3.950
3.950
3.950

zs [m]
0.525
0.527
0.521

Iy [m4]
1.2560
1.2535
1.2601

Iz [m4]
9.8822
9.8822
9.8822

Iyz[m4]
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000

Tendon groups with bond

No. E-Modul fp0,1k
fpk
[MN/m] [MN/m] [MN/m]
1 195000
1500
1770

y
[m]
3.950

z
[m]
0.185

Ap
[mm]
7200

Duct
d [mm]
82

Prestress
[kN]
7255.93

Inclin.
[]
0.00

1. Characteristic (rare) combination (CC.1): G.1+P, Construction stage ungrouted

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

Stat. determ. part (P+CSR): Nx0=-6557.10 kN; My0=2229.41; Mz0=0.00 kNm

Relevant values from 2 sets of internal forces
Concrete section
Bond section
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
2
: -6430.65 -9821.11
0.00
126.44 -12050.52

Mz[kNm]
0.00

Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces

Set
Combination
2
: L1+L2+0.96*L10+L20+L3
1. Quasi-continuous combination (QC.1): G.1+G.2+P+CSR1+QS, Final state grouted
Loss of prestress by CSR in tendon groups
No. CSR[%]
No. CSR[%]
No. CSR[%]
1
9.63
-.-.-

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

Stat. determ. part (P+CSR): Nx0=-6557.10 kN; My0=2229.41; Mz0=0.00 kNm

Relevant values from 1 sets of internal forces
Concrete section
Bond section
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
1
: -6430.65 -8051.51
0.00
126.44 -10280.92

Mz[kNm]
0.00

Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces

Set
Combination
1
: L1+L2+0.96*L10+L20
Check of compressive stress in concrete for the Characteristic (rare) combination
Side

Se.Pnt.
top
1
bottom
7

min Sigma.x
[MN/m]
(I)
-0.59
(I) -16.04

per. Sigma.x
[MN/m]
-27.00
-27.00

Period

Situation

Constr.
Final

CC.1,1
CC.3,2

Check of compressive stress in concrete for the Quasi-continuous combination

Side

Se.Pnt.
top
1
bottom
7

min Sigma.x
[MN/m]
(I)
1.16
(I) -13.54

per. Sigma.x
[MN/m]
-20.25
-20.25

Period

Situation

Final
Final

QC.1,1
QC.1,1

Check of steel stress

For the check, a cracked concrete section is assumed.
For tendon groups without bond and/or for situations before grouting,
the prestressing steel stress is checked acc. to Eq. (49).
Type S
Type P
N0, M0
fck

Long. reinf. from N and M, layer number, Charact. C. (CC)

Prestressing steel, Tendon number, Q.-cont. C. (QC)
and Charact. C. (CC)
Statically determined forces of tendons with bond [kN, kNm]
Concrete strength to determine the strain state [MN/m]

Location 2
Beam 16, x = 4.00 m (Beam length 4.00 m)
Cross-section 1: Polygon - C45/55, 1 tendon group with bond
fck=45; Steel 1
Section properties
gross :
net
:
ideally:

A [m]
2.926
2.905
2.962

ys [m]
3.950
3.950
3.950

zs [m]
0.525
0.527
0.521

Iy [m4]
1.2560
1.2535
1.2601

Iz [m4]
9.8822
9.8822
9.8822

Iyz[m4]
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000

Tendon groups with bond

No. E-Modul fp0,1k
fpk
[MN/m] [MN/m] [MN/m]
1 195000
1500
1770

y
[m]
3.950

z
[m]
0.185

Ap
[mm]
7200

Duct
d [mm]
82

Prestress
[kN]
7255.93

Inclin.
[]
0.00

329

DIN 1045-1 Design

1. Characteristic (rare) combination (CC.1): G.1+P, Construction stage ungrouted
Relevant concrete internal forces from 1 sets of internal forces
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
1
: -7255.87 -4530.46
0.00
Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces
Set
Combination
1
: L1+L10
2. Characteristic (rare) combination (CC.2): G.1+G.2+P+QS, Final state grouted
No set of internal forces in this situation was relevant.
3. Characteristic (rare) combination (CC.3): G.1+G.2+P+CSR1+QS, Final state grouted
Loss of prestress by CSR in tendon groups
No. CSR[%]
No. CSR[%]
No. CSR[%]
1
9.63
-.-.-

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

Stat. determ. part (P+CSR): Nx0=-6557.10 kN; My0=2229.41; Mz0=0.00 kNm

Relevant values from 2 sets of internal forces
Concrete section
Bond section
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
2
: -6430.65 -9821.11
0.00
126.44 -12050.52

Mz[kNm]
0.00

Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

Stat. determ. part (P+CSR): Nx0=-6557.10 kN; My0=2229.41; Mz0=0.00 kNm

Relevant values from 1 sets of internal forces
Concrete section
Bond section
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
1
: -6430.65 -8051.51
0.00
126.44 -10280.92

Mz[kNm]
0.00

Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces

Set
Combination
1
: L1+L2+0.96*L10+L20
Check of steel stress
Steel
Type No.
S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
P
1
P
1

330

Nx
[kN]
-6430.65
-6430.65
-7255.87
-7255.87
-6430.65
.

My
[kNm]
-9821.11
-9821.11
-4530.46
-4530.46
-8051.51
.

Mz
[kNm]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
.

As
[cm]
59.91
59.91
9.03
9.03
72.00
72.00

Sigma.s
[MN/m]
54.05
54.05
-48.90
-48.90
923.60
1007.77

per.
[MN/m]
400.00
400.00
400.00
400.00
1150.50
1275.00

Situation
CC.3,2
CC.3,2
CC.1,1
CC.1,1
QC.1,1
CC.1,--

Examples

Torsional Beam
The depicted cantilever is subjected to an eccentrically acting load F = 175 kN. The required shear, torsion longitudinal and
stirrup reinforcements are listed in the following log.

System drawing
Design according to DIN 1045-1 (2008-08)
Settings for flexural and shear reinforcement
M,N

Design mode for bend and longitudinal force:

fyk
Theta
Slabs
Asl
rhow
x,y
cvl
Red.

Se. Concr.
1 C35/45

Density
[kg/m]
.

Dsn. fyk
M,N [MPa]
.
500

cot
Theta
1.00

Dsn.
Asl [cm]
like
Pic. 32
slabs given max
.
1.00
.

Fac.
rhow
1.00

Dsn. cvl
x,y [mm]
.
55

Red.
prestr.
.

Shear sections
bw.nom
h.nom
z1, z2
teff
B.
Se.
1

Nominal width of the prestressed section acc. to 10.3.4 (8).

Nominal height of the prestressed section acc. to 10.3.4 (8).
Height and width of the core section for torsion.
Thickness of the torsion box.
Box section.
Width [m]
Eff. width
bw
bw.nom
bn [m]
0.300
.
0.245

Height [m] Eff.height

h
h.nom
d [m]
0.700
.
0.645

Torsion section [m]

z1
z2
teff B.
0.590 0.190 0.110 .

Design of shear reinforcement

The percentage of nominal reinforcement acc. to 13.2.3 (5) is considered.
bw
bn
kb
h
d
kd
z1, z2
teff
Angle
Asl giv.
min rhow
Qy, Qz
VRdct
VRdmax
z
cvl
Asb.y,z
Asl
Mx
Q/VRd+
Mx/TRd
TRdmax
Asb.T
Asl.T

Effective width for calculation of shear stresses from Qz and Mx [m]

Statically effective width for shear design using Qy [m]
Factor to calculate the inner lever arm from bn
Effective height for calculation of shear stresses from Qy and Mx [m]
Statically effective height for shear design using Qz [m]
Factor to calculate the inner lever arm from d
Height and width of the core section Ak for torsion [m]
Wall thickness of the torsion section [m]
Angle cot Theta between the compressive strut and the beam axis
Chargeable longitudinal reinf. acc. to Pic. 32 [cm]
Minimal percentage of lateral reinforcement acc. to 13.2.3 (5)
Lateral forces for design in y- and z-direction [kN]
Resisting lateral force without shear reinforcement [kN]
Resisting lateral force of the concrete struts [kN]
Inner lever arm z=kb*bn resp. z=kd*d [m]; z<=max(d-2cvl,d-cvl-30mm)
Laying measure of the long. reinforcement to limit the lever arm z [m]
Req. stirrup reinforcement from Qy resp. Qz [cm/m]
Req. longitudinal reinf. acc. to Pic. 32 [cm] for req.Asb
Torsional moment for design [kNm]
Block section: (Q/VRdmax)+(Mx/TRdmax)
Box section: Q/VRdmax+Mx/TRdmax
Resisting torsional moment of the concrete struts [kNm]
Req. stirrup reinforcement from torsion [cm/m]
Req. longitudinal reinforcement from torsion [cm]

331

DIN 1045-1 Design

Beam 1
Location 1
Beam 1, x = 0.00 m (Beam length 2.00 m)
Cross-section 1: Polygon - C35/45
bw/bn/kb=0.3/0.245/0.9; h/d/kd=0.7/0.645/0.9
cvl=0.055; fyk=500; Asl giv./max=1/0; min rhow=1*rho
Block section z1/z2=0.59/0.19; teff=0.11
1. Permanent and temporary comb. (PC.1): G, Final state
Check of the shear reinforcement and the compressive struts
Action
max, cor.
Qy, Mx
:
Mx, Qy
:
Qz, Mx
:
Mx, Qz
:

z
[m]
0.16
0.16
0.56
0.56

Angle
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00

Q/
Asb.y
Asb.z
Asb.T
VRdct [cm/m] [cm/m] [cm/m]
0.00
0.00
.
3.59
0.00
0.00
.
4.85
3.24
.
9.70
4.85
3.24
.
9.70
4.85

Action
max
Qy
:
Qz
:
Mx
:
Qy "+" Mx:
Qz "+" Mx:

z
[m]
0.16
0.56
.
0.16
0.56

Qy/
Angle VRdmax
1.00 0.00
1.00
.
1.00
.
1.00 0.00
1.00
.

Qz/
VRdmax
.
0.19
.
.
0.19

Mx/
TRdmax
.
.
0.37
0.37
0.37

Asl.T
[cm]
5.60
7.56
7.56
7.56

Q/VRd+
Mx/TRd
.
.
.
0.14
0.17

Asl
[cm]
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00

Situation
-,PC.1,Qz+
PC.1,Qz+
PC.1,Qz+

Situation
-,PC.1,Qz+
PC.1,Qz+
PC.1,Qz+
PC.1,Qz+

Single Design Reinforced Concrete

A single rectangular section is designed under bending and normal force.
Pos. 1 - Reinforced concrete design per DIN 1045-1
Section 1

0.600

Sc. = 1 : 20
Pressure

2
2

3
0.300

Action
Resistance
Force system
Strength
Design mode
Reinforcement
Concrete section
Point
y [m]
1

N = 10.00 kN; My = 67.50; Mz = 27.00 kNm

N = 10.00 kN; My = 67.50; Mz = 27.00 kNm
ys / zs = 0.150 / 0.300 m
C20/25; gamma.c = 1.50; gamma.s = 1.15
Standard
3.87 cm; 0.21 %; Concrete area = 1800.00 cm
z [m]

eps[] sigma[MPa]

0.000
0.135
0.300
0.300
0.000
0.000

0.000
0.000
0.000
0.600
0.600
0.312

-3.50
0.00
4.29
11.04
3.24
0.00

-11.33
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

Reinforcement
Point
y [m]

z [m]

d1 [m]

Es, s [MPa]

0.050
0.050
0.550
0.550

0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050

2
3
4

1
2
3
4

332

0.050
0.250
0.250
0.050

200000
200000
200000
200000

500
500
500
500

Inner
Forces
Compr.
Tension
Lev. arm

Zv0 [kN]
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0

y [m]

z [m]

F [kN]

0.038
0.203
0.165

0.088
0.498
0.409

-160.15
170.15

eps[] sigma[MPa]
-1.64
3.56
9.17
3.98

-327.84
436.10
441.45
436.50

As [cm]
0.00
0.41
2.55
0.91

Examples

Single Design Prestressed Concrete

In the following example a failure safety check is performed on a prestressed concrete section. In this case tendon groups
are defined as prestressed concrete steel layers 1 and 2.
Pos. 1 - Reinforced concrete design per DIN 1045-1
Section 1

6
1

Sc. = 1 : 5
Pressure

0.220

8
S

1
6

9
2

10
5

11
0.120

Action
Resistance
Force system
Strength
Design mode
Reinforcement
Concrete section
Point
y [m]
1
2

N = 0.00 kN; My = 40.00; Mz = 0.00 kNm

N = -0.00 kN; My = 40.00; Mz = 0.00 kNm
ys / zs = 0.050 / 0.113 m
C45/55; gamma.c = 1.50; gamma.s = 1.15
Standard
4.90 cm; 3.30 %; Concrete area = 148.50 cm
z [m]

eps[] sigma[MPa]

-0.010
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.000
0.000
0.100
0.100
0.070
0.070
0.070
0.110
0.110
-0.010

0.185
0.175
0.095
0.060
0.035
0.000
0.000
0.035
0.060
0.094
0.175
0.185
0.220
0.220

3.35
2.98
0.00
-1.28
-2.20
-3.50
-3.50
-2.20
-1.28
0.00
2.98
3.35
4.65
4.65

0.00
0.00
0.00
-22.17
-25.50
-25.50
-25.50
-25.50
-22.17
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

Reinforcement
Point
y [m]

z [m]

d1 [m]

Es, s [MPa]

0.018
0.200
0.010
0.010
0.210
0.210

0.018
0.020
0.010
0.010
0.010
0.010

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

1
2
3
4
5
6

0.050
0.050
0.010
0.090
0.100
0.000

205000
205000
200000
200000
200000
200000

1420
1420
500
500
500
500

Inner
Forces
Compr.
Tension
Lev. arm

Zv0 [kN]
12.0
117.6
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0

y [m]

z [m]

F [kN]

0.050
0.050
0.000

0.025
0.203
0.178

-224.39
224.39

eps[] sigma[MPa]
-2.83
3.91
-3.13
-3.13
4.28
4.28

-280.83
1234.78
-435.69
-435.69
436.79
436.79

As [cm]
0.40
1.20
0.78
0.78
0.87
0.87

References
Allgemeines Rundschreiben Straenbau (ARS)
des Bundesministeriums fr Verkehr, Bau- und Wohnungswesen (General Newsletter on Roadworks from the Federal
Ministry of Transport, Construction and Housing)
No. 8/2003 No. 14/2003 from 7 March 2003. Verkehrsblatt-Verlag, Dortmund 2003.
Auslegungen des Normenausschusses Bauwesen (NABau)
zur DIN 1045-1 (Interpretations from the Building and Civil Engineering Standards Committee on DIN 1045-1).
Date: 1 June 2012.
DIN 1045-1:2001-07
Concrete, Reinforced Concrete and Prestressed Concrete Structures - Part 1: Design and Construction.
Beuth Verlag GmbH, Berlin 2001.

333

DIN 1045-1 Design

DIN 1045-1:2005-06
Revisions to DIN 1045-1:2001-07.
Beuth Verlag GmbH, Berlin 2005.
DIN 1045-1:2008-08 (New Edition)
Concrete, Reinforced Concrete and Prestressed Concrete Structures - Part 1: Design and Construction.
Beuth Verlag GmbH, Berlin 2008.
DIN 1045 - Concrete and Reinforced Concrete Structures
Part1: Design and Construction, Annotated Short Version.
3rd completely reworked edition, Beuth Verlag GmbH, Berlin 2008.
DIN 1055-100:2001-03
Actions on Structures. Part 100: Basis of Design,
Safety Concept and Design Rules. Beuth Verlag GmbH, Berlin 2003.
DIN 4149:2005-04
Bauten in deutschen Erdbebengebieten - Lastannahmen, Bemessung und Ausfhrung blicher Hochbauten
(Buildings in German Earthquake Areas - Design Loads, Analysis and Structural Design of Buildings).
Beuth Verlag GmbH, Berlin 2005.
DIN Report 102, Concrete Bridges
Publisher: DIN Deutsches Institut fr Normung e.V.
2nd Edition. Beuth Verlag GmbH, Berlin 2003.
Erfahrungssammlung des Normenausschusses Bauwesen (NABau) zu den DIN-Fachberichten 101 und 102
(Knowledge Base of the Building Trade and Civil Engineering Standards Committee on DIN Technical Reports 101 and
102). Date: 7 March 2007.
Heft 166 - Berechnungstafeln fr schiefwinklige Fahrbahnplatten von Straenbrcken
(Book 166 - Calculation Tables for Oblique-angled Roadway Slabs of Road Bridges).
Publisher: Deutscher Ausschuss fr Stahlbeton.
Beuth Verlag GmbH, Berlin 1967.
Heft 466 - Grundlagen und Bemessungshilfen fr die Rissbreitenbeschrnkung im Stahlbeton und Spannbeton.
(Book 466 - Principles and Design Aids for Crack Width Limitation in Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete) Publisher:
Deutscher Ausschuss fr Stahlbeton.
Beuth Verlag GmbH, Berlin 1996.
Heft 525 - Erluterungen zur DIN 1045-1 (Book 525 - Explanations on DIN 1045-1).
Publisher: Deutscher Ausschuss fr Stahlbeton.
1st Edition - September 2003, Beuth Verlag GmbH, Berlin 2003.
Heft 525 - Berichtigung 1:2005-05 (Book 525 Correction 1:2005-05).
Publisher: Deutscher Ausschuss fr Stahlbeton,
Beuth Verlag GmbH, Berlin 2005.
Knig, G.; Maurer, R.; Kliver, J.; Bornmann, M.
Leitfaden zum DIN-Fachbericht 102 Betonbrcken (Guide for DIN Technical Report 102 Concrete Bridges).
March 2003 Edition. 1st Edition - November 2003. Ernst & Sohn Verlag, Berlin 2003.
Thrlimann, B.
Anwendungen der Plastizittstheorie auf Stahlbeton (Vorlesungen)
(Applying the Plasticity Theory to Reinforced Concrete (Lectures)).
Institut fr Baustatik und Konstruktion ETH-Zrich 1983.
Wolfensberger, R.
Traglast und optimale Bemessung von Platten (Load and Optimal Design of Slabs).
Technische Forschungs- und Beratungsstelle der Schweizerischen Zementindustrie, Wildegg,
Dissertation, ETH Zrich 1964.
Zilch, K.; Curbach, M. (Eds.)
Einfhrung in die DIN 1045-1 - Anwendungsbeispiele. (Introduction to DIN 1045-1 - Application Examples).
Ernst & Sohn Verlag, Berlin 2001.
Zilch, K.; Rogge, A.
Bemessung der Stahlbeton- und Spannbetonbauteile nach DIN 1045-1.
(Design of Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete Components According to DIN 1045-1).
Betonkalender 2002, V. 1, pp. 217-359.
Ernst & Sohn Verlag, Berlin 2002.

334

Basics

EN 1992-1-1 Design
Basics
The reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete design specified in EN 1992-1-1 (Eurocode 2) can be used for buildings
and engineering constructions under observance of the following standards:
EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2010 as the base document

DIN EN 1992-1-1:2011 with the National Annex Germany 2013-04

OENORM EN 1992-1-1:2011 with the National Annex Austria B 1992-1-1:2011-12

SS EN 1992-1-1:2010 with the National Annex Sweden 2011-04

The desired rule is selected in the Design Codes dialog in the Options menu. The relevant entry, calculation and results
dialogs appear depending on which rule is selected. When selecting the material the following alternatives are available:
C12/15-EN-D to C100/115-EN-D and LC12/13-EN-D to LC80/88-EN-D for design in accordance with DIN EN 1992-1-1

C12/15-EN to C90/105-EN and LC12/13-EN to LC80/88-EN for design in accordance with the other standards

Prestressed components with subsequent bond

Prestressed components without bond

Components with external prestressing

Mixed-construction components

The design is carried out after the static calculation. To do so, you need to assign the calculated load cases to the actions in
accordance with EN 1991:2002 (Eurocode 1), Part 1. The program will take into account the preset safety factors and
combination coefficients defined in EN 1990:2010 (Eurocode 0) for the desired design situations to automatically calculate
the decisive design internal forces for either the entire system or a group of selected elements.
The actions and check selection dialogs can be opened from the analysis settings. Detailed check specifications and
reinforcement data must be entered during section definition.
For beams and design objects, all checks are carried out at the polygon section. For general notes on using design objects,
refer to the relevant chapter in the manual.
In the EN 1992-1-1 Design folder of the database and the national variants folders, a single design can also be performed
for the user-defined polygon sections.
The EN 1992-1-1 guidelines are primarily cited for the following explanations. Reference to the relevant national settings is
only made if they contain different or complementary rules.

335

EN 1992-1-1 Design

Input
Actions and Design Situations
The design values of the load are calculated based on the internal forces of individual load cases and load case
combinations. For this the existing load cases and load case combinations must be assigned to actions. These actions are
then used to establish the desired design situations.
The following dialog is opened from the database or the Settings in the Analysis menu.

Action dialog for EN 1992-1-1 (national variants corresponding)

Action...
Open the dialog for entering new actions:
Permanent actions (G, GE, GH)

Prestressing (P)

Creep and shrinkage, relaxation (CSR1, CSR2). These actions are only available if a P action has been defined. In the

combinations they are treated, along with P, as a single action.

Variable actions (QN, QS, QW, QT, QH, QD)

Accidental actions (A)

Actions due to earthquakes (AE)

Design values of actions (Fd)

These actions already contain the partial safety factors and combination coefficients. They are combined exclusively.
Cyclic fatigue actions (Qfat)

336

Input
Calculate
Calculate the defined design situations. Once calculated, the extremal results (internal forces, support reactions) can be
accessed for all situations in the database. This allows you to evaluate the results without having to execute the checking
module. Each time you execute the checking module, all results will be automatically recalculated using the currently valid
actions and then stored in the database for the elements to be checked.
Use combination rules of EN 1990 (6.10a/b)
Optionally the Eq. (6.10a/b) are used for the combination of the permanent and temporary situation, otherwise Eq. (6.10).
The following table demonstrates how the situations are used in the various checks. The numbers refer to the chapters of
the EN 1992-1-1 standard.
Situation
Perm. and temp.
Accidental
Earthquake
Characteristic
(rare)

Ultimate limit state

Longitudinal reinf.
Lateral reinf.
Torsional reinf.
Robustness reinf.
(EN 1992-2:2005,
6.1(110))

Frequent

Fatigue, simplified

Quasi-continuous

Fatigue

Fatigue reinf. steel

Fatigue prestr. steel
Fatigue concrete

Chapter Serviceability limit state

6.1
6.2
6.3
9.2.1.1 Concrete compr. stress
Reinforcing steel stress
Prestressing steel stress
Crack width, prestr. with immed. bond
6.8.6(2) Decompr. Class XD1-XS3
Crack width, prestr. with bond
Concrete compr. stress
Prestressing steel stress
Decompr. Class XC2-XC4
Crack w., reinf.concr. & prestr. w/o b.
Deformations
6.8.4
6.8.4
6.8.7(1)

Chapter

7.2(2)
7.2(5)
7.2(5)
7.3.1DE
7.3.1
7.3.1
7.2(2)
7.2(5)DE
7.3.1
7.3.1
7.4

Definition of an Action
The illustration below shows an example of the dialog field for entering a variable action. The dialog fields for other action
types are of a similar appearance.

Name
User-defined label for the action.

337

EN 1992-1-1 Design
Gamma.sup, Gamma.inf
Partial safety factors gsup and ginf. The nationally valid values are suggested based on EN 1990, Table A.1.2(B).
DIN EN 1992-1-1: In accordance with 2.3.1.3(4) a partial safety factor for settlements gG,Set = 1.0 can be assumed for the
linear-elastic determination of internal forces with stiffnesses of uncracked sections.
SS EN 1990: The program suggests the partial safety factors as they result in accordance with 2 for safety class 3 from
gd gsup with the reduction factor gd = 1.0 as per 6. If required, lower safety classes can be taken into account entering
lower values.
Combination coefficients psi for:
Input fields for selecting the combination coefficients for variable actions according to EN 1990. The default number values
are based on the national specifications in Table A.1.1 of the standard. Click the
combination coefficients y0, y1 and y2.

button to view and edit the selected

Load cases
List of the possible load cases or load case combinations. Select items by highlighting them and clicking the corresponding
button or use drag & drop.
Multi-select
Load cases and combinations can be added to the actions more than once.
Exclusive variants
Variable actions may consist of multiple exclusive variants that are mutually exclusive. The variants themselves contain both
inclusive and exclusive parts. You can add or delete action variants with the

buttons.

Inclusive load cases

Selected load cases and combinations that can have a simultaneous effect.
Exclusive load cases
Selected load cases and combinations that are mutually exclusive.
Prestressing loss from relaxation of prestressing steel
The prestressing loss is defined as a constant percentage reduction of prestress.
CS as constant reduction of prestress
As an alternative to defining CS load cases, you can allow for the effect of creep and shrinkage by defining a constant
percentage reduction of prestress.
Internal prestressing
Selected load cases that describe internal prestressing. The reactions of the individual load cases are added together.
External prestressing
Selected load cases that describe external prestressing. The reactions of the individual load cases are added together.

Partial Safety Factors

The partial safety factors of the construction materials are preset with the nationally applicable values as specified in
EN 1992-1-1, Table 2.1. In design situations resulting from earthquakes, the factors of the permanent and temporary design
situation apply in accordance with EN 1998-1, Chapter 5.2.4(2). The partial safety factors for the actions are specified in the
definition of the actions based on EN 1990, Table A.1.2(B).

338

Input

Section Inputs
The section inputs contain all of the specific settings made for checks in the ultimate limit and serviceability states. An
overview of the design specifications can be accessed in the EN 1992-1-1 Design folder of the database and in the folders of
the national variants.

Check selection for EN 1992-1-1 (national variants corresponding)

Prestressing of the component
The type of prestressing can be selected for each section separately:
not prestressed

subsequent bond

without bond

external

mixed construction

Exposure class
The check conditions for the decompression and crack width check are grouped by exposure class in EN 1992-1-1, Chapter
7.3, Table 7.1N. A component can be assigned to an exposure class based on the information provided in Table 4.1 of the
standard.
SS EN 1992-1-1, 20, 21: In addition, the service life class can be selected to determine the crack width according to Table
D-2 and the crack safety factor according to Table D-3.
Robustness
This check determines the minimum reinforcement against failure without notice (robustness reinforcement) based on
EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 5.10.1(5)P with the method specified for prestressed concrete bridges in EN 1992-2, Chapter 6.1
(109), Equation (6.101a). It thus offers an alternative to minimum reinforcement as per EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 9.2.1.1(1),
Equation (9.1N). The latter can be taken into account when necessary by specifying a base reinforcement in the reinforcing
steel description.
DIN EN 1992-1-1: According to Chapter 9.2.1.1(1), the ductile component behavior must always be ensured for
components with or without prestressing by applying robustness reinforcement.
Steel tensile stresses
For components with internal prestressing, both the prestressing steel stresses an the reinforcing steel stresses are checked.

339

EN 1992-1-1 Design
Minimum crack reinforcement, crack width
The crack width check is carried out according to Chapter 7.3.4. In this check the final longitudinal reinforcement is set as
the maximum value from the bending reinforcement, robustness reinforcement and minimum crack reinforcement as per
7.3.2. The latter will be increased automatically if necessary to maintain the crack width.

Base Values
The base values apply for all checks in the ultimate limit and serviceability states.

Design mode
Standard: Standard design mode for bending with normal force throughout the load area. Reinforcement will be

calculated in the tensile section to the greatest degree possible.

Symmetrical: Design for symmetrical reinforcement. As opposed to the standard mode, all of the reinforcement layers

reinforcement according to Section 9.5.2(2).

Reduction factor of prestr. for robustness
In the program the regulations of the EN 1992-2, Chapter 6.1(110) are decisive for the arrangement of the robustness
reinforcement. Thus for the determination of the tensile zone the statically determined effect of prestressing is not taken
into account. Because this cannot be determined for area elements alternatively the prestress can be reduced by a reduction
factor. The specification of an appropriate value is subject to the discretion of the user.
Effective height
Effective static height for the shear design of area elements [m].
Angle cot Theta

cot Q defines the concrete strut angle according to Chapter 6.2.3(2), Equation (6.7N). The program will suggest a value of 1
(45 strut angle). You can choose to ignore the suggestion and pick any value within the permissible national limits.
Entering a higher number will normally result in a lower necessary lateral force reinforcement Asw, a lower absorbable
lateral force VRd,max and a larger displacement a1 according to Chapter 9.2.1.3, Equation (9.2).
DIN EN 1992-1-1:
Three calculation methods can be chosen for the check:
Standard: The input value is limited to the range permitted in accordance with Eq. (6.7aDE) for lateral force, torsion and

combined loads (method with load-dependent strut angle).

Constant: The check is carried out using the chosen value for cot Q without further limitations (cf. interpretation No.
24 of NABau for DIN 1045-1).

Std./45: For lateral force cot Q is limited according to Eq. (6.7aDE), for torsion a constant strut angle of 45 is assumed
for simplification according to Chapter 6.3.2(2).

340

Input
The actual effective angle of the concrete struts is logged for each check location.
OENORM B 1992-1-1:
The concrete strut angle is defined by tan Q and should be limited according to equations (3AT) and (4AT).
SS EN 1992-1-1, 15:
Differing from Equation (6.7N), for prestressed components the condition 1.0 cot Q 3.0 applies.
Asl acc. to Fig. 6.3
The bending tensile reinforcement to be taken into account according to Chapter 6.2.2, Figure 6.3 [cm].
Asl extension to
You can optionally specify a maximum value for areas and the program will automatically increase the above input value
until that maximum value is reached in order to avoid stirrup reinforcement [cm].
Quality of the stirrups

420S: Reinforcing rod with fyk = 420 MN/m.

500S: Reinforcing rod with fyk = 500 MN/m.

500M: Reinforcing meshes with fyk = 500 MN/m.

General information: Freely definable steel quality [MN/m].

Design like slabs

Beams or design objects are treated like slabs, which means that a minimum lateral force reinforcement will not be
determined as per Chapter 6.2.1(4), if no lateral force reinforcement is required for computation.

For design according to DIN EN 1992-1-1 additional data can be entered:

Factor for rho.w,min
The minimum reinforcement level rw,min complies with Chapter 9.2.2 (5) and is defined using a factor related to the
standard value for beams according to Equation (9.5aDE). The program will suggest a factor of 1 for beams and design
objects and a factor of 0.6 for area elements as per 9.3.2 (2). The factor can be any number between 0 and 1.6, which is
the nominal value for structured sections with prestressed tension chord according to Equation (9.5bDE).
Laying measure cv,l
In Chapter 6.2.3(1) the inner lever arm z is limited to the maximum value derived from z = d cv,l 30 mm and z = d 2cv,l.
Note that cv,l is the laying measure of the longitudinal reinforcement in the concrete compressive zone. For cv,l the program
will suggest the smallest axis distance of the longitudinal reinforcement to the section edge d1.
Separate check for x and y direction
For two-axes stressed slabs, the lateral force check can be performed separately in the x and y stress directions as described
in Chapter 6.2.1(10). The user is responsible for properly aligning the reinforcement directions.

341

EN 1992-1-1 Design

Shear Section
For polygon sections, additional section dimensions are required for the lateral force and torsion design. These are explained
in the following.

Width
Section width for calculating the lateral force load-bearing capacity for Qz [m].
Height
Section height for calculating the lateral force load-bearing capacity for Qy [m].
Effective height
Effective static height for calculating the lateral force load-bearing capacity for Qz [m].
Effective width
Effective static width for calculating the lateral force load-bearing capacity for Qy [m].
Nominal width, nominal height
The nominal width or height of internally prestressed components as per EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 6.2.3(6), for including the
duct diameter in the calculation of the design value of the lateral load-bearing capacity VRd,max.
Factor kb, Factor kd
Factor for calculating the inner lever arm z from the effective width bn or effective height d in the lateral loadbearing
capacity check for Qy or Qz.
Core section Ak = z1 * z2
Dimensions of the core section for calculating the torsion reinforcement [m].
tef
The effective wall thickness of the torsion section according to Figure 6.11 [m].
Box section
Chapter 6.3.2, Section (5), is not applicable for box sections. Hence only the minimum reinforcement is necessary if the
condition expressed in Equation (6.31) is met.
DIN EN 1992-1-1: The calculation of the torsional resistance according to equation (6.30) proceeds on the assumption that
reinforcement exists at the inner and outer side of the walls. The concrete strut resistance is calculated with Equation (6.29)
instead of (NA.6.29.1).
OENORM B 1992-1-1: The concrete strut resistance is calculated with Equation (6.29) instead of (2AT).

342

Input

Stresses

perm. sigma.c
The concrete compressive stress sc must be limited to 0.60 fck under the characteristic action combination in the
construction stages and final states according to EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 7.2(2). If stress in the concrete under quasicontinuous combination does not exceed the limit 0.45fck, linear creep can be assumed according to 7.2(3). If this is not
the case, non-linear creep must be taken into account.
perm. sigma.c(t)
Permissible concrete stress sc(t) at time t when prestressing is introduced. If the compressive stress exceeds the value
0.45fck(t), the nonlinearity of the creep should be taken into account according to the standard. The program assumes that
prestressing is introduced in design situation 'G+P'.
fck(t)
Concrete compressive strength at time t when prestressing is introduced according to Chapter 5.10.2.2(5) of the standard
[MN/m].
Reinforcing steel stresses
According to Chapter 7.2(5) the tensile stresses in the reinforcement may not exceed the value 0.8fyk under the
characteristic action combination. For stresses resulting from indirect action, the limits can be assumed as 1.0fyk.
SS EN 1992-1-1, 19: The limit 1.0fyk can be generally assumed.
Prestressing steel stresses
For internally prestressed components, the prestressing steel stresses are checked against the limit 0.75fpk under the
characteristic action combination as per Chapter 7.2(5).
DIN EN 1992-1-1: The check is carried out for the quasi-continuous combination based on the limit 0.65fpk. In addition, the
stresses are checked against the minimum of 0.9fp0,1k and 0.8fpk under the characteristic combination.

343

EN 1992-1-1 Design

Crack Width
These specifications apply to the minimum crack reinforcement calculation and the crack width check.

Section edge
The limit for the calculated crack width wmax, the largest existing bar diameter max. ds and the crack spacing sr,max can be
defined differently for the section edges and the reinforcement directions.
Standard

The standard properties are used for the unspecified edges and directions.

Top, bottem, x, y

Definition for the top or bottom edge in the x or y reinforcement direction.

<Add>

Starts the dialog for adding a section edge.

Deletes the displayed section edge.

wmax
Limit for the calculated crack width according to EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 7.3.1, Table 7.1N [mm]. The program will suggest a
tabular value according to the national requirements based on the selected exposure class and the prestressing of the
component. This value can be modified after the input field is enabled.
SS EN 1992-1-1, 20: In addition, the service life class is taken into account to determine the suggested value according to
Table D-2. For prestressed components the tabular values for higher corrosion are taken, for reinforced concrete the values
for slight corrosion apply.
max. ds
Largest existing bar diameter of the reinforcing steel reinforcement for evaluating Equations (7.6N), (7.7N) and (7.11) in
Chapter 7.3 of the standard [mm].
sr,max
When calculating the crack width, the crack spacing sr,max is determined by default using Equation (7.11) of the standard.
Alternatively, the user can specify an upper limit to take into account any special conditions of Equation (7.14) or Sections
(4) and (5) of Chapter 7.3.4, for example.
Coefficient Xi1
The bond coefficient x1 according to Chapter 7.3.2, Equation (7.5), defines the extent to which prestressing steel as per
7.3.2(3) can be taken into account for the minimum crack reinforcement. It is also used in calculating the effective
reinforcement level according to Chapter 7.3.4, Equation (7.10), and thus enters into the direct calculation of the crack
width. Data input is blocked for area elements since prestressing steel is normally not taken into account here.
OENORM B 1992-1-1:
The bond coefficient x1 is used to take into account the different bonding behavior of concrete and prestressing steel for
the stress checks according to Chapter 7.2 of the standard.

344

Input
Determ. of the tensile zone
You can specify the tensile section where the minimum crack reinforcement as per Chapter 7.3.2 will be placed by selecting
either an action combination or a restraint (bending, centrical tension).
Thick component (DIN EN 1992-1-1)
Based on DIN EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 7.3.2 (5), the minimum reinforcement for the crack width limitation in the case of
thicker components under centrical restraint can be determined according to Equation (NA 7.5.1). Therewith a reduction
compared to the calculation with Equation (7.1) can be achieved.
Minimum reinforcement according to Eq. (17AT) (OENORM B 1992-1-1)
The minimum reinforcement for the crack width limitation under centrical restraint can be determined according to
Equation (17AT). Therewith a reduction compared to the calculation with Equation (7.1) can be achieved.
Coefficient k
Coefficient for taking into account nonlinear distributed concrete tensile stresses in the section in Chapter 7.3.2, Equation
(7.1). Depending on the flange width or the web height h the value k can be assumed between 0.65 (h 800 mm) and 1.0
(h 300 mm).
DIN EN 1992-1-1:
In case of restraint within the component, k can be multiplied by 0.8 whereby the minimum of the height and the width of
the section or section part shall be used for h. For tensile stresses due to restraint generated outside of the component, k
= 1.0 applies.
Factor for fctm
This factor is used to specify the effective concrete tensile strength fct,eff based on the average value of tensile strength fctm.
This is done separately for the minimum reinforcement calculation according to Equation (7.1) and the crack width
calculation according to Equation (7.9) of the standard. The tensile strength, which depends on the age of the concrete, is
defined in Equation (3.4) of Chapter 3.1.2.
DIN EN 1992-1-1:
If it is not certain wether crack formation will occur within the first 28 days, a tensile strength of 3.0 MN/m for normal
concrete and 2.5 MN/m for lightweight concrete should be assumed for Eq. (7.1). The program meets this requirement if
1.0 is entered for the reduction factor.
Action combination
The action combination (AC) for the crack width check normally results from the selected exposition class. Alternatively, a
deviating combination can be chosen.
Load duration; kt
This selection defines the factor kt in Equation (7.9) for crack width calculation.

345

EN 1992-1-1 Design

Fatigue

dSigma.Rsk,s, dSigma.Rsk,b
The permissible characteristic stress range DsRsk (N*) of the longitudinal reinforcement and shear reinforcement at N* load
cycles according to the S-N curves specified in EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 6.8.4 [MN/m]. The national decisive value found in
Table 6.3N, Row 1 (beam sections) resp. Row 2 (area sections), is suggested in the dialog. For the shear reinforcement, the
mandrel diameter is assumed to be four bar diameters.
dSigma.Rsk,p
The permissible characteristic stress range DsRsk (N*) of the prestressing steel at N* load cycles according to the S-N curves
specified in Chapter 6.8.4 [MN/m]. The value found in Table 6.4, Row 4, is suggested in the dialog.
DIN EN 1992-1-1, OENORM B 1992-1-1: The value for prestressing steel of class 1 is suggested.
Eta
Increase factor h for the reinforcing steel stress of the longitudinal reinforcement. This factor is used to take into account
the varying bonding behavior of concrete and prestressing steel as per Chapter 6.8.2(1), Eq. (6.64).
fcd,fat
Concrete compressive strength before onset of cyclic load according to Chapter 6.8.7(1), Eq. (6.76) [MN/m]. In general, the
following applies:

f cd, fat = k1 cc (t 0 ) f cd 1 - ck
250
with

cc (t 0 ) = e

s (1- 28 / t0 )

s
t0

Coefficient depending on the cement type.

= 0.85

Time of the initial stressing of the concrete.

DIN EN 1992-1-1, OENORM B 1992-1-1, SS EN 1992-1-1:

= 1.0

fcd,fat for s = 0.2, t0 = 28 and fcd according to Eq. (3.15) is suggested in the dialog.

346

(6.76)

Input
Simplified check
The simplified check according to Chapter 6.8.6(2) bases on the frequent action combination including the traffic loads at
serviceability limit state. The method for concrete is defined in Chapter 6.8.7(2), the permissible stress ranges for steel are
suggested according to Chapter 6.8.6(1) in the dialog. For shear reinforcement this value is reduced analogous to Table
6.3N.
Limit design variants
For area elements, the variants for determining the stress range can be limited to the corresponding sets of design internal
forces. For more information see chapter 'Fatigue Checks / Special Characteristic for Shell Structures'.

Scattering Coefficients

The coefficients used to take into account the scattering of prestressing force are defined in EN 1992-1-1 depending on the
prestressing type. In the dialog, values are suggested according to Chapter 5.10.9(1)P for subsequent bond. The defined
scattering coefficients are taken into account for the effects from internal prestressing in the following checks:
Decompression and concrete compressive stress check

Minimum reinforcement for crack width limitation, crack width check

Reinforcing steel and prestressing steel stress check

Regarding the effects from external prestressing, the scattering coefficients correspond to rsup = rinf = 1.

347

EN 1992-1-1 Design

Analysis Settings
The EN 1992-1-1 dialog page can be opened using the Settings function in the Analysis menu.

Check selection
When selecting checks, the following cases are to be distinguished:
The check is performed according to the settings in the section dialog (see section inputs).
The check is performed for all sections of the structure.
The check is performed for no sections of the structure.
Corresponding section settings are bundled as follows:
Reinforcement

Fatigue
Crack width

Bend and longitudinal force

Lateral force
Torsion
Robustness
Fatigue for concrete
Fatigue for reinforcing and prestressed steel
Minimum crack reinforcement
Calculation of the crack width

An overview of the checks can be accessed using the Design Settings function in the EN 1992-1-1 Design folder of the
database.
All checks for the extreme values of actions (simplifying)
When you make a selection, the minimum and maximum values are generated for each internal force component. They will
then be used together with their associated values to execute the design. Alternatively, all possible combinations of load
cases can be generated and designed as well. This option can, however, greatly slow down calculation if there is a large
number of load cases.
Actions...
Open the dialog for describing actions.
Partial safety factors...
Open the dialog for modifying partial safety factors.

348

Input
Listing
No: No log is generated by the checking program.

Standard: Log with tabular output of results.

Detailed: Additional output of the decisive combination internal forces at the check locations.

Standard > permissible: Standard log limited to check locations where the permissible limit values are exceeded.

Detailed > permissible: Detailed log limited to check locations where the permissible limit values are exceeded.

Single Design
The single design function allows you to analyze individual sections independently of the global system using predefined
internal forces. Enter the information listed below in the Single Design table in the EN 1992-1-1 Design folder of the
database or the folders of the national variants.
Section
Number of the section to be designed. Both polygon and composite sections can be designed.
Combination
Design situation according to EN 1992-1-1, Table 2.1.
0: Permanent and temporary design situation

1: Accidental design situation

Nsd, Mysd, Mzsd

calculated in the tensile section to the greatest degree possible.

Symmetrical: Design for symmetrical reinforcement. As opposed to the standard mode, all of the reinforcement layers

will be increased if a reinforcement increase is necessary. The predefined relationships between the reinforcement layers
will not be affected.
Compression member: For compression members a symmetrical design is carried out taking into account the minimum

reinforcement according to Chapter 9.5.2(2).

Strains: Determine strain state for existing reinforcing steel layers.

Strains SLS: Determine strain state in the serviceability limit state for existing reinforcing steel layers. A linear strain
stress curve of the concrete is used in the compression zone to determine the strain state.
Strains SLS2: Determine strain state in the serviceability limit state for existing reinforcing steel layers. A nonlinear strain
stress curve of the concrete is used as shown in Figure 3.2. Note that a horizontal progression is assumed for strains
exceeding ec1.
Load bearing capacity: Calculation of the load bearing capacity in the ultimate limit state.

Inactive: Design disabled.

The calculation is carried out from the opened input table via the Single Design or Print Preview menu item.
OENORM B 1992-1-1:
In the modes SLS and SLS2 the stress increase of the prestressing steel layers is determined according to Eq. (14AT) with the
bond coefficient x1 specified for the section to be checked.

349

EN 1992-1-1 Design

Punching Shear Check

When you select a check node, the key data for the checks is displayed in a dialog field. This dialog is divided into three
pages.
1a. Input data, column
The column forms rectangle and round with the locations internal, edge parallel to x, edge parallel to y and corner are
available. When you enter a new column, the program will suggest the dimensions of existing columns. The edge distances
ax and ay are used to calculate the perimeters ui of the check sections.
1b. Input data, slab
This section shows the material properties, the existing reinforcement as well as additional coefficients for calculating
punching shear resistances.
DIN EN 1992-1-1, OENORM B 1992-1-1:
Alternatively the check locations Wall end and Wall corner can be chosen.
1c. Input data, action
The action VEd can either be added as a support force from a previous design according to EN 1992-1-1 or defined directly.
All medium soil pressures s0 lower the design value of the lateral force within the area of the decisive perimeter. The
medium longitudinal forces NEd are used to calculate the normal concrete stress.
2. Aperture
This dialog page is used to define the geometry and location of an opening.
3. Results
This dialog page shows the calculated punching shear resistances, the necessary punching shear reinforcement (if
applicable) and the minimum bending reinforcement (if nationally relevant). You can call up an improved bending
reinforcement by clicking the Proposal button.
Example

Punching shear check node 4312

The check is performed according to EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2010.
1. Measurements, situation and material
Rectangular column with width bx = 0.45 m and height by = 0.45 m
Situation: Inside; b = 1.15

350

0.45

Input

0.45

Critical perimeter u1 = 4.19 m (Distance = 0.38 m); A1 = 1.34 m

Slab height h = 0.240 m
Effective height of the slab dx = 0.190 m; dy = 0.190 m; d = (dx + dy) / 2 = 0.190 m
Available longitudinal reinforcement asx = 36.00 cm/m; asy = 36.00 cm/m
Truss angle a = 90.0
Concrete: C35/45-EN

fck = 35.00 MN/m

acc = 1.00

gc = 1.50

fcd = acc fck / gc = 23.33 MN/m

Reinforce.: BSt 500

fck = 500.00 MN/m

gs = 1.15

fyd = fyk / gs = 434.78 MN/m

2. Action from fundamental combination
VEd = 809.00 kN
NEd = 0.00 kN/m
vEd = b VEd / (ui d)

s0 = 0.00 kN/m

(6.38)

ui = u1

with

vEd = 1.17 MN/m

3. Punching resistance without punching reinforcement

v Rd,c = CRd,c k (100 rl fck )1 3 + k 1 s cp ( v min + k 1 s cp )

with

(6.47)

CRd,c = 0.12

k = 2.00

rl = 0.0189

fck = 35.00 MN/m

k1 = 0.1

scp = -NEd / h = 0.00 MN/m

vmin = 0.59 MN/m

vRd,c = 0.97 MN/m
vEd / vRd,c = 1.20 > 1 Punching reinforcement is required!
vEd,0 = b VEd / (u0 d) = 2.72 < vRd,max = 4.82 MN/m (6.53)
u0 = 1.80
with
4. Punching reinforcement (normal)

A sw =

( v Ed - 0,75 v Rd,c )
1,5 (d / sr ) f ywd,ef (1/(u1 d))

A sw ,i,min = 0,08 fck / f yk

sr ucont,i
1,5

with vEd = 1.17 MN/m

sr = 0.14 m

vRd,c = 0.97 MN/m

fck = 35.00 MN/m

fyk = 500.00 MN/m

(6.52)

(9.11)

fywd,ef = 297.50 MN/m

Row 1: Distance = 0.10 m; ucont,1 = 2.40 m; Asw,1 = 5.87 cm > Asw,1,min = 2.15 cm
Row 2: Distance = 0.24 m; ucont,2 = 3.29 m; Asw,2 = 5.87 cm > Asw,2,min = 2.95 cm
External perimeter according to Equ. (6.54) and Fig. 6.22 A
uout = b VEd / (vRd,c d) = 5.04 m
Distance = 0.52 m
The outermost reinf. row is placed at a spacing of 0.28 m 1.5 d = 0.29 m. The check is OK!

351

EN 1992-1-1 Design

External Prestressing, Mixed Construction

External prestressing can be taken into account by entering the external forces directly in the program. For mixed
construction, the additional tendons in a bond must be entered as described above.

Scattering of Prestressing
For checks in the ultimate limit state, the following applies for the design value of the prestressing force according to
EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 5.10.8(1):

Pd,t(x) = gP Pm,t(x)
with

Pm,t(x) Mean value of prestressing force at time t and location x including prestressing losses from friction, slippage, creep,
shrinkage and relaxation.

Partial safety factor of prestressing force, gP = 1 as specified in Chapter 2.4.2.2(1).

In the serviceability limit state, two characteristic values for the prestressing force are defined in Chapter 5.10.9(1):

Pk,sup

= rsup Pm,t(x)

Upper characteristic value according to Equation (5.47).

Pk,inf

= rinf Pm,t(x)

Lower characteristic value according to Equation (5.48).

The scattering coefficients for internal prestressing are defined separately for construction stages and final states. They are
used in the following checks:
Decompression and concrete compressive stress check.

Minimum reinforcement for crack width limitation, crack width check.

Reinforcing steel and prestressing steel stress check.

Regarding the effects from external prestressing, the scattering coefficients correspond to rsup = rinf = 1.
For internal prestressing, the recommended country-specific values are:
-

For tendons with immediate bond or without bond:

rsup = 1.05 and rinf = 0.95.

For tendons with subsequent bond:

rsup = 1.10 and rinf = 0.90.

OENORM B 1992-1-1:
-

For tendons with immediate bond or without bond:

rsup = rinf = 1.00.

For tendons with subsequent bond:

rsup = 1.05 and rinf = 0.95.

352

Prestressed Structures

Creep and Shrinkage

Similar to prestressing, creep and shrinkage are taken into account by specifying a corresponding load case (Creep and
shrinkage load type) in the FEM calculation. Besides the creep-generating continuous load case, you also need to specify
whether the internal forces relocation between concrete and prestressing steel is to be taken into account. This option is
only useful in the case of tendons with bond.
The decisive creep and shrinkage coefficients for calculating the Creep and shrinkage load case are entered in the section
dialog. Alternatively, you can also use this dialog to calculate the coefficients according to chapter 3.1.4 with Annex B.

The program determines concrete creep and shrinkage based on a time-dependent stress-strain law developed by Trost.

s b (t ) =

Eb
e b (t ) - j e b,0 - e b,S
1+r j

Explanation of the individual terms:

sb(t)

Concrete stress from creep and shrinkage at time t.

E-modulus of the concrete.

Relaxation coefficient according to Trost for time t (normally r = 0.80).

Creep coefficient for time t.

eb(t)

Concrete strain from creep and shrinkage at time t.

eb,0

Concrete strain from creep-generating continuous load.

eb,s

Concrete strain from shrinkage.

Dsp,csr = Dspr + Ep Decpt

with

Dspr

Prestressing loss from relaxation of the prestressing steel.

Decpt

Concrete strain change from creep and shrinkage.

E-modulus of the prestressing steel.

353

EN 1992-1-1 Design

Relaxation of Prestressing Steel

According to EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 5.10.6, the stress change Dspr in the tendons at position x and time t due to relaxation
must be taken into account in addition to the stress loss from concrete creep and shrinkage. The relaxation of the steel
depends on the deformation of the concrete caused by creep and shrinkage. According to 5.10.6(1) (b), this interaction can
be taken into account in a general and approximate manner by specifying a reduction coefficient of 0.8.
The stress change Dspr can be determined for the initial stress in the tendons as a result of prestressing and quasicontinuous actions according to 5.10.6(2). More details are provided in Chapter 3.3.2 of the standard.
The stress losses are defined in the CSR actions of the EN 1992-1-1 actions dialog.
DIN EN 1992-1-1: The stress change Dspr can be determined using the specifications of the prestressing steel certification
for the ratio of initial stress to characteristic tensile strength (sp0/fpk). sp0 = spg0 may be used as the initial stress, with spg0
referring to the initial prestressing steel stress from prestressing and the permanent action.

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States

The

following checks are available:

Bending with or without normal force or normal force only (EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 6.1).
Minimum reinforcement against failure without warning (Chapter 5.10.1(5)P and 9.2.1.1).
Lateral force (Chapter 6.2).
Torsion and combined stressing (Chapter 6.3).
Punching shear (Chapter 6.4).
Check against fatigue (Chapter 6.8).

Design Combinations
In accordance with EN 1990 (Eurocode 0), Chapter 6.4.3, the following combinations are taken into account in the ultimate
limit states:

For the combination of the permanent and temporary design situation either Equation (6.10) or the most unfavorable
equation from (6.10a) and (6.10b) is permitted.

g G, j Gk, j "+" g P P "+" g Q,1 Qk,1 "+" g Q,i y 0,i Qk,i

j 1

i >1

g G, j Gk, j "+" g P P "+" g Q,1 y 0,1 Qk,1 "+" g Q,i y 0,i Qk,i
j 1

i >1

x j g G, j Gk, j "+" g P P "+" g Q,1 Qk,1 "+" g Q,i y 0,i Qk,i

j 1

i >1

(6.10)
(6.10a)
(6.10b)

For the coefficient x the value of x = 0.85 results from Table A.1.2(B).
DIN EN 1990, OENORM B 1990: Equation (6.10) is used for the combination.
SS EN 1990: The Equations (6.10a) and (6.10b) are used. The coefficient x is set to the value of x = 0.89.

Combination for accidental design situations

Gk, j "+" P "+" Ad "+" (y1,1 or y 2,1) Qk,1 "+" y 2,i Qk,i
j 1

i >1

(6.11b)

y1,1 Qk,1 is used by the program for this combination.

OENORM B 1990-1: y2,1 Qk,1 is decisive.

Combination for design situations caused by earthquakes

Gk, j "+" P "+" AEd "+" y 2,i Qk,i

j 1

354

i 1

(6.12b)

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States

For the check against fatigue two alternative action combinations can be used:

Frequent combination for simplified checks according to EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 6.8.6 (2) in conjunction with EN 1990,
Chapter 6.5.3.

Gk, j "+" P "+" y1,1 Qk,1 "+" y 2,i Qk,i

j 1

i >1

(6.15b)

Fatigue combination for checks with damage equivalent stress ranges.

G "+" P "+" y Q "+" y Q "+" Q

k,
j
1,1
k,1
2,i
k,i
fat

i >1
j 1

(6.69)

In this equation Qk,1 and Qk,i are non-cyclic, non-permanent actions whereas Qfat defines the relevant fatigue load.
For each combination you can define different design situations for the construction stages and final states. When
conducting the check, the extreme value deriving from all combinations and situations is decisive.

Stress-Strain Curves
The following characteristics are used for section design:

Concrete: Parabola-rectangle diagram according to EN 1992-1-1, Figure 3.3. Note that the design value for concrete
compressive strength fcd in Equation (3.15) is defined as fcd = acc fck / gc with acc = 1 for normal concrete and acc =
0.85 for lightweight concrete.
DIN EN 1992-1-1: acc = 0.85 for normal concrete and acc = 0.75 for lightweight concrete.
SS EN 1992-1-1: acc = 1 for normal and lightweight concrete.

Reinforcing steel: Stress-strain curve according to EN 1992-1-1, Figure 3.8, with rising upper branch, where the
maximum stress is assumed to be k fyk / gs with k = 1.05 as per Table C.1, class A.

Prestressing steel: Stress-strain curve according to EN 1992-1-1, Figure 3.10, with horizontal upper branch according to
Chapter 3.3.6(7) of the standard.

The check against fatigue uses the stress-strain curve according to EN 1992-1-1, Fig. 3.2, to determine the compressive
concrete stresses.

Design for Bending With or Without Normal Force or Normal Force Only
The design for longitudinal force and bending moment is performed according to EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 6.1. With respect
to slab, plain stress and shell elements with perpendicular or inclined reinforcement, the design internal forces are calculated
in the same way as for the design according to DIN 1045-1 is. The reinforcement required for each internal force
combination at the reinforced concrete section is determined iteratively based on the formulation of equilibrium conditions
as well as the limit strain curve depicted in the illustration below. The final result is derived from the extreme value of all
calculated reinforcements.

Strain areas for the design with eud = 0.9 euk and euk = 0.025 as per Table C.1.
DIN EN 1992-1-1: eud = 0.025.

355

EN 1992-1-1 Design
You can control the result of the design by specifying the reinforcement geometry and choosing one of three design
modes. For sections subject to a compressive normal force, the minimum eccentricity defined in Chapter 6.1(4) is taken into
account. Concrete compression according to Chapter 6.1(5) cannot be checked.
Standard Mode
This is the standard design mode for bending with longitudinal force throughout the entire load area. Reinforcement will be
calculated in the tensile section to the greatest degree possible. The procedure in strain areas 4 and 5 is the same as with
symmetrical design.
DIN EN 1992-1-1
The referenced compressive zone height xd / d is limited according to Chapter 5.4 (NA.5) and NA.11.5.2(1) as follows:

xd / d

0.45 for concrete strength classes up to C50/60.

0.35 for concrete strength class C55/67 or higher and for lightweight concrete.

Symmetrical Mode
In contrast to the standard design, the reinforcement will be applied at all predefined locations in all strain areas, if
necessary. The specified relationships between the reinforcement layers will not be affected.
Compression member Mode
The design is performed symmetrically. In addition, the minimum reinforcement required by EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 9.5.2(2),
will be calculated:

As,min = 0.10 | NEd | / fyd or 0.002 Ac, depending on which value is greater

(9.12N)

with

NEd
fyd

Design value of the longitudinal force to be absorbed.

Design value for the reinforcing steel strength at the yield strength.

DIN EN 1992-1-1:

As,min = 0.15 NEd / fyd

(9.12DE)

OENORM B 1992-1-1:

As,min = 0.13 NEd / fyd 0.0026 Ac

(30AT)

SS EN 1992-1-1, 28:

As,min = 0.002 Ac
Inclusion of tendons with bond
When designing beams and design objects, the internal forces of the concrete section is reduced by the statically
determined portions which result from prestressing minus the losses from creep, shrinkage and prestressing steel relaxation
(CSR). Situations prior to the grouting of the tendons are excluded. So only the restraint portions from 'P+CSR' and the
external loads are contained in the remaining internal forces for the composite section. If necessary, the reinforcing steel
positioned by the user will be increased until the composite internal forces can be absorbed.
The position of the tendon groups in the section, the prestressing losses from CSR, the statically determined portions and
the internal forces of the concrete section and the composite section are written to the detailed log.
As a separation into statically determined and undetermined shares of the internal forces from prestressing is not possible
for shell structures, the prestressing is taken into account fully on the action side when designing the longitudinal
reinforcement. As a result, on the resistance side only mild steel and concrete are considered whereas the strain reserves of
the tendons with bond are not used.

356

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States

Minimum Reinforcement against Failure Without Warning

With respect to prestressed concrete structures, a component failure without warning may not be caused by a tendon
failure according to EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 5.10.1(5)P. The failure can be prevented by adding the minimum reinforcement
as described in Chapter 9.2.1 or any other measure listed in Section (6).
The minimum reinforcement is to be dimensioned according to Chapter 9.2.1 with Equation (9.1N) (also applies to
reinforced concrete components). To account for this in the program, specify a base reinforcement in the reinforcing steel
description.
Alternatively, you can select the minimum reinforcement in the section dialog based on the methods specified for
prestressed concrete bridges in EN 1992-2:2005, Chapter 6.1(109) (robustness reinforcement). This reinforcement is
determined based on Equation (6.101a):

As,min= Mrep / (zs fyk)

(6.101a)

with

Mrep

Crack moment without allowance for prestressing force and under the assumption that the edge tensile stress
corresponds to fctm. According to Chapter 9.2.1.1(4), the 1.15-fold crack moment is used for components with
unbonded tendons or with external prestressing.

Lever arm of the internal forces in the ultimate limit state.

According to EN 1992-2, Chapter 6.1(110), the minimum reinforcement should be added in areas where tensile stresses in
the concrete occur under the characteristic action combination. This process should take into account the statically
undetermined prestressing effect and ignore the statically determined effect.
The program determines all stresses at the gross section. The statically determined prestressing effect can only be subtracted
for beams and design objects. For area elements the prestress is alternatively reduced by a user-defined reduction factor.
The lever arm zs of the internal forces is assumed as 0.9 d for the sake of simplicity. The calculated reinforcement is evenly
distributed to the reinforcement layers in the tensile zone. In the design mode symmetrical reinforcement is also applied to
the remaining layers. This will not affect the predefined relationships between the individual reinforcement layers. For
sections with mode compression member the robustness reinforcement is not checked because minimum reinforcement is
already determined during the design for bending with longitudinal force.
DIN EN 1992-1-1: To ensure a ductile component behavior, the above-mentioned robustness reinforcement must be added
instead of the minimum reinforcement from Equation (9.1N) for components with or without prestressing. The
reinforcement must be evenly distributed in the tensile zone. As it is not specified in more detail, this reinforcement is
determined with the characteristic combination as described above. The option to take tendons into account is not used by
the program.
SS EN 1992-1-1, 13: Method D (proofs concerning the reliability of the tendons), in combination with at least one of the
other methods, should be used. The second condition can be covered by adding the minimum reinforcement as described
in Chapter 9.2.1 (method A) or by use of the above-mentioned robustness reinforcement.

Surface Reinforcement
To prevent concrete spalling, a surface reinforcement may be necessary according to EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 9.2.4. For more
information, refer to Annex J. The reinforcement determined in this manner can be incorporated into the program by
specifying a base reinforcement in the reinforcing steel description.
OENORM B 1992-1-1: The guidelines set forth in Annex J are not normative.

357

EN 1992-1-1 Design

Design for Lateral Force

Lateral force design involves determining the lateral force reinforcement and includes a concrete strut check according to
EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 6.2. The following special conditions apply:
The angle of the lateral force reinforcement is assumed to be 90.

The value for cot Q can be selected by the user within the permissible national limits of Equation (6.7N).
DIN EN 1992-1-1: In the calculation, the specified value for cot Q is limited to the range permitted in accordance with
Equation (6.7aDE) (method with load-dependent strut angle), unless the check with a constant value is selected in the
section dialog. The actual effective angle of the concrete struts is logged for each check location.
The minimum reinforcement according to Chapter 9.2.2(5) of the standard is included in the calculated stirrup
reinforcement. For areas, the minimum reinforcement as per Chapter 6.2.1(4) will only be determined if the lateral
force reinforcement is necessary for computation. For beams no minimum reinforcement is calculated for the direction
with M = Q = 0.
Slab and shell elements are designed for lateral force qr = (qx + qy). Depending on which has a negative effect,
either the principal compressive force or principal tensile force is used for the associated longitudinal force.
DIN EN 1992-1-1: If selected, the check will be carried out separately for the reinforcement directions x and y in
accordance with Chapter 6.2.1(10). If lateral force reinforcement is necessary, it must be added from both directions.
There is no reduction of the action from loads near supports as specified in Chapter 6.2.1(8) of the standard.
For beams and design objects, the decisive values of the equivalent rectangle are determined by the user independently
of the normal section geometry. The coefficients for calculating the inner lever arm z based on the effective width and
effective height must also be specified. For area elements, the calculation is generally performed with the lever arm
z = 0.9 d.
DIN EN 1992-1-1: According to 6.2.3(1), the inner lever arm is limited to the maximum value derived from
z = d - cv,l - 30 mm and z = d 2cv,l. Note that cv,l refers to the extent to which longitudinal reinforcement is laid in
the concrete compressive zone.
For beam sections with internal prestressing, the design value of lateral load-bearing capacity VRd,max according to
Chapter 6.2.3(6) is determined using the nominal value bw,nom of the section width.

The necessity of a lateral force reinforcement is analyzed according to Chapter 6.2.2(1) of the standard. The special
conditions listed in Sections (2) through (7) are not used in this case.

The used formulas from EN 1992-1-1 that are used are listed below.
Components without computationally necessary lateral force reinforcement

VRd,c = [CRd,c k (100 rl fck)1/3 + k1 scp] bw d

(6.2a)

with at least

VRd,c = ( vmin + k1 scp ) bw d

(6.2b)

For lightweight concrete applies:

VlRd,c = [ClRd,c h1 k (100 rl flck)1/3 + k1 scp] bw d

( h1 vl,min + k1 scp) bw d

(11.6.2)

where

fck , flck

is the characteristic concrete strength [N/mm].

= 1 + (200 / d ) 2.0 with d specified in mm.

= Asl / (bw d ) 0.02.

Asl

is the area of the tensile reinforcement that extends at least ( lbd + d ) beyond the analyzed section (see Figure
6.3).

is the smallest section width in the tensile zone of the section [mm].

scp

= NEd / Ac < 0.2 fcd [N/mm].

NEd

is the normal force in the section due to loading or prestressing [N]

(NEd > 0 for compression). The influence of the forced deformations on NEd can be ignored.

is the entire area of the concrete section [mm].

VRd,c , VlRd,c is the design value of the lateral force resistance [N].
h1

358

is the reduction coefficient for lightweight concrete according to Eq. (11.1).

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States

The recommended values are:

CRd,c

= 0.18 / gc for normal concrete.

ClRd,c

= 0.15 / gc for lightweight concrete.

= 0.15

vmin

= 0.035 k3/2 fck1/2 for normal concrete.

vl,min

= 0.028 k3/2 flck1/2 for lightweight concrete according to 11.6.1(1).

(6.3N)

DIN EN 1992-1-1:

CRd,c

= ClRd,c = 0.15 / gc

= 0.12

vmin

= (k1 / gc) k3/2 fck1/2

vl,min

= (k1 / gc) k3/2 flck1/2

with

=0.0525 for d < 600 mm

=0.0375 for d > 800 mm
For 600 mm < d 800 mm can be interpolated.
k1

Components with computationally necessary lateral force reinforcement

The angle q between the concrete struts and the component axis perpendicular to the lateral force must be limited:

1 cot q 2.5

(6.7N)

DIN EN 1992-1-1:

1.0 cot q (1.2 + 1.4 scp / fcd) / (1 - VRd,cc / VEd) 3.0

(6.7aDE)

with

VRd,cc = c 0.48 fck1/3 (1 - 1.2 scp / fcd) bw z

(6.7bDE)

The individual parts of which are

= 0.5

scp

The design value of the concrete longitudinal stress at the level of the centroid of the
section with scp = NEd / Ac in N/mm.

NEd

The design value of the longitudinal force in the section caused by external actions
(NEd > 0 as longitudinal compressive force).

For lightweight concrete the strut angle is to be limited to cot q = 2 in accordance with Eq. (6.7aDE). The input value VRd,cc
from Eq. (6.7bDE) is to be multiplied by h1 according to Eq. (11.1).
OENORM B 1992-1-1:

0.6 tan q 1.0

(3AT)

If the section is in compression, then q in the range

0.4 tan q 1.0

(4AT)

may be selected.
SS EN 1992-1-1, 15:
Differing from Equation (6.7N), for prestressed components the condition 1.0 cot Q 3.0 applies.
For components with lateral force reinforcement perpendicular to the complement axis, the lateral force resistance VRd is
the smaller value from

VRd,s = (Asw / s) z fywd cot q

(6.8)

and

359

EN 1992-1-1 Design

VRd,max = acw bw z n1 fcd / (cot q + tan q)

(6.9)

where

Asw

is the section area of the lateral force reinforcement.

s
fywd

is the distance of the stirrups to each other.

is a reduction coefficient for the concrete strength when shear cracks occur.

acw

is a coefficient for taking into account the stress state in the compression chord.

is the design value for the yield strength of the lateral force reinforcement.

The recommended values are:

=n
with

acw

(6.6N)

n = 0.6 (1 - fck / 250)

for normal concrete ( fck in N/mm)

n = 0.5 h1 (1 - flck / 250)

for lightweight concrete ( flck in N/mm)

for non-prestressed components

= (1 + scp / fcd)

for 0 < scp 0.25 fcd

(6.11aN)

= 1.25

for 0.25 fcd < scp 0.5 fcd

(6.11bN)

= 2.5 (1 - scp / fcd)

for 0.5 fcd < scp 1.0 fcd

(6.11cN)

(11.6.6N)

where

scp

is the average compressive stress in the concrete (indicated as a positive value) as a result of the design value for
the normal force.

DIN EN 1992-1-1:

= h1 0.75 min (1.0; 1.1 - fck / 500)

= 1.0 for normal concrete and as per Eq. (11.1) for lightweight concrete.

acw

= 1.0

The maximum effective section area of the lateral force reinforcement Asw,max for cot q = 1 is derived from:
(Asw,max fywd) / (bw s) acw n fcd

(6.12)

The additional tensile force in the longitudinal reinforcement due to lateral force according to Eq. (6.18) is

DFtd = 0.5VEd(cot Q - cot a ).

(6.18)

Lateral force reinforcement

The lateral force reinforcement level is derived from Equation (9.4):

rw = Asw / (s bw sin a)

(9.4)

where

is the reinforcement level of the lateral force reinforcement. In general, this level may not be smaller than rw,min.

Asw

is the section area of the lateral force reinforcement per length s.

s
bw

is the distance of the lateral force reinforcement as measured along the component axis.

is the angle between the lateral force reinforcement and the component axis.

is the web width of the component.

The recommended value for the minimum reinforcement is:

rw,min = 0.08 fck / fyk

(9.5N)

DIN EN 1992-1-1:

rw,min = 0.16 fctm / fyk

With respect to slabs, the value can vary between zero and the above value as described in Chapter 9.3.2(2).
360

(9.5aDE)

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States

For structured sections with prestressed tension chord, the following applies:

rw,min = 0.256 fctm / fyk

(9.5bDE)

OENORM B 1992-1-1:

rw,min = 0.15 fctm / fyd

(24AT)

Design for Torsion and Combined Stressing

The design for torsion is carried out according to EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 6.3. It includes the calculation of the diagonal
tensile reinforcement and the longitudinal reinforcement based on Equation (6.28) and the concrete strut check under
lateral force based on Formula (6.29) of the standard.
The equivalent section on which this design is based is defined by the user independently of the normal section geometry.
Strut angle
According to 6.3.2(2), the rules set forth in Chapter 6.2.3(2) for lateral force also apply for the strut angle.
DIN EN 1992-1-1:
For combined stress from torsion and proportional lateral force, VEd in Equation (6.7aDE) must include the shear force of
the wall VEd,T+V based on Equation (NA.6.27.1) and bw in Equation (6.7bDE) must include the effective thickness of wall tef.
The check for both lateral force and torsion must be carried out using the selected angle Q. The reinforcements determined
in this manner are to be added together.

VEd,T+V = VEd,T + VEd tef / bw

(NA.6.27.1)

Alternatively a strut angle of 45 for torsion according to Chapter 6.3.2(2) or a constant value cot Q for lateral force and
torsion (cf. interpretation No. 24 of NABau for DIN 1045-1) can be chosen in the section dialog.
Torsion reinforcement
The necessary reinforcement is to be determined according to Chapter 6.3.2(3):

SAsl fyd / uk = TEd / 2Ak cot Q

(6.28)

Asw fyd / s = TEd / 2Ak tan Q

where

Asl

is the section area of the torsion longitudinal reinforcement.

Asw

is the section area of the torsion reinforcement perpendicular to the component axis.

is the perimeter of area Ak.

s
Ak

is the distance of the torsion reinforcement as measured along the component axis.
is the area enclosed by the center lines of the walls.

For approximately rectangular full sections, only the minimum reinforcement defined in Section (5) is necessary if the
condition expressed by Equation (6.31) is met:

TEd / TRd,c + VEd / VRd,c 1.0

(6.31)

where

TRd,c

is the torsion crack moment which, according to Zilch (2006, p. 290), is defined as TRd,c = fctd WT.

VRd,c

is the lateral force resistance according to Equation (6.2).

DIN EN 1992-1-1:
The condition (6.31) is supplemented with the following equations:

V b
TEd Ed w
4.5

(NA.6.31.1)

4.5 TEd
VEd 1 +
VRd,c
VEd bw

(NA.6.31.2)

361

EN 1992-1-1 Design

Strut load-bearing capacity

To avoid exceeding the strut load-bearing capacity of a component subject to torsion and lateral force, the following
condition must be met:

TEd / TRd,max + VEd / VRd,max 1.0

(6.29)

where

TEd

is the design value of the torsion moment.

VEd

is the design value of the lateral force.

TRd,max

is the design value of the absorbable torsion moment based on

TRd,max = 2 n acw fcd Ak tef,i sin Q cos Q

(6.30)

with acw according to Equation (6.9) and n according to Eq. (6.6N) for normal concrete and according to
Eq. (11.6.6N) for lightweight concrete.
DIN EN 1992-1-1:
For compact sections, the interaction Equation (NA.6.29.1) is used:
(TEd / TRd,max) + (VEd / VRd,max) 1.0

(NA.6.29.1)

In Equation (6.30) n = h1 0.75 is used for box sections and n = h1 0.525 min (1.0; 1.1 - fck / 500) in all other cases with

h1 = 1 for normal concrete and as per Eq. (11.1) for lightweight concrete.
OENORM B 1992-1-1:
For full sections the following interaction equation can be used:
(TEd / TRd,max) + (VEd / VRd,max) 1.0

(9AT)

Punching Shear
The load-bearing safety check against punching shear is carried out according to EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 6.4. This check is
used to determine the necessary punching reinforcement. The following special conditions apply:
The orthogonal effect directions labeled as y and z in the standard are indicated below as well as in the dialog and the

listing as x and y in order to comply with the area reinforcement directions commonly used in the program.
The average effectve static height d results from the input parameters dx and dy with d = (dx+dy) / 2. These parameters

are to be selected as shown in Figure 6.12, 6.16 or 6.17.

No check is carried out for pad footings.
The action can be entered directly or taken from the analyzed design situation at the ultimate limit state. In this case,
VEd is set to the maximum support force Rz for each corresponding action combination.

The check is considered fulfilled if:

1. For slabs w i t h o u t punching reinforcement

vEd vRd,max ,
vEd vRd,c .
2. For slabs w i t h punching reinforcement

vEd vRd,max ,
vEd vRd,cs .
3. The minimum longitudinal reinforcement is maintained (DIN EN 1992-1-1, OENORM B 1992-1-1 only)
with

vEd =

VEd
ui d

where

vEd

362

is the maximum acting lateral force per area unit.

(6.38)

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States

VEd

is the design value of the entire lateral force to be absorbed. For foundation slabs the lateral force may be
reduced due to the favourable action of the soil pressure. For the reduction the program assumes the area
within u1 unless the national annex contains a different rule.

is the load increase factor for taking into account eccentric load introduction according to Equation (6.39). The
value is specified by the user.

is the average effective height of the slab, which can be assumed as (dx + dy) / 2, with:

dx, dy

is the effective static height of the slab in the x or y direction in the section area of the analyzed perimeter.

is the circumference of the analyzed perimeter.

vRd,c

is the design value of the punching resistance per area unit for a slab without punching reinforcement.

vRd,cs

is the design value of the punching resistance per area unit for a slab with punching reinforcement.

vRd,max

is the design value of the maximum punching resistance per area unit.

The load discharge areas and check sections as per Chapter 6.4.2, Section (1) to (7), are taken into consideration. The userspecified opening dimensions are used to calculate the check sections.
Punching resistance without punching reinforcement
The punching resistance of a slab without punching reinforcement is calculated as

vRd,c = CRd,c k (100 rl fck)1/3 + k1scp ( vmin + k1 scp )

For lightweight concrete applies
vlRd,c = ClRd,c k h1 (100 rl flck)1/3 + k2scp ( h1 vl,min + k2 scp )

(6.47)

(11.6.47)

where

fck

is the characteristic concrete strength [N/mm]

= 1 + (200 / d) 2.0; d [mm]

= (rlx rly) 0.02

rlx, rly

is the reinforcement level based on the fixed tensile reinforcement in the x or y direction. The values rlx and rly
are normally calculated as average values given a slab width based on the column measurements plus 3d for
each side.

scp

= (scx + scy) / 2

where

scx, scy

are the normal stresses in the concrete in the x and y directions in the critical section (MN/m, positive for
pressure):

scx = NEd,x / Acx and scy = NEd,y / Acy.

NEd,x, NEd,y are the normal forces acting on internal columns in the entire section area of the analyzed perimeter and the
normal forces acting on the edge and corner columns in the area of the analyzed perimeter. These forces result
from loads or prestressing.

is the section area of the concrete according to the definition of NEd.

The recommended country-specific values are:

CRd,c

= 0.18 / gc for normal concrete

ClRd,c

= 0.15 / gc for lightweight concrete

= 0.1

= 0.08

vmin

derived from Equation (6.3N) for normal concrete:

vmin = 0.035k3/2fck1/2
vl,min

(6.3N)

derived from Chapter 11.6.1(1) for lightweight concrete:

vl,min = 0.028k3/2flck1/2

363

EN 1992-1-1 Design
For column foundations and foundation slabs the following applies according to Chapter 6.4.4(2):

vRd,c = CRd,c k (100 rl fck)1/3 2 d/a ( vmin 2 d/a )

vlRd,c = ClRd,c k h1 (100 rl flck)1/3 2 d/a ( h1 vl,min 2 d/a )
a

(6.50)
(11.6.50)

Distance from the column edge to the decisive perimeter. Within the perimeter the soil pressures deducting the
foundation dead load are allowed for relieving.

DIN EN 1992-1-1 and Book 600 of the DAfStb:

vmin

as in Section 6.2.2(1)

For internal columns of flat slabs with u0 /d < 4 the following applies:

CRd,c

= ClRd,c = 0.18 / gc ( 0.1u0 /d + 0.6 ) 0.15/gc

For column foundations and foundation slabs the following applies:

a
The program does not iterate over the distance a according to NCI of 6.4.4(2). If a constant perimeter with a =
1.0 d is assumed, only 50% of the soil pressures are allowed for relieving. This is taken into account during
determination of the resistance.
CRd,c
= ClRd,c = 0.15 / gc
In all other cases the recommended value for CRd,c applies.
The bending reinforcement level rl must also be limited to rl 0.5 fcd / fyd.
OENORM B 1992-1-1:
The allowable reinforcement level for determining vRd,c must not exceed

rl = 0.4 fcd / fyd 0.02.

For foundation slabs the program does not iterate over the distance a according to the supplement to 6.4.4(2). For
simplification, a constant perimeter with a = 1.0 d can be assumed.
Punching resistances with punching reinforcement
1) The punching resistances with punching reinforcement are calculated as
for normal concrete
v = V / ( u d ) v
Ed

Rd,max

vEd = VEd / ( u0d ) vlRd,max

for lightweight concrete

(6.53)
(11.6.53)

where

c1 , c2

For an internal column

u0 = Circumference of the column

For an edge column

u0 = c2 + 3d c2 + 2c1

For a corner column

u0 = 3d c1 + c2

are the column dimensions as shown in Figure 6.20. For circular columns, the decisive values of u0 are
determined proportionally. For walls u0 is determined corresponding to edge and corner columns.
OENORM B 1992-1-1: The possibility of simplification in case of round edge and corner columns is not used.

vEd

See 6.4.3 (3), (4) and (5).

is the lateral force to be absorbed at the column section per area unit.

The recommended country-specific values are:

vRd,max

= 0.4 v fcd with v as per Eq. (6.6N)

vlRd,max

= 0.4 v flcd with v as per Eq. (11.6.6N)

DIN EN 1992-1-1:
The maximum punching resistance is determined within the critical perimeter u1 :

vEd,u1 vRd,max = 1.4 vRdc,u1

OENORM B 1992-1-1:
The maximum punching resistance for normal concrete is the smaller one of the following values:
-

VRd,max = 0.40 v fcd u0 d

VRd,max = k vRd,c u1 d

The coefficient k is assumed as k = 1.65. In accordance with the OENORM it is assumed that the punching shear
reinforcement encompasses the outer longitudinal reinforcement layers. For lightweight concrete the recommended value
364

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States

applies.
SS EN 1992-1-1, 16:

vRd,max { 0.50 v fcd ; 1.6 vRd,c u1 / u0 }

For lightweight concrete the recommended value applies.
2) The first reinforcement row is specified with a distance of 0.5d from the column edge; the other reinforcement rows are
specified with a distance of sr 0.75d from each other (see Picture 9.10). The reinforcement is determined using the
following equation:

vRd,cs = 0.75vRd,c + 1.5(d / sr) Asw fywd,ef ( 1/(u1d)) sin a [MN/m]

(6.52)

where

Asw

is the section area of the punching reinforcement in a reinforcement row around the column [mm].

is the radial distance of the punching reinforcement rows [mm].

fywd,ef

is the effective design value for the yield strength of the punching reinforcement according to

fywd,ef = 250 + 0.25d fywd [MN/m]

is the circumference of the critical perimeter [mm].

is the average value of the effective static heights in the orthogonal directions [mm].

is the angle between the punching reinforcement and the slab plane.
For bent-down reinforcement d / sr = 0.67 is used according to Section 6.4.5(1).
DIN EN 1992-1-1:
Within the perimeter uout as per Section 6.4.5(4), a minimum of two reinforcement rows is always required. For the first
two reinforcement rows of flat slabs, Asw is to be increased by the factors ksw,1 = 2.5 resp. ksw,2 = 1.4. For bent-down
punching shear reinforcement d / sr = 0.53 is used. The bent-down reinforcement can be exploited with fywd,ef = fywd. For
foundation slabs the stirrup reinforcement is calculated according to the following Equation:

VEd,red VRd,s = Asw,1+2 fywd,ef

(NA.6.52.1)

For bent-down reinforcement:

VEd,red VRd,s = 1.3 Asw,1+2 fywd sin a

(NA.6.52.2)

In order to determine VEd,red, the reduction value DVEd in Eq. (6.48) is calculated using the area Acrit according to Figure
NA.6.21.1 for the first two reinforcement rows and Ai > Acrit for the following rows i > 2, whereas in each case only 50%
of the soil pressures are applied relieving. For the first two rows, 50% of the reinforcement amount determined with Eq.
(NA.6.52.1) are required whereas 33% should be installed in each of the following rows. The first reinforcement row is
specified with a distance of 0.3d from the column edge. For the first three rows the distance sr between the rows should
be limited to 0.5d.
OENORM B 1992-1-1:
For each of the first two rows Asw is to be increased by 60%.
3) The perimeter uout,ef , which does not need any punching reinforcement, is normally calculated based on Equation (6.54):

uout,ef = VEd / (vRd,cd)

(6.54)

In general, the outermost row of the punching reinforcement must not be farther from uout,ef than 1.5d.
DIN EN 1992-1-1:
vRd,c is determined as the lateral force resistance according to Chapter 6.2.2(1).
4) For the minimum required punching reinforcement Asw,min of the internal check sections, the following applies:

Asw,min (1.5 sin a + cos a ) / (sr s t ) 0.08

( f ck ) / f yk

(9.11)

where

is the angle between the punching reinforcement and the longitudinal reinforcement
(i.e., for vertical stirrups a = 90 and sin a = 1).

is the radial distance of the stirrups of the punching reinforcement.

365

EN 1992-1-1 Design

is the tangential distance of the stirrups of the punching reinforcement.

fck

in N/mm.

DIN EN 1992-1-1:

Asw, min = As sin a = 0.08 / 1.5 f ck / f yk sr st

(9.11DE)

5) Minimum longitudinal reinforcement

DIN EN 1992-1-1:
The minimum reinforcement is found according to Chapter 6.4.5(NA.6) based on the design of the minimum moments:

mEd,x = hx VEd and mEd,y = hy VEd

(NA.6.54.1)

with

hx, hy

the moment coefficient as per Table NA.6.1.1 for the x or y direction.

OENORM EN 1992-1-1:
The minimum reinforcement is determined according to Equation (28AT):

as,min =
with
e/beff

VEd
e

0.9 d f yd beff

(28AT)

the relative eccentricity as per Table 13AT.

Check against Fatigue

The user can select two alternative methods for design:
Simplified check for the frequent action combination according to EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 6.8.6(2), and EN 1990, Eq.

(6.15b), taking the relevant traffic loads at serviceability limit state into account.
Check with damage equivalent stress ranges for the fatigue combination according to EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 6.8.3, Eq.

(6.69), considering the specific fatigue load Qfat.

The concrete compressive stresses in state II are determined with the stress-strain-curve according to Fig. 3.2. Differing from
Chapter 5.10.9 the scattering of prestressing is not taken into account.

Fatigue of longitudinal reinforcement, shear reinforcement and prestressing steel

The fatigue check is carried out according to EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 6.8. The steel stresses are calculated for longitudinal
reinforcement from bending and longitudinal force as well as for prestressing steel in beams and design objects under the
assumption of a cracked concrete section. For shear and longitudinal reinforcement from lateral force and torsion, the
stresses are calculated according to 6.8.3(3) based on a truss model with the strut angle tan Qfat = tan Q 1 acc. to
Eq. (6.65). The prestressing steel stresses in area elements are determined at the uncracked concrete section. Tendons
without bond and external tendons are not checked.
DIN EN 1992-1-1: The strut angle is to be determined according to Eq. (H.6-26) of Book 600 of the DAfStb.
Simplified check
According to Chapter 6.8.6, adequate fatigue resistance may be assumed if the stress range under the frequent action
combination does not exceed 70 MN/m for unwelded reinforcing bars and 35 MN/m for welded bars. The condition
described in Chapter 6.8.6(3) for couplings in prestressed components is not examined by the program.
DIN EN 1992-1-1: The simplified check is not permitted for welded reinforcing bars.
Check with damage equivalent stress ranges
According to Chapter 6.8.5(3), for reinforcing and prestressing steel adequate fatigue resistance should be assumed if Eq.
(6.71) is satisfied:

gF,fat Dss,equ(N) DsRsk(N) / gs,fat

with

gF,fat

= 1 according to Chapter 2.4.2.3.

gs,fat

= 1.15 for reinforcing and prestressing steel according to Chapter 2.4.2.4.

366

(6.71)

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States

DsRsk(N*)

Permitted characteristic stress range at N* load cycles based on the S-N curves specified in Tab. 6.4N for
prestressing steel or Tab. 6.3N for reinforcing steel.

Dss,equ(N*)

Damage equivalent stress range with N* load cycles. For building construction this value may be
approximated by Dss,max .

Dss,max

Maximum stress range from the fatigue combination.

Calculation method
The maximum from the robustness, crack and bending reinforcement is taken as the existing bending reinforcement. If as a
result the load from the fatigue combination in state II cannot be absorbed, the design will be repeated using the existing
reinforcement and the check internal forces.
The maximum stress range per steel layer that results from the strain state in state II or the truss model is determined
separately for each check situation. For longitudinal reinforcement the varying bond behavior of reinforcing and prestressing
steel is taken into account by increasing the steel stress by the coefficient h from Eq. (6.64). If for longitudinal and shear
reinforcement the resulting stress range exceeds the permitted stress range, the necessary reinforcement will be iteratively
increased until the check succeeds for all situations. In the Symmetrical and Compression member design modes the
longitudinal reinforcement is applied at all predefined locations. This will not affect the predefined relationships between
the individual reinforcement layers.
The permitted stress ranges and the coefficient h are specified by the user in the Section dialog.
The decisive reinforcement used for the check, which may have been increased, is recorded in the check log and saved for
graphical representation.

Fatigue of concrete under compressive stress

The fatigue check for concrete that is subject to compressive stress is performed for bending and longitudinal force at the
cracked section as described in EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 6.8.7. This check takes into account the final longitudinal
reinforcement and may include an increase applied during the fatigue check for reinforcing steel. The struts of components
subject to lateral force stress are not analyzed.
Simplified check
Adequate fatigue resistance may be assumed if the following condition is satisfied:

s c,max
f cd , fat

0.5 + 0.45

s c,min 0.9 for f 50 MN/m

ck
f cd , fat 0.8 for f > 50 MN/m

(6.77)

where

sc,max

is the maximum compressive stress at a fibre under the frequent load combination (compression measured
positive).

sc,min

is the minimum compressive stress at the same fibre where sc,max occurs (sc,min = 0 if sc,min is a tensile stress).

fcd,fat

is the design fatigue strength of concrete according to Eq. (6.76). This value is entered by the user in the Section
dialog.

fcd,fat

= k1 cc(t0) fcd (1 - fck / 250)

with cc(t0) as per Eq. (3.2) and fcd as per Eq. (3.15)

= 0.85

(6.76)

DIN EN 1992-1-1, OENORM B 1992-1-1, SS EN 1992-1-1:

= 1.0

Check with damage equivalent concrete compressive stresses

According to Chapter 6.8.7(1), a satisfactory fatigue resistance may be assumed for concrete under compression, if Eq.
(6.72) is fulfilled:

Ecd ,max, equ + 0.43 1 - Requ 1

(6.72)

where

Requ

= Ecd,min,equ / Ecd,max,equ is the stress ratio.

Ecd,min,equ

= scd,min,equ / fcd,fat is the minimum compressive stress level.

367

EN 1992-1-1 Design

Ecd,max,equ

= scd,max,equ / fcd,fat is the maximum compressive stress level.

scd,min,equ

is the lower stress of the ultimate amplitude for N = 106 cycles.

scd,max,equ

is the uper stress of the ultimate amplitude for N = 106 cycles.

fcd,fat

is the design fatigue strength of concrete according to Eq. (6.76).

Special characteristic of shell structures

368

Checks in the Serviceability Limit States

The

following checks are performed:

Limiting the concrete compressive stresses (EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 7.2).
Limiting the reinforcing steel stresses (Chapter 7.2).
Limiting the prestressing steel stresses (Chapter 7.2).
Decompression check (Chapter 7.3.1).
Minimum reinforcement for crack width limitation (Chapter 7.3.2).
Crack with calculation (Chapter 7.3.4).
Limiting deformations (Chapter 7.4).

Design Combinations
In accordance with EN 1990 (Eurocode 0), Chapter 6.5.3, the following combinations are taken into account in the
serviceability limit states:
Combination for characteristic situations

Gk, j "+" P "+" Qk,1 "+" y 0,i Qk,i

j 1

(6.14b)

i >1

Combination for frequent situations

Gk, j "+" P "+" y1,1 Qk,1 "+" y 2,i Qk,i

j 1

(6.15b)

i >1

Combination for quasi-continuous situations

Gk, j "+" P "+" y 2,i Qk,i

j 1

(6.16b)

i >1

Stress Analysis
For uncracked concrete sections, the program assumes that concrete and steel under tensile and compressive stress behave
elastically. As for cracked concrete sections, the concrete compressive stresses are determined using the stress-strain curve
according to EN 1992-1-1, Figure 3.2. Note here that a horizontal curve is assumed for strains of ec1 or higher.
Area elements
For area elements the concrete stresses are calculated at the gross section. The steel stress check is carried out for
reinforcing steel by determining the strain state at the cracked concrete section and for the prestressing steel at the
uncracked concrete section.
Beams and design objects
The action combination stresses that can be determined without checks are always calculated at the gross section.
Conversely, in the checks the stresses are determined as follows and are graphically displayed or logged:
When checking the crack reinforcement and crack width, the concrete stress is calculated at the gross section

When checking the decompression and concrete compressive stresses, the concrete stress is calculated

- without internal tendons at the gross section

section
OENORM B 1992-1-1:
If the stresses according to chapter 7.2 are calculated at the cracked section the different bonding behavior of concrete and
prestressing steel is to be taken into account. The increase of tension force DFtp in the prestressing steel is to be calculated
as follows:
369

EN 1992-1-1 Design

DFtp = x1 Ap e ( yp ) Ep

(14AT)

where

is the bond coefficient according to Eq. (7.5); the value can be entered in the crack width check dialog;

is the section area of the tendon with bond;

e ( yp )

is the strain of the concrete section at the location yp of the tendon;

is the elasticity modulus of the tendon.

For beams and design objects this rule is taken into account by the program for situations after grouting. For area elements
it is not used because prestressing steel is only checked at the uncracked section.

Limiting the Concrete Compressive Stresses

The concrete compressive stress check is carried out according to EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 7.2. As described in Chapter 7.1(2),
a cracked section is assumed if the tensile stress calculated in the uncracked state exceeds fctm.
The calculation in the cracked state is performed by determining the strain state with the final longitudinal reinforcement
(maximum from robustness, crack and bending reinforcement including a possible increase from the fatigue check). For
beams and design objects, the tendons with bond are taken into account on the resistance side provided that they are
grouted in the check situation. For area elements, the compressive stress for both reinforcement directions is determined
separately and the extreme value is checked because the general strain state cannot be determined unambiguously.
In the construction stages and final states, for members of exposure classes XD, XF and XS the concrete compressive stress
sc as defined in Chapter 7.2(1) is to be limited to 0.60 fck under the characteristic combination. If stress in the concrete
under quasi-continuous combination does not exceed the limit 0.45 fck, linear creep can be assumed according to 7.2(3). If
this is not the case, non-linear creep must be taken into account. Both conditions are considered based on the user's
specifications.
In prestressed concrete components as per Chapter 5.10.2.2, the maximum concrete compressive stress must be limited to
0.60 fc(t) when entering the average prestressing value. If the concrete compressive stress exceeds the value 0.45 fc(t), the
nonlinearity of the creep must be taken into account. fc(t) indicates the average value of the concrete compressive strength
at time t when the prestressing is entered.
The program assumes the time of introducing the prestressing to coincide with situation G+P. If a situation G+P is defined
in the combination selected above, the concrete stress is checked against the limit value 0.45 fc(t) or 0.60 fc(t) for this
situation depending on the user's specification. The value for fc(t) is also defined in the dialog.

Limiting the Reinforcing and Prestressing Steel Stresses

Reinforcing steel
For reinforcing steel, the limitation of steel stress under the characteristic combination is checked for 0.8 fyk or 1.0 fyk
depending on the user's selection according to EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 7.2(5). The increased limit is permissible for stresses
from indirect actions. In this check the reinforcement corresponds to the maximum value from the robustness, crack and
bending reinforcement, including a possible increase as a result of the fatigue check. The determination of the strain state is
performed at the cracked concrete section. If for beams and design objects tendons with bond are grouted in the check
situation, they will be taken into account on the resistance side.
SS EN 1992-1-1, 19: The limit 1.0 fyk is generally assumed.
Prestressing steel
For tendons with bond, the limitation of steel stress is checked at the cracked concrete section for beams and design objects
and at the uncracked concrete section for area elements. This check is based on the limit 0.75 fpk under the characteristic
action combination.
For situations before prestressing and for tendons without bond, the stress spm0 (x) is checked according to Equation
(5.43). External tendons are not checked.
DIN EN 1992-1-1: The check is carried out for the quasi-continuous combination with the limit 0.65 fpk. In addition, the
stresses are checked against the minimum of 0.9fp0,1k and 0.8fpk under the characteristic combination.

370

Checks in the Serviceability Limit States

Decompression Check
This check is to be carried out for prestressed components of exposure classes XC2-XC4, XD1-XD3 and XS1-XS3 as per
Table 7.1N in Chapter 7.3.1 of EN 1992-1-1. According to this, all parts of the tendon with bond or the duct must be
located in the overcompressed concrete at a depth of at least 25 mm. The decisive action combination is determined based
on the exposure class.
For beams and design objects, the analysis is carried out for stresses resulting from bending and normal force. A cracked
section is assumed in this analysis in case the tensile stress under the decisive action combination exceeds fctm. In addition,
the rules for stress analysis indicated above apply.
For area sections, an uncracked section is assumed. The 2D concrete stress applied in the direction of the tendon is decisive
for the check.
The result is indicated as the 'compression depth' which refers to the shortest distance between the tendon or duct and the
tensile zone or section edge. This value is negative if the tendon is in the tensile zone.
DIN EN 1992-1-1:
Table 7.1DE is decisive. The limit state of decompression is maintained if the concrete section around the tendon is under
compressive stresses in the range of 100 mm or 1/10 of the section height. The higher range is decisive. The stresses are to
be checked in state II.
OENORM B 1992-1-1:
Table 7AT is decisive.

Minimum Reinforcement for Crack Width Limitation

The minimum reinforcement for crack width limitation is defined in EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 7.3.2. According to 7.3.2(1), the
minimum reinforcement is to be applied in areas where tension is expected. Tension areas can be defined in the section
dialog by choosing either an action combination or a restraint (bending, centrical tension). Reinforcing steel layers that are
not under tension are also provided with reinforcement in the symmetrical and compression member design modes. This
will not affect the predefined relationships between the individual reinforcement layers.
For profiled sections, each subsection (web or flange) should be checked individually in accordance with Section (2). This
cannot be done if any polygonal section geometries are taken into consideration. For this reason, the program always
determines the minimum reinforcement based on the entire section. For rectangular full sections, Equation (7.2) is used. In
all other cases, Equation (7.3) applies.
SS EN 1992-1-1, 20: The permissible crack widths are defined in Table D-2 for the quasi-continuous action combination
depending on the exposure class, the service life class and the corrosion susceptibility. If the tensile stress does not exceed
fctk / z with z as per Table D-3, the concrete may be regarded as uncracked. In this case no minimum reinforcement is
determined. The program assumes fctk = fctk;0.05(t) = 0.7fctm(t) = 0.7fct,eff with fct,eff according to Equation (7.1).
Determining the minimum reinforcement
Minimum reinforcement As,min is determined using Equation (7.1) of the standard:

As,min ss = kc k fct,eff Act

(7.1)

where

Act

is the area of the concrete tensile zone during initial crack formation in state I. To determine the value, the
program scales the bending moment of the action combination until the maximum edge stress in state I
corresponds to the value fct,eff.

is the maximum permitted stress in the reinforcing steel reinforcement in relation to the limit diameter of the
reinforcing steel.

is the coefficient for factoring in nonlinearly distributed tensile stresses based on the user's input, which can vary
between 0.65 and 1.0 depending on the section height.
DIN EN 1992-1-1: In case of restraint within the component, these values can be multiplied by 0.8 and for tensile
stresses due to restraint generated outside of the component, k = 1.0 shall be assumed.

371

EN 1992-1-1 Design

fct,eff

is the effective concrete tensile strength at the time of crack formation based on the user's input. The tensile
strength is assumed to be fctm or lower in case the crack formation is expected to occur within the first 28 days.
The tensile strength, which depends on the age of the concrete, is defined in Equation (3.4) of Chapter 3.1.2.
DIN EN 1992-1-1: If it is not certain whether crack formation will occur within the first 28 days, a tensile strength
of 3 MN/m for normal concrete and 2.5 MN/m for lightweight concrete should be assumed.

is the coefficient for consideration of stress distribution prior to crack formation.

kc = 1.0 for tension only

For rectangular sections and webs of box girders or T sections:

kc = 0.4 (1 - sc / (k1 h / h*) / fct,eff ) 1

(7.2)

For flanges of box girders and T sections:

kc = 0.9 Fcr / Act / fct,eff 0.5

(7.3)

is the average concrete stress in the analyzed part of the section with

sc = NEd / (b h)
NEd

(7.4)

is the normal stress in the analyzed part of the section (compressive force positive) under the decisive action
combination.

h*
k1

= min( h; 1.0 m).

is the coefficient for taking into account the effects of normal force NEd on the stress distribution:

k1 = 1.5
k1 = 2 h* / (3h)
Fcr

for compressive normal force

for tensile normal force

is the absolute value of the tensile force in the chord directly before crack formation. The tensile force is
generated through the integration of tensile stresses within area Act.

The largest existing bar diameter fs is specified in the Section dialog (where it is labeled with ds). It is used in the following
equations to determine the limit diameter fs* as an input value for Table 7.2N:

fs = fs* fct,eff / 2.9 kc hcr / (2(h-d))

for bending

(7.6N)

fs = fs* fct,eff / 2.9 hcr / (8(h-d))

for centrical tension

(7.7N)

where

h
d
hcr

is the overall section height.

is the static effective height up to the centroid of the outermost reinforcement layer.
is the height of the tensile zone directly before crack formation under the decisive action combination.

The limit diameter fs* and the permissible crack width wmax are used to determine the permissible reinforcing steel stress

ss for Equation (7.1) according to Table 7.2N. The values within the table are interpolated linear, beyond the table they are
extrapolated linear for wk and quadratic for ss.
If the crack width check is to be carried out at the same time, the program will determine whether the specified crack width
according to Chapter 7.3.4 is maintained by inserting the calculated minimum reinforcement. If necessary, the minimum
reinforcement is increased iteratively until the check limit is reached. The increased reinforcement is indicated by an
exclamation mark "!" in the log.
DIN EN 1992-1-1:
The limit diameter fs* for Table 7.2DE is determined using the following equations:

fs = fs* fct,eff / 2.9 kc k hcr / (4(h-d)) fs* fct,eff / 2.9

for bending

(7.6DE)

fs = fs* fct,eff / 2.9 kc k hcr / (8(h-d)) fs* fct,eff / 2.9

for centrical tension

(7.7DE)

The steel stress ss is calculated with the equation from Table 7.2DE.
Based on Chapter 7.3.2 (NA.5), the minimum reinforcement for the crack width limitation in the case of thicker
components under centrical restraint can be determined according to Equation (NA.7.5.1). It is not necessary to insert more
reinforcing steel as results from Equation (7.1). The rules specified before will be used, if the option is selected by the user,
whereas the possibility of lower reinforcement for slowly hardening concrete according to Section (NA.6) will not be used.

372

Checks in the Serviceability Limit States

OENORM B 1992-1-1:
Table 7.2N is replaced by Table 8AT. The steel stress ss is determined according to Equation (19AT). The limit diameter is to
be modified as follows:

fs = fs* fct,eff / 2.9 kc k hcr / (4(h-d)) fs* fct,eff / 2.9

(21AT)

For centrical tension hcr / 2 for each member side is applied.

For members under centrical restraint the minimum reinforcement for the crack width limitation can be determined
according to Equation (17AT). This rule will be used, if the option is selected by the user. The program does not take into
account the possibility of reducing the reinforcement for slowly hardening concrete.
Special characteristic of prestressed concrete structures
According to the guidelines set forth in Chapter 7.3.2(3), tendons with bond in the tensile zone may be added to the
minimum reinforcement as long as their axis distance to the reinforcing steel layer does not exceed 150 mm. To include the
tendons, add the term

x1 Ap Dsp
on the left side of Equation (7.1). In this formula

is the section area of the tendons with bond located in Ac,eff.

Ac,eff

is the effective area of the reinforcement according to Figure 7.1. The section after the next describes how Ac,eff
is determined.

is the adjusted ratio of bond strengths between reinforcing steel and prestressing steel according to Equation
(7.5).

Dsp

is the stress change in the tendons.

For beams and design objects, the tendon layers with bond can be added using the x1 value specified in the Section dialog
as long as they are grouted in the check situation. For area elements, prestressing steel can never be taken into account.
According to Section (4) of Chapter 7.3.2, prestressed concrete components do not require a minimum reinforcement in
sections where the absolute value of concrete tensile stress sct,p under the characteristic action combination and
characteristic prestressing is less than fct,eff. This condition is automatically checked by the program.
DIN EN 1992-1-1:
According to Section (4), components with subsequent bond do not require a minimum reinforcement if the absolute value
of concrete compressive stress under the characteristic combination on the section edge is greater than 1 N/mm. This
condition is also checked by the program.
OENORM B 1992-1-1:
The value is specified as sct,p = 0.0 N/mm.
SS EN 1992-1-1, 21:
The value is specified as sct,p = fctk / z with z the crack safety factor according to Table D-3.
The program assumes fctk = fctk;0.05(t) = 0.7fctm(t) = 0.7fct,eff with fct,eff according to Equation (7.1).

373

EN 1992-1-1 Design

Crack Width Calculation

The crack width check is performed through direct calculation in accordance with EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 7.3.4, for all
sections where tensile stresses in state I occur under the action combination that is based on the exposure class specified in
the Table 7.1N. The bar diameter f (ds in the dialog) of the reinforcing steel reinforcement and the decisive fct,eff concrete
tensile strength are defined in the section dialog.
SS EN 1992-1-1, 20: The check is performed for the quasi-continuous action combination.
The program performs the check according to the following steps:

Determine strain state II under the check combination with the stress-strain curve shown in Figure 3.2. For beams and
design objects, all tendons with bond are considered on the resistance side.

Define the effective area of reinforcement Ac,eff shown in Figure 7.1 (see next section), determine the reinforcing steel
layers and prestressing steel layers within Ac,eff.

Calculate reinforcement level:

rp,eff

= (As + x1 Ap) / Ac,eff

rtot

= (As + Ap) / Ac,eff

Bond coefficient according to user specification.

As, Ap

Reinforcing steel and prestressing steel within Ac,eff .

(7.10)

Determine individually for each reinforcing steel layer:

Difference of the average strain for concrete and reinforcing steel

esm - ecm = [ss - kt fct,eff / rp,eff (1 + ae rp,eff)] / Es 0.6 ss / Es

(7.9)

where

= Es / Ecm

is the reinforcing steel stress from strain state II.

DIN EN 1992-1-1:
ss = ss2 + 0.4 fct,eff ( 1/rp,eff - 1/rtot )

ss2 = Reinforcing steel stress from strain state II.

fct,eff

is the effective concrete tensile strength as per specifications.

is the factor for the duration of the load action:

0.6 for short-term and 0.4 for long-term load action.

Maximum crack spacing

sr,max

= k3 c + k1 k2 k4 f / rp, eff

(7.11)

where

is the bar diameter specified by the user.

is the concrete cover with respect to the longitudinal reinforcement. The concrete cover is set to d1 - f / 2 in
the program, where d1 is the smallest axis distance of the reinforcing steel reinforcement of the section
edge within Ac,eff.

is the coefficient for consideration of the bond properties of the reinforcement. The coefficient is set to 0.8
in the program, which is the recommended value for good bond properties.

is the coefficient for taking strain distribution into account:

0.5 for bending and 1.0 for pure tension.

374

Checks in the Serviceability Limit States

k3 , k4

The recommended national values are k3 = 3.4 and k4 = 0.425.

DIN EN 1992-1-1:
k1 k2 = 1, k3 = 0 and k4 = 1 / 3.6

sr,max ss f / (3.6 fct,eff ) .

OENORM B 1992-1-1:
k3 = 0 and k4 = 1 / (3.6 k1 k2 ) rp,eff ss / (3.6 k1 k2 fct,eff )

sr,max = f / (3.6 rp,eff ) ss f / (3.6 fct,eff ) .

(22AT)
(23AT)

SS EN 1992-1-1, 22: k3 = 7 f / c
If an upper limit for the crack spacing in Equation (7.11) was specified in the section dialog, this allows the special
features of Equations (7.13) and (7.14) and sections (4) and (5) of Chapter 7.3.4 to be taken into consideration.
Calculated value of the crack width

= sr,max ( esm - ecm )

(7.8)

The layer with the largest calculated crack width is shown in the log.
For sections completely under tension, the check is performed separately for each of the two effective tensile zones.
The maximum value is shown in the log.

Determining the Effective Area Ac,eff

According to EN 1992-1-1, Figure 7.1, the effective area of reinforcement Ac,eff defines the area of a rectangular, uniaxially
stressed concrete section in which the model assumptions in Book 466 of the German Committee for Reinforced Concrete
(DAfStb) are applicable. Although the program can apply this model to any section and stress situation, the user has the
responsibility and discretion to do so.
When determining Ac,eff, the following steps are performed by the program:
Determine tensile zone Act in state I: When calculating the minimum reinforcement, use the stress that led to the initial

crack; when calculating the crack width, use the check combination based on the exposure class.
Define the centroid line of the reinforcement as a regression line through the reinforcing steel layers in the tensile zone.
In 2D frameworks and for area elements, a horizontal line through the centroid of the reinforcement layers under
tension is assumed.
Determine the truncated residual area Ar to the edge and the sum of section lengths ls. The average edge distance is
then assumed as d1=Ar / ls, but not less than the smallest edge distance of the reinforcing steel layers in the tensile

zone.
Shift the centroid line in parallel by 1.5 d1. Assuming h - d = d1 , the height of Ac,eff is determined as per 7.3.2(3) by

hc,ef = 2.5 (h - d) h / 2. According to DIN EN 1992-1-1 and OENORM B 1992-1-1, Section 7.3.2(3), this value is
limited to (h - x) / 2 (x = compressive zone height in state I).
The resulting polygon is intersected with the tensile zone and then defines the effective area Ac,eff.

DIN EN 1992-1-1 und NORM B 1992-1-1:

If the minimum reinforcement for thicker components under central restraint is selected in the section dialog, the
height of Ac,eff is heff 2.5 d1 according to Figure NA.7.1 d) or Eq. (17AT).

The following illustrations show the effective areas determined by the program for a few representative situations. The last
case (edge beam) deviates from the model assumptions in Book 466 to such a degree that it is questionable as to whether it
should be used.

375

EN 1992-1-1 Design

A c,eff
A ct
d1
Ar

2.5 d1

Effective area of the reinforcement at a rectangular section under uniaxial bending, normal force with double bending and
centrical tension

Effective area of the reinforcement at a bridge section under uniaxial bending

d1
1.5

ls
Effective area of the reinforcement at an edge beam under uniaxial bending

376

Checks in the Serviceability Limit States

Limiting Deformations
According to EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 7.4.1, the deformations of a component or structure may not impair its proper
functioning or appearance. Consequently, a beam, slab or cantilever under the quasi-continuous action combination should
not sag more than 1/250th of the span as specified in Section (4). To avoid damage to adjacent components, their
deformation should be limited to 1/500th of the span as specified in Section (5).
The standard does not include a method for direct calculation of deformations in accordance with Chapter 7.4.3.
The InfoCAD program system allows you to perform a realistic check as part of a nonlinear system analysis for beam and
shell structures that takes geometric and physical nonlinearities into account. The resistance of the tendons within the bond
is currently not included in the calculation.
Editing is performed in the following steps:
Define the check situation using the Load Group function in the Load dialog by grouping the decisive individual load

cases. The variable loads must first be weighted with the combination coefficients y2 for the quasi-continuous

combination.
Select the check load cases in the Nonlinear Analysis / Serviceability dialog in the analysis settings for the FEM or
framework analysis.
Set the reinforcement determined in the ultimate limit state in the Start reinforcement selection field (maximum from
bending, robustness, crack check and fatigue).
Perform the FEM or framework analysis to determine the deformations in state II.
Check the system deformations displayed graphically or in tabular form.

For a detailed description of nonlinear system analysis, refer to the relevant chapter of the manual.

377

EN 1992-1-1 Design

sp, Dsp

Stresses and stress ranges for prestressing steel [MN/m].

dp, dp,min

Depth of the tendons or ducts in the concrete compressive zone in the decompression check [mm].

Stresses for beams and design objects

Longitudinal stresses in the decompression and concrete compressive stress checks [MN/m].

ss, Dss

Stresses and stress ranges for reinforcing steel [MN/m].

sp, Dsp

Stresses and stress ranges for prestressing steel [MN/m].

scd, Dscd

Stresses and stress ranges in the fatigue check for concrete under longitudinal compression [MN/m].

Dssb,y, Dssb,z

Stress ranges for shear reinforcement from Qy and Qz [MN/m].

Dssb,T, Dssl,T

Stress ranges for shear reinforcement from torsion and longitudinal torsion reinforcement [MN/m].

Stresses for area elements

Concrete stress in the tendon direction in the decompression check [MN/m].

ssx, Dssx

Stresses and stress ranges for reinforcing steel in the x direction [MN/m].

ssy, Dssy

Stresses and stress ranges for reinforcing steel in the y direction [MN/m].

sp, Dsp

Stresses and stress ranges for prestressing steel [MN/m].

scd,x, Dscd,x,

Stresses and stress ranges in the concrete fatigue check under longitudinal compression in the

scd,y, Dscd,y

x- and y-direction [MN/m].

Dss,b

Stress ranges for shear reinforcement [MN/m].

Bending reinforcement

Bending reinforcement [cm] for beams and design objects.

asx, asy

Bending reinforcement [cm/m] for area elements in the x and y direction.

asj

Meridian reinforcement [cm/m] for axisymmetric shell elements.

asu

Ring reinforcement [cm/m] for axisymmetric shell elements.

Reinforcement from lateral force

asbx, asby, asb

Stirrup reinforcement [cm/m] of area elements from qx, qy and qr.

Asb.y, Asb.z

Stirrup reinforcement [cm/m] of beams and design objects from Qy and Qz.

Asl for asb=0

Longitudinal reinforcement [cm] of area elements.

DFtdy, DFtdz

Additional tensile force [kN] in the longitudinal reinforcement as a result of lateral force Qy and Qz.

Torsional reinforcement

Asb.T

Torsional stirrup reinforcement [cm/m] of beams and design objects from Mx.

Asl.T

Torsional longitudinal reinforcement [cm] of beams and design objects from Mx.

378

Results
Design values

VRd,ct, vRd,ct

Absorbable design lateral force without shear reinforcement [kN or kN/m].

vRd,max

Absorbable design lateral force of concrete struts for area elements [kN/m].

VRd,max

Absorbable design lateral force of concrete struts for beams and design objects [kN].

TRd,max

Design value of the maximum absorbable torsion moment [kNm].

Q/VRd+Mx/TRd

For compact and box sections: Q /VRd,max + Mx /TRd,max

DIN EN 1992-1-1: For compact sections: (Q /VRd,max) + (Mx /TRd,max)
OENORM B 1992-1-1: For full sections: (Q /VRd,max) + (Mx /TRd,max)

Crack width

wk.top

Computed crack width at the top and bottom of the cross-section

wk.bottom

separately for the x and y reinforcement direction for area elements.

379

EN 1992-1-1 Design

Examples
Slab with Downstand Beam
In this example a rectangular slab (d = 20 cm, C30/37-EN, BSt 500 S, exposure class XC2) with a downstand beam will be
analyzed. This slab supported with joints will be subjected to its dead load and a traffic load of 10 kN/m.
The checks will be carried out for all possible combinations of load cases. This method is selected in the calculation settings
and can take a very long time to complete if there is a large number of load cases.

Design specifications and reinforcing steel description of the slab (section 1):
Edge distance of the reinforcing steel for the x and y direction of the upper (1st) and lower (2nd) layer: 0.03 m

Bending design mode: Standard

Steel quality: 500S

Effective height: 0.17 m

Strut angle cot Q: 1.0.

Bending tensile reinforcement Asl for the lateral force design: 1.88 cm

Design specifications of the torsion-flexible downstand beam (section 2):

Bending design mode: Standard

Steel quality of the stirrups: 500S

Platte mit Unterzug - M = 1:103

Shear section:

Width: 0.30 m
InfoGraph GmbH, Kackertstr. 10, D-52072 Aachen, Tel. (0241) 889980
Effective height: 0.57 m

380

Strut angle cot Q: 1.0.

Bending tensile reinforcement Asl for the lateral force design: 2.90 cm

Examples
EN 1992-1-1 actions
Standard design group

G - Dead load
Gamma.sup / gamma.inf = 1.35 / 1
Load cases
1

Dead load

QN - Imposed load, traffic load

Gamma.sup / gamma.inf = 1.5 / 0
Combination coefficients for: Superstructures
Working load - category A: Residential buildings
Psi.0 / Psi.1 / Psi.2 = 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.3
Load cases 1. Variante, inclusive
2
3

Traffic span 1
Traffic span 2

1. Permanent and temporary situation

Final state
G
QN

Dead load
Imposed load, traffic load

1. Rare (characteristic) situation

Final state
G
QN

Dead load
Imposed load, traffic load

1. Quasi-continuous situation
Final state
G
QN

Dead load
Imposed load, traffic load

Design overview
Se.

Expos.
class
XC4
XC4

1
2
(M)
(R)
(B)
(Q)
(T)
(S)
(P)
(C)

Prestress
of component
Not prestressed
Not prestressed

Reinforc.
M R B Q T
x x x x .
x x x x .

Fatig.
S P C
. . .
. . .

Crackwidth
x
x

Decomp.
.
.

Stress
Comp.
x
x

checks
S P
x .
x .

Nominal reinforcement to guarantee robustness.

Settings for flexural and shear reinforcement

M,N
fyk
Theta
Slabs
Asl
Red.

Design mode for bend and longitudinal force:

(ST) Standard, (SY) Symmetrical, (CM) Compression member.
Quality of stirrups.
Angle of concrete truss.
Beams are designed like slabs.
Given reinforcement according to picture 6.3, increase to maximum.
Reduction factor of prestress for determining the tensile zone for
distribution of robustness reinforcement for area elements.

Se. Concr.
1 C30/37-EN
2 C30/37-EN

Density
[kg/m]
.
.

Dsn.
M,N
ST
ST

fyk
[MPa]
500
500

cot
Theta
1.00
1.00

Dsn.
Asl [cm]
like
Pic. 6.3
slabs given max
.
1.88
0.00
.
2.90
.

Red.
prestr.
.
.

381

EN 1992-1-1 Design
Shear sections
bw.nom
h.nom
kb, kd
z1, z2
tef
B.
Se.
1
2

Nominal width of the prestressed section according to 6.2.3(6).

Nominal height of the prestressed section according to 6.2.3(6).
Factor to calculate the inner lever arm z from the eff. width bn resp.
from the eff. height d.
Height and width of the core section for torsion.
Thickness of the torsion box.
Box section; determination of the bearing capacity acc. to equ. (6.29).
Width [m]
bw
bw.nom
1.000
.
0.300
.

Eff. width
bn [m] kb
.
.
0.270 0.90

Height[m]
h
h.nom
0.200
.
0.600
.

Eff.height
d [m] kd
0.170 0.90
0.570 0.90

Torsion section [m]

z1
z2
tef B.
.
.
.
.
0.540 0.240 0.060 .

Settings for the check of crack widths

ds
Xi1
k
kt
Factor
sr,max
Se.
1
2

Maximal given bar diameter of the reinforcing steel.

Bond coefficient of prestressing steel for beam sections.
Coefficient for consideration of non-linear distributed tensile stress.
Coefficient for the duration of the load to calculate the crack width.
Reduction factor for fctm as per chapt. 7.3.2 (As,min) resp. 7.3.4 (wk).
Upper limit for the crack spacing from equ. (7.11).
wmax ds
[mm] [mm]
0.30 10.0
0.30 10.0

Coeff.
sr,max
Xi1 k
kt
[mm]
.
1.00 0.4
.
.
1.00 0.4
.

fctm-Factor
As,min
wk
1.00 1.00
1.00 1.00

Combination for check

As,min
wk
as per class as per class
as per class as per class

Settings for the check of concrete and steel stresses

Sigma.c
Sigma.s
(CC),(QC)
Se.
1
2

Concrete compressive stress in the serviceability limit state.

Reinforcing steel stress in the serviceability limit state.
Characteristic, quasi-continuous combination.

fck(t)
[MN/m]
.
.

per.sigma.c(t)
per.sigma.c
(CC, QC)
(CC)
(QC)
.
0.60 fck
.
.
0.60 fck
.

per.sigma.s
(CC)
0.80 fyk
0.80 fyk

Decompression
Stress
.
.

The calculated reinforcements are shown in the illustrations below.

Longitudinal reinforcement of the beams in the ultimate limit state [cm]

Longitudinal reinforcement of the beams to ensure robustness (ductility) [cm]

Longitudinal reinforcement of the beams to limit the crack width [cm]

382

Examples

Maximum longitudinal reinforcement of the beams [cm]

Maximum slab reinforcement in the intersection direction based on the robustness (ductility), crack width and design checks
in the ultimate limit state [cm/m]

Lateral force reinforcement of the beams [cm/m]

Averaged lateral force reinforcement of the slab at the nodes [cm/m]

An excerpt of the detailed log for the midspan of the downstand beam is provided below.
Design of longitudinal reinforcement
(M) Nominal reinf. for robustness as per EN 1992-2, 6.1 (109) (Charact. C.)
fctm
Average centric concrete tensile strength [MN/m]
zs,t/b Lever arm of inner strengths top/bottom with zs=0,9*d [m]
fyk,t/b Strength of longitudinal reinforcement top/bottom [MN/m]
max Sc Maximum concrete edge stress from Charact. C. [MN/m]
(R) Nominal/requ. reinforcement as per 7.3.2 for crack width limitation
Increase of reinforcement due to crack width check is marked by "!".
wmax
Permissible crack width as per specification [mm]
ds
Maximal given steel diameter [mm]
k
Coefficient for consideration of non-linear distributed tensile stress
fct,eff Concrete strength at date of cracking [MN/m]
kc
Coefficient to consider stress distribution in tensile zone
as per Eq. (7.3), for rectangles per Eq. (7.2)
max Sx Maximal concrete edge stress from action combination [MN/m]
(B) Design of reinforement at ultimate limit state
In case of dominant bending, compression reinforcement is marked with "*"
For section areas acc. to 6.1.(5) the conrecte strain is not limited
The minimum reinforcement acc. to 9.2.1.1 and 9.3.1.1 is not determined
For compressive members the minimum reinf. acc. to 9.5.2 is considered
fck
Concrete strength for design of reinforcement [MN/m]

383

EN 1992-1-1 Design
Location 1
Beam 70, x = 0.00 m (Beam length 0.83 m)
Cross-section 2: Polygon - C30/37-EN
Steel 2; Design mode: Standard
(M) fctm=2.9; zs,t/b=0.513/0.513; fyk,t/b=500/500
(R) wmax=0.3; ds=10; k=1; fct,eff=2.9
(B) fck=30
Section properties
gross :

A [m]
0.460

ys [m]
0.850

zs [m]
0.178

Iy [m4]
0.0107

Iz [m4]
0.0828

Iyz[m4]
0.0000

1. Characteristic (rare) combination (CC.1): G+QN, Final state

My
[kNm]
69.95
69.95
69.95
69.95
69.95
69.95
196.53
107.92
284.31
196.53
107.92
284.31

Mz
max Sc kc
[kNm] [MN/m]
0.00
.
.
0.00
2.75
.
0.00
.
.
0.00
.
.
0.00
2.75
.
0.00
.
.
0.00
7.73
.
0.00
4.25 0.50
0.00
.
.
0.00
7.73
.
0.00
4.25 0.50
0.00
.
.

Ap'
[cm]
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

req.As
[cm]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
1.44
2.53
5.60
1.44
2.53
5.60

Situation
CC.1,1
QC.1,1
PC.1,5
CC.1,1
QC.1,1
PC.1,5
CC.1,2
QC.1,2
PC.1,2
CC.1,2
QC.1,2
PC.1,2

Design of shear reinforcement

The percentage of nominal reinforcement acc. to Eq. (9.5N) is considered.
bw
bn
kb
h
d
kd
Angle
Asl giv.
Qy, Qz
VRdc
VRdmax
z
Asb.y,z
Asl
Delta Ftd

Effective width for calculation of shear stresses from Qz and Mx [m]

Location 1
Beam 70, x = 0.00 m (Beam length 0.83 m)
Cross-section 2: Polygon - C30/37-EN
bw/bn/kb=0.3/0.27/0.9; h/d/kd=0.6/0.57/0.9
fyk=500; Asl giv./max=2.9/0
1. Permanent and temporary comb. (PC.1): G+QN, Final state
Relevant concrete internal forces from 8 sets of internal forces
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
Mx[kNm]
Qy[kN]
Qz[kN]
2
:
0.00
284.31
0.00
0.00
0.00
-30.79
Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces
Set
Combination
2
: 1.35*L1+1.50*L2+1.50*L3

384

Examples
Check of the shear reinforcement and the compressive struts
Action
max
Qy
Qz
Action
max
Qy
Qz

:
:

z
[m]
0.24
0.51

Q/
Angle VRdc
1.00 0.00
1.00 0.47

Asb.y
Asb.z
Asb.T
[cm/m] [cm/m] [cm/m]
0.00
.
.
.
2.63
.

:
:

z
[m]
0.24
0.51

Qy/
Angle VRdmax
1.00 0.00
1.00
.

Qz/
VRdmax
.
0.04

Mx/
TRdmax
.
.

Asl.T
[cm]
.
.

Q/VRd+
Mx/TRd
.
.

Asl
[cm]
2.90
2.90

Situation
-,PC.1,2

Check of crack widths

The check calculates the crack width directly.
(CC) Charact. (rare), (TC) Frequent, (QC) Quasi-continuous combination
wmax
ds
fct,eff
Sigma.c
wk
sr,max
Ac,eff
As,eff
Ap,eff
Sigma.s
kt

Permissible crack width as per specification [mm]

Maximal given steel diameter [mm]
Concrete strength at date of cracking [MN/m]
Maximal concrete edge stress in state I [MN/m]
Calculated value of crack width as per 7.3.4 [mm]
Calculated / given maximal crack spacing as per 7.3.4 (3) [mm]
Effective region of reinf. [m] acc. to Fig. 7.1
Reinforcing steel within Ac,eff [cm]
Prestressing steel with bond within Ac,eff [cm]
Reinf. steel stress in state II [MN/m]
Coefficient for the duration of load as per 7.3.4 (2)

Location 1
Beam 70, x = 0.00 m (Beam length 0.83 m)
Cross-section 2: Polygon - C30/37-EN
wmax=0.3; ds=10; fct,eff=2.9; kt=0.4
Section properties
gross :

A [m]
0.460

ys [m]
0.850

zs [m]
0.178

Iy [m4]
0.0107

Iz [m4]
0.0828

Iyz[m4]
0.0000

1. Quasi-continuous combination (QC.1): G+QN, Final state

:
0.00
:
107.92
:
0.00
:
4.25
: QC.1,2

kN
kNm
kNm
MN/m

As,eff
Ap,eff
Ac,eff
Sigma.s
sr,max
wk

: 11.19
:
.
:
0.023
: 175.61
: 119.23
:
0.09

cm
cm
m
MN/m
mm
per. 0.30 mm

Check of concrete compressive stress

For the check, a cracked concrete section (II) is assumed if the tensile stress
from the decisive c. exceeds the value of fctm. Otherwise, a non-cracked section
(I) is used. If the strain is not absorbable on cracked section, (I*) is marked.
fck
Sigma.x,min
Sigma.x,per
top, bottom

Characteristic compressive concrete strength [MN/m]

Total maximal longitudinal compressive stress [MN/m]
= 0,60*fck for Charact. C. (CC) as per 7.2 (2)
Position of the edge point: above, below of centre

Location 1
Beam 70, x = 0.00 m (Beam length 0.83 m)
Cross-section 2: Polygon - C30/37-EN
0.6*fck=18
Section properties
gross :

A [m]
0.460

ys [m]
0.850

zs [m]
0.178

Iy [m4]
0.0107

Iz [m4]
0.0828

Iyz[m4]
0.0000

1. Characteristic (rare) combination (CC.1): G+QN, Final state

Se.Pnt.
top
1
bottom
7

min Sigma.x
[MN/m]
(II) -6.58
(II)
0.00

per. Sigma.x
[MN/m]
-18.00
-18.00

Period

Situation

Final
Final

CC.1,2
CC.1,1

385

EN 1992-1-1 Design
Check of steel stress
For the check, a cracked concrete section is assumed.
Type S

Long. reinf. from N and M, layer number, Charact. C. (CC)

H_EN1992_VDach.fem
to determine the strain
state [MN/m]
Sigma.s,per = 0.80 * fyk resp. 1.0 * fyk (CK) as per 7.2 (5)

mente 7.00a
fck InfoGraph
Concrete GmbH
strength

- 03.03.2008 12:27:44 - Blatt 1

Location 1
Beam 70, x = 0.00 m (Beam length 0.83 m)
Cross-section 2: Polygon - C30/37-EN
fck=30; Steel 2; 0.8*fyk,t/b=400/400
Section properties
gross :

A [m]
0.460

ys [m]
0.850

zs [m]
0.178

Iy [m4]
0.0107

Iz [m4]
0.0828

Iyz[m4]
0.0000

1. Characteristic (rare) combination (CC.1): G+QN, Final state

Nx
[kN]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

My
[kNm]
69.95
69.95
196.53
196.53

Mz
[kNm]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

As
[cm]
0.00
0.00
5.60
5.60

Sigma.s
[MN/m]
.
.
319.92
319.92

per.
[MN/m]
400.00
400.00
400.00
400.00

Situation
CC.1,1
CC.1,1
CC.1,2
CC.1,2

Prestressed Roof Construction

This example involves the wide-spanned roof construction of an entrance hall that is represented as a continuous girder over
two spans with a double-sided cantilever. A T-beam is selected as the section. The figure below shows the system in
longitudinal and lateral section view.
Limited prestressing with subsequent bond is applied to the roof construction in the longitudinal direction. Prestressing in
the lateral direction is not applied for reasons of economy. The construction is designed to meet exposure class XC1.
According to Table 7.1N of the EN 1992-1-1, a decompression check is not necessary for this class.

Static system and dimensions (longitudinal and lateral section)

Material
Concrete

C45/55-EN

Reinforcing steel

BSt 500, axis distance from edge 5 cm

Section

386

Examples
Prestressing steel and prestressing system
Prestressing steel quality

St 1500/1770

Certification of the prestressing system

EC2

Number of tendons in the bundle

Section surface Ap

1800 mm

E-modulus of the prestressing steel

195000 MN/m

0.1% strain limit (yield strength) of the prestressing steel fp0.1k

1500 MN/m

Tensile strength of the prestressing steel fpk

1770 MN/m

Permissible prestressing force of a tendon Pm0

2295 kN

Friction coefficients when prestressing and releasing m

0.2

Unintentional deviation angle of a tendon

0.3 /m

Slippage at prestressing anchor

6 mm

Duct diameter dh

82 mm

Scattering coefficients of the internal prestressing

Construction stage (rsup / rinf )

1.1 / 0.9

Final state (rsup / rinf )

1.1 / 0.9

Tendon group ordinates zv [cm] at the base points

xv 0.00 6.40

12.80 19.20 25.60 32.00 38.40 44.80 51.20 57.60 64.00 70.40 76.80 83.20 89.60 96.00 102.40 108.80 115.20 121.60 128.00

1 70.0 52.0 19.2 42.0

120.2 180.1 208.8 201.5 157.4

78.3 18.5 78.3

157.4 201.5 208.8 180.1 120.2

42.0 19.2 52.0 70.0

Force function of tendon group 1 (4 tendon(s), l = 128.41 m)

Prestressing system 1 - Example. Certification according to EC2.
Pm0
= 2295.0 kN,
Ap = 1800.0 mm, a = 0.20, Angle ' = 0.30 /m
E-Modulus= 195000 MN/m, Ah = 5281.0 mm, n = 0.20, Slippage = 6.00 mm
Prestressing procedure 1 - Example
Pre. anchor
:
Start
End
Normal. force : 1.000 1.000
Pre. force [kN]: 2295.0 2295.0
Extension [mm]: 694.5
72.8

8079.4

7936.2

7814.6

7556.0

7814.6

7936.2

8079.4

8229.0

8373.7

8506.5

8623.2

8584.5

25.60

32.00

38.40

44.80

51.20

57.60

64.00

70.40

76.80

83.20

89.60

96.00

102.40

108.80

115.20 121.60

8337.3

8229.0

8452.6

8373.7

0.00 6.40 12.80 19.20

8506.5

8623.2

8584.5

8452.6

8337.3 [kN]

8717.5

128.00

xv
[m]

Tendon guide and prestressing curve in the longitudinal section (4 tendons).

387

EN 1992-1-1 Design
Loads
Load case 1
Load case 2
Load case 3
Load case 10
Load case 15
Load case 20

Dead load (G1).

Additional loads q=11.06 kN/m (G2).
Traffic load (snow load) q=7.90 kN/m (Q).
Prestressing (P).
Creep-generating permanent load: G1+P+G2
Creep and shrinkage (CSR).
Coefficients: jt = 2.55; r = 0.8; et = -24.8 10-5
Creep-generating permanent load case: 15
The redistribution of internal forces between concrete and prestressing steel are taken into account.

EN 1992-1-1 actions
Standard design group

G - Dead load
Gamma.sup / gamma.inf = 1.35 / 1
Load cases
1

Dead load

G - Additional dead load

Gamma.sup / gamma.inf = 1.35 / 1
Load cases
2

Additional dead load

P - Prestressing
Gamma.sup / gamma.inf = 1 / 1
Load cases internal prestressing
10

Prestressing

CSR1 - Creep, shrinkage, relaxation

Prestressing loss from relaxation of prestressed steel: 4.5 %.
Load cases
20

Creep, shrinkage

QS - Snow and ice load

Gamma.sup / gamma.inf = 1.5 / 0
Combination coefficients for: Superstructures
Snow load - Places in CEN member states with more than 1000 m above sea level
Psi.0 / Psi.1 / Psi.2 = 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.2
Load cases 1. Variante, inclusive
3

Snow load

388

Examples
1. Permanent and temporary situation - Structural cond.
Construction stage - Ungrouted
G
P

Dead load
Prestressing

Bending moment My [kNm]

2. Permanent and temporary situation - t0
Final state
G
G
P
QS

Dead load
Additional dead load
Prestressing
Snow and ice load

Bending moment My [kNm]

3. Permanent and temporary situation - too
Final state
G
Dead load
G
Additional dead load
P
Prestressing
CSR1 Creep, shrinkage, relaxation
QS Snow and ice load

Bending moment My [kNm]

Design overview
Se.

Expos.
class
XC4

1
(M)
(R)
(B)
(Q)
(T)
(S)
(P)
(C)

Prestress
of component
Subsequent bond

Reinforc.
M R B Q T
x x x x .

Fatig.
S P C
. . .

Crackwidth
x

Decomp.
.

Stress checks
Comp. S P
x
x x

Nominal reinforcement to guarantee robustness.

Dispersion of prestressing
The dispersion of prestressing is considered at the following checks:
- Check of decompression and concrete compressive stress
- Nominal reinforcement for crack width limitation, check of crack width
- Check of steel tensile stress
All other checks are made using the mean value Pm,t of prestressing.
Se.
1

Prestressing of
component
Subsequent bond

Const.period
r.sup r.inf
1.10
0.90

Final state
r.sup r.inf
1.10
0.90

389

EN 1992-1-1 Design
Settings for flexural and shear reinforcement
M,N
fyk
Theta
Slabs
Asl
Red.

Design mode for bend and longitudinal force:

Se. Concr.
1 C45/55-EN

Density
[kg/m]
.

Dsn.
M,N
ST

fyk
[MPa]
500

cot
Theta
2.50

Dsn.
Asl [cm]
like
Pic. 6.3
slabs given max
.
0.00
.

Red.
prestr.
.

Shear sections
bw.nom
h.nom
kb, kd
z1, z2
tef
B.
Se.
1

Nominal width of the prestressed section according to 6.2.3(6).

Eff. width
bn [m] kb
0.450 0.90

Height[m]
h
h.nom
2.300 2.300

Eff.height
d [m] kd
2.250 0.90

Torsion section [m]

z1
z2
tef B.
2.200 0.400 0.100 .

Settings for the check of crack widths

ds
Xi1
k
kt
Factor
sr,max
Se.
1

Maximal given bar diameter of the reinforcing steel.

Coeff.
sr,max
Xi1 k
kt
[mm]
0.38 0.65 0.4
.

fctm-Factor
As,min
wk
1.00 1.00

Combination for check

As,min
wk
as per class as per class

Settings for the check of concrete and steel stresses

fck(t)
Sigma.c(t)
Sigma.c
Sigma.s
(CC),(QC)
Se.
1

Compressive strength of concrete at the time t of prestressing.

Concrete compressive stress at the time t of prestressing.
Concrete compressive stress in the serviceability limit state.
Reinforcing steel stress in the serviceability limit state.
Characteristic, quasi-continuous combination.

fck(t)
[MN/m]
45.00

per.sigma.c(t)
per.sigma.c
(CC, QC)
(CC)
(QC)
0.45 fck(t)
0.60 fck
.

per.sigma.s
(CC)
0.80 fyk

Decompression
Stress
.

The following illustration shows the curve of the required bending and shear reinforcement.

Longitudinal reinforcement As from the design in the ultimate limit states [cm]
(upper reinforcement with dashed lines).

Minimum reinforcement As for ensuring robustness (ductility) [cm]

(upper reinforcement with dashed lines).

Reinforcement As for limiting the crack width [cm]

(upper reinforcement with dashed lines).

390

Examples

Enclosing reinforcement As from the checks [cm]

(upper reinforcement with dashed lines).

reinf. for robustness as per EN 1992-2, 6.1 (109) (Charact. C.)

Average centric concrete tensile strength [MN/m]
Lever arm of inner strengths top/bottom with zs=0,9*d [m]
Strength of longitudinal reinforcement top/bottom [MN/m]
Maximum concrete edge stress from Charact. C. [MN/m]
without the statically determined part of prestressing
(R) Nominal/requ. reinforcement as per 7.3.2 for crack width limitation
Increase of reinforcement due to crack width check is marked by "!".
wmax
Permissible crack width as per specification [mm]
ds
Maximal given steel diameter [mm]
k
Coefficient for consideration of non-linear distributed tensile stress
fct,eff Concrete strength at date of cracking [MN/m]
kc
Coefficient to consider stress distribution in tensile zone
as per Eq. (7.3), for rectangles per Eq. (7.2)
Ap'
Part of prestr. steel area Xi1*Ap which was used to reduce req.As
Xi1
Bond coefficient for prestressing steel as per Eq. (7.5)
max Sx Maximal concrete edge stress from action combination [MN/m]
(B) Design of reinforement at ultimate limit state
In case of dominant bending, compression reinforcement is marked with "*"
For section areas acc. to 6.1.(5) the conrecte strain is not limited
The minimum reinforcement acc. to 9.2.1.1 and 9.3.1.1 is not determined
For compressive members the minimum reinf. acc. to 9.5.2 is considered
fck
Concrete strength for design of reinforcement [MN/m]
N0, M0 Statically determined forces of tendons with bond [kN, kNm]
Location 2
Beam 16, x = 4.00 m (Beam length 4.00 m)
Cross-section 1: Polygon - C45/55-EN, 1 tendon group with bond
Steel 1; Design mode: Standard
(M) fctm=3.8; zs,t/b=2.025/2.025; fyk,t/b=500/500
(R) wmax=0.2; ds=20; k=0.65; fct,eff=3.8; Xi1=0.384
r.sup/inf(Constr.)=1.1/0.9; r.sup/inf(Final)=1.1/0.9
(B) fck=45
Section properties
gross :
net
:
ideally:

A [m]
2.926
2.905
2.958

ys [m]
3.950
3.950
3.950

zs [m]
0.525
0.527
0.521

Iy [m4]
1.2560
1.2535
1.2596

Iz [m4]
9.8822
9.8822
9.8822

Iyz[m4]
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000

Tendon groups with bond

No. E-Modul fp0,1k
fpk
[MN/m] [MN/m] [MN/m]
1 195000
1500
1770

y
[m]
3.950

z
[m]
0.185

Ap
[mm]
7200

Duct
d [mm]
82

Prestress
[kN]
7555.99

Inclin.
[]
0.00

1. Characteristic (rare) combination (CC.1): G.1+P, Construction stage ungrouted

Relevant concrete internal forces from 1 sets of internal forces
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
1
: -7555.93 -4040.19
0.00
Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces
Set
Combination
1
: L1+L10
2. Characteristic (rare) combination (CC.2): G.1+G.2+P+QS, Final state grouted
No set of internal forces in this situation was relevant.
3. Characteristic (rare) combination (CC.3): G.1+G.2+P+CSR1+QS, Final state grouted
Loss of prestress by CSR in tendon groups
No. CSR[%]
No. CSR[%]
No. CSR[%]
1
9.69
-.-.-

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

Stat. determ. part (P+CSR): Nx0=-6823.71 kN; My0=2320.06; Mz0=0.00 kNm

Relevant values from 2 sets of internal forces
Concrete section
Bond section
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
2
: -6714.15 -9384.61
0.00
109.56 -11704.67

Mz[kNm]
0.00

391

EN 1992-1-1 Design
Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces
Set
Combination
2
: L1+L2+0.96*L10+L20+L3
1. Frequent combination (TC.1): G.1+P, Construction stage ungrouted
No set of internal forces in this situation was relevant.
2. Frequent combination (TC.2): G.1+G.2+P+QS, Final state grouted
No set of internal forces in this situation was relevant.
3. Frequent combination (TC.3): G.1+G.2+P+CSR1+QS, Final state grouted
Relevant concrete internal forces from 4 sets of internal forces
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
2
: -6042.73 -9624.62
0.00 r.inf
Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces
Set
Combination
2
: L1+L2+0.96*L10+L20+0.50*L3
1. Permanent and temporary comb. (PC.1): G.1+P, Construction stage ungrouted
Relevant concrete internal forces from 2 sets of internal forces
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
2
: -7555.93 -4040.19
0.00
Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces
Set
Combination
2
: L1+L10
2. Permanent and temporary comb. (PC.2): G.1+G.2+P+QS, Final state grouted
No set of internal forces in this situation was relevant.
3. Permanent and temporary comb. (PC.3): G.1+G.2+P+CSR1+QS, Final state grouted
Loss of prestress by CSR in tendon groups
No. CSR[%]
No. CSR[%]
No. CSR[%]
1
9.69
-.-.-

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

Stat. determ. part (P+CSR): Nx0=-6823.71 kN; My0=2320.06; Mz0=0.00 kNm

Relevant values from 8 sets of internal forces
Concrete section
Bond section
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
2
: -6714.14 -16871.48
0.00
109.56 -19191.54

Mz[kNm]
0.00

Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces

Set
Combination
2
: 1.35*L1+1.35*L2+0.96*L10+L20+1.50*L3
Design of longitudinal reinforcement
Charact. c.: max Sc = 1.63 < 3.80 MN/m => no minimum crack reinf. required
Reinforcement Nx
Lay. Type
[kN]
1
M
109.56
R -6042.73
B -6714.14
2
M
109.56
R -6042.73
B -6714.14
3
M
0.06
R
0.00
B -7555.93
4
M
0.06
R
0.00
B -7555.93

My
[kNm]
-11704.67
-9624.62
-16871.48
-11704.67
-9624.62
-16871.48
-6609.23
0.00
-4040.19
-6609.23
0.00
-4040.19

Mz
max Sc
[kNm] [MN/m]
0.00
4.93
0.00
.
0.00
.
0.00
4.93
0.00
.
0.00
.
0.00
.
0.00
0.00
0.00
.
0.00
.
0.00
0.00
0.00
.

kc
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Ap'
[cm]
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

req.As
[cm]
44.91
25.54!
18.11
44.91
25.54!
18.11
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

Situation
CC.3,2
TC.3,2
PC.3,2
CC.3,2
TC.3,2
PC.3,2
CC.1,1
-,PC.1,2
CC.1,1
-,PC.1,2

Design of shear reinforcement

The percentage of nominal reinforcement acc. to Equ. (9.5N) is considered.
bw
bw.nom
bn
kb
h
h.nom
d
kd
Angle
Asl giv.
Qy, Qz
VRdc
VRdmax
z
Asb.y,z
Asl
Delta Ftd

392

Effective width for calculation of shear stresses from Qz and Mx [m]

Nominal value of the width when deducting the duct diameter [m]
Statically effective width for shear design using Qy [m]
Factor to calculate the inner lever arm from bn
Effective height for calculation of shear stresses from Qy and Mx [m]
Nominal value of the height when deducting the duct diameter [m]
Statically effective height for shear design using Qz [m]
Factor to calculate the inner lever arm from d
Angle cot Theta between the compressive strut and the beam axis
Chargeable longitudinal reinf. acc. to Fig. 6.3 [cm]
Lateral forces for design in y- and z-direction [kN]
Absorbable lat. force without lat. reinf. per 6.2.2 (1) [kN]
Absorbable lateral force of comp. struts per 6.2.3 (3) [kN]
Inner lever arm z=kb*bn resp. z=kd*d [m]
Req. stirrup reinforcement from Qy resp. Qz [cm/m]
Req. longitudinal reinf. acc. to Fig. 6.3 [cm] for req.Asb
Tensile force in long. reinf. from lateral force as per Eq. (6.18)

Examples
Location 2
Beam 16, x = 4.00 m (Beam length 4.00 m)
Cross-section 1: Polygon - C45/55-EN, 1 tendon group with bond
bw/bw.nom/bn/kb=0.5/0.5/0.45/0.9; h/h.nom/d/kd=2.3/2.3/2.25/0.9
fyk=500; Asl giv./max=0/0
1. Permanent and temporary comb. (PC.1): G.1+P, Construction stage ungrouted
No set of internal forces in this situation was relevant.
2. Permanent and temporary comb. (PC.2): G.1+G.2+P+QS, Final state grouted
Relevant concrete internal forces from 8 sets of internal forces
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
Mx[kNm]
Qy[kN]
Qz[kN]
2
: -7555.93 -15774.10
0.00
0.00
0.00 -3029.62
Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces
Set
Combination
2
: 1.35*L1+1.35*L2+L10+1.50*L3
3. Permanent and temporary comb. (PC.3): G.1+G.2+P+CSR1+QS, Final state grouted
Relevant concrete internal forces from 8 sets of internal forces
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
Mx[kNm]
Qy[kN]
Qz[kN]
2
: -6714.14 -16871.48
0.00
0.00
0.00 -3073.60
Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces
Set
Combination
2
: 1.35*L1+1.35*L2+0.96*L10+L20+1.50*L3
Check of the shear reinforcement and the compressive struts
Action
max
Qy
Qz
Action
max
Qy
Qz

:
:

z
[m]
0.41
2.02

Q/
Angle VRdc
2.50 0.00
2.50 3.95

Asb.y
Asb.z
Asb.T
[cm/m] [cm/m] [cm/m]
0.00
.
.
.
13.96
.

:
:

z
[m]
0.41
2.02

Qy/
Angle VRdmax
2.50 0.00
2.50
.

Qz/
VRdmax
.
0.55

Mx/
TRdmax
.
.

Asl.T
[cm]
.
.

Q/VRd+
Mx/TRd
.
.

Asl
[cm]
0.00
0.00

Situation
PC.2,2
PC.3,2

Delta Ftd
[kN]
0.00
3842.00

Situation
PC.2,2
PC.3,2

Check of crack widths

The check calculates the crack width directly.
(CC) Charact. (rare), (TC) Frequent, (QC) Quasi-continuous combination
wmax
ds
fct,eff
Sigma.c
wk
sr,max
Ac,eff
As,eff
Ap,eff
Sigma.s
kt
Xi1

Permissible crack width as per specification [mm]

Location 2
Beam 16, x = 4.00 m (Beam length 4.00 m)
Cross-section 1: Polygon - C45/55-EN, 1 tendon group with bond
wmax=0.2; ds=20; fct,eff=3.8; kt=0.4; Xi1=0.384
r.sup/inf(Constr.)=1.1/0.9; r.sup/inf(Final)=1.1/0.9
Section properties
gross :
net
:
ideally:

A [m]
2.926
2.905
2.958

ys [m]
3.950
3.950
3.950

zs [m]
0.525
0.527
0.521

Iy [m4]
1.2560
1.2535
1.2596

Iz [m4]
9.8822
9.8822
9.8822

Iyz[m4]
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000

Tendon groups with bond

No. E-Modul fp0,1k
fpk
[MN/m] [MN/m] [MN/m]
1 195000
1500
1770

y
[m]
3.950

z
[m]
0.185

Ap
[mm]
7200

Duct
d [mm]
82

Prestress
[kN]
7555.99

Inclin.
[]
0.00

1. Frequent combination (TC.1): G.1+P, Construction stage ungrouted

No set of internal forces in this situation was relevant.
2. Frequent combination (TC.2): G.1+G.2+P+QS, Final state grouted
No set of internal forces in this situation was relevant.
3. Frequent combination (TC.3): G.1+G.2+P+CSR1+QS, Final state grouted
Loss of prestress by CSR in tendon groups
No. CSR[%]
No. CSR[%]
No. CSR[%]
1
9.69
-.-.-

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

Stat.determ.part (P+CSR)*r.inf: Nx0=-6141.34 kN; My0=2088.05; Mz0=0.00 kNm

393

EN 1992-1-1 Design
Relevant values from 4 sets of internal forces
Concrete section
Bond section
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
2
: -6042.73 -9624.61
0.00
98.61 -11712.67

Mz[kNm]
0.00 r.inf

Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces

Set
Combination
2
: L1+L2+0.96*L10+L20+0.50*L3
Check of crack width for reinf. layer 1 (top)
Nx
My
Mz
Sigma.c
Situation

: -6042.73 kN
: -9624.61 kNm
:
0.00 kNm
:
1.96 MN/m
: TC.3,2

As,eff
Ap,eff
Ac,eff
Sigma.s
sr,max
wk

: 89.82
:
0.00
:
0.987
: 68.27
: 509.64
:
0.10

cm
cm
m
MN/m
mm
per. 0.20 mm

Check of concrete compressive stress

For the check, a cracked concrete section (II) is assumed if the tensile stress
from the decisive c. exceeds the value of fctm. Otherwise, a non-cracked section
(I) is used. If the strain is not absorbable on cracked section, (I*) is marked.
fck
fck(t)
Sigma.x,min
Sigma.x,per
top, bottom

Characteristic compressive concrete strength [MN/m]

Average compressive strength of concrete at time t of the beginning
of prestressing (Situation G+P) as per 5.10.2.2 (5) [MN/m]
Total maximal longitudinal compressive stress [MN/m]
= 0,60*fck for Charact. C. (CC) as per 7.2 (2)
Position of the edge point: above, below of centre

Location 2
Beam 16, x = 4.00 m (Beam length 4.00 m)
Cross-section 1: Polygon - C45/55-EN, 1 tendon group with bond
0.6*fck=27; 0.45*fck(t)=20.25
r.sup/inf(Constr.)=1.1/0.9; r.sup/inf(Final)=1.1/0.9
Section properties
gross :
net
:
ideally:

A [m]
2.926
2.905
2.958

ys [m]
3.950
3.950
3.950

zs [m]
0.525
0.527
0.521

Iy [m4]
1.2560
1.2535
1.2596

Iz [m4]
9.8822
9.8822
9.8822

Iyz[m4]
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000

Tendon groups with bond

No. E-Modul fp0,1k
fpk
[MN/m] [MN/m] [MN/m]
1 195000
1500
1770

y
[m]
3.950

z
[m]
0.185

Ap
[mm]
7200

Duct
d [mm]
82

Prestress
[kN]
7555.99

Inclin.
[]
0.00

1. Characteristic (rare) combination (CC.1): G.1+P, Construction stage ungrouted

Relevant concrete internal forces from 2 sets of internal forces
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
1
: -8311.52 -2805.65
0.00 r.sup
Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces
Set
Combination
1
: L1+L10
2. Characteristic (rare) combination (CC.2): G.1+G.2+P+QS, Final state grouted
No set of internal forces in this situation was relevant.
3. Characteristic (rare) combination (CC.3): G.1+G.2+P+CSR1+QS, Final state grouted
Loss of prestress by CSR in tendon groups
No. CSR[%]
No. CSR[%]
No. CSR[%]
1
9.69
-.-.-

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

Stat.determ.part (P+CSR)*r.inf: Nx0=-6141.34 kN; My0=2088.05; Mz0=0.00 kNm

Relevant values from 4 sets of internal forces
Concrete section
Bond section
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
2
: -6042.73 -10509.41
0.00
98.61 -12597.47

Mz[kNm]
0.00 r.inf

Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces

Set
Combination
2
: L1+L2+0.96*L10+L20+L3
Check of compressive stress in concrete for the Characteristic (rare) combination
Side

Se.Pnt.
top
2
bottom
9

394

min Sigma.x
[MN/m]
(I)
-1.68
(I) -16.88

per. Sigma.x
[MN/m]
-20.25
-27.00

Period

Situation

Constr.
Final

CC.1,1
CC.3,2

Examples
Check of steel stress
For the check, a cracked concrete section is assumed.
For tendon groups without bond and/or for situations before grouting,
the prestressing steel stress is checked acc. to Eq. (5.43).
Type S Long. reinf. from N and M, layer number, Charact. C. (CC)
Type P Prestressing steel, Tendon number, Charact. C. (CC)
N0, M0 Statically determined forces of tendons with bond [kN, kNm]
fck
Concrete strength to determine the strain state [MN/m]
Sigma.s,per = 0.80 * fyk resp. 1.0 * fyk (CK) as per 7.2 (5)
Sigma.p,per = 0.75 * fpk as per 7.2 (5)
Location 2
Beam 16, x = 4.00 m (Beam length 4.00 m)
Cross-section 1: Polygon - C45/55-EN, 1 tendon group with bond
fck=45; Steel 1; 0.8*fyk,t/b=400/400
r.sup/inf(Constr.)=1.1/0.9; r.sup/inf(Final)=1.1/0.9
Section properties
gross :
net
:
ideally:

A [m]
2.926
2.905
2.958

ys [m]
3.950
3.950
3.950

zs [m]
0.525
0.527
0.521

Iy [m4]
1.2560
1.2535
1.2596

Iz [m4]
9.8822
9.8822
9.8822

Iyz[m4]
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000

Tendon groups with bond

No. E-Modul fp0,1k
fpk
[MN/m] [MN/m] [MN/m]
1 195000
1500
1770

y
[m]
3.950

z
[m]
0.185

Ap
[mm]
7200

Duct
d [mm]
82

Prestress
[kN]
7555.99

Inclin.
[]
0.00

1. Characteristic (rare) combination (CC.1): G.1+P, Construction stage ungrouted

Relevant concrete internal forces from 2 sets of internal forces
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
1
: -8311.52 -2805.65
0.00 r.sup
Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces
Set
Combination
1
: L1+L10
2. Characteristic (rare) combination (CC.2): G.1+G.2+P+QS, Final state grouted
Loss of prestress by CSR : 0.00%
Stat.determ.part (P+CSR)*r.sup: Nx0=-8311.59 kN; My0=2825.94; Mz0=0.00 kNm
Relevant values from 4 sets of internal forces
Concrete section
Bond section
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
2
: -8311.52 -7052.69
0.00
0.07 -9878.63

Mz[kNm]
0.00 r.sup

Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces

Set
Combination
2
: L1+L2+L10+L3
3. Characteristic (rare) combination (CC.3): G.1+G.2+P+CSR1+QS, Final state grouted
Loss of prestress by CSR in tendon groups
No. CSR[%]
No. CSR[%]
No. CSR[%]
1
9.69
-.-.-

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

Stat.determ.part (P+CSR)*r.inf: Nx0=-6141.34 kN; My0=2088.05; Mz0=0.00 kNm

Relevant values from 4 sets of internal forces
Concrete section
Bond section
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
2
: -6042.73 -10509.41
0.00
98.61 -12597.47

Mz[kNm]
0.00 r.inf

Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces

Set
Combination
2
: L1+L2+0.96*L10+L20+L3
Check of steel stress
Steel
Type No.
S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
P
1

Nx
My
[kN]
[kNm]
-6042.73 -10509.41
-6042.73 -10509.41
-8311.52 -2805.65
-8311.52 -2805.65
-8311.52 -7052.69

Mz
[kNm]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

As
[cm]
44.91
44.91
0.00
0.00
72.00

Sigma.s
[MN/m]
92.95
92.94
.
.
1149.68

per.
[MN/m]
400.00
400.00
400.00
400.00
1327.50

Situation
CC.3,2
CC.3,2
CC.1,1
CC.1,1
CC.2,2

395

EN 1992-1-1 Design

Torsional Beam
The depicted cantilever is subjected to an eccentrically acting load F = 175 kN. The required shear, torsion longitudinal and
stirrup reinforcements are listed in the following log.

System drawing
Design according to EN 1992-1-1:2010
Settings for flexural and shear reinforcement
M,N
fyk
Theta
Slabs
Asl
Red.

Design mode for bend and longitudinal force:

Se. Concr.
1 C35/45-EN

Density
[kg/m]
.

Dsn.
M,N
.

fyk
[MPa]
500

cot
Theta
1.00

Dsn.
Asl [cm]
like
Pic. 6.3
slabs given max
.
0.00
.

Red.
prestr.
.

Shear sections
bw.nom
h.nom
kb, kd
z1, z2
tef
B.
Se.
1

Nominal width of the prestressed section according to 6.2.3(6).

Eff. width
bn [m] kb
0.245 0.90

Height[m]
h
h.nom
0.700
.

Eff.height
d [m] kd
0.645 0.90

Torsion section [m]

z1
z2
tef B.
0.590 0.190 0.110 .

Design of shear reinforcement

The percentage of nominal reinforcement acc. to Eq. (9.5N) is considered.
bw
bn
kb
h
d
kd
z1, z2
tef
Angle
Asl giv.
Qy, Qz
VRdc
VRdmax
z
Asb.y,z
Asl
Delta Ftd
Mx
TRdmax
Asb.T
Asl.T
fctd

Effective width for calculation of shear stresses from Qz and Mx [m]

Statically effective width for shear design using Qy [m]
Factor to calculate the inner lever arm from bn
Effective height for calculation of shear stresses from Qy and Mx [m]
Statically effective height for shear design using Qz [m]
Factor to calculate the inner lever arm from d
Height and width of the core section Ak for torsion [m]
Wall thickness of the torsion section [m]
Angle cot Theta between the compressive strut and the beam axis
Chargeable longitudinal reinf. acc. to Fig. 6.3 [cm]
Lateral forces for design in y- and z-direction [kN]
Absorbable lat. force without lat. reinf. per 6.2.2 (1) [kN]
Absorbable lateral force of comp. struts per 6.2.3 (3) [kN]
Inner lever arm z=kb*bn resp. z=kd*d [m]
Req. stirrup reinforcement from Qy resp. Qz [cm/m]
Req. longitudinal reinf. acc. to Fig. 6.3 [cm] for req.Asb
Tensile force in long. reinf. from lateral force as per Eq. (6.18)
Torsional moment for design [kNm]
Maximum absorbable torsional moment as per 6.3.2 (4) [kNm]
Req. stirrup reinforcement from torsion [cm/m]
Req. longitudinal reinforcement from torsion [cm]
Design value of the tensile strength for TRd,c in Equ. (6.31) [MN/m]

Location 1
Beam 1, x = 0.00 m (Beam length 2.00 m)
Cross-section 1: Polygon - C35/45-EN
Block section z1/z2=0.59/0.19; tef=0.11; fctd=1.49333

396

Examples
1. Permanent and temporary comb. (PC.1): G, Final state
Concrete internal
Nx[kN]
Nx- :
0.00
Nx+ :
0.00
My- :
0.00
My+ :
0.00
Mz- :
0.00
Mz+ :
0.00
Mx- :
0.00
Mx+ :
0.00
Qy- :
0.00
Qy+ :
0.00
Qz- :
0.00
Qz+ :
0.00

forces
My[kNm]
-350.00
-350.00
-472.50
-350.00
-350.00
-350.00
-350.00
-472.50
-350.00
-350.00
-350.00
-472.50

Mz[kNm]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

Mx[kNm]
35.00
35.00
47.25
35.00
35.00
35.00
35.00
47.25
35.00
35.00
35.00
47.25

Qy[kN]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

Qz[kN]
175.00
175.00
236.25
175.00
175.00
175.00
175.00
236.25
175.00
175.00
175.00
236.25

Check of the shear reinforcement and the compressive struts

Action
max, cor.
Qy, Mx
:
Mx, Qy
:
Qz, Mx
:
Mx, Qz
:

z
[m]
0.22
0.22
0.58
0.58

Angle
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00

Q/
VRdc
0.00
0.00
3.04
3.04

Action
max
Qy
:
Qz
:
Mx
:
Qy "+" Mx:
Qz "+" Mx:

z
[m]
0.22
0.58
.
0.22
0.58

Qy/
Angle VRdmax
1.00 0.00
1.00
.
1.00
.
1.00 0.00
1.00
.

Asb.y
Asb.z
Asb.T
[cm/m] [cm/m] [cm/m]
0.00
.
3.59
0.00
.
4.85
.
9.36
4.85
.
9.36
4.85
Qz/
VRdmax
.
0.23
.
.
0.23

Mx/
TRdmax
.
.
0.32
0.32
0.32

Asl.T
[cm]
5.60
7.56
7.56
7.56

Q/VRd+
Mx/TRd
.
.
.
0.32
0.54

Asl
[cm]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

Situation
-,PC.1,Qz+
PC.1,Qz+
PC.1,Qz+

Delta Ftd
[kN]
0.00
118.13
.
.
.

Situation
-,PC.1,Qz+
PC.1,Qz+
PC.1,Qz+
PC.1,Qz+

Single Design Reinforced Concrete

A single rectangular section is designed under bending and normal force.
Pos. 1 - Reinforced concrete design per EN 1992-1-1: 2010
Section 1

0.600

Sc. = 1 : 20
Pressure

2
2

3
0.300

Action
Resistance
Force system
Strength
Design mode
Reinforcement
Remark
Concrete section
Point
y [m]
1

N = 10.00 kN; My = 67.50; Mz = 27.00 kNm

N = 10.00 kN; My = 67.50; Mz = 27.00 kNm
ys / zs = 0.150 / 0.300 m
C25/30-EN; gamma.c = 1.50; gamma.s = 1.15
Standard
3.51 cm; 0.19 %; Concrete area = 1800.00 cm
The concrete compression cannot be checked according to Chapter 6.1 (5).
The minimum reinforcement acc. to Chapter 9.2.1.1 (9.1N) is not included.
z [m]

eps[] sigma[MPa]

0.000
0.107
0.300
0.300
0.000
0.000

0.000
0.000
0.000
0.600
0.600
0.242

-3.50
0.00
6.31
14.98
5.18
0.00

-16.67
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

Reinforcement
Point
y [m]

z [m]

d1 [m]

Es, s [MPa]

0.050
0.050
0.550
0.550

0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050

2
3
4

1
2
3
4

0.050
0.250
0.250
0.050

200000
200000
200000
200000

500
500
500
500

Inner
Forces
Compr.
Tension
Lev. arm

Zv0 [kN]
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0

y [m]

z [m]

F [kN]

0.030
0.212
0.181

0.069
0.518
0.449

-145.43
155.43

eps[] sigma[MPa]
-1.14
5.40
12.63
6.09

-228.48
437.85
444.74
438.51

As [cm]
0.00
0.23
2.60
0.68

397

EN 1992-1-1 Design

Single Design Prestressed Concrete

In this example the results of the prestressed concrete design according to EN 1992-1-1 of the example Prestressed roof
construction shall be reproduced using the single design according to EN 1992-1-1.
The values relevant for the design can be taken from the detailed listing for beam 16 at location 2 (middle column) of the
example.
Location 2
Beam 16, x = 4.00 m (Beam length 4.00 m)
Cross-section 1: Polygon - C45/55-EN, 1 tendon group with bond
Steel 1; Design mode: Standard
Tendon groups with bond
No. E-Modul fp0,1k
fpk
[MN/m] [MN/m] [MN/m]
1 195000
1500
1770

y
[m]
3.950

z
[m]
0.185

Ap
[mm]
7200

Duct
d [mm]
82

Prestress
[kN]
7555.99

Inclin.
[]
0.00

3. Permanent and temporary comb. (PC.3): G.1+G.2+P+CSR1+QS, Final state grouted

Loss of prestress by CSR in tendon groups
No. CSR[%]
No. CSR[%]
No. CSR[%]
1
9.69
-.-.-

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

No.

CSR[%]
-.-

Stat. determ. part (P+CSR): Nx0=-6823.71 kN; My0=2320.06; Mz0=0.00 kNm

Relevant values from 8 sets of internal forces
Concrete section
Bond section
Set
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Mz[kNm]
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
2
: -6714.15 -16871.48
0.00
109.56 -19191.54

Mz[kNm]
0.00

Load case combinations for the relevant sets of internal forces

Set
Combination
2
: 1.35*L1+1.35*L2+0.96*L10+L20+1.50*L3
Design of longitudinal reinforcement
Charact. c.: max Sc = 1.63 < 3.80 MN/m => no minimum crack reinf. required
Reinforcement Nx
My
Lay. Type
[kN]
[kNm]
1
B -6714.15 -16871.48
2
B -6714.15 -16871.48
3
B -7555.93 -4040.19
4
B -7555.93 -4040.19

Mz
max Sc
[kNm] [MN/m]
0.00
.
0.00
.
0.00
.
0.00
.

kc
.
.
.
.

Ap'
[cm]
.
.
.
.

req.As
[cm]
18.11
18.11
0.00
0.00

Situation
PC.3,2
PC.3,2
PC.1,2
PC.1,2

Calculation procedure for the check program:

1.
2.
3.

The statically determined part of prestressing with creep and shrinkage

((P + CSR) cos a centroid distance) is subtracted from the concrete internal forces.
From this the bond internal forces result (statically undetermined part of P + CSR with the internal forces from outer
loads).
The design is carried out with the bond internal forces. Thereby the prestressing steel together with the loss of
prestressing from CSR is taken into account on the resistance side.

Single Design according to EN 1992-1-1

1.
2.

For the single design a new section with an additional steel layer at the position of the tendon is necessary. For this
purpose section 1 is initially copied to get section 2.
Subsequently the new steel layer is added to section 2. The values E, fyk = fP0,1k, y, z and As = Ap for the check
location can be found in the listing. For the prestressing force Zv0 the absolute value of the statically determined part

Nx0 from the listing is entered.

Reinforcement of beam elements 2

1
2
3
4
5

E-Modulus
[MN/m]

fyk
[MN/m]

210000
210000
210000
210000
195000

500
500
500
500
1500

y
[m]

z
[m]

As
[cm]

0.050
7.850
4.150
3.750
3.950

0.050
0.050
2.250
2.250
0.185

0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
72.000

The e-modulus is used for prestressed steel layers only.

y, z
coordinates of reinforcement
As
Base reinforcement
Zv0
Prestressing force of a prestressed steel layer

398

Zv0
[kN]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
6823.71

Examples
3.

The bond internal forces with the statically undetermined part of P + CSR are necessary for the single design. They
can also be taken from the listing.

Pos. 1 - Reinforced concrete design per EN 1992-1-1: 2010

Section 2

10 S

5
6

2.300

Sc. = 1 : 75
Pressure

4
5

7.900
Action
Resistance
Force system
Strength
Design mode
Reinforcement
Remark
Concrete section
Point
y [m]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

N = 109.56 kN; My = -19191.54; Mz = 0.00 kNm

N = 109.56 kN; My = -19191.54; Mz = 0.00 kNm
ys / zs = 3.950 / 0.525 m
C45/55-EN; gamma.c = 1.50; gamma.s = 1.15
Standard
108.24 cm; 0.37 %; Concrete area = 29260.00 cm
The concrete compression cannot be checked according to Chapter 6.1 (5).
The minimum reinforcement acc. to Chapter 9.2.1.1 (9.1N) is not included.
z [m]

eps[] sigma[MPa]

-0.000
0.000
3.700
4.200
7.900
7.900
4.200
4.200
4.200
3.700
3.700
3.700

0.240
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.240
0.240
1.405
2.300
2.300
1.405
0.240

4.56
5.49
5.49
5.49
5.49
4.56
4.56
0.00
-3.50
-3.50
0.00
4.56

0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
-30.00
-30.00
0.00
0.00

Reinforcement
Point
y [m]

z [m]

d1 [m]

Es,fyk [MPa]

0.050
0.050
2.250
2.250
0.185

0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.185

8
9
10

1
2
3
4
5

0.050
7.850
4.150
3.750
3.950

200000
200000
200000
200000
195000

500
500
500
500
1500

Inner
Forces
Compr.
Tension
Lev. arm

Zv0 [kN]
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
6823.7

y [m]

z [m]

F [kN]

3.950
3.950
0.000

1.928
0.165
1.762

-10868.30
10977.86

eps[] sigma[MPa]
5.30
5.30
-3.30
-3.30
4.77

437.76
437.76
-435.86
-435.86
1304.35

As [cm]
18.12
18.12
0.00
0.00
72.00

399

EN 1992-1-1 Design

References
DIN EN 1990/NA/A1:2012-08
Nationaler Anhang National festgelegte Parameter
(National Annex Nationally Determined Parameters)
Eurocode: Grundlagen der Tragwerksplanung; nderung A1.
(Eurocode: Basis of Structural Design; Amendment A1)
Publisher: DIN Deutsches Institut fr Normung e. V., Berlin.
Beuth Verlag, Berlin 2012.
DIN EN 1992-1-1/NA:2013-04
Nationaler Anhang National festgelegte Parameter
(National Annex Nationally Determined Parameters)
Eurocode 2: Bemessung und Konstruktion von Stahlbeton- und Spannbetontragwerken
Teil 1-1: Allgemeine Bemessungsregeln und Regeln fr den Hochbau.
(Design of Concrete Structures - Part 1-1: General Rules and Rules for Buildings).
Publisher: DIN Deutsches Institut fr Normung e.V., Berlin.
Beuth Verlag, Berlin 2013.
EN 1990:2002/A1:2005/AC:2010
Eurocode: Basics of Structural Design
Publisher: CEN European Committee for Standardization, Brussels.
Beuth Verlag, Berlin 2010.
EN 1991-1-1:2002
Eurocode 1: Actions on Structures
Part 1-1: General Actions. Densities, Self-Weight, Imposed Loads for Buildings
Publisher: CEN European Committee for Standardization, Brussels.
Beuth Verlag, Berlin 2002.
EN 1992-1-1:2004/AC:2010
Eurocode 2: Design of Concrete Structures
Part 1-1: General Rules and Rules for Buildings
Publisher: CEN European Committee for Standardization, Brussels.
Beuth Verlag, Berlin 2010.
EN 1992-2:2005/AC:2008
Eurocode 2: Design of Concrete Structures
Part 2: Concrete Bridges - Design and Detailing Rules
Publisher: CEN European Committee for Standardization, Brussels.
Beuth Verlag, Berlin 2010.
EN 1998-1:2004
Eurocode 8: Design of Structures for Earthquake Resistance
Part 1: General Rules, Seismic Actions and Rules for Buildings
Publisher: CEN European Committee for Standardization, Brussels.
Beuth Verlag, Berlin 2006.
Fingerloos, F.; Hegger, J.; Zilch, K.
Eurocode 2 fr Deutschland (Eurocode 2 for Germany).
DIN EN 1992-1-1 Bemessung und Konstruktion von Stahlbeton- und Spannbetontragwerken
Teil 1-1: Allgemeine Bemessungsregeln und Regeln fr den Hochbau mit Nationalem Anhang.
(Design of Concrete Structures - Part 1-1: General Rules and Rules for Buildings with National Annex).
Kommentierte Fassung. 1. Auflage 2012. Berichtigungen, Ergnzungen, Austauschseiten September 2013.
(Commented version. 1st edition 2012. Corrections, additions, replacement pages September 2013).
Beuth Verlag, Berlin 2012.
Heft 466 - Grundlagen und Bemessungshilfen fr die Rissbreitenbeschrnkung im Stahlbeton und Spannbeton.
(Book 466 - Principles and Design Aids for Crack Width Limitation in Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete)
Publisher: Deutscher Ausschuss fr Stahlbeton, Berlin.
Beuth Verlag, Berlin 1996.
Heft 600 - Erluterungen zu DIN EN 1992-1-1 und DIN EN 1992-1-1/NA (Eurocode 2).
(Book 600 - Notes to EN 1992-1-1 and EN 1992-1-1/NA (Eurocode 2) )
Publisher: Deutscher Ausschuss fr Stahlbeton, Berlin.
Beuth Verlag, Berlin 1996.

400

References
OENORM B 1990-1:2013-01
Eurocode: Grundlagen der Tragwerksplanung
Nationale Festlegungen zu NORM EN 1990 und nationale Ergnzung.
(Basics of Structural Design - National Specifications for OENORM EN 1990 and National Supplements)
Publisher: ON sterreichisches Normungsinstitut, Vienna.
sterreichisches Normungsinstitut, Vienna 2013.
OENORM B 1992-1-1:2011-12
Eurocode 2: Bemessung und Konstruktion von Stahlbeton und Spannbetontragwerken
Teil 1-1: Allgemeine Bemessungsregeln und Regeln fr den Hochbau
Nationale Festlegungen zu NORM EN 1991-1-1, nationale Erluterungen und nationale Ergnzungen.
(Design of Concrete Structures Part 1-1: General Rules and Rules for Buildings
National Specifications for OENORM EN 1992-1-1, National Comments and National Supplements)
Publisher: ON sterreichisches Normungsinstitut, Vienna.
sterreichisches Normungsinstitut, Vienna 2011.
SS EN 1990:2011-04
Application of SS EN 1990.
Statue Book of the Swedish Board of Housing, Building and Planning.
Publisher: Swedish Board of Housing, Building and Planning (Boverket).
Karlskrona 2011.
SS EN 1992-1-1:2011-04
Application of SS EN 1992-1-1.
Statue Book of the Swedish Board of Housing, Building and Planning.
Publisher: Swedish Board of Housing, Building and Planning (Boverket).
Karlskrona 2011.
Zilch, K.; Rogge, A.
Bemessung der Stahlbeton- und Spannbetonbauteile nach DIN 1045-1.
(Design of Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete Components According to DIN 1045-1)
Betonkalender 2002, V. 1, pp. 217-359.
Ernst & Sohn Verlag, Berlin 2002.
Zilch, K.; Zehetmaier, G.
Bemessung im konstruktiven Betonbau nach DIN 1045-1 und EN 1992-1-1.
(Design in Concrete Structure Engineering According to DIN 1045-1 and EN 1992-1-1)
Springer-Verlag, Berlin 2006.

401

OENORM B 4700 Design

Basics
The reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete design as specified in OENORM B 4700, B 4750 and B 4753 is applicable
for both building and bridge structures. Permitted structure models include 2D and 3D beam and area constructions.
Prestressed structures can only be checked in the FEM module.
Differing components can be combined in a Structure model:

Non-prestressed components
Prestressed components with subsequent bond
Prestressed components without bond
Components with external prestressing
Mixed-construction components

The design is carried out after the static calculation. As a part of this process, the calculated load cases are combined into
logical action groups. The program will take into account the preset safety factors and combination coefficients for the
defined action combinations to automatically calculate the decisive design internal forces for either the entire system or a
group of selected elements.
The actions and check selection dialogs can be opened from the analysis settings. Detailed check specifications and
reinforcement data must be entered during section definition.
The checks are limited to elements with materials C16/20 to C50/60, NB40 and the general material type NBeton.
For beams and design objects, all checks are carried out at the polygon section. For general notes on using design objects,
refer to the relevant chapter in the manual.
In the OENORM B 4700 Design folder of the database you can also perform a single design for user-defined section
polygons or composite sections.
The following paragraphs primarily cite the guidelines of standards B 4700 and B 4750. Reference to OENROM B 4753 is
only made if it contains a different or complementary rule.

402

Input

Input
Actions and Design Situations
The design values of the load are calculated based on the internal forces of individual load cases and load case
combinations. For this the existing load cases and load case combinations must be assigned to actions. These actions are
then used to establish the desired action combinations.
The following dialog is opened from the database or the Settings in the Analysis menu.

Action...
Open the dialog for entering new actions:
Permanent actions (G, GE, GH)

Prestressing (P)

Creep and shrinkage, relaxation (CSR1, CSR2)

These actions are only available if a P action has been defined. In the combinations they are treated, along with P, as a
single action.
Variable actions (QN, QS, QW, QT, QH, QD)

Accidental actions (A)

Design values of actions (Fd)

These actions already contain the partial safety factors and combination coefficients. They are combined exclusively.
Group...
Open the dialog for entering a new design group. Optionally, particular actions and action combinations can be defined for
specific components (sections).
Situation...
Open the dialog for entering new action combinations. The combination must be classified as either a construction stage or
a final state before starting any corresponding checks. For prestressed concrete structures with subsequent bond, you can
specify that the tendons are still ungrouted.
Edit
Open the Edit dialog for the selected action or combination.
Delete
Delete the selected action or combination.
Combinations...
Opens a dialog that contains the first 999 load case variants to be combined for the selected design situation and includes
an option to create load groups for selected variants. These variants can be used for second-order theory analysis or
nonlinear analysis.

403

OENORM B 4700 Design

Calculate
Calculate the defined action combinations. Once calculated, the extremal results (internal forces, support reactions) can be
accessed for all combinations in the database. This allows you to evaluate the results without having to execute the
checking module. Each time you execute the checking module, all results will be automatically recalculated using the
currently valid actions and then stored in the database for the elements to be checked.
The following table demonstrates how the action combinations are used in the various checks. The numbers refer to the
chapters of the standards.
Situation
Fundamental,
Accidental

Ultimate limit state

Longitudinal reinf.
Lateral reinf.
Torsional reinf.

Characteristic
(rare)

Frequent

B4700
3.4.2
3.4.4
3.4.6

Concrete compr. stress

Reinforcing steel stress
Prestressing steel stress
Decompression Class A
Crack width Class B
Crack width Class C
Robustness reinf.
Decompression Class B
Crack width Class C
Crack width Class D
Concrete compr. stress
Prestressing steel stress
Decompression Class C
Crack width Class E
Deformations

Quasicontinuous

Fatigue

Serviceability limit state

Concrete
Reinforcing steel
Prestressing steel

4.2
4.3

B4750
12.2
12.3
12.4
11.4.5(1)
11.4.5(3)
11.4.5(4)
11.3
11.5
12.5
11.3
11.5
11.5
11.4.5(2)
11.4.5(4)
11.3
11.5
11.6

B4753
12.2
12.3
12.4
11.4.2(1)
11.4.2(7)
11.4.2(4)
11.3
11.5
11.5
12.5
11.3
11.5
11.4.2(2)
11.4.2(5)
11.3
11.5
11.6
13.2
13.3-4
13.3

Definition of an Action
The illustration below shows an example of the dialog field for entering variable actions. The dialog fields for the other
action types have a similar appearance.

Label
User-defined label for the action.

404

Input
Gamma.sup, Gamma.inf
Partial safety factors gsup and ginf.
Combination coefficients psi for:
Input fields for selecting the combination coefficients for variable actions. The
button allows you to view and modify the
selected combination coefficients y0, y1 and y2. Depending on the selection, the values according to B 4750, table 5, or
B 4753, table 4, will apply.
Load cases
List of possible load cases or load case combinations. You can choose an item from the list by selecting it and then clicking
the corresponding button or by using drag & drop.
Multi-select
Load cases and combinations can be added to the actions more than once.
Exclusive variants
Variable actions may consist of multiple exclusive variants that are mutually exclusive. The variants themselves contain both
inclusive and exclusive parts. You can add or delete action variants by clicking the

buttons.

Inclusive load cases

Selected load cases and combinations that can have a simultaneous effect.
Exclusive load cases
Selected load cases and combinations that exclude each other.
Prestressing loss from relaxation of prestressing steel
The prestressing loss is defined as a constant percentage reduction of prestress.
CS as constant reduction of prestress
As an alternative to defining CS load cases, you can allow for the effect of creep and shrinkage by defining a constant
percentage reduction of prestress.
Internal prestressing
Selected load cases that describe internal prestressing. The reactions of the individual load cases are added together.
External prestressing
Selected load cases that describe external prestressing. The reactions of the individual load cases are added together.

Partial Safety Factors

The partial safety factors of the construction materials are preset with the default values specified by OENORM B 4700,
Tables 1 and 2, and can be modified if necessary. In version 6.12 or higher, the partial safety factors for actions are specified
when defining the actions. These factors appear in the Partial Safety Factors dialog for compatibility reasons only and
therefore cannot be modified.

405

OENORM B 4700 Design

Section Input
The section inputs contain all of the specific settings made for checks in the ultimate limit and serviceability states. An
overview of the design settings can be accessed in the OENORM B 4700 Design section of the database.

Prestress of component
The type of prestressing can be selected for each section separately:
not prestressed

subsequent bond

without bond

external

mixed construction

Reqirement class
The check conditions for the decompression and crack width check are defined in OENORM B 4750, Chapter 3.7.3, Table 1,
based on requirement classes A through F. OENORM B 4700 makes no reference to requirement classes, but instead defines
the serviceability checks for the quasi-continuous combination. This check corresponds to a requirement class E
classification.

406

Input

Base Values
The base values apply for ultimate limit state and serviceability checks.

Design mode
Standard: Standard design mode for bending with normal force throughout the load range. Reinforcement will be

calculated in the tensile section to the greatest degree possible.

Symmetrical: Design for symmetrical reinforcement. As opposed to the standard mode, all of the reinforcement layers

reinforcement according to OENORM B 4700, Chapter 3.4.9.2, Eq. (60).

Alternative concrete
This value is necessary to perform a design according to the standard if the material type Beton or NBeton are selected.
Effective height
Effective static height for the shear design of area elements [m].
Truss angle tan
Concrete strut angle according to OENORM B 4700, Chapter 3.4.4.2 (7).
50 % of the biggest bottom reinforcement is unbroken up to support
Setting for components without diagonal tensile reinforcement (e.g., slabs) according to B 4700, Chap. 3.4.4.4.
Chargeable bending reinforcement according to picture 23
Bending reinforcement to be added according to OENORM B 4700, Figure 23 [cm].
Quality of stirrups
420S: Reinforcing steel BSt 420 according to OENORM B 4200-7 and B 4700, Tab. 5

500S: Reinforcing steel BSt 500 according to OENORM B 4200-7 and B 4700, Tab. 5

500M: Reinforcing steel M 500 according to OENORM B 4200-7 and B 4700, Tab. 5

General: User-definable steel quality [MN/m].

Design like slabs

Beams or design objects are treated like slabs.

407

OENORM B 4700 Design

Shear Section
For polygon sections, additional section dimensions are required for the lateral force and torsion design according to
OENORM. These dimensions are explained in the following.

408

Input

Stresses

Concrete compressive stresses

The concrete compressive stress sc must be limited to 0.60fck under the rare (characteristic) action combination according
to OENORM B 4750, Chapter 11.4.5 (1). According to OENORM B 4753, Eq. (12), for uniaxial bending sc must be limited to

0.55fck. To prevent disproportionate creep deformations, you should also maintain the limit 0.45fck under the quasicontinuous action combination as per B 4750, Chapter 11.4.5 (2).
Reinforcing steel stresses
The concrete steel stress ss must be limited to 0.80fyk under the rare (characteristic) action combination as per OENORM
B 4750, Chapter 11.4.5 (3). A limitation to 0.70fyk is required according to Eq. (18) of OENORM B 4753.
Decompression, Stress
Decisive stress for the decompression check for area elements (s1, sx, sy).
Decompression, Concrete tensile strength
Decisive tensile strength for the check of concrete tensile stresses during construction stages according to OENORM B 4750,
Chapter 3.7.5, and B 4753, Chapter 11.4.2(3).

409

OENORM B 4700 Design

Crack Width
These specifications apply to the minimum crack reinforcement calculation and the crack width check through beam
diameter limitation.

wk
Calculation value of the crack width according to OENORM B 4700, Tables 8a and 8b or 9 and 10 [mm]. If this value
deviates from the default values 0.15 mm or 0.30 mm, the program interpolates between the tables.
max. ds
Largest existing bar diameter of the reinforcing steel reinforcement according to OENORM B 4700, Chapter 4.2.3 (3) [mm].
Action combinations acc. to B 4753
For railway bridges the action combinations according to OENORM B 4753, Table 1, are decisive. It provides the use of the
rare combination for requirement class C instead of the frequent combination as described in B 4750.
Determination of the concrete tensile zone
You can specify the tensile section where the minimum crack reinforcement as per OENORM B 4700, Chapter 4.2.2 will be
placed by selecting either an action combination (AC) or a restraint (bending, centrical tension).
Coefficient kp
The bond coefficient kp according to OENORM B 4750, Chapter 11.5 (6), defines the extent to which prestressing steel as
per Chapter 11.5 (5) can be taken into account for the minimum crack reinforcement. Data input is blocked for area
elements since prestressing steel is normally not taken into account here.
Reduction coeff.
This factor allows you to group all of the reductions of reinforcement level rt according to OENORM B 4700, Chapter 4.2.2,
Sections (5) through (7).

410

Input

Fatigue

dSigma.Rsk,s
Permissible characteristic stress range DsRsk of the longitudinal reinforcement and shear reinforcement according to
OENORM B 4753, Chapter 13.3 / 13.4 [MN/m]. The value specified in Chapter 13.3 (3) is suggested in the dialog.
dSigma.Rsk,p
Permissible characteristic stress range DsRsk of the prestressing steel according to OENORM B 4753, Chapter 13.3 (4)
[MN/m]. The value for tendons in steel ducts is suggested in the dialog.
Limit design variants
For area elements, the variants for determining the stress range can be limited to the corresponding sets of design internal
forces. For more information see chapter 'Fatigue Checks / Special Characteristic for Shell Structures'.

411

OENORM B 4700 Design

Analysis Settings
The OENORM B 4700 dialog page can be opened using the Settings function of the Analysis menu.

Fatigue
Crack width

Bend and longitudinal force

Lateral force
Torsion
Robustness
Fatigue for concrete
Fatigue for reinforcing and prestressed steel
Minimum crack reinforcement
Crack width

An overview of the checks can be accessed using the Design Settings function in the OENORM B 4700 Design folder of the
database.
All checks for the extreme values of actions (simplifying)
When you make a selection, the minimum and maximum values are generated for each internal force component. They will
then be used together with their associated values to execute the design. Alternatively, all possible combinations of load
cases can be generated and designed as well. This option can, however, greatly slow down calculation if there is a large
number of load cases.
Actions...
Open the dialog for describing actions.
Partial safety factors...
Open the dialog for modifying partial safety factors.

412

Input
Listing
No: No log is generated by the checking program.

Standard: Log with tabular output of results.

Detailed: Additional output of the decisive combination internal forces at the check locations.

Standard > permissible: Standard log limited to check locations where the permissible limit values are exceeded.

Detailed > permissible: Detailed log limited to check locations where the permissible limit values are exceeded.

Single Design
The single design function allows you to analyze individual section polygons separately from the whole system using
predefined internal forces. The following data needs to be entered in the Single Design table, which is located in the
OENORM B 4700 Design folder of the database.
Section
Number of the section to be designed.
fck
Concrete strength according to OENORM B 4700, Table 4 [MN/m].
Combination
Combination according to OENORM B 4700, Table 1.
0: Fundamental combination

1: Accidental combination

Nsd, Mysd, Mzsd

Longitudinal design force [kN], bending design moments around the y and z axes [kNm].
Mode
Standard: Standard design for bending with longitudinal force.

Symmetrical: Design for symmetrical reinforcement.

Compression member: Compression member design.

Inactive: Design disabled.

Strains: Determine the strain state for existing reinforcing steel layers.

Strains SLS: Determine strain state in the serviceability limit state for existing reinforcing steel layers. A linear strain
stress curve of the concrete is used in the compression zone to determine the strain state.
The calculation can be carried out while the input table is open using the Single Design or Page Preview menu item.

413

OENORM B 4700 Design

Punching Shear Check

When you select a check node, the key data for the checks is displayed in a dialog field. This field is divided into four
sections.
1. Column
The column forms Rectangle, Round and General with the viewpoints Intern, Edge in x-direction, Edge in y-direction and
Corner are available. When you enter a new column, the program will suggest the dimensions of existing columns. The
edge distances ax and ay are used to calculate the circumference u of the critical perimeter. When selecting the column
form General, you must enter the circumference u.
2. Slab
This section shows the material properties, the existing bending reinforcement for calculating the reinforcement level r, and
additional coefficients for calculating the punching resistances.
3. Action
You can either add a support force from a previous design according to OENORM or enter an action directly. All bedding
forces reduce the design value of the lateral force.
4. Results
This section shows the calculated punching resistances, the necessary punching reinforcement (if applicable) and the
minimum bending reinforcement. You can call up an improved bending reinforcement by clicking the Proposal... button.
Example

Punching shear check node 1659

Check per OENORM B 4700 edition: 2001-06-01, section 3.4.5.
1. Measurements, situation and material
Rectangular column with width bx = 0.24 m and height by = 0.24 m
Situation: Inside column; ke = 1.15
Critical perimeter u = 2.56 m
Effective height of the slab dx = 0.170 m; dy = 0.170 m
Available longitudinal reinforcement asx = 6.00 cm/m; asy = 6.00 cm/m
Truss angle a = 90.0; Span length l = 4.00 m; ks = 0.50

414

Input
Concrete: C20/25; gc = 1.50
Reinforcement: BSt 550; gs = 1.15
2. Action
VSd = 208.98 kN from fundamental combination
VSd,max = 240.32 kN
3. Punching resistance without punching reinforcement

VRdc = 1,2 t d k c (1,2 + 2000

with

td = 0.24 N/mm

1
r) u d
l/d

kc = 1.43
r = 0.0035

l / d = 23.53
d = 0.170 m

u = 2.56 m

VRdc = 269.08 kN
4. Check
VSd,max VRdc

The check is OK!

5. Minimum longitudinal reinforcement after section 3.4.5.3 (4)

a s x,min =

with

VSd,max
0,9 d x f yd

e x / bef

a s y,min =

VSd,max
0,9 d y f yd

fyd = 478.26 N/mm

ex/bef = 0.125

d = 0.170 m

ey/bef = 0.125

asx,min = 4.11 cm/m asx

e y / bef

asy,min = 4.11 cm/m asy

415

OENORM B 4700 Design

Prestressed Structures
Internal Prestressing
For internal prestressing, the tendon groups as well as the prestressing system and procedures are entered using the
Prestressing function of the Structure menu. To include them in the FEM calculation, you then need to define a load case
with the Prestressing load type. For more information, refer to the Prestressed Concrete section of the manual.
Prestressing with bond and prestressing without bond are differentiated in the section inputs and the specifications for the
Creep and shrinkage load case.

External Prestressing, Mixed Construction

External prestressing can be taken into account by entering the external forces directly in the program. For mixed
construction, the additional tendons with bond must be entered as described above.

Scattering of Prestressing
For checks in the ultimate limit state, the following applies for the design value of the prestressing force according to
OENORM B 4750, Chapter 12.1 (3):

Pd = gP Pm,t
with

Pm,t

Mean value of prestressing force at time t including prestressing losses from friction, slippage, creep, shrinkage

Partial safety factor of the prestressing force; gP = 1 is normally assumed.

and relaxation.

In the serviceability limit state, two characteristic values for the prestressing force are defined in OENORM B 4750, Chapter
11.2 (3):

Pk,sup

= rsup Pm,t

Upper characteristic value acc. to Eq. (22).

Pk,inf

= rinf Pm,t

Lower characteristic value acc. to Eq. (23).

According to the standard, the coefficients rsup and rinf equal rsup = 1.05 and rinf = 0.95 for tendons with subsequent
bond, and for tendons with immediate bond or without bond as well as for effects from external prestressing rsup = rinf =
1.0.
Chapter 11.2 (3) of the standards B 4750 and B 4753 specifies for which checks scattering is to be taken into account:
Minimum crack reinforcement and crack width check (B 4753)

Decompression check and concrete compressive stress check (B 4750 and B 4753)

Reinforcing steel and prestressing steel stress check (B 4750)

The program takes scattering into account in all of the above checks.

416

Prestressed Structures

Creep and Shrinkage

Similar to prestressing, creep and shrinkage can be taken into account by defining the appropriate load case (Creep and
shrinkage load type) in the FEM calculation. Besides the creep-generating permanent load case, you also need to specify
whether the internal forces relocation between concrete and prestressing steel is to be taken into account. This option is
only useful in the case of tendons with bond.
The decisive creep and shrinkage coefficients for calculating the Creep and shrinkage load case are entered in the Section
dialog. Alternatively, this dialog can be used to calculate the coefficient as per OENORM B 4750, Chapter 8.2 and 8.3.
The program determines concrete creep and shrinkage based on a time-dependent stress-strain law developed by Trost.

s b (t ) =

Eb
e b (t ) - j e b,0 - e b,s
1+r j

With

sb(t)

Concrete stress from creep and shrinkage at time t.

E-modulus of the concrete.

Relaxation coefficient according to Trost for time t (normally r= 0.80).

Creep coefficient for time t.

eb(t)

Concrete strain from creep and shrinkage at time t.

eb,0

Concrete strain from creep-generating continuous load.

eb,s

Concrete strain from shrinkage.

Dsp,csr = Dspr + Ep Decpt

with

Dspr

Prestressing loss from relaxation of the prestressing steel.

Decpt

Concrete strain change from creep and shrinkage.

E-modulus of the prestressing steel.

Relaxation of Prestressing Steel

According to OENORM B 4750, Chapter 8.4, the stress change Dspr in the tendons at position x caused by relaxation must
be taken into account in addition to the stress loss from concrete creep and shrinkage. Unless specified otherwise by the
manufacturer, this change may be taken from Figure 10 with an initial stress of

sp = spg0 0.3 Dsp,csr

(11)

with

Dsp,csr

Stress change in the tendons due to creep, shrinkage and relaxation at position x at time t.

spg0

Initial stress in the tendons from prestressing and permanent actions.

Since the entire stress loss cannot be known in advance, the input value Dsp,csr must be estimated for Eq. (11) according to
the standard, e.g., sp= 0.95 spg0.
You can define the stress losses in the CSR actions of the OENORM B 4700 Actions dialog.

417

OENORM B 4700 Design

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States

The

following checks according to OENORM are available:

Bending with longitudinal force (B 4700, Chap. 3.4.2, and B 4750, Chap. 12.2).
Minimum reinforcement against failure without warning (B 4750, Chap. 12.5).
Lateral force (B 4700, Chap. 3.4.4, and B 4750, Chap. 12.3).
Torsion and combined strain (B 4700, Chap. 3.4.6, and B 4750, Chap. 12.4).
Punching shear (B 4700, Chap. 3.4.5).
Fatigue check (B 4753, Chap. 13).

Design Combinations
The decisive action combinations are calculated using the following formulas from OENORM B 4700, Chapter 3.2.2, in
conjunction with B 4750, Chapter 12.1:

Fundamental combination

Ld = ( g G, j Gk, j ) + ( g P Pk ) + 1.50 Qk,i

for i = 1

(4)

for n > 1

(5)

Ld = ( g G, j Gk, j ) + ( g P Pk ) + 1.35 Qk,i

i =1

Accidental combination

Ld = Gk, j + Pk + (y 2,i Qk,i ) + Fex

(6)

According to B 4753, Chapter 13.1, the fatigue check uses a special

Fatigue combination

Lk = Gk, j + Pk + (y1,1 Qk,1 ) + (y 2,i Qk,i )

i >1

which is based on the frequent action combination in the serviceability state according to B 4750, Eq. (20).
The individual parts have the following meaning:

gG,j, gP

Partial safety factor for permanent actions and prestressing.

Gk,j, Pk

Characteristic values of the permanent actions and prestressing.

Qk,i

Characteristic values of the variable actions.

Number of variable actions.

y2,i

Combination coefficients of B 4750, Table 5, or B 4753, Table 4.

Fex

Accidental action.

Different variants in the construction stages and final states can be defined for each combination. When conducting the
check, the extreme value deriving from all combinations and situations is decisive.

Stress-Strain-Curves
The following characteristics are used for section design:

418

Concrete: Parabola-rectangle diagram according to OENORM 4700, Figure 7.

Reinforcing steel: Stress-strain curves according to OENORM B 4700, Figure 9.
Prestressing steel: Stress-strain curve according to OENORM B 4750, Figure 11b,
with upper horizontal branch according to Chapter 10.1.2 (2) of the standard.

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States

Design for Normal Force, Bending Moment (N, M, N and M)

The design for normal force and bending moment is performed according to OENORM B 4700, Chapter 3.4.2. With respect
to slab, plain stress and shell elements with perpendicular or inclined reinforcement, the design internal forces are calculated
in the same way as for the design according to DIN 1045-1. The reinforcement required for each internal force combination
at the reinforced concrete section is determined iteratively based on the formulation of equilibrium conditions as well as the
limit strain curve depicted in the illustration below. The final result is derived from the extreme value of all calculated
reinforcements.

Strain areas for the design

The steel strain is limited to es = 20 for the purpose of numerical stability. You can control the result of the design by
specifying the reinforcement geometry and choosing one of three design modes:
Mode Standard
This is the standard design mode for bending with longitudinal force throughout the entire load area. Reinforcement will be
calculated in the tensile section to the greatest degree possible. For reasons of economy, if the steel strain esd related to the
steel strength fsd is exceeded, compressive reinforcement is determined.
The procedure in strain areas 4 and 5 is the same as with symmetrical design.

Mode Symmetrical
In contrast to the standard design, the reinforcement will be applied at all predefined locations in all strain areas, if
necessary. The specified relationships between the reinforcement layers will not be affected.

Mode Compression member

The design is performed symmetrically. Additionally, the required minimum reinforcement for columns and compression
members according to Chapter 3.4.9.2 of B 4700 is determined:

As,min = 0.15Nsd / fyd 0.0028Ac

(60)

with

fyd

Design value for the reinforcing steel strength at the yield strength.

Nsd

Design value of the longitudinal force to be absorbed.

Total area of the concrete section.

Inclusion of tendons with bond

When designing beams and design objects, the internal forces of the concrete section is reduced by the statically
determined portions which result from prestressing minus the losses from creep, shrinkage and prestressing steel relaxation
(CSR). Situations prior to the grouting of the tendons are excluded. So only the restraint portions from P+CSR and the
external loads are contained in the remaining internal forces for the composite section. If necessary, the reinforcing steel
positioned by the user will be increased until the composite internal forces can be absorbed.
The position of the tendon groups in the section, the prestressing losses from CSR, the statically determined portions and
the internal forces of the concrete section and the composite section are written to the detailed log.
As a separation into statically determined and undetermined shares of the internal forces from prestressing is not possible
for shell structures, the prestressing is taken into account fully on the action side when designing the longitudinal
reinforcement. As a result, on the resistance side only mild steel and concrete are considered whereas the strain reserves of
the tendons with bond are not used.

419

OENORM B 4700 Design

Minimum Reinforcement against Failure without Warning

Prestressed structures must be checked to ensure that structure failures do not occur without warning during initial crack
formation. According to OENORM B 4753, Chapter 12.5, you can fulfill this requirement by simply following the guidelines
in B 4700, Chapter 3.4.9.4 (1), for the minimum bending reinforcement.
OENORM B 4750, Chapter 12.5, on the other hand, requires that you apply a special minimum reinforcement (robustness
reinforcement). The assumption here is that the prestressing force will be fictitiously reduced until bending cracks occur
under the frequent action combination. The reduced prestressing force Pred is:

Pred =

M - f ctm Wc1 + N k1
ep + k1

(60)

with

M
N
fctm

Bending moment from the frequent action combination without prestressing force.

Core width, based on the bending tensile edge fiber, k1 = Wc1 / Ac.

Wc1

Resistance moment based on the bending tensile edge fiber 1.

Section area.

Eccentricity of the prestressing force.

Normal force from the frequent action combination without prestressing force.
Average concrete tensile strength according to OENORM B 4700, Table 4.

The reinforcement must be designed according to B 4750, Eq. (35). As part of the process, the normal force N = - Pred must
be factored in to determine the auxiliary values in Eq. (34) and (36).
The program determines the robustness reinforcement according to B 4750. Irrespective of the result, you must observe the
rules for the minimum bending reinforcement as per B 4700, Chapter 3.4.9.4 (1). These rules can be incorporated into the
program by specifying a base reinforcement in the reinforcing steel description.

Design for Lateral Force

The design for lateral force involves determining the diagonal tensile reinforcement and includes a concrete strut check
according to OENORM B 4700, Chapter 3.4.4.2 in conjunction with B 4750, Chapter 12.3.4. The following special
conditions apply:
The angle of the diagonal tensile reinforcement is assumed to be 90.

The calculated stirrup reinforcement takes into account the minimum reinforcement based on Equation (62) of B 4700.

Slab and shell elements are designed for lateral force qr = (qx + qy). Depending on which has a negative effect,

either the principal compressive force or principal tensile force is used for the associated longitudinal force.
In B 4700, Formula (27b) (calculation of the reduced concrete strut reinforcement), the section areas of the nonprestressed reinforcement in the bending compression chord (compression reinforcement) As2 is assumed to be zero to

be on the safe side.

There is no reduction of the action from loads near supports as specified in Chapter 3.4.4.2, Section (12) or (13) of
B 4700.
For beams and design objects, the decisive web width and the effective height of the girder are defined by the user
independently of the normal section geometry.
For sections with internal prestressing, the design value of lateral load-bearing capacity VRdc as per B 4750, Chapter
12.3.4 (4), is determined using the nominal value bw,nom of the section width.

For prestressed sections, the angle of the concrete struts is limited to tan 1.0 according to B 4750, Chapter
12.3.4 (1).
The lever arm z of the internal forces is generally assumed as z = 0.9 d.

Slab and shell elements (and beam elements, if required by the user) can be checked to determine whether a diagonal
tensile reinforcement is necessary according to Chapter 3.4.4.4 of B 4700. As in the previous case, no reduction of the
action from loads near supports occurs.

420

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States

The formulas from OENORM B 4700 that are used:

VRdc = bw z n f cd

1
cot + tan

(27)

with

VRdc

Design value of the lateral force resistance if the strength of the concrete strut angle plays a decisive role
(concrete failure under diagonal pressure).

Smallest width of the web.

z
d

Lever arm of the internal forces.

n = 0.7 -

Effective height of the girder.

1.5 f cd
0.5 (fcd in N/mm)
200

Angle of the concrete struts in relation to the girder axis with 0.6 tan 1.6.

s cd, eff
VRdc, red = 1.67 VRdc 1 f cd

VRdc

(25)
(23)

(27a)

with

s cd, eff =

N sd - f yd As 2
Ac

VRdc,red

Reduced value of VRdc resulting from compressive force.

scd,eff

Average effective concrete stress as a result of longitudinal force (positive for compression).

Nsd

Design value of the longitudinal force to be absorbed (positive for compression).

As2

Section area of the non-prestressed reinforcement in the bending compression chord (compression

(27b)

reinforcement).

Entire area of the concrete section.

VRds = Asw/ s z fyd cot

(29)

with

VRds

Design value of the lateral force resistance if the strength of the diagonal tensile reinforcement plays a decisive
role (diagonal tensile reinforcement failure).

Asw

Section area of the diagonal tensile reinforcement in the effective area s.

Distance of the diagonal tensile reinforcement in the direction of the girder axis (e.g., stirrup distance).

asw,min =

Asw 15 f ctm

bw
s
f yd

(62)

with

fctm

Average concrete tensile strength according to B 4700, Table 4.

Smallest width of the web in cm.

VRd1 = [ td k ( 1.2 + 40r ) + 0.15 scd] bw d

(39)

with

VRd1

Absorbable lateral design force of a component without shear reinforcement.

Calculated value of shear stress according to B 4700, Table 4.

k = (1.6 - d) 1.0
In components for which more than 50% of the largest span reinforcement is continuously extended to the
support (d in m).

k = 1.0

if less than 50% of the largest span reinforcement is continuously extended to the support.

421

OENORM B 4700 Design

As
0.02
bw d

Bending tensile reinforcement that is extended by at least d+lb,crf beyond the section under consideration
(see B 4700, Figure 23), lb,crf according to Formula (84).

scd = Nsd / Ac
Nsd

Design value of a longitudinal normal force that simultaneously acts with the lateral force
(positive for compression).

Concrete section area.

Smallest width of the section under consideration.

Design for Torsion

The design for torsion is carried out according to OENORM B 4700, Chapter 3.4.6. This design involves determining the
diagonal tensile reinforcement and the longitudinal reinforcement and includes a concrete strut check under maximum
torsional stress according to formula (52) combined with a concrete strut check under lateral force according to formula
(56) of the standard. Box girders are also checked as per B 4750, Chapter 12.4 (3) to ensure that the principle compressive
stress does not exceed the calculated value fcd of the concrete compressive strength.
The calculated longitudinal reinforcement takes into account the minimum reinforcement according to formula (62) of the
standard. The equivalent hollow section on which this design is based is defined by the user independently of the normal
section geometry.
The formulas from OENORM B 4700 that are used:

tSd =

TSd
2Ak

(49)

with

tSd

Design value of the shear force to be absorbed in the lateral areas of the equivalent hollow section.

TSd

Design value of the torsion moment to be absorbed.

Areas enclosed by the center line of the equivalent hollow section.

t Rdc = n f cd d ef

1
cot + tan

(52)

with

tRdc

Design value of resistance against concrete failure due to diagonal compression.

def =d0/6 Wall thickness of the equivalent hollow section.

Diameter of the largest circle that can be drawn within the actual section.

tRds = Asw / s fyd cot

(53)

with

tRds

Design value of the resistance against failure due to diagonal tensile reinforcement yielding.

Asw

Section area of the diagonal tensile reinforcement (stirrup beams) inserted to absorb torsion.

Distance of the diagonal tensile reinforcement beams in the direction of the girder axis.

Ft(T )i = uk,i tSd cot 0

(54)

Ft(T )i Asi fyd

(55)

with

F t (T )i

Tensile force of the lateral wall under consideration in the longitudinal direction of the girder.

uk,i

Length of the center line of the lateral wall under consideration in the equivalent hollow section.

Asi

Section of the longitudinal torsion reinforcement for the lateral wall under consideration.

422

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States

VSd

V
Rdc

tSd
+
t
Rdc

(56)

Punching Shear
The load-bearing safety check with respect to punching shear is carried out according to OENORM B 4700, Chapter 3.4.5.
The check is fulfilled when the following condition is met (equations provided by the standard):
(42)

VSd,max VRd
with

VSd,max = VSd ke

(43)

VSd

Design value of the lateral force exerted in the critical perimeter.

Coefficient for taking load eccentricity into account. ke = 1 for centrical punching shear.

VRd

Punching resistance according to equations (44) and (45).

Punching resistance without punching reinforcement is calculated as

VRdc = 0.12tdkc(1.2 + 2000d/lr)ud

(44)

with

Calculated value of shear stress according to B 4700, Table 4.

kc = 1.6 - d > 1 (d in m)
d

= 0.5(dx+dy) average effective height.

for flat slabs, the maximum span adjoining to the column; for single foundations, twice the maximum ground
plan dimensions. In this case note that l/d 20.

r = r x r y 0.015
rx =

as y
asx
; ry =
Level of tensile reinforcement in the x and y direction.
dx
dy

Decisive circumference of the critical perimeter according to B 4700, Chapter 3.4.5.4.

Punching resistance with punching reinforcement is calculated as

VRds = VRdc + ksAsvfydsina 1.4VRdc

(45)

with

Effect coefficient depending on the selected arrangement of the punching reinforcement. ks = 0.5 is normally

Asv

Steel section of the punching reinforcement between column edge and critical perimeter, with a minimum of

applicable.

Asv,min = 0.15
a 35

f ctm u d
f yd sin a

Angle between the effect direction of the reinforcement and the slab midplane.

Minimum bending reinforcement

as,min =

VSd
e

0.9 d f yd bef

e
bef

according to B 4700, Table 7.

(47)

423

OENORM B 4700 Design

Check against Fatigue

According to OENORM B 4750, fatigue checks are not normally required for building and road bridge construction. The
fatigue strength of railway bridges, however, must always be checked as per B 4753. As outlined in Chapter 13, a check
must be carried out for the special fatigue combination, which is based on the frequent action combination in the
serviceability limit state and comprises the loads specified in Chapter 9.4.2 (load combination 2). The traffic load that has an
impact on fatigue should be added to the program using a variable action QN.

Fatigue of longitudinal reinforcement, shear reinforcement and prestressing steel

The fatigue check is carried out according to B 4753, Chapter 13.3. The steel stresses are calculated for longitudinal
reinforcement from bending and longitudinal force as well as for prestressing steel in beams and design objects under the
assumption of a cracked concrete section. The stresses for shear and longitudinal reinforcement from lateral force and
torsion are calculated on the basis of a truss model using the strut angle tan from the shear design. The prestressing steel
stresses in area elements are determined at the uncracked concrete section. Tendons without bond and external tendons
are not checked.
According to chapter 13.3, Section (1), the actions from prestressing are to be reduced by 5% while the permanent actions
and principal traffic loads are to be increased by 5% in the check combination to account for unavoidable scattering. The
program does not automatically make these modifications, which ultimately lead to an increase in the stress range. If
necessary, you can alternatively specify a lower permissible stress range in accordance with Chapter 13.3, Sections (3) and
(4).
The check is valid if the damage-equivalent stress range Dss,equ of the steel does not exceed

Dss,equ = ssd,max - ssd,min DsRsk / gfat

(35)

with gfat = 1.15. Note that DsRsk is the permissible characteristic stress range specified by the user in the Section dialog for
2 106 load changes. The compressive stresses of the non-prestressed reinforcement are not considered in the stress range
calculation as permitted in the standard.
The maximum from the robustness, crack and bending reinforcement is assumed to be the existing bending reinforcement.
If as a result the load from the fatigue combination in state II cannot be absorbed, a new design is carried out based on the
existing reinforcement and the check internal forces. The maximum stress range per steel layer that results from the strain
state in state II or the truss model is determined separately for each check situation. If this range exceeds the permitted
stress range according to Eq. (35), the necessary reinforcement will be iteratively increased until the check succeeds for all
situations. In the Symmetrical and Compression member design modes the reinforcement is applied at all predefined
locations. This will not affect the predefined relationships between the individual reinforcement layers.
The decisive reinforcement used for the check, which may have been increased, is recorded in the check log and saved for
graphical representation.

Fatigue of concrete under compressive stress

The fatigue check for concrete under compressive stress is conducted for bending and longitudinal force according to
Chapter 13.2 of OENORM B 4753 at the cracked section. It takes into account the final longitudinal reinforcement and may
include an increase applied during the fatigue check for reinforcing steel. The struts of components subject to lateral force
stress are not analyzed. The check is considered successful if compliance with OENORM B 4753, Eq. (34) is established.

Dsc,equ = scd,max - scd,min 0.50fcd 0.55scd,min

with

scd,max

Largest longitudinal compressive stress of the concrete (compression > 0).

scd,min

Smallest longitudinal compressive stress of the concrete in the same fiber in which scd,max occurs. If
tensile stresses occur, set scd,min = 0.

424

(34)

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States

Special characteristic of shell structures

Variant
1
2
1
2

m [kNm/m]
mx + |mxy| = 400
mx - |mxy| = 200
mx + |mxy| = 400
mx - |mxy| = 200

The torsional moments generate a variation of the design moments and thus a calculatory stress range. This may lead to a
necessary reinforcement increase in the fatigue check due to apparent overstressing. For design normal forces, this applies
for the shear forces in a corresponding manner.
Selecting Limit design variants in the Section dialog allows you to avoid the described effect. In this case only the
corresponding variants are compared when determining the stress range, which means only the first and second variants of
both sets in this example. Assuming constant stress, the stress range is thus correctly determined to be zero.
This alternative, however, cannot ensure that all conceivable stress fluctuations will be analyzed. You should
therefore be particularly careful when assessing the results. The main variants and design internal forces that
are used for the check are indicated in the detailed log for this purpose.
When determining the design internal forces according to Rsch for inclined reinforcement, the described relationships
apply accordingly.

425

OENORM B 4700 Design

Checks in the Serviceability Limit States

The

following checks specified by OENORM are performed:

Limiting the concrete compressive stresses (B 4750, Chap. 11.4.5, and B 4753, 11.4.2).
Limiting the reinforcing steel stresses (B 4750, Chap. 11.4.5, and B 4753, 11.4.2).
Limiting the prestressing steel stresses (B 4750, Chap. 11.4.5, and B 4753, 11.4.2).
Check of decompression (B 4750 and B 4753, Chapter 11.3)
Crack-dispersing minimum reinforcement (B 4700, Chap. 4.2.2, and B 4750, 11.5)
Limiting the crack width (B 4700, Chapter 4.2.3).
Limiting deformations (B 4700, Chapter 4.3).

The concrete compressive stress, steel stress and decompression checks are only relevant for prestressed structures.

Design Combinations
Based on OENORM B 4750, Chapter 11.2, the combinations listed below are taken into consideration in the serviceability
limit states. The combination coefficients can be selected according to B 4750, Table 5, or B 4753, Table 4.

Rare (characteristic) combination

L0 = Gk, j + Pk + Qk,1 + y 0,i Qk,i

Frequent combination

L1 = Gk, j + Pk + y1,1 Qk,1 + y 2,i Qk,i

(19)

i >1

(20)

i >1

Quasi-continuous combination

L2 = Gk, j + Pk + y 2,i Qk,i

(21)

i 1

Different variants of the construction stages and final states can be defined for each combination. If necessary, the
combination required by the check will automatically be determined from the section specifications. Each check is carried
out for all the variants of a combination.

Stress Determination
For uncracked concrete sections, the program assumes that concrete and steel under tensile and compressive stress behave
elastically. With respect to cracked concrete sections, concrete that is subjected to compression is assumed to have an
elastic behavior yet without the capacity to absorb tensile stresses (cf. OENORM B 4750, Chapter 11.4).
Area elements
For area elements the concrete stresses are calculated at the gross section. The steel stress check is carried out for
reinforcing steel by determining the strain state at the cracked concrete section and for the prestressing steel at the
uncracked concrete section.
Beams and design objects
The action combination stresses that can be determined without checks are always calculated at the gross section.
Conversely, in the checks the stresses are determined as follows and are graphically displayed or logged:
When checking the crack reinforcement and crack width, the concrete stress is calculated at the gross section

When decompression and the concrete compressive stresses are checked, the concrete stress is calculated in state I

- without internal tendons at the gross section

section

426

Checks in the Serviceability Limit States

Limiting the Concrete Compressive Stresses

The concrete compressive stresses are checked according to OENORM B 4750, Chapter 11.4.5 and B 4753, Chapter 11.4.2.
Based on B 4750, Chapter 11.4 (2), the cracked state is assumed if the tensile stress calculated in the uncracked state under
the rare action combination exceeds the value fctm. This assumption also takes into account the scattering of prestressing
force as per B 4750, Chapter 11.2 (3).
The calculation in the cracked state is carried out with a linear stress-strain curve by determining the strain state with the
final longitudinal reinforcement (maximum from robustness, crack and bending reinforcement including a possible increase
from the fatigue check). For beams and design objects, the tendons with bond are taken into account on the resistance side
provided that they are grouted in the check situation. For area elements, the compressive stress for both reinforcement
directions is determined separately and the extreme value is checked since the general strain state cannot be determined
unambiguously.
The concrete compressive stress sc must be limited to 0.60 fck under the rare (characteristic) combination according to
OENORM B 4750, Chapter 11.4.5 (1). According to OENORM B 4753, Eq. (12), the stress must be limited to 0.55 fck given
uniaxial bending. Also, to prevent disproportionate creep deformations, the limit 0.45 fck should be maintained under the
quasi-continuous combination as per B 4750, Chap. 11.4.5 (2). Both options are considered based on the user's
specifications.

Limiting the Reinforcing and Prestressing Steel Stresses

Reinforcing steel
For reinforcing steel, the limit of 0.80 fyk (B 4750, Chapter 11.4.5 (3)) or 0.70 fyk (B 4753, Chapter 11.4.2 (7)) as set by the
user for steel stress under the rare combination will be checked. In this check the reinforcement corresponds to the
maximum value from the robustness, crack and bending reinforcement, including a possible increase as a result of the
fatigue check. The determination of the strain state is performed at the cracked concrete section. If beam tendons with
bond are grouted in the check situation, they will be taken into account on the resistance side.
Prestressing steel
For tendons with bond, the limitation of steel stress as per OENORM B 4750, Chapter 11.4.5 (4), will be checked at the
cracked concrete section for beams and design objects and at the uncracked concrete section for area elements. In either
case the following limits apply:
0.70 fpk under the rare combination

0.65 fpk under the quasi-continuous combination

For situations prior to grouting and for tendons without bond, the stress spm0 is checked according to B 4750, Eq. (4) and
(5). External tendons are not checked.

Check of Decompression
This check is carried out for prestressed components of requirement classes A-C with the combinations specified in Table 1
of the OENORM B 4750. According to Chapter 11.2 (3) of the standard, the scattering of the prestressing force is to be
taken into account. The minimum requirement classes for the structure depend on the prestressing type as outlined in Table
2 of the standard. For area elements, the principal tensile stress s1 or one of the longitudinal tensile stresses sx or sy is
checked depending on the user's selection. The latter can be used to limit the check to the direction of the prestressing if
the internal force systems are appropriately aligned. In all other cases, the rules listed above for stress analysis apply.
The permitted stress limits are defined as follows:
Construction stage
According to OENORM B 4750, Chapter 3.7.3, road bridges in the construction stage must be checked to ensure that the
characteristic tensile strength fctk as per B 4700, Table 4, is not exceeded under the decisive action combination. This also
applies to railway bridges as per B 4753, Chapters 3.2 and 11.4.2(3). The effective tensile strength for the construction
stage is defined in the section dialog.
Final state
The decompression limit state is reached according to OENORM B 4750, Chapter 3.7, when the stress of the edge fiber
427

OENORM B 4700 Design

reaches zero in the precompressed tensile zone (i.e., at the section edge facing the tendon). According to Chapter 11.3 of
the standard, the action combinations of this limit state as defined by the requirement classes may not be exceeded. The
program determines the above edge as follows:
Beams and design objects: If the edge point next to the tendon is above the centroid, the stress on the upper side of

Crack Dispersing Minimum Reinforcement

For all components in which crack formation through restraint is expected, a crack reinforcement should be distributed to
the tensile edges based on OENORM B 4700, Chapter 4.2.2. The reinforcement As to be applied is determined according to
Eq. (64):
(64)
As = rt / 100 bt ht (rt in %)
The reinforcement level rt, which is based on tensile zone bt ht and dependent on the specified limit diameter ds = dsg and
the permissible crack width wk, must be taken from Table 8a (wk = 0.30 mm) or Table 8b (wk = 0.15 mm). The calculated
limit diameter dsr serves as the input value and is determined according to the following relationship:
(65)

dsg = dsr k
with

k = ht / 5 h1 1 for bending cracks ht < h.

(66)

k = h / 10 h1 1 for separation cracks.

(67)

Average width of the concrete tensile zone.

Height of the tensile zone in state I when the concrete tensile strength is reached.

h
h1

Height of the section or the section part under consideration.

Distance of the reinforcement's centroid from the tensile edge.

For concrete quality above B30, the limit diameter dsg is to be reduced by a factor of 30/fcwk according to Chapter 4.2.2 (4).
The program will accordingly increase the input value dsr for Table 8a or 8b by this factor.
In the case of predominant compression, i.e., if ht h1, the limitation of the bar diameter is not necessary according to
Chapter 4.2.2 (3), Item b). The program uses the minimum reinforcement level as per Table 8a or 8b for Eq. (64) in such
cases.
The reductions of reinforcement level rt as permitted in Sections (5) through (7) can be specified in the Section dialog. The
guidelines of Sections (8) through (10) are to be taken into account constructively by the user.
The tensile sections in which the crack reinforcement is to be inserted can be defined in the Section dialog by selecting
either an action combination or a restraint (bending, centrical tension). In the design modes Symmetrical and Compression
member, the remaining layers are also reinforced. This will not affect the predefined relationships between the individual
reinforcement layers.
If the crack width check is to be carried out at the same time, the program will determine whether the specified permissible
crack width is maintained by inserting the calculated crack reinforcement. If necessary, the crack reinforcement is increased
iteratively until the check limit is reached. The increased reinforcement is indicated by an exclamation mark "!" in the log.
The necessary (constructive) minimum reinforcement as per B 4700, Chapter 3.4.9.4, and B 4750, Chapter 7.3.3, is not
taken into consideration when determining the crack reinforcement. It can be specified as the base reinforcement in the
reinforcing steel description.
Special characteristic of prestressed concrete structures
In prestressed concrete structures, according to OENORM B 4750, Chapter 11.5 (5), tendons with bond in the tensile zone
whose distance from the reinforcing steel reinforcement in the tensile zone does not exceed 300 mm can be accounted for
with kp times their prestressed steel area Ap. The calculated reinforcement level is then derived by

rtr = 100 (As + kp Ap) / (bt ht)

(31)

The bond coefficient kp must be determined as per 11.5 (6) and specified for beams and design objects in the Section
428

Checks in the Serviceability Limit States

dialog. The program does not take prestressing steel into account for area elements.
Influences from the plain stress effect and the change of the inner lever arm during transition from state I to state II can be
taken into account by reducing the reinforcement level as per B 4750, Eq. (33):
(33)

r t = r tr k c
kc = 1 +

N
k h Ac f ctm

(34)

0 kc 1
with

N
fctm

Permanent normal force (compression: N < 0) or permanent prestressing force.

Average expected tensile strength of the concrete during initial cracking.

kh = 1.5

for beams and slabs with h < 1 m.

kh = 1.5 h

for beams and slabs with h 1 m.

According to B 4750, Chapter 11.5 (8), the steel section area As used in formula (31) may not be less than

As,min = 0.0028 kc bt ht

(35)

This value must be increased by 15% for B50 and 30% for B60.
The program does not take into account the special rules for tension chords with connected flange parts provided in
Chapter 11.5 (8).

Limiting the Crack Width

The crack width check is carried out according to OENORM B 4700, Chapter 4.2.3, by limiting the bar diameter ds of the
reinforcement in the tensile section to dsg.
The bar diameter ds is specified in the Section dialog. The limit diameter dsg is determined from the calculated limit diameter

dsr based on formulas (65) through (67) of the standard. Note that dsr which depends on the existing reinforcement level rt
and the steel stress ssD of the reinforcement, is taken from Table 9 (wk = 0.30 mm) or Table 10 (wk = 0.15 mm).
The reinforcement level rt is determined according to Chapter 4.2.2 (3) with the tensile zone in state I upon reaching the
concrete tensile strength. In the case of predominant compression, i.e., if the height of the tensile zone ht results in ht h1,
the limit diameter is not checked according to Chapter 4.2.2 (3) (b).
The steel stress ssD is derived from the strain state II under the check combination defined by the requirement class and
with allowance for prestressing scattering. For beams and design objects, all tendons with bond are considered on the
resistance side. The stress-strain curve of the concrete is assumed to be linear as per B 4750, Chapter 11.4 (1).
The concrete steel layer with the maximum value for the difference (ds dsg) is listed in the log.
If the minimum reinforcement check for limiting the crack width is not selected, the program will automatically determine
the reinforcement that is required to limit the crack width. A design with the decisive check combination is performed for
this purpose. The resulting calculated reinforcement is indicated by an exclamation mark "!" in the check log.
The bar diameter limitation is then checked for the final longitudinal reinforcement (maximum from the robustness, crack
and bending reinforcement including a possible increase resulting from the fatigue check).

429

OENORM B 4700 Design

Limiting Deformations
According to OENORM B 4700, Chapter 4.3, or B 4750, Chapter 11.6, the deformations of a structure or component must
be limited such as to prevent any negative effects with respect to its function or appearance. Chapter 4.3.1 (2) of B 4700
stipulates that in general, no component under continuous load should sag any more than 1/250th of the span.
Prestressed concrete structures of requirement classes A, B, and C are planned to remain in state I for the quasi-continuous
action combination. This allows short-term deformations in condition I to be calculated on the basis of the elasticity theory
in accordance with B 4750, Chapter 11.6 (7). Congruence with the actual deformation largely depends on how realistic the
modulus of elasticity is defined. For structures classified as requirement classes D and E, the deformation analysis specified in
Chapter 11.6 (9) should be conducted in accordance with B 4700, Chapter 4.3.3.
When using InfoCAD to perform a realistic check in state II, this can only be done as part of a nonlinear system analysis for
beam and shell structures that takes geometric and physical nonlinearities into account. The resistance of the tendons with
bond is currently not included in the calculation.
Editing is performed in the following steps:
Define the check situation with the Load group function in the Load dialog by grouping the decisive individual load

cases. The variable loads must first be weighted with the combination coefficients y2 for the quasi-continuous

For a detailed description of the nonlinear system analysis, refer to the relevant chapter of the manual.

Longitudinal stresses in the decompression and concrete compressive stress checks [MN/m].

ss, Dss

Stresses and stress ranges for reinforcing steel [MN/m].

sp, Dsp

Stresses and stress ranges for prestressing steel [MN/m].

scd, Dscd

Stresses and stress ranges in the fatigue check for concrete under longitudinal compression [MN/m].

Dssb,y, Dssb,z

Stress ranges for shear reinforcement from Qy and Qz [MN/m].

Dssb,T, Dssl,T

Stress ranges for shear reinforcement from torsion and longitudinal torsion reinforcement [MN/m].

Stresses for area elements

sx, sy, s1

Longitudinal stress in x or y direction or principal tensile stresses in the decompression check [MN/m]
(depending on user specification).

Principal compressive stresses [MN/m].

txy, txz, tyz

Shear stresses [MN/m].

ssx, Dssx

Stresses and stress ranges [MN/m] for reinforcing steel in the x direction.

ssy, Dssy

Stresses and stress ranges [MN/m] for reinforcing steel in the y direction.

sp, Dsp

Stresses and stress ranges [MN/m] for prestressing steel.

430

Results

scd,x, Dscd,x,

Stresses and stress ranges in the concrete fatigue check under longitudinal compression in the

scd,y, Dscd,y

x- and y-direction [MN/m].

Dss,b

Stress ranges for shear reinforcement [MN/m].

Bending reinforcement
As
Bending reinforcement [cm] for beams and design objects.

asx, asy

Bending reinforcement [cm/m] for area elements in the x and y direction.

asj

Meridian reinforcement [cm/m] for axisymmetric shell elements.

asu

Ring reinforcement [cm/m] for axisymmetric shell elements.

Reinforcement from lateral force

asb
Stirrup reinforcement [cm/m] of area and axisymmetric shell elements.

Asb.y, Asb.z

Stirrup reinforcement [cm/m] of beams and design objects from Qy and Qz.

Asl for asb=0

Longitudinal reinforcement [cm] of area elements.

Torsion reinforcement
Asb.T
Torsional stirrup reinforcement [cm/m] of beams and design objects from Mx.

Asl.T

Torsional longitudinal reinforcement [cm] of beams and design objects from Mx.

Design values

vRd1

Absorbable design lateral force without shear reinforcement for area elements [kN/m].

vRdc

Absorbable design lateral force of concrete struts for area elements [kN/m].

VRd1

Absorbable design lateral force without shear reinforcement for beams and design objects [kN].

VRdc

Absorbable design lateral force of concrete struts for beams and design objects [kN].

TRdc

Design value of the maximum absorbable torsion moment [kNm].

431

OENORM B 4700 Design

Example - Two-Span Girder with Cantilever

The following example illustrates the analysis of the two-span girder with cantilever shown. The system corresponds to
example 6 from 'Examples for Applying the New OENORM B 4700, Reinforced Steel Structures - EUROCODE-Oriented
Analysis, Design and Detailing', sterreichisches Normungsinstitut (ON), Vienna.

System and load of the reinforced concrete girder

The characteristic values of the permanent loads Gk,1 to Gk,3 and the variable loads Qk,1 and Qk,2 are provided in the
illustration. It is important to note that the variable loads are effective independent of one another. The definition of actions
with respect to the seven individual load cases can be taken from the following program printout.
OENORM B4700 actions
Standard design group

G - Dead load

G - Dead load from above on cantilever

Gamma.sup / gamma.inf = 1.35 / 1

Load cases

Dead load Gk,1

Dead load Gk,2

G - Dead load from above on span 1

Gamma.sup / gamma.inf = 1.35 / 1
Load cases
3

Dead load Gk,3

QN - Imposed load, traffic load

Gamma.sup / gamma.inf = 1.5 / 0
Combination coefficients for: Reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete structures
Working loads on ceilings - Living rooms, lounges, office rooms including
adjacent rooms, staircases and walks
Psi.0 / Psi.1 / Psi.2 = 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.3
Load cases 1. Variant, inclusive
4
5
6

432

Traffic cantilever
Traffic span 1
Traffic span 2

Example - Two-Span Girder with Cantilever

QN - Imposed load, traffic load from above on span 1
Gamma.sup / gamma.inf = 1.5 / 0
Combination coefficients for: Reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete structures
Working loads on ceilings - Living rooms, lounges, office rooms including
adjacent rooms, staircases and walks
Psi.0 / Psi.1 / Psi.2 = 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.3
Load cases 1. Variant, inclusive
7

Traffic Qk,2

1. Fundamental combination

1. Quasi-continuous combination

Final state

G
G
G
QN
QN

Dead load
Dead load from above on cantilever
Dead load from above on span 1
Imposed load, traffic load
Imposed load, traffic load from above ...

Moment boundary curves My [kNm], 1st fundamental combination,

linear internal force determination without redistribution

Bending reinforcement As from the load-bearing capacity [cm]

Moment boundary curves My [kNm], 1st quasi-continuous combination,

linear internal force determination without redistribution

Bending reinforcement As from crack check [cm]

Maximum bending reinforcement As [cm]

Lateral force boundary curves Qz [kN], 1st fundamental combination,

linear internal force determination without redistribution

Associated lateral force reinforcement Asb [cm/m]

433

OENORM B 4700 Design

The preceding illustrations show the calculated boundary curves of the girder with respect to a linear internal force
determination and the resulting As or Asb curve. There has been no redistribution of the column moments.
Below you will find a printout of the design specifications and an excerpt of the design results.
Design acc. to OENORM B 4700 (2001), B 4750 (2000), B 4753 (2003)
The design is applicable for reinforced and prestressed concrete with and
without bond. The actions are combined by use of the specific partial safety
and combination factors according to OENORM B 4700, B 4750 und B 4753.
All checks are made for the extreme values of actions.
Design overview
Se. Class, Prestress
of component
1 E Not prestressed
(M)
(R)
(B)
(Q)
(T)
(S)
(P)
(C)

Reinforc.
M R B Q T
. x x x .

Fatig.
S P C
. . .

Crack- DeStress checks

width comp. Comp. S P
x
.
.
. .

Nominal reinforcement to guarantee robustness.

Settings for flexural and shear reinforcement

fyk
tan
Slabs
As
50% As

Quality of stirrups [MN/m].

Angle of concrete truss.
Beams are designed like slabs.
Given reinforcement according to B4700, picture 23.
More than 50% of the biggest bottom reinforcement is unbroken
up to support.

Se. Concrete Designmode for

M and N
1 NB40
Standard

fyk
St.
[MN/m]
500

Trussangle
tan
1.00

Design
As
like
Pict.23
Slabs
[cm]
.
0.00

50% As
up to
support
.

Shear sections
bw.nom
h.nom
dk, bk
def
B.
Se.
1

Nominal width of the prestressed section acc. to B4750, 12.3.4(4).

Nominal height of the prestressed section acc. to B4750, 12.3.4(4).
Height and width of the core section for torsion.
Thickness of the torsion box.
Box section.
Width [m]
Eff. width
bw
bw.nom
bn [m]
0.380
.
0.300

Height [m] Eff.height

h
h.nom
d [m]
1.500
.
1.420

Torsion section [m]

dk
bk
def
B.
1.437 0.317 0.063 .

Settings for the check of crack widths

kp
Bond coeff. of prestr. steel for beam sections acc. to B4750, 11.5(6).
krho Reduction coeff. for reinf. degree rho.t acc. to B4700, 4.2.2(5)-(7).
AC
Use of the action combinations according to B4753, table 1.
Se.
1

Crack width
wk,per [mm]
0.30

Steel diameter
ds [mm]
20.00

Coeff.
kp
krho
.
1.00

AC
B4753
.

Determination of tens.
zone for As,min
Comb. acc. to class

Section geometry and reinforcing steel for beams

Se. Point
1

434

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Concrecte
y [m]
z [m]
0.000
0.000
0.560
0.000
0.940
0.000
1.500
0.000
1.500
0.150
0.940
0.150
0.940
1.500
0.560
1.500
0.560
0.150
0.000
0.150

Reinforcing steel
Es, fyk [MN/m]
200000
550
200000
550
200000
550
200000
550

y [m]
0.080
1.420
0.860
0.640

z [m] d1 [m]
0.080 0.070
0.080 0.070
1.420 0.080
1.420 0.080

As [cm]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

Example - Two-Span Girder with Cantilever

Design of longitudinal reinforcement
(R) Nominal or required reinforcement for crack width limitation.
Increase of reinforcement due to crack width check is marked by "!".
(B) Design of reinforement at ultimate limit state.
In case of dominant bending, compression reinforcement is marked with "*".
Beam
No.
1

Se. Lo.
1
1

Reinforcement
Lay. Type
1
R
B
2
R
B
3
R
B
4
R
B
1
R
B
2
R
B
3
R
B
4
R
B
1
R
B
2
R
B
3
R
B
4
R
B
1
R
B
2
R
B
3
R
B
4
R
B
1
R
B
2
R
B
3
R
B
4
R
B
1
R
B
2
R
B
3
R
B
4
R
B

Nx
[kN]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

My
[kNm]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
-1207.40
-1980.39
-1207.40
-1980.39
-1111.40
-1111.40
-1111.40
-1111.40
565.23
242.20
565.23
242.20
829.68
1890.00
829.68
1890.00
-902.05
-1755.00
-902.05
-1755.00
-730.15
-562.80
-730.15
-562.80
344.78
144.44
344.78
144.44
453.86
891.16
453.86
891.16
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

Mz
[kNm]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

Ap'
[cm]
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

req.As
[cm]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
14.58!
15.70
14.58!
15.70
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
9.18!
14.23
9.18!
14.23
11.30!
13.79
11.30!
13.79
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
5.53!
6.66
5.53!
6.66
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

Design of shear reinforcement

The percentage of nominal reinforcement acc. to B 4700, 3.4.9.4(2) is considered.
VRd, TRd
Angle
Asb,Asl.T
Asl
S2/fcd

Resisting lateral force and torsional moment

Angle tan Beta between the compressive strut and the beam axis
Req. stirrup reinf. from lateral force and torsion, torsional reinf.
Req. longitudinal reinf. acc. to B 4700, Fig. 23 for req. Asb.
Box section, max. principal compressive stress from M,N and torsion

Beam
Qy/
No. Loc. VRd
1 1 0.00
11 0.00
2 1 0.00
6 0.00
11 0.00
3 1 0.00
7 0.00
11 0.00

Asb.y
Qz/
Angle [cm/m] VRd
1.00
0.00 0.00
1.00
0.00 0.30
1.00
0.00 0.46
1.00
0.00 0.20
1.00
0.00 0.46
1.00
0.00 0.32
1.00
0.00 0.04
1.00
0.00 0.20

Asb.z
Asl Q/VRd+
Angle[cm/m] [cm] Mx/TRd
1.00
0.00
.
.
1.00 14.45
.
.
1.00 22.30
.
.
1.00
9.72
.
.
1.00 22.35
.
.
1.00 15.61
.
.
1.00
3.93
.
.
1.00
9.81
.
.

Asb.T, Asl.T
[cm/m, cm]
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

S2/
fcd
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Check of crack widths

The check calculates the limiting steel diameter.
(CC) Charact. (rare), (TC) Frequent, (QC) Quasi-continuous combination
Beam
No.
1
2
3

Rei.
Se. C. Lo. Lay.
1 QC 1
0
11
2
1 QC 1
2
6
3
11
2
1 QC 1
2
7
4
11
0

Nx
My
[kN]
[kNm]
0.00
0.00
0.00 -1207.40
0.00 -1207.40
0.00
829.68
0.00 -902.05
0.00 -902.05
0.00
453.86
0.00
0.00

Mz
[kNm]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

Sigma.x
[MN/m]
0.00
4.33
4.33
4.51
3.23
3.23
2.47
0.00

ds
[mm]
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0

per.
[mm]
.
25.6
25.6
65.9
33.8
33.8
34.6
.

435

OENORM B 4700 Design

References
DIN 1045-1:2008-08 (New Edition)
Concrete, Reinforced Concrete and Prestressed Concrete Structures
Part 1: Design and Construction.
Ref. No. DIN 1045-1:2008-08. Beuth Verlag GmbH, Berlin 2008.
OENORM B 4700:2001-06
Reinforced Concrete Structures EUROCODE-Orientated Analysis,
Design and Detailing.
sterreichisches Normungsinstitut (ON), Vienna 2001.
OENORM B 4750:2000-11
Prestressed Concrete Structures EUROCODE-Oriented Calculation,
Design and Detailing.
sterreichisches Normungsinstitut (ON), Vienna 2000.
OENORM B 4753:2003-06
Prestressed Concrete Railway Bridges EUROCODE-Oriented Calculation,
Design and Detailing.
sterreichisches Normungsinstitut (ON), Vienna 2003.
Examples for applying the new OENORM B 4700
'Reinforced Steel Structures. EUROCODE-Orientated Analysis, Design and Detailing', as of 1 October 1995.
sterreichisches Normungsinstitut (ON), Vienna 1995.
Zilch, K.; Rogge, A.
Bemessung der Stahlbeton- und Spannbetonbauteile nach DIN 1045-1
(Design of Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete Components According to DIN 1045-1).
Betonkalender 2002, V. 1, pp. 217-359.
Ernst & Sohn Verlag, Berlin 2002.

436

Basics

SIA 262 Design

Basics
The reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete design according to SIA 262:2013 is applicable for both building and
bridge structures. Permitted structure models include beam, area and solid constructions. Prestressed structures can only be
checked in the FEM module.
Differing components can be combined in a structure model:
Non-prestressed components

Prestressed components with subsequent bond

Prestressed components without bond

Components with external prestressing

Mixed-construction components

The design is carried out after the static calculation. To do so, you need to assign the calculated load cases to the actions in
accordance with SIA 260. The program will take into account the preset safety factors and combination coefficients for the
desired design situations to automatically calculate the decisive design internal forces for either the entire system or a group
of selected elements.
The actions and check selection dialogs can be opened from the analysis settings. Detailed check specifications and
reinforcement data must be entered during section definition.
The checks are limited to elements with materials SC12/15 to SC50/60, SLC12/13 to SLC50/55 and SCX..
For beams and design objects, all checks are carried out at the polygon section. For general notes on using design objects,
refer to the relevant chapter of the manual.
In the SIA 262 Design folder of the database you can also perform a single design for user-defined polygon sections or
composite sections.

Input
Actions and Design Situations
The design values of the load are calculated based on the internal forces of the individual load cases and load case
combinations. For this the existing load cases and load case combinations must be assigned to actions. This results in the
desired design situations.
The following dialog is opened from the database or the Settings in the Analysis menu.

437

SIA 262 Design

Action...
Open the dialog for entering new actions:
Permanent actions (G, GE, GH)

Prestressing (P)

Creep and shrinkage, relaxation (CSR1, CSR2)

These actions are only available if a P action has been defined. In the combinations they are treated, along with P, as a
single action.
Variable actions (QN, QS, QW, QT, QH, QD)

Accidental actions (A)

Actions due to earthquakes (AE)

Design values of actions (Fd)

These actions already contain the partial safety factors and combination coefficients. They are combined exclusively.
Cyclic fatigue actions (Qfat)

Group...
Open the dialog for entering a new design group. Optionally, particular actions and design situations can be defined for
specific components (sections).
Situation...
Open the dialog for entering new design situations. Situations must be classified as either a construction stage or a final
state in order to control the checking process. For prestressed concrete structures with subsequent bond, you can specify
that the tendons are still ungrouted.
Edit
Open the Edit dialog for the selected action or situation.
Delete
Delete the selected action or situation.
Combinations...
Opens a dialog that contains the first 999 load case variants to be combined for the selected design situation and includes
an option to create load groups for selected variants. These variants can be used for second-order theory analysis or
nonlinear analysis.
Calculate
Calculate the defined design situations. Once calculated, the extremal results (internal forces, support reactions) can be
accessed for all combinations in the database. This allows you to evaluate the results without having to open the checking
module. Each time you open the checking module, all results will be automatically recalculated using the currently valid
actions and then stored in the database for the elements to be checked.
The following table demonstrates how the situations are used in the various checks. The numbers refer to the SIA 262
chapters.
Situation
Permanent and temp.
Accidental
Earthquake
Characteristic
(rare)
Frequent
Quasi-continuous

Ultimate limit state

Longitudinal reinf.
Lateral reinf.
Torsional reinf.

Fatigue

Fatigue reinf. steel

Fatigue prestr. steel
Fatigue concrete

Chapter
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.5

Serviceability limit state

Chapter

Prevention of brittle
failure
Crack width limitation
Concrete compr. stress

4.4.2

Crack width limitation

438

4.3.8
4.3.8
4.3.8

4.4.2
3.1.2.6.3
4.1.5.2.4
4.4.2

Input

Definition of an Action
The illustration below shows an example of the dialog field for entering variable actions. The dialog fields for the other
action types have a similar appearance.

Label
User-defined label for the action.
Gamma.sup, Gamma.inf
Partial safety factors gsup and ginf.
Combination coefficients psi for:
Input fields for selecting the combination coefficients for variable actions. The
selected combination coefficients y0, y1 and y2.

button allows you to view and modify the

buttons.

Inclusive load cases

SIA 262 Design

Internal prestressing
Selected load cases that describe internal prestressing. The reactions of the individual load cases are added up.
External prestressing
Selected load cases that describe external prestressing. The reactions of the individual load cases are added up.

Partial Safety Factors

The partial safety factors for actions are determined by the definition of actions in accordance with SIA 260, Table 1, and
can be modified if necessary. The partial safety factors of the construction materials are preset with the values specified by
SIA 262, Section 2.3.2.5.

Prestress of component
The type of prestressing can be selected for each section separately:
not prestressed

subsequent bond

without bond

external

mixed construction

Requirement
The requirement for crack formation determines the actions and steel stress limits for crack width limitation according to
SIA 262, Table 17 and Figure 31.

440

Input

Base Values
The base values apply for all checks in the ultimate limit and serviceability states.

Design mode
Standard: Standard design mode for bending with normal force throughout the load range. Reinforcement will be

calculated in the tensile section to the greatest degree possible.

Symmetrical: Design for symmetrical reinforcement. As opposed to the standard mode, all of the reinforcement layers

reinforcement according to SIA 262, Chapter 5.5.4.

Reduction factor of prestr. for brittle failure
In the program, the regulations of EN 1992-2, Chapter 6.2(110) are decisive for the arrangement of robustness
reinforcement. Thus for the determination of the tensile zone the statically determined effect of prestressing is not taken
into account. Because this cannot be determined for area elements, the prestress can alternatively be reduced by a reduction
factor. The specification of an appropriate value is subject to the discretion of the user.
Quality of stirrups
Steel quality for stirrup and longitudinal reinforcement from lateral force in MN/m.
Effective height
Effective static height for the shear design of area elements [m].
Design like slabs
Beams or design objects are treated like slabs.
Strain eps.v for slabs

Basic value: Strain ev according to Section 4.3.3.2.2 for calculation of the absorbable lateral force without lateral force

reinforcement [].
Max. grain Dmax: Maximum grain of the concrete for the calculation of kg according to Equation (37).

Longitudinal reinforcement is graded: Switch for the increase of ev according to Section 4.3.3.2.3.

Compression field angle Alpha []

Angle of the concrete compressive field according to Section 4.3.3.3.2.
Coefficient kc for compress. strength
Coefficient for the concrete compressive strength according to Section 4.2.1.7.

441

SIA 262 Design

Shear Section
For polygon sections, additional section dimensions are required for the lateral force and torsion design according to
SIA 262. These dimensions are explained in the following.

442

Input

Concrete Stress

perm. sigma.c
In accordance with SIA 262, Section 3.1.2.6.3, the effect of the load level on the creep is to be taken into account for
concrete stresses sc > 0.45 fck. The compliance of this stress limit is verified for the quasi-continuous combination referring
to EN 1992-1-1, Section 7.2(3).
perm. sigma.c(t)
Permissible concrete stress sc(t) at time t when prestressing is introduced according to SIA 262, Section 4.1.5.2.4, Equation
(23). If the compressive stress exceeds the value 0.45fck(t), the nonlinearity of the creep should be taken into account
according to Section 3.1.2.6.3. The program assumes that prestressing is introduced in design situation G1+P.
fck(t)
Concrete strength at time t when prestressing is introduced as per Section 4.1.5.2.4 [MN/m].

443

SIA 262 Design

Crack Control
These specifications apply to the check against brittle failure, the calculation of the crack reinforcement and the crack width
limitation.

Tensile strength fctd

The concrete tensile strength fctd can be calculated either with SIA 262, Equation (98), or with Equation (100).
Factor kt
Reduction factor kt for taking into account the dimension of the tension chord t according to Equation (99).
Restraint for crack reinforcement
Selection of the tensile zone according to Section 4.4.2.3.6 for distribution of the crack reinforcement in case of restraint.
Take prestr. steel into account
Bonded prestressing steel within the tensile zone is taken into account according to Section 4.4.2.3.10.
Max. bar distance s acc. to Fig. 31 [mm]
Largest existing bar distance of the reinforcing steel for determination of the stress limits according to Figure 31.

444

Input

Fatigue

dSigma.sd,fat, dSigma.bd,fat, dSigma.pd,fat

Design values of the fatigue strength of the longitudinal reinforcement, the shear reinforcement and the prestressing steel
according to SIA 262, Table 13. For calculation of the coefficient k according to Equation (85) for shear reinforcement, the
mandrel diameter is taken to be di = 4 s.
Increase factor k.xi
Increase factor kx for the reinforcing steel stress of the longitudinal reinforcement. This factor is used to take into account
the varying bonding behavior of concrete and prestressing steel as per Section 4.3.8.1.4.
Limit design variants
For area elements, the variants for determining the stress range can be limited to the corresponding sets of design internal
forces. For more information see chapter 'Fatigue Checks / Special Characteristic for Shell Structures'.

445

SIA 262 Design

Analysis Settings
The SIA 262 dialog page can be opened using the Settings function of the Analysis menu.

Fatigue
Crack control

Bend and longitudinal force

Lateral force
Torsion
Robustness
Fatigue for concrete
Fatigue for reinforcing and prestressed steel
Brittle failure
Crack reinforcement from restraint
Crack width limitation

An overview of the checks can be accessed using the Design Settings function in the SIA 262 Design folder of the database.
All checks for the extreme values of actions (simplifying)
When you make a selection, the minimum and maximum values are generated for each internal force component. They will
then be used together with their associated values to execute the design. Alternatively, all possible combinations of load
cases can be generated and designed as well. This option can, however, greatly slow down calculation if there is a large
number of load cases.
Actions...
Open the dialog for describing actions.

446

Input
Listing
No: No log is generated by the checking program.

Standard: Log with tabular output of results.

Detailed: Additional output of the decisive combination internal forces at the check locations.

Standard > permissible: Standard log limited to check locations where the permissible limit values are exceeded.

Detailed > permissible: Detailed log limited to check locations where the permissible limit values are exceeded.

Single Design
The single design function allows you to analyze individual section polygons separately from the whole system using
predefined internal forces. The entry table can be found in the SIA 262 Design folder of the database.
Section
Number of the section to be designed.
Concrete
Concrete class SC12/15, ... SC50/60 or LSC12/13, ... LSC50/55
Apparent density
Apparent density of the lightweight concrete [kg/m].
Combination
Design situation according to SIA 261, Section 4.4.3.4 or 4.4.3.5.
0: Permanent and temporary design situation.

1: Accidental design situation.

Nsd, Mysd, Mzsd

Internal forces that are designed.
Mode
Standard: Standard design mode for bending with normal force throughout the load range. Reinforcement will be

calculated in the tensile section to the greatest degree possible.

Symmetrical: Design for symmetrical reinforcement. As opposed to the standard mode, all of the reinforcement layers

reinforcement according to SIA 262, Section 5.5.4.

Strains: Determine strain state for existing reinforcing steel layers.

Inactive: Design disabled.

The calculation can be carried out while the input table is open using the Single Design or Page Preview menu item.

447

SIA 262 Design

Punching Shear Check

When you select a check node, the key data for the checks is displayed in a dialog field. This dialog is divided into three
pages.
1a. Input data, column
The column forms Rectangle and Round, with the viewpoints Intern, Edge parallel to x, Edge parallel to y and Corner are
available. When you enter a new column, the program will suggest the dimensions of existing columns. The edge distances
ax and ay are used to calculate the perimeters ui of the check sections.
1b. Input data, slab
This section presents the material properties, the existing bending reinforcement as well as other coefficients for the
calculation of the punching shear resistances.
1c. Input data, action
You can either add a support force from a previous design according to SIA 262 or enter an action directly. Possible average
soil pressures s0 decrease the design value of the lateral force.
2. Aperture
This dialog page is used to define the geometry and location of an opening.
3. Results
This dialog page shows the calculated punching shear resistances, the necessary punching shear reinforcement (if
applicable) and the minimum bending reinforcement.
Example

Punching shear check node 146

The check is performed according to SIA 262:2013.
1. Measurements, situation and material
Rectangular column with width bx = 0.24 m and height by = 0.24 m
Situation: Edge parallel to the x-axis; Edge spacing ay = 0.20 m

448

0.24

0.20

Input

0.24

Static height dv = 0.200 m

Critical perimeter u = 1.43 m (distance = 0.10 m); Acrit = 0.23 m
Available long. reinf. asx / asy = 5.00 / 5.00 cm/m
Eff. height of the slab dx / dy = 0.200 / 0.200 m; d = (dx + dy)/2 = 0.200 m
Spans lx / ly = 8.00 / 7.00 m
Truss angle a = 90.0
Concrete: SC20/25; Dmax = 32 mm
tcd = 0.3 ht fck / gc = 0.3 1.0 20.00 / 1.50 = 0.89 N/mm
fbd = 1.4 fctm / gc = 2.05 N/mm
Reinforcement: B500B
Es = 205000 N/mm; fsd = fsk / gs = 500.00 / 1.15 = 434.78 N/mm
Collapse protection as per Figure 26
b = 0; dint = 0.170 m; sint = 0.40 m
2. Action: 1.Permanent and temporary situation
Vd = 587.00 kN; Md = 0.00 kNm
3. Punching resistance without punching reinforcement
Coefficient ke as per Chapter 4.3.6.2.4
eu = 0; ke = 1
Distance rs as per Chapter 4.3.6.4.4
rs,x = 0.22 lx = 1.76 m; rs,y = 0.22 ly = 1.54 m
bs = min(1.5 (rs,x rs,y); lmin) = 2.47 m
Bending resistance and comparison moment as per Chapter 4.3.6.4.7
mRd,x = 43.61 kNm; mRd,y = 43.61 kNm
msd,x = max( Vd (1/8 + |eu| / 2bs); Vd / 4) = 146.75 kNm
msd,y = Vd (1/8 + |eu| / bs) = 73.38 kNm
Slab rotation y as per Chapter 4.3.6.4.1 at approximation level 2
yx = 1.5 rs,x / d fsd / Es (msd,x / mRd,x)3/2 = 0.17
yy = 1.5 rs,y / d fsd / Es (msd,y / mRd,y)3/2 = 0.05
y = max( yx; yy) = 0.17
Coefficient kr as per Chapter 4.3.6.3.2
kg = 48 / (16 + Dmax) = 1.00
kr = min(1 / (0.45 + 0.18 y d kg); 2) = 2.00
Punching resistance as per Chapter 4.3.6.3.1
VRd,c = kr tcd dv ke u = 513.10 kN
Vd / VRd,c = 587.00 / 513.10 = 1.14 > 1

Punching reinforcement is required!

449

SIA 262 Design

4. Punching reinforcement perpendicular to the slab plane

Design lateral force as per Chapter 4.3.6.5.2
Vd,s = max(Vd - VRd,c; Vd / 2) = 293.50 kN
Punching reinforcement as per Chapter 4.3.6.5.4
VRd,s = Asw ke ssd sin 90
sw = 16 mm as per Table 20
ssd = min(Es y / 6 (1 + fbd / fsd d / sw); fsd) = 434.78 N/mm
Asw = Vd,s / ke / ssd = 6.75 cm
Reinforcement arrangement as per Chapter 5.5.3.8, Figure 39 and Table 20
- The punching reinforcement should consist of two or more rows
- The first row should have a minimal distance of 0.07 m from the edge of the supported area
- The radial distance of the reinforcing rows must not exceed 0.07 m
- The outmost row should have a distance of 0.14 m from the edge of the supported area
- In the second row, the tangential distance of the reinforcing elements must not exceed 0.30 m
Check of the concret compressive strut at the supported area as per Chapter 4.3.6.5.7
VRd,c = min( 2 kr; 3.5) tcd dv ke u = 897.93 kN
Vd / VRd,c = 587.00 / 897.93 = 0.65 1

Check is OK!

Punching shear check outside of the reinforced zone as per Chapter 4.3.6.5.9 and Figure 25
Check perimeter uout = 1.87 m; Distance = 0.24 m
The static height is assumed to be dv = 0.20 m
VRd,c,out = kr tcd dv ke uout = 670.46 kN
Vd / VRd,c,out = 587.00 / 670.46 = 0.88 1

Check is OK!

5. Collaps protection
Check section as per Figure 26: uint = sint + p / 2 dint = 0.67 m
kb = 0.37 as per Table 12 for ductility class B
Residual resistance at check section as per Chapter 4.3.6.7.2
VRd,res = As fsd kb 1.7 tcd dint uint
As = min( Vd; 1.7 tcd dint uint) / (fsd kb) = 10.72 cm

450

Prestressed Structures

External Prestressing, Mixed Construction

External prestressing can be taken into account by entering the external forces directly in the program. For mixed
construction, the additional tendons with bond must be entered as described above.

Creep and Shrinkage

Similar to prestressing, creep and shrinkage are taken into account by specifying a corresponding load case (Creep and
shrinkage load type) in the FEM calculation. Besides the creep-generating permanent load case, you also need to specify
whether the internal forces relocation between concrete and prestressing steel is to be taken into account. This option is
only useful in the case of tendons with bond.
The decisive creep and shrinkage coefficients for calculating the Creep and shrinkage load case are entered in the section
dialog.
The program determines concrete creep and shrinkage based on a time-dependent stress-strain law developed by Trost.

s b (t ) =

Eb
e b (t ) - j e b,0 - e b,S
1+r j

In this case:

sb(t)

Concrete stress from creep and shrinkage at time t.

E-modulus of the concrete.

Relaxation coefficient according to Trost for time t (normally r = 0.80).

Creep coefficient for time t.

eb(t)

Concrete strain from creep and shrinkage at time t.

eb,0

Concrete strain from creep-generating continuous load.

eb,s

Concrete strain from shrinkage.

Dsp,csr = Dspr + Ep Decpt

with

Dspr

Prestressing loss from relaxation of the prestressing steel.

Decpt

Concrete strain change from creep and shrinkage.

E-modulus of the prestressing steel.

451

SIA 262 Design

Relaxation of Prestressing Steel

According to SIA 262, Section 3.3.2.7.1, the design values of the stress loss from relaxation of the prestressing steel for a
duration of 1000 h can be taken from Figure 8. Long time values of the stress loss can be determined by multiplying these
values with the factor 3.
You can define the stress losses in the CSR actions of the SIA 262 Actions dialog.

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States

The following checks are available:

Bending and bending with normal force (SIA 262, Chapter 4.3.2)
Lateral force (Chapter 4.3.3)
Torsion and combined load (Chapter 4.3.5)
Punching shear (Chapter 4.3.6).
Fatigue (Chapter 4.3.8)

The following combinations in accordance with SIA 260, Chapter 4.4.3, are taken into account in the ultimate limit states:
Permanent and temporary design situations

(16)
Ed = E{g G Gk , g P Pk , g Q,1 Qk,1, y 0,i Qk,i }

Accidental design situations

(17)

Ed = E{Gk , Pk , Ad , y 2,i Qk,i }

Design situations resulting from earthquakes (AE) according to SIA 261, Section 16.1.4.

Ed = E{Gk , Pk , AE , y 2,i Qk,i }

Fatigue combination according to SIA 262, Chapter 4.3.8, combined with EN 1992-1-1, Chapter 6.8.3, Equation (6.68).
(6.68)
Ed = E {Gk , Pk , y1,1 Qk,1, y 2,i Qk,i }; Qfat

Stress-Strain-Curves
The following characteristics are used for section design:

Concrete: parabola-rectangle diagram according to SIA 262, Figure 12 and Equation (28). The coefficient ht in
Equations (2) and (3) which considers the effect of load duration on concrete strength, is assumed to be ht = 1

according to Section 4.2.1.3.

Reinforcing steel: stress-strain curve according to Figure 16, with rising upper branch and ks = 1.05.

Prestressing steel: stress-strain curve according to Figure 17, with horizontal upper branch according to Section 4.2.3.5.

The check against fatigue is carried out in the cracked state with a linear stress-strain curve according to Section 4.3.8.1.3.

452

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States

Design for Bending and Bending with Normal Force

The design for bending and bending with normal force is carried out using a detailed section analysis according to SIA 262,
Section 4.3.2.3, where the coefficient for the concrete compressive strength kc = 1.0 is assumed. As a simplification,
calculations are performed with ks = 1.05 and eud = 0.020 for all reinforcing steel types. The design includes slab, plain
stress and shell elements with perpendicular or inclined reinforcement as well as beams. The design internal forces are
calculated in the same way as for the design according to DIN 1045-1. For each internal force combination, the necessary
reinforcement due to the equilibrium conditions of the reinforced concrete section is determined iteratively. The final result
is derived from the extreme value of all calculated reinforcements.
You can control the result of the design by specifying the reinforcement geometry and choosing one of three design
modes:
Mode Standard
This is the standard design mode for bending with longitudinal force throughout the entire load area. Reinforcement will be
calculated in the tensile section to the greatest degree possible. For reasons of economy, if the steel strain esd part of the
steel strength fsd is exceeded, compressive reinforcement is determined.
Mode Symmetrical
In contrast to the standard design, the reinforcement will be applied at all predefined locations in all strain areas, if
necessary. The specified relationships between the reinforcement layers will not be affected.
Mode Compression member
The design is performed symmetrically. Additionally, the minimum reinforcement of 0.6% required according to
Section 5.5.4.2 of the standard is determined. This calculation is based on the entire area of the concrete section.

Design for Lateral Force

The design for lateral force includes the determination of lateral force reinforcement and the check of the resistance of the
concrete compressive field according to SIA 262, Chapter 4.3.3. The following special conditions apply:
The angle of the diagonal tensile reinforcement is assumed to be 90.

The minimum reinforcement according to Section 5.5.2.2 of the standard is included in the calculated stirrup

reinforcement.

Slab and shell elements are designed for the lateral force qr = (qx + qy).

There is no limitation on the check locations according to Section 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.4.1 as well as no reduction of the
action from loads near supports according to Section 4.3.3.2.7.
For beams and design objects, the decisive values of the equivalent rectangle are determined by the user independently
of the normal section geometry. The coefficients for calculating the inner lever arm z based on the effective width and
effective height according to Section 4.3.3.4.2 must also be specified.
For area elements, the calculation is normally performed with the lever arm z = 0.9 d.
The coefficient kc for the concrete compressive strength defined by the user is taken into account.

Formulas used from the standard:

4.3.3.2
4.3.3.2.1

Components without Lateral Force Reinforcement

Lateral force resistance of slabs without lateral force reinforcement

vRd = kd tcd dv

(35)

kd =

1
1 + ev d kg

(36)

kg =

48
16 + Dmax

(37)

Dmax

Maximum grain in the concrete. Dmax= 0 for lightweight concrete.

tcd

Design value of the shear stress limit.

t cd =
d

0.3 ht

f ck

(3)

Static height, average static height given several reinforcement layers [mm].
453

SIA 262 Design

Effective static height for absorbing the lateral force dv = d is assumed.

Coefficient to take into account the effect of the load duration on the concrete strength. In
accordance with Section 4.2.1.3, ht = 1 is assumed.

4.3.3.2.2

If the bending reinforcement remains in the elastic state:

ev =

f sd md
Es mRd

(38)

If plastic deformation of the bending reinforcement cannot be ruled out:

e v = 1.5

f sd
Es

Design value of the bending moment.

mRd

Design value of the bending resistance.

4.3.3.2.3

The strain ev is to be increased by 50% if the longitudinal reinforcement in the check area is staged.

4.3.3.2.4

The strain ev is to be increased with 1/(sin4 J + cos4 J), where J is the Angle between the principal

(39)

reinforcement and principal direction of the lateral force (arctan qy / qx).

4.3.3.3
4.3.3.4.3

Components with Lateral Force Reinforcement

Resistance of a vertical lateral force reinforcement

VRd,s = Asw /s z fsd cot a

4.3.3.3.2

(43)

The compression field angle can freely be chosen between the following limits:

amin a 45

(40)

The minimum compression field angle amin is:

- amin =

30 in the normal case,

- amin =

25 if a significant longitudinal compressive force acts on the web,

- amin =

40 if a longitudinal tensile force acts on the web or plastic deformations of the chord in the
observed part of the girder are expected.

4.3.3.4.6

Resistance of the concrete compressive field

VRd,c = bw z kc fcd sin a cos a

kc
4.3.3.4.12

(45)

Coefficient for determination of the concrete strength according to Section 4.2.1.7.

Longitudinal tensile force as a result of lateral force

FtVd = Vd ( cot a - cot )

(50)

Angle of the stirrup reinforcement (here 90).

Ft = 0.5 | Vd | cot a (additional tensile force in the longitudinal reinforcement)
5.5.2.2

Minimum stirrup reinforcement of girders

rw =
5.5.3.4

454

Asw
f
500
0.001 ck
s bw
30 f sk

The reinforcement content of slabs also has to satisfy the condition of Equation (110), if shear
reinforcement is necessary.

(110)

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States

Design for Torsion and Combined Loads

The design for torsion is carried out according to SIA 262, Chapter 4.3.5. The stirrup reinforcement, the longitudinal
reinforcement and the resistance of the concrete compressive field are determined. According to the standard, for
simultaneously acting lateral force and torsional load, the combined utilization of the concrete compressive field

Vd
T
+ d
VRd,c TRd,c
is checked. The ideal hollow section on which this design is based is defined by the user independently of the normal
section geometry.
Formulas used from the standard:
4.3.5

Torsion and combined load

4.3.5.2

Equivalent plain stress element forces

Vd,i =

4.3.5.3

Td
zi
2 Ak

Vd,i

Design value of the lateral force in the plain stress element i .

Design value of the torsional moment.

Section area according to Figure 19.

Lever arm of the longitudinal force in the plain stress element i .

(54)

Effective plain stress element thickness of solid sections

tk dk / 8
dk

(55)
Maximum diameter that can be placed inside area Ak .

Punching Shear
The check of the load-bearing safety with respect to punching shear is carried out according to SIA 262, Chapter 4.3.6. The
necessary punching reinforcement and longitudinal reinforcement to protect against collapse are determined.
The following special conditions apply:
The factor ke is determined according to Section 4.3.6.2.4.

The average static height d results from the input parameters dx and dy with d = (dx + dy) / 2. The static height dv for

absorption of lateral force according to Section 4.3.6.2.1 is to be specified by the user.

The action can be entered directly or taken from the analyzed design situation at the ultimate limit state. In this case,
Vd is set to the maximum support force Rz for each corresponding action combination. The moment for consideration
of the load eccentricity Md results from the support moments Mx and My with Md = (Mx + My). It is therefore

important that the support is oriented correctly. The least favorable combination is logged.
In accordance with Section 4.3.6.2.6 soil pressures within the check perimeter can be used to reduce the design value
of the lateral force Vd. This is taken into account if the value s0 is entered in the punching shear dialog.

The punching shear check is fulfilled when:

Vd VRd.
The following formulas are used:
4.3.6.2.4
Reduction factor for the circumference of the check perimeter

ke =

1
e
1+ u
b

(56)

Load eccentricity of the column with:

eu = | Md / Vd |
455

SIA 262 Design

4.3.6.3.1

Moment for calculation of the load eccentricity.

Diameter of a circle with the same area as the area of the column.

Punching resistance without punching reinforcement

VRd,c = kr tcd dv u

(57)

with

tcd

t cd =

Design Value of the Shear Stress Limit

0.3 ht

f ck

(3)

Static height.

u
ht

Circumference of the perimeter under consideration according to Figure 21 and 22.

Coefficient to take into account the effect of the load duration on the concrete strength. In
accordance with Section 4.2.1.3, ht = 1 is assumed.

4.3.6.3.2

kr =

1
2
0.45 + 0.18 y d k g

(58)

with
4.3.6.4.1

r f
y = 1.5 s sd
d Es
rs

msd

m
Rd

(59)

Radial distance between column axis and moment zero point according to Section 4.3.6.4.4:

rs = Maximum ( 0.22 lx; 0.22 ly)

4.3.6.5.4

d
fsd

Effective static height.

Design value for the yield criterion of reinforcing steel.

Elasticity modulus of the reinforcing steel.

msd

Average moment in the support band, determined for approximation level 2 according to

mRd

Section 4.3.6.4.7 with Equations (61) to (64).

Average value of the bending resistance in the support band.

Coefficient for consideration of the maximum grain diameter according to Section 4.3.3.2.1.

Punching resistance with punching reinforcement

VRd,s = Asw ke ssd sinb

(67)

with

Asw

Area of the punching reinforcement.

ssd

Design value of the stress in the punching reinforcement

s sd =

Es y
6

f
d
1 + bd
f sd

sd
sw

(68)

with

fbd

Design value of the bond stress

f bd =
sw

1.4 f ctm
gc

Diameter of the punching reinforcement elements. The limit value of Table 20 is used in the
program.

456

(103)

Checks in the Ultimate Limit States

4.3.6.5.2

4.3.6.5.7

The design of punching reinforcement is carried out using the following lateral force

Vd,s = Vd - VRd,c

(65)

Vd,s Vd / 2

(66)

Crack resistance of the concrete compressive diagonals

VRd,c = 2 kr tcd dv u 3.5 tcd dv u

4.3.6.5.9

(67)

An additional check at the perimeter uout is performed to determine the size of the area with punching
reinforcement.

Vd VRd,c,out
VRd,c,out = kr tcd dv uout
For the static height dv, the value entered in accordance with Section 4.3.6.2.1 is used for the sake of
simplicity.
4.3.6.7

Protection against collapse

Determination of the required longitudinal reinforcement on the side of the slab under bending
compression.

VRd,res = (As fsd k) 1.7 tcd dint uint

(70)

uint = (sint + p/2 dint)

(71)

with

dint

Distance between bending reinforcement and reinforcement against collapse according to

Figure 26.

sint

Distance between the outer reinforcing bars according to Figure 26.

Coefficient according to Table 12.

Check against Fatigue

Fatigue of longitudinal reinforcement, shear reinforcement and prestressing steel
The fatigue check is carried out according to SIA 262, Chapter 4.3.8. The steel stresses are calculated for longitudinal
reinforcement from bending and longitudinal force as well as for prestressing steel in beams and design objects under the
assumption of a cracked concrete section. For shear and longitudinal reinforcement from lateral force and torsion, the
stresses are calculated according to Section 4.3.8.1.7 based on a truss model with the strut angle tan afat = tan a 1.
The prestressing steel stresses in area elements are determined at the uncracked concrete section. Tendons without bond
and external tendons are not checked.
The check is carried out for the long-time strength according to Section 4.3.8.2.3, Equation (86):

Dssd(Qfat) Dssd,D

(86)

with

Dssd,D @ 0.8Dssd,fat
Dssd(Qfat)

Stress range of fatigue action Qfat.

Dssd,fat

Design value of the fatigue strength according to Table 13.

(86)

In case of bonded presstressed tendons the stresses in the reinforcing steel are increased by the factor kx according to
Equation (81) to take into account the varying bond behavior of reinforcing and prestressing steel.
The values for Dssd,fat and kx are specified by the user in the Section dialog.
Calculation method
The maximum from the robustness, crack and bending reinforcement is taken as the existing bending reinforcement. If as a
result the load from the fatigue action in state II cannot be absorbed, the design will be repeated using the existing
reinforcement and the check internal forces.
The maximum stress range per steel layer that results from the strain state in state II or the truss model is determined
separately for each check situation. Multiplying the coefficient kx yields the stress range Dssd. If for longitudinal and shear
457

SIA 262 Design

reinforcement this range exceeds the permitted stress range according to Equation (86), the necessary reinforcement will be
iteratively increased until the check succeeds for all situations. In the Symmetrical and Compression member design modes
the longitudinal reinforcement is applied at all predefined locations. This will not affect the predefined relationships
between the individual reinforcement layers.
The decisive reinforcement used for the check, which may have been increased, is recorded in the check log and saved for
graphical representation.

Fatigue of concrete under compressive stress

The fatigue check for concrete that is subject to compressive stress is performed for bending and longitudinal force at the
cracked section. This check takes into account the final longitudinal reinforcement and may include an increase applied
during the fatigue check for reinforcing steel. The struts of components subject to lateral force stress are not analyzed.
The check according to Section 4.3.8.3.1 is proved, if Equation (91) is fulfilled:
|scd|max 0.5 kc fcd + 0.45 |scd|min 0.9 kc fcd
with

|scd|max, |scd|min

(91)

Design values of the maximum and minimum concrete compressive stress for the fatigue action Qfat.
In the case of tensile stresses, |scd|min is assumed to be zero.

The reduction coefficient for the concrete compressive strength is assumed to be kc = 1.0 according
to Section 4.2.1.7.

Special characteristic of shell structures

458

Checks in the Serviceability Limit States

The

following checks are performed:

Limiting the concrete compressive stresses (SIA 262, Section 3.1.2.6.3 and 4.1.5.2.4).
Minimum reinforcement against brittle failure (robustness reinforcement)(Chapter 4.4.2).
Crack reinforcement in case of restraint (Chapter 4.4.2).
Crack width limitation (Chapter 4.4.2).

In accordance with SIA 260, Section 4.4.4.4, the following combinations are taken into account in the serviceability limit
states:

Rare situations
(20)
E = E{G , P , Q , y Q }
d

k,1

0,i

k,i

Frequent situations

Ed = E{Gk , Pk , y1,1 Qk,1, y 2,i Qk,i }

(21)

Quasi-continuous situations

Ed = E{Gk , Pk , y 2,i Qk,i }

(22)

Limiting the Concrete Compressive Stresses

The concrete compressive stress check is carried out in state I. For area elements the concrete stresses are calculated at the
gross section. For beams and design objects, the bending stress is calculated
- without internal tendons at the gross section,
- with internal tendons without bond at the net section,
- with internal tendons with bond for situations before being grouted at the net section or otherwise at the ideal section.
In accordance with SIA 262, Section 3.1.2.6.3, the influence of the load level on the creep behavior is to be taken into
account for concrete stresses sc > 0.45 fck. If selected in the section dialog, this stress limit is verified for the quasicontinuous combination based on EN 1992-1-1, Section 7.2(3).
In prestressed concrete components the concrete compressive stresses during and after the prestressing process may not
exceed the value 0.6 fck(t) at any location of the structure out of the anchoring area according to SIA 262, Section 4.1.5.2.4.
If the concrete compressive stress also exceeds the value 0.45 fck(t), the nonlinearity of the creep must be taken into
account. fck(t) indicates the characteristic value of the concrete compressive strength at time t when the prestressing is
introduced.
The program assumes the time of introducing the prestressing to coincide with situation G1+P. If a quasi-continuous
situation G1+P is defined, the concrete stress is checked against the limit value 0.45 fck(t) or 0.6 fck(t) for this situation
depending on the user's specification. The value for fck(t) is also defined in the dialog.

Minimum Reinforcement against Brittle Failure

According to SIA 262, Chapter 4.4.2, brittle failure of concrete in the tensile zone must be prevented by installation of a
minimum reinforcement. The minimum reinforcement (Robustness reinforcement) is calculated for the crack moment using
the design values of the tensile strength fctd and the steel strength fsd:

As = Mcr / ( fsd z )
with

Mcr

Crack moment by which a tensile stress of fctd occurs without prestressing effect at the section edge.

Lever arm of internal forces.

The crack moment results in Mcr = Wc fctd, the lever arm z of the internal forces is assumed to be 0.9 d for the sake of
simplicity. In accordance with Section 4.4.2.3.6 the minimum reinforcement is to be placed in the tensile zone of the
components. Referring to EN 1992-2, Section 6.1(110), the rare action combination is used to determine the tensile zone. In
459

SIA 262 Design

this process the statically undetermined prestressing effect should be taken into account rather than the statically
determined prestressing effect. The program determines all stresses at the gross section. The statically determined
prestressing effect can only be subtracted for beams and design objects. For area elements the prestress is alternatively
reduced by a user-defined reduction factor.
The calculated reinforcement is evenly distributed to the reinforcement layers in the tensile zone. In the design mode
symmetrical reinforcement is also applied to the remaining layers. This will not affect the predefined relationships between
the individual reinforcement layers. For sections with mode compression member the robustness reinforcement is not
checked because minimum reinforcement is already determined during the design for bending with longitudinal force.

Crack Reinforcement in Case of Restraint

The installation of a minimum reinforcement can be used to limit the crack width in case of imposed or obstructed
deformations according to SIA 262, Section 4.4.2.3.7. In accordance with Section 4.4.2.3.6 the minimum reinforcement is
to be placed in the tensile zone of the components. The tensile zone is defined by the user in the section dialog by selection
of a restraint action (tension at the top/bottom, centrical tension).
The minimum reinforcement is calculated with the following equation:

As = ks fctd Act / ss,adm

with

Coefficient for consideration of stress distribution prior to crack formation:

ks = 1.0

for centrical restraint

ks = 0.4

for bending restraint of rectangular sections, deduced from

SIA D 0182, Eq. (10.7)

ks = 0.9 Fcr / Act / fctd 0.5

in all other cases according to EN 1992-1-1, Eq. (7.3)

with the tensile force Fcr in the tension chord in state I directly before crack formation with the edge stress fctd.
The tensile force is calculated by integrating the tensile stresses over the area Act.

fctd

Design value of the concrete tensile strength. Depending on the selection in the section dialog one of the
following equations is used:

fctd = kt fctm
fctd = kt fctk0.95

(98)
(100)

with

kt =

1
1 + 0.5 t

(99)

Smallest dimension of the observed tension chord [m]. For slabs and rectangular sections under bending
load, t = h/3 applies.
The coefficient kt can be defined in the section dialog. The suggested value is kt = 1.0.

Act

Area of the concrete tensile zone at initial crack formation in state I.

ss,adm

Reinforcing steel strength according to Figure 31, depending on the selected requirement (Table 17) and the bar

distance of the longitudinal reinforcement.

If selected by the user, bonded prestressing steel within the tensile zone can optionally be taken into account for As
according to Section 4.4.2.3.10.

460

Checks in the Serviceability Limit States

Crack Width Limitation

Limitation of crack width is performed by checking the existing reinforcing steel stresses against the permitted steel stresses
according to SIA 262, Table 17 and Figure 31. The reinforcing steel stresses are calculated in state II for the maximum of
robustness, crack and bending reinforcement including a possible increase resulting from the fatigue check. Depending on
the selected requirement, the reinforcing steel stresses may not exceed the following values:

Requirement

Action combination
frequent

quasi-continuous

raised

fsd - 80 N/mm

high

fsd - 80 N/mm

ss,adm from Figure 31, curve C

If the reinforcing steel stresses can not be absorbed by the reinforcement, the program will automatically determine a crack
reinforcement that is required to maintain the crack width. For that purpose a design is carried out using the decisive check
combination for calculating the crack width.

Limiting Deformations
According to SIA 262, Chapter 4.4.3, the deformations of a component or structure may not impair its proper functioning
or appearance. Considering that, the deformation should not exceed the limits specified in SIA 260.
The InfoCAD program system allows you to perform a realistic check as part of a nonlinear system analysis for beam and
shell structures that takes geometric and physical nonlinearities into account. The resistance of the tendons with bond is
currently not included in the calculation.
Editing is performed in the following steps:
Define the check situation with the Load group function in the Load dialog through grouping the decisive individual

load cases. The variable loads must first be weighted with the combination coefficients of the combination specified in
SIA 260.
Select the check load cases in the Nonlinear Analysis / Serviceability dialog of the analysis settings for the FEM or

framework analysis.
Set the reinforcement determined in the ultimate limit state in the Start reinforcement selection field (maximum from

bending, robustness, crack check and fatigue).

Perform the FEM or framework analysis to determine the deformations in state II.

Check the system deformations displayed graphically or in tabular form.

For a detailed description of the nonlinear system analysis, refer to the relevant chapter of the manual.

461

SIA 262 Design

Results
The extremal values for internal forces, support reactions, deformations, soil pressures and stresses are saved for all check
situations. The resulting bending, minimum- and crack reinforcement, the decisive maximum value and the stirrup and
torsion reinforcement are provided for the graphical representation as well.
The log shows the design internal forces and necessary reinforcements, checked stresses or crack widths at each result
location. If the permissible limit values are exceeded, they are reported as warnings and indicated at the check location. The
detailed log also lists the decisive combination internal forces of all design situations.
Stresses for beams and design objects

Longitudinal stress in the concrete compressive stress check [MN/m].

ss, Dss

Stresses and stress ranges for reinforcing steel [MN/m].

sp, Dsp

Stresses and stress ranges for prestressing steel [MN/m].

scd, Dscd

Stresses and stress ranges in the fatigue check for concrete under longitudinal compression [MN/m].

Dssb,y, Dssb,z

Stress ranges for shear reinforcement from Qy and Qz [MN/m].

Dssb,T, Dssl,T

Stress ranges for shear reinforcement from torsion and for longitudinal torsion reinforcement
[MN/m].

Stresses for area elements

sx, sy

Longitudinal stress in x or y direction [MN/m].

ssx, Dssx

Stresses and stress ranges for reinforcing steel in the x direction [MN/m].

ssy, Dssy

Stresses and stress ranges for reinforcing steel in the y direction [MN/m].

sp, Dsp

Stresses and stress ranges for prestressing steel [MN/m].

scd,x, Dscd,x,

Stresses and stress ranges in the concrete fatigue check under longitudinal compression in the

scd,y, Dscd,y

x- and y-direction [MN/m].

Dss,b

Stress ranges for shear reinforcement [MN/m].

Bending Reinforcement
As
Bending reinforcement [cm] for beams.

asx, asy

Bending reinforcement [cm/m] for area elements in the x and y direction.

asj

Meridian reinforcement [cm/m] for axisymmetric shell elements.

asu

Ring reinforcement [cm/m] for axisymmetric shell elements.

Reinforcement from lateral force

asb
Stirrup reinforcement [cm/m] of area and axisymmetric shell elements.

Asb.y

Stirrup reinforcement of beams from Qy [cm/m].

Asb.z

Stirrup reinforcement of beams from Qz [cm/m].

asq

Longitudinal reinforcement from the lateral force design of area elements [cm/m].

Asl.y

Longitudinal reinforcement of beams from Qy [cm].

Asl.z

Longitudinal reinforcement of beams from Qz [cm].

Torsion reinforcement
Asb
Stirrup reinforcement of beams from torsion [cm/m].

Asl,T

Longitudinal reinforcement of beams from torsion [cm].

Design values

VyRdc

Resistance of the concrete compressive field with respect to Qy [kN].

VzRdc

Resistance of the concrete compressive field with respect to Qz [kN].

Q/VRdc+ Mx/TRdc Utilization of the concrete compressive field as a result of combined load from lateral force and torsion.
TRdc
462

Resistance of the concrete compressive field with respect to Mx [kNm].

Examples

Examples
Slab with Downstand Beam
In this example a rectangular slab (d = 20 cm, SC25/30) with a downstand beam is analyzed. This joint-supported slab will
be subjected to a traffic load of 10 kN/m.
The necessary design specifications and the stirrup reinforcements calculated for the slab and the downstand beam are
shown.

SIA 262 actions

Standard design group
G - Dead load
Gamma.sup / gamma.inf = 1.35 / 0.8
Load cases
---------1
Dead load
QN - Imposed load, traffic load
Gamma.sup / gamma.inf = 1.5 / 0
Combination coefficients for: Buildings
Working load - category A - floor spaces
Psi.0 / Psi.1 / Psi.2 = 0.7 / 0.5 / 0.3
Load cases 1. Variant, inclusive
-------------------------------2
Traffic span 1
3
Traffic span 2
1. Permanent and temporary situation
Final state
G - Dead load
QN - Imposed load, traffic load
1. Rare (characteristic) situation
Final state
G - Dead load
QN - Imposed load, traffic load
1. Frequent situation
Final state
G - Dead load
QN - Imposed load, traffic load

463

SIA 262 Design

Design overview
Se.

Prestress
of component
Not prestressed
Not prestressed

1
2
(M)
(R)
(B)
(Q)
(T)
(S)
(P)
(C)

Requirement
raised
raised

Reinforc.
M R B Q T
x + x x .
x + x x .

Fatig.
S P C
. . .
. . .

Crack
width
x
x

Comp.stress
.
.

Nominal reinforcement against brittle failure (robustness reinforcement).

Crack reinforcement from restraint (x), required reinf. due to load (+).
Flexural reinforcement at ultimate limit state.
(Nominal-)lateral force reinforcement at ultimate limit state.
Torsional reinforcement at ultimate limit state.
Reinforcing steel at fatigue check.
Prestressing steel at fatigue check.
Concrete at fatigue check.

Settings for flexural and shear reinforcement

M,N
Red.
eta.t
fsk
Alpha
kc
Slab
eps.v
Dmax
Long.

Design mode for bend and longitudinal force:

(ST) Standard, (SY) Symmetrical, (CM) Compression member.
Reduction factor of prestress for determining the tensile zone for
distribution of reinf. against brittle failure for area elements.
Coefficient for concrete strength as per 4.2.1.3.
Quality of stirrups [MN/m].
Compression field angle [].
Reduction factor for concrete strength as per 4.2.1.7.
Beams are designed like slabs.
Base value of strain as per 4.3.3.2.2 [o/oo].
Max. grain of concrete as per Eq. (37) [mm].
Longitudinal reinforecent is graded as per 4.3.3.2.3.

Se. Concrete Des.

for
M,N
1 SC25/30
ST
2 SC25/30
ST

Red.
prestr.
.
.

eta.t
1.00
1.00

fsk
Alpha
[MN/m] []
500
45.00
500
45.00

kc
0.55
0.55

Des.
like
slabs
.
.

Base
value
eps.v
3.00
.

Dmax
[mm]
32

Long.
reinf.
graded
.
.

Shear sections
bw.nom
h.nom
kb, kd
z1, z2
tk
Se.
1
2

Nominal width of the prestressed section according to 4.3.3.3.5.

Nominal height of the prestressed section according to 4.3.3.3.5.
Factor to calculate the inner lever arm z from the eff. width bn resp.
from the eff. height d according to 4.3.3.4.2.
Dimensions of the ideal hollow section for torsion as per 4.3.5.1.
Thickness of the ideal hollow section.
Width [m]
bw
bw.nom
1.000
.
0.300
.

Eff. width
bn [m] kb
.
.
0.270 0.90

Height[m]
h
h.nom
0.200
.
0.600
.

Eff.height
d [m] kd
0.170 0.90
0.570 0.90

Torsion section [m]

z1
z2
tk
.
.
.
0.540 0.240 0.060

The calculated reinforcements are shown in the illustrations below.

Longitudinal reinforcement of the beams in the ultimate limit state [cm]

Longitudinal reinforcement of the beams to ensure robustness [cm]

464

Examples

Longitudinal reinforcement of the beams to limit the crack width [cm]

Maximum longitudinal reinforcement of the beams [cm]

Maximum slab reinforcement in the intersection direction based on the robustness, crack width and design checks in the
ultimate limit state [cm/m]

Lateral force reinforcement of the beams [cm/m]

An excerpt of the detailed log for the midspan of the downstand beam is provided below.
Design of longitudinal reinforcement
(M) Nominal reinf. against brittle failure (robustness reinf.), Charact. C.
fctd
Design value of concrete tensile strength acc. to Chapter 4.4.1 [MN/m].
zs,t/b Lever arm of inner strengths top/bottom [m].
S.s,adm Admissible steel stress as per Fig. 31 [MN/m].
max Sc Maximal concrete edge stress from Charact. C. [MN/m].
(R) Required reinforcement for crack width limitation.
Increase of reinforcement due to crack width check is marked by "!".
max.s
Maximal given bar spacing [mm].
(B) Design of reinforement at ultimate limit state.
In case of dominant bending, compression reinforcement is marked with "*".
fck
Concrete strength for design of reinforcement [MN/m].

465

SIA 262 Design

Beam 70
Location 1
Beam 70, x = 0.00 m (Beam length 0.83 m)
Cross-section 2: Polygon - SC25/30
Steel 2; Design mode: Standard
(M) fctd=2.6; zs,o/u=0.513/0.513; Sigma.s,adm=435
(R) max.s=200
(B) fck=25
Section properties
gross :

A [m]
0.460

ys [m]
0.850

zs [m]
0.178

Iy [m4]
0.0107

Iz [m4]
0.0828

Iyz[m4]
0.0000

1. Characteristic (rare) combination (CC.1): G+QN, Final state

Concrete internal forces
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Nx- :
0.00
69.95
Nx+ :
0.00
69.95
My- :
0.00
69.95
My+ :
0.00
196.53
Mz- :
0.00
69.95
Mz+ :
0.00
69.95

Mz[kNm]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

1. Frequent combination (TC.1): G+QN, Final state

Concrete internal forces
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Nx- :
0.00
69.95
Nx+ :
0.00
69.95
My- :
0.00
69.95
My+ :
0.00
133.24
Mz- :
0.00
69.95
Mz+ :
0.00
69.95

Mz[kNm]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

1. Permanent and temporary comb. (PC.1): G+QN, Final state

Concrete internal forces
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Nx- :
0.00
55.96
Nx+ :
0.00
55.96
My- :
0.00
55.96
My+ :
0.00
284.31
Mz- :
0.00
55.96
Mz+ :
0.00
55.96

Mz[kNm]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

Design of longitudinal reinforcement

Reinforcement Nx
Lay. Type
[kN]
1
M
0.00
R
0.00
B
0.00
2
M
0.00
R
0.00
B
0.00
3
M
0.00
R
0.00
B
0.00
4
M
0.00
R
0.00
B
0.00

My
[kNm]
69.95
0.00
55.96
69.95
0.00
55.96
196.53
133.24
284.31
196.53
133.24
284.31

Mz
max Sc
[kNm] [MN/m]
0.00
.
0.00
0.00
0.00
.
0.00
.
0.00
0.00
0.00
.
0.00
7.73
0.00
.
0.00
.
0.00
7.73
0.00
.
0.00
.

Ap'
[cm]
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

req.As
[cm]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
1.48
3.42!
5.58
1.48
3.42!
5.58

Situation
CC.1,Nx-,PC.1,NxCC.1,Nx-,PC.1,NxCC.1,My+
TC.1,My+
PC.1,My+
CC.1,My+
TC.1,My+
PC.1,My+

Design of shear reinforcement

The percentage of nominal reinforcement acc. to 5.5.2.2 is considered.
bw
bn
kb
h
d
kd
fsk
kc
Qy, Qz
VRd
VRdc
z
Alpha
Asb.y,z
Asl.y,z

Effective width for calculation of shear stresses from Qz [m]

Beam 70
Location 1
Beam 70, x = 0.00 m (Beam length 0.83 m)
Cross-section 2: Polygon - SC25/30
bw/bn/kb=0.3/0.27/0.9; h/d/kd=0.6/0.57/0.9
fsk=500; kc=0.55

466

Examples
1. Permanent and temporary comb. (PC.1): G+QN, Final state
Concrete internal forces
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Nx- :
0.00
55.96
Nx+ :
0.00
55.96
My- :
0.00
55.96
My+ :
0.00
284.31
Mz- :
0.00
55.96
Mz+ :
0.00
55.96
Mx- :
0.00
55.96
Mx+ :
0.00
94.43
Qy- :
0.00
55.96
Qy+ :
0.00
55.96
Qz- :
0.00
284.31
Qz+ :
0.00
55.96

Mz[kNm]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

Mx[kNm]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

Qy[kN]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

Qz[kN]
-5.41
-5.41
-5.41
-30.79
-5.41
-5.41
-5.41
-9.13
-5.41
-5.41
-30.79
-5.41

Check of the shear reinforcement and the compressive struts

Qy
Qy/VyRdc
Situation

:
0.00 kN
:
0.00
: -,-

Alpha
z
req.Asb.y
req.Asl.y

:
:
:
:

45.00
0.24
0.00
0.00

m
cm/m
cm

Qz
Qz/VzRdc
Situation

: -30.79 kN
:
0.04
: PC.1,Qz-

Alpha
z
req.Asb.z
req.Asl.z

:
:
:
:

45.00
0.51
2.74
0.35

m
cm/m
cm

Check of crack widths

The check is led by limiting the steel stress.
(TC) Frequent, (QC) Quasi-continuous combination
max.s
Sigma.c
Sigma.s

Maximal given bar spacing [mm]

Maximal concrete edge stress in state I [MN/m]
Reinf. steel stress in state II [MN/m]

Beam 70
Location 1
Beam 70, x = 0.00 m (Beam length 0.83 m)
Cross-section 2: Polygon - SC25/30
Requirement: raised; max.s=200
Section properties
gross :

A [m]
0.460

ys [m]
0.850

zs [m]
0.178

Iy [m4]
0.0107

Iz [m4]
0.0828

Iyz[m4]
0.0000

1. Frequent combination (TC.1): G+QN, Final state

Concrete internal forces
Nx[kN]
My[kNm]
Nx- :
0.00
69.95
Nx+ :
0.00
69.95
My- :
0.00
69.95
My+ :
0.00
133.24
Mz- :
0.00
69.95
Mz+ :
0.00
69.95

Mz[kNm]
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00

Check of crack width for reinf. layer 3 (bottom) - Frequent combination

Nx [kN]
My [kNm]
Mz [kNm]
Situation

:
0.00
:
133.24
:
0.00
: TC.1,My+

Sigma.c [MN/m]:
5.24
As
[cm] :
5.58
Sigma.s [MN/m]: 218.56

per. 355.00

467

SIA 262 Design

Prestressed Roof Construction

Static system and dimensions (longitudinal and lateral section)

Material
Concrete
Reinforcing steel

SC45/55
BSt 500, axis distance from edge 5 cm

Section

Prestressing steel and prestressing system

Prestressing steel quality
Certification of the prestressing system
Number of tendons in the bundle
Section surface Ap

St 1520/1770
SIA 262
4
1800 mm

E-modulus of the prestressing steel

0.1% strain limit (yield strength) of the prestressing steel fp0.1k

195000 MN/m
1520 MN/m

Tensile strength of the prestressing steel fpk

1770 MN/m

Permissible prestressing force of a tendon Pm0

2230.2 kN

Friction coefficients when prestressing and releasing m

Unintentional deviation angle of a tendon
Slippage at prestressing anchor
Duct diameter dh

0.2
0.3 /m
6 mm
82 mm

468

Examples
Tendon groups in beam series view 1, [-16.00/0.00/0.00] - [112.00/0.00/0.00] / [-16.00/0.00/1.00]
Superelevation = 10
0
0

Tendon group ordinates zv [cm] at the base points

xv 0.00 6.40

12.80 19.20 25.60 32.00 38.40 44.80 51.20 57.60 64.00 70.40 76.80 83.20 89.60 96.00 102.40 108.80 115.20 121.60 128.00

1 70.0 52.0 19.2 42.0

120.2 180.1 208.8 201.5 157.4

78.3 18.5 78.3

157.4 201.5 208.8 180.1 120.2

42.0 19.2 52.0 70.0

Force function of tendon group 1 (4 tendon(s), l = 128.41 m)

Prestressing system 1 - Example. Certification according to SIA 262.
Pm0
= 2230.2 kN,
Ap = 1800.0 mm, a = 0.20, Angle ' = 0.30 /m
E-Modulus= 195000 MN/m, Ah = 5281.0 mm, n = 0.20, Slippage = 6.00 mm
Prestressing procedure 1 - Example
Pre. anchor
:
Start
End
Normal. force : 1.000 1.000
Pre. force [kN]: 2230.2 2230.2
Extension [mm]: 674.9
70.8

7851.3

7712.1

7593.9

7342.6

7593.9

7712.1

7851.3

7996.6

8137.2

8266.3

8379.7

8324.2

25.60

32.00

38.40

44.80

51.20

57.60

64.00

70.40

76.80

83.20

89.60

96.00

102.40

108.80

115.20 121.60

8084.5

7996.6

8196.3

8137.2

0.00 6.40 12.80 19.20

8266.3

8379.7

8324.2

8196.3

8084.5 [kN]

8466.4

128.00

xv
[m]